CASEGOODS. Shelving 175. Display 195. Academy 198 Addenda 198

Transcription

1 Table of Contents GENERAL INFORMATION General Information 2 Material Specifications 3 CASEGOODS Academy 6 Addenda 14 American Classics Alcott 22 Hawthorne 26 Thoreau 28 Twain 29 CRI 40 Circulation 47 degilde 54 Diametron 68 Folio 78 Franklin 99 Liberty 104 Marlborough 110 MWS 120 Pedestals & Accessories 121 Pavilion 122 Stance 134 Tempus 152 Teres 159 Book Trucks 174 Shelving 175 Display 195 SEATING Academy 210 Anchor 211 Cummings 214 Cummings Lite 216 Diametron 217 Linden 218 Rhodes 219 Reference 221 Straiter 222 Tempus 223 Thurber 224 TJ 225 Turner 230 Whitman 231 LOUNGE SEATING American Classics Cubed 234 Tapered 237 Express 240 Forum 241 MySpot 245 Parc 252 Regis 255 Ottomans 257 END PANELS Academy 198 Addenda 198 American Classics Alcott 199 Thoreau 199 Twain 200 degilde 201 Diametron 201 Folio 202 Marlborough 204 MWS 204 Pavilion 205 Self-Edged 205 Tempus 206 Teres 206 Tombstone 207 LOUNGE TABLES American Classics Series Series Series 260 Diametron 261 LIGHTING LED 264 Task 264 Folio 265 ELECTRICAL Electrical 267 ADDENDUM Swing 280 Canopy Tops 281 The Worden Company Source Book October

2 General Information General Worden Finish Information OAK FINISHES: Light Cherry on Oak Clear Sealer and Lacquer Autumn Oak English Oak Black on Oak Executive Oak Cordovan Oak MAPLE FINISHES: Clear Sealer and Lacquer Mahogany on Maple Honey on Maple Lt. Cherry on Maple CHERRY FINISHES: Clear Sealer and Lacquer degilde Light Cherry degilde Dark Cherry TJ CHAIRS SOLID COLOR FINISHES (OAK OR MAPLE): Note: Colors are for TJ chairs only. A factory quote is required for use on other Worden products. Blue Jay Deep Lavender Hyacinth Delft Island Blue Sea Breeze Spring Green Balsam Apple Lemon Butternut Mandarin Mimosa Dark Mango Tomato CUSTOM COLORS: Are available. STANDARD PLASTIC LAMINATE SELECTIONS: -Matching Wood Grains laminates are available to match certain standard Worden finishes. -Any standard color selection available through: Wilsonart Formica Nevamar Pionite -Other non-standard laminate selections are also available. PAINTED HARDBOARD FINISHES FOR SHELVING BACK PANELS: Beige Spice Walnutone Black Soft Grey METAL FINISHES: Slate Taupe Black Black Crackle Charcoal Metallic Sparkle Metallic Arctic Silver Graphite 2 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

3 Material Specifications LUMBER: All woods used in the construction of this equipment shall be selected from thoroughly air seasoned stock, free from imperfections and kiln dried to have a moisture content, at time of assembly, of from 5% to 7%. WOOD SPECIES: All exposed or show wood shall be selected Northern Red Oak (Quercus Rubra), American Black Cherry (Prunus Serotina), or Northern grown Hard Maple (Acer Saccharum), free from all defects and selected for uniform grain and color. All unexposed wood shall be sound hardwoods. CORES: CARB: The particleboard, medium density fiberboard (MDF) and hardwood plywood (veneer core) used in the construction of this furniture complies with the current California Air Resources Board (CARB) formaldehyde emission standards as required by CCR VENEER CORE: Shall be constructed with an odd number of plies. All interior plies, except the core of center ply, shall occur in pairs. The plies of each interior pair shall be of the same specie, thickness and grain direction and be placed on opposite sides of the core. The grain direction of each ply shall be at right angles (90 ) to the grain of the adjacent plies and the ends and edges of the panel. All plies shall be manufactured free from blisters, wrinkles, laps or other defects. PARTICLEBOARD CORE: Shall be Type I, grade M, class 3 mat-formed panel conforming to current ANSI/A wood particleboard standard. The panel shall be formed of wood chip, bonded with a water-resistant adhesive. It shall be of medium density 45 lbs./cu.ft., having a minimum average modulus of rupture of 2400 PSI and a minimum average modulus of elasticity of 400,000 PSI. MDF: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Shall be a cellulosic fiber mat panel bonded with a resin based adhesive and formed under heat and pressure. Panels shall meet current ANSI A standards for interior use. Panels shall have an average density of 46.5 lbs./cu. ft. with a minimum average modulus of rupture of 3400 PSI and a minimum average modulus of elasticity of 340,000 PSI. FACE VENEERS: Exposed face veneers shall be a minimum.024" thick, plain-sliced premium, or select grade A Red Oak, Cherry, or Maple, tight and smooth cut, selected for uniformity, even grain, beauty and color. Face veneers shall have cathedral grain figure. Faces must be book matched and balanced for premium grade A and select grade A oak and cherry, slip matched and balanced for premium grade A and select grade A maple. Faces must be free of wild grain, wide heart and gross figure on either side of cathedral figure. Unexposed veneers shall be hardwood veneers except they may be unselected for grain or color. Veneers shall be matched and joined in such manner as to prevent lap or open joints. No tape shall be permitted on the glue line. HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE: Work or top surfaces shall be.050 thick and used with an appropriate backing sheet not to be less than.028 thickness. Laminate shall comply with performance standards set by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA LD3 - GP20). THERMALLY FUSED LAMINATE: The surfaces shall be a laminate resin-impregnated decorative paper thermally fused under heat and pressure to permanently bond the impregnated paper to the particleboard core. The laminate must meet the standards set by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA LD3 - GP20) and the American Laminators Association (ALA 1992). The faces shall have a matte finish. TEMPERED HARDBOARD: This shall be a composition of compressed wood fibers, pressed by hydraulic pressure into homogeneous sheets, sheets to be in 1/4 thick overall thickness. The board shall meet current ANSI/AHAA American Hardwood Association standard. JOINERY: Connecting joinery will follow the guidelines set forth by Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and includes dovetail, dowel, locking shoulder, square shoulder, miterfold, spline, biscuit, dado, lap and other interlocking mechanical fasteners. WOOD FINISHING: After normal machine sanding operations have been performed, each piece shall be further polished and hand sanded to insure removal of all machine or mill marks. Each piece shall then be thoroughly inspected prior to the application of any finishing materials. A selected stain of the desired shade shall be applied to all surfaces requiring stain, paying particular attention to the shading and blending of colors on individual units. After a thorough drying of the stain, a sealer coat shall be applied to provide a secure bond between the wood and the topcoat. The surface shall then be well sanded before applying a catalytic type lacquer topcoat. FINISH: Colors shall be selected by the architect or owner from standard or custom finishes. STEEL: All tubular steel shall be of Hot Rolled Pickled and Oiled (HRPO) or Cold Rolled Electric Weld (CREW) meeting Commercial Quality standards. Weld flash shall be to the inside. Surface shall be free from roller marks or rust. Plate steel shall be hot or cold rolled steel meeting Commercial Quality standards. Aluminum shall be 6063-T5, anodized. METAL FINISHING: POWDER COAT: Metal parts are thoroughly cleaned and electrostatically coated with an epoxy powder to a thickness of 2-4 mils and oven cured. Exposed surfaces to be free of orange-peel and out-gasing. UL LISTING: Selected furniture intended to be powered and all electrical accessories, including power columns, duplex outlets, and raceways shall be listed (UL or equivalent) and labeled under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) for Modular Furniture or Utility Tables Standard (WWJT) for nonmodular furniture. The furniture and electrical accessories shall be listed under the name of the furniture manufacturer. PATENTS. Certain Worden designs and mechanical features may be protected under patents, either obtained or pending. The Worden Company Source Book October

4

5 W O R D E N C A S E G O O D S Furniture for Learning Spaces. Stance Table with Wood End Panels & Center Divider 5

6 Academy Casegoods ACADEMY ATLAS STAND TOP: Sloped reference top assembly shall be fabricated of 3/4 particleboard with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate facing. The incline of top shall be from low to high point on assembly. There shall be a 5/8 x 5/8 solid oak or maple retaining strip located 5/8 up from lower edge of top surface. Underside of cross rail assembly shall be dadoed to receive finished back. The top shall be screwed to the end panel with 1 3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1 3/4 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3 ply particleboard panel with premium Grade A oak or maple veneer face and back, a 1-3/4 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple frame on four sides and three 1/2 thick x 1-7/8 wide vertical slats. Glued up stock shall not be used for frame or slats. Frame shall be blind tenoned, splined or doweled to panel and adjoining band. Top and bottom members shall lap vertical members. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. BASE: The base shall be 3/4 thick, 3 ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer on the exposed face. Front and back edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1 5/8 wide solid oak or maple external edge banding radiused top and bottom 1/16. The back edge shall be dadoed to receive the back panel. The base shall be fitted with full width 3/4 x 3/4 wood cleats and screwed to the end panels with 1/4-20 x 1-1/4 stove bolts screwed into threaded inserts embedded in the end panels. The base shall be 10-3/4 above the floor. BACK: The back shall be 3/4, 3 ply particleboard with premium Grade A oak or maple veneer on the exposed face and select oak on the interior face. The back shall be rabbeted top and bottom and screw cleated to case sides. STORAGE SHELVES: Slide out storage shelves shall be 3/4 thick, 3 ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer on face and any sound back. Front stop rail shall be 1/2 thick x 1 1/2 wide x 25 7/8 long solid oak, tongue and grooved to shelf panel. Shelves shall slide on Grant # or Accuride # full extension ball bearing drawer slides. Shelves shall be positioned so that each opening provides a clear area 26 wide x 24 1/2 deep x 3 3/8 high. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1 3/16 base diameter and a 1/4 20 x 15/16 threaded stem. 7000/AS HPL TOP, OAK D x 27.5 W x H 7000/AS-M HPL TOP, MAPLE D x 27.5 W x H 7000/AS-J HPL TOP, JUV HGT, OAK D x 27.5 W x 34.5 H 7000/AS-J-M HPL TOP, JUV HGT, MAPLE D x 27.5 W x 34.5 H ACADEMY DICTIONARY STAND TOP: Sloped reference top assembly shall be fabricated of 3/4 particleboard with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate facing. The incline of top shall be from low to high point on assembly. There shall be a 5/8 x 5/8 solid oak or maple retaining strip located 5/8 up from lower edge of top surface. Underside of cross rail assembly shall be dadoed to receive finished back. The top shall be screwed to the end panel with 1 3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1 3/4 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3 ply particleboard panel with premium Grade A oak or maple veneer face and back, a 1-3/4 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple frame on four sides and three 1/2 thick x 1-7/8 wide vertical slats. Glued up stock shall not be used for frame or slats. Frame shall be blind tenoned, splined or doweled to panel and adjoining band. Top and bottom members shall lap vertical members. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. BASE: The base shall be 3/4 thick, 3 ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer on the exposed face. Front and back edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1 5/8 wide solid oak or maple external edge banding radiused top and bottom 1/16. The back edge shall be dadoed to receive the back panel. The base shall be fitted with full width 3/4 x 3/4 wood cleats and screwed to the end panels with 1/4-20 x 1-1/4 stove bolts screwed into threaded inserts embedded in the end panels. The base shall be 10-3/4 above the floor. BACK: The back shall be 3/4, 3 ply particleboard with premium Grade A oak or maple veneer on the exposed face and select oak on the interior face. The back shall be rabbeted top and bottom and screw cleated to case sides. ADJUSTABLE SHELF: The adjustable shelf shall be 3/4 thick, 3 ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer on the face and any sound veneer on the back. The exposed edges shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple external bands. Shelf adjustment shall be provided by K-V shelf suport routed flush into the ends or Pin Fast* shelf pins with retaining color. A 1-1/2 high book stop shall be attached to the back edge of the shelf. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1 3/16 base diameter and a 1/4 20 x 15/16 threaded stem. 7000/DS HPL TOP, OAK D x27.5 W x44.75 H 7000/DS-M HPL TOP, MAPLE D x27.5 W x44.75 H 7000/DS-J JUV HGT, HPL TOP, OAK D x27.5 W x 34.5 H 7000/DS-J-M JUV HGT, HPL TOP, MAPLE D x27.5 W x 34.5 H 6 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

7 Academy Casegoods ACADEMY DISPLAY TABLE GLASS CASE SIZE: 59 W x 29 D x 9-11/16 H This display case has extruded aluminum frame with dark bronze finish. The case has 3/16 annealed float glass at sides and top. The top of the case is hinged with continuous piano type hinge and equipped with 2 point lock and lid supports. The bottom to be offered with optional tackable surface covered with neutral beige colored fabric, at additional cost. Table top has a high pressure laminate face. The two (2) long edges of top are externally banded with 5/8 x 1-5/8 solid oak or maple. End assembly is same as on tables. The end panel is 1-3/4 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak or maple veneer face and back, a 1-3/4 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple frame on four sides and three 1/2 thick x 1-7/8 wide vertical slats. Top and bottom members shall lap vertical members. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. Equipped with adjustable leveling glides. 7000/3060-EXC TABLE W/ BRONZE CASE, OAK 31 W x 63-1/2 L x38-1/2 H 7000/3060-EXC-M TABLE W/ BRONZE CASE, MAPLE 31 W x 63-1/2 L x38-1/2 H ACADEMY NEWSPAPER RACK TOP FRAME ASSEMBLY: The frame shall be constructed of 1 3/16 thick solid oak or maple members mortised and tenoned together forming a 25 1/2 long x 21 3/4 wide opening in the center. The long edges of the frame shall be banded with a 5/8 thick x 1 5/8 solid oak or maple external edge band radiused top and bottom 1/16. The frame shall be faced with.050 high pressure laminate. Mounted at each end of the opening there shall be a 1 1/4 x 1 1/4 solid oak or maple newspaper holder rail notched to receive ten (10) newspaper holders. Each end of the frame shall be fitted with a 21 3/16 long black oxided metal Z bar bracket. Each bracket shall be attached to the top by means of three #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the end panel by means of four M6 x 25-mm machine screws screwing into M6 threaded inserts embedded in the end panels. END PANEL: The end panels shall be 1 3/4 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3 ply particleboard panel with premium Grade A oak or maple face veneer and back, a 1-3/4 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple frame on four sides and three 1/2 thick x 1-7/8 wide vertical slats. Glued up stock shall not be used for frame or slats. Frame shall be blind tenoned, splined or doweled to panel and adjoining band. Top and bottom members shall lap vertical members. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. End panel shall overhang 1/4 above and beyond the edges of the top. KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keel shall be 1 thick x 6 wide, plywood with select Grade A oak or maple face and back. Top edge and bottom shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple. The ends of the keel shall be fitted with recessed locking tension spring Mod eez* clips for attachment to end panels. NEWSPAPER HOLDERS: The holders shall be 15/16 diameter hardwood turnings slotted longitudinally into six segments and with 5 long turned handle at one end. Overall length of holder shall be 35 and it shall be furnished complete with rubber o ring binder at open slotted end. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1 3/16 base diameter and a 1/4 20 x 15/16 threaded stem. 7000/NR 7000/NR-M 10 STICKS, OAK 10 STICKS, MAPLE 27 D x 43.5 W x 29 H 27 D x 43.5 W x 29 H The Worden Company Source Book October

8 Academy Casegoods ACADEMY INDEX TABLE TOP: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face, balanced with a.028 backer sheet. The two (2) long edges of top are banded with 5/8 x 1-5/8 solid oak or maple and radiused top and bottom 1/16". The top is secured to the end panels by means of black oxided metal "Z-bar" brackets. END PANEL: The end panels are 1-3/4" thick, consisting of a 1-3/16" thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade "A" oak or maple veneer face and back, a 1-3/4" thick x 2-1/2" wide solid oak or maple frame on four sides and five 1/2" thick x 1-7/8" wide vertical slats. Top and bottom members shall lap vertical members. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16". KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keels are 1 thick x 8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with Thermally Fused Melamine on both faces. Keels are attached to the underside of top and to end panels. 60 and 30 wide units will have one keel. INDEX RACK: The dividers, back and shelves, are constructed of 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard with premium grade "A" oak or maple veneer face and back. Exposed edges are banded with 5/16" solid oak with all edges and corners radiused 1/16". The rack assembly is secured to top by screws passing through the underside of the top and into the dividers. The shelves are adjustable and removable to accommodate computers. GLIDES: Each end panel is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 30 high. Optional 27 high height may be specified. UL LISTING: Index tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 7000/6060-ID 7000/6060-ID-M 7000/6090-ID 7000/6090-ID-M DF, 26 RACK ADJ SHELF, OAK DF, 26 RACK ADJ SHELF, MAPLE DF, 26 RACK ADJ SHELF, OAK DF, 26 RACK ADJ SHELF, MAPLE 60 W x 63-1/2 L x HGT 60 W x 63-1/2 L x HGT 60 W x 93-1/2 L x HGT 60 W x 93-1/2 L x HGT ACADEMY LEG STYLE TABLE WORKSURFACE: The top shall be 1-3/16 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The long edges shall be banded with a 5/16 thick, solid oak or maple external band and the ends with 2-5/8 wide, solid oak or maple external bands. Bands shall be set flush to the laminate. No reveals or vein lines shall be permitted. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. Tables 60" long and longer shall have a V-shaped steel keel. Tables 48" wide and 60" long or longer shall have two V-shaped keels. The keels shall extend to within 9" of the ends of the work surface and shall be 14-gauge steel powder coated black. The keels shall be screwed to the underside of the work surface with two #14 x 1 PHSM screws every 10". The top shall overhang the base 1/8 on all sides. END FRAME: The end frame shall be 2-1/2 thick, consisting of two legs, two cross headers and five slats. The legs shall be 2-1/2 square, constructed of solid oak or maple glued up face to face with no more than two glue lines. Headers shall be 1-1/4 x 2-1/2 solid oak or maple recessed 1/8 from the face of the leg and doweled and glued to legs. The bottom header shall be 4-1/4 above the floor. The slats shall be 3/4 x 1-7/8 solid oak or maple, centered and doweled and glued to headers on 96-mm centers. Top header shall be counter-bored for #10 screws for attachment of top. All edges shall be radiused 1/16. APRON: The apron shall be 1-1/4 x 2-1/2 solid oak or maple, recessed 1/8 from the face of the leg and mechanically joined to the end frame using concealed fasteners. The apron shall be counter-bored for #10 screws for attachment of top. GLIDES: Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 7200/3660 OAK 36 W x 60 L x HGT 7200/3660-M MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT 7200/3672 OAK 36 W x 72 L x HGT 7200/3672-M MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT 7200/3690 OAK 36 W x 90 L x HGT 7200/3690-M MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT 7200/4260 OAK 42 W x 60 L x HGT 7200/4260-M MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT 7200/4272 OAK 42 W x 72 L x HGT 7200/4272-M MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT 7200/4290 OAK 42 W x 90 L x HGT 7200/4290-M MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT 7200/4860 OAK 48 W x 60 L x HGT 7200/4860-M MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT 7200/4872 OAK 48 W x 72 L x HGT 7200/4872-M MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT 7200/4890 OAK 48 W x 90 L x HGT 7200/4890-M MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT 8 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

9 Academy Casegoods ACADEMY STRETCHER LEG TABLE WORK SURFACE: The top shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particle board construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The long edges shall be banded with a 5/16 thick solid oak or maple external band and the ends with 2-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external bands. Bands shall be set flush to the laminate. No reveals or vein lines shall be permitted. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. The top shall be reinforced with one 54 long, 14 gauge steel V shaped keel screwed to the underside of the top with ten (10) #14 x 1 PHSM screws. The top shall overhang the base 1/8 on all sides. END FRAME: The end frame shall be 2-1/2 thick, consisting of two legs, two cross headers and five slats. The legs shall be 2-1/2 square, constructed of solid oak or maple glued up face to face with no more than two glue lines. Headers shall be 1-1/4 x 2-1/2 solid oak or maple recessed 1/8 from the face of the leg and doweled and glued to legs. The bottom header shall be 4-1/4 above the floor. The slats shall be 3/4 x 1-7/8 solid oak or maple, centered and doweled and glued to headers on 96-mm centers. Top header shall be counter-bored for #10 screws for attachment of top. All edges shall be radiused 1/16. APRON: The apron shall be 1-1/4 x 2-1/2 solid oak or maple, recessed 1/8 from the face of the leg and mechanically joined to the end frame using concealed fasteners. The apron shall be counter-bored for #10 screws for attachment of top. CABLE CHASE STRETCHER ASSEMBLY: The stretcher assembly shall consist of a stretcher and a top support cable chase. The stretcher shall be 1-3/16 thick x 5-3/4 wide, constructed of 3/4, 3-ply particle board with oak or maple face and any sound back. The two long edges shall be banded with 5/8 x 1-3/16 solid oak or maple. The stretcher shall be mechanically joined to end assembly using concealed fasteners. The top support cable chase shall be a 4 deep x 12 wide chase consisting of a back, two sides and a hinged front. All members shall be 3/4 thick 3-ply particle board construction with oak or maple veneers and exposed edges banded with solid oak. The sides shall be notched and the stretcher fitted with a grommet to allow cord egress. The support shall be mechanically joined to the underside of the top and stretcher. GLIDES: Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Model # Description Dimensions 7300/3660 OAK 36 W x 60 L x HGT 7300/3660-M MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT 7300/3672 OAK 36 W x 72 L x HGT 7300/3672-M MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT 7300/3690 OAK 36 W x 90 L x HGT 7300/3690-M MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT 7300/4260 OAK 42 W x 60 L x HGT 7300/4260-M MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT 7300/4272 OAK 42 W x 72 L x HGT 7300/4272-M MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT 7300/4290 OAK 42 W x 90 L x HGT 7300/4290-M MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT 7300/4860 OAK 48 W x 60 L x HGT 7300/4860-M MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT 7300/4872 OAK 48 W x 72 L x HGT 7300/4872-M MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT 7300/4890 OAK 48 W x 90 L x HGT 7300/4890-M MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT ACADEMY ROUND & SQUARE TABLES WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-3/16 thick x 48 diameter or square, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The perimeter shall be banded with a 5/16 thick steam bent solid oak or maple external band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL. Bands shall be set flush to the laminate. No reveals or vein lines shall be permitted. Top and bottom edges shall be radiused 1/16. APRON: A 1-1/4 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple apron shall bridge the distance between the legs. The apron shall be recessed 1/8 from the face of the legs and shall be secured to the top by means of #10 FHW screws on approximate 12 centers. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/2 square, glued up, face to face, from two or three solid oak or maple blanks. The legs shall be recessed 1/4 from the edge of the work surface and shall be attached to the aprons and top by means of heavy duty formed sheet metal corner brackets reinforced with a 1/2 x 1 steel backing plate and bolted to the leg with 5/16-18 hanger bolts, washer and nuts. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 7200/ /048-M 7200/ /4848-M ROUND TABLE, OAK ROUND TABLE, MAPLE SQUARE TABLE, OAK SQUARE TABLE, MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT 48 DIAMETER x HGT 48 x 48 x HGT 48 x 48 x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

10 Academy Casegoods ACADEMY PANEL STYLE TABLE The table shall comply with ADA requirements at 29 high work surface height. WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The two long edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak or maple external edge band applied to the core after lamination of HPL and radiused 1/16 top and bottom. The work surface shall be grooved on the underside at each end for three 9-9/16 long 14 gauge black oxided steel Z bar brackets. Each bracket shall be attached to the work surface by means of four (4) #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the ends by means of four (4) M6-10 PHM screws screwing into metal inserts embedded in the end panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/4 thick, consisting of 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak or maple veneer face and back, a 1-3/4 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple frame on four sides and five 1/2 thick x 1-7/8 wide vertical slats. Glued up stock shall not be used for frame or slats. Frame shall be blind tenoned, splined or doweled to panel and adjoining band. Top and bottom members shall lap vertical members. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. The end panels shall extend 1/2 above and 1/2 beyond the outside of the work surface. KEELS: The longitudinal stabilizing keel is 1" thick x 8" wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with termally fused malmine on both faces. All tables 48" wide have two (2) longitudinal stabilizing keels. The keel shall be attached to the underside of the work surface by means of three 9-9/16 long 14 gauge black oxided steel Z bar brackets and at the bottom by means of a 5/16 18 x 3/4 black oxided THM screw passing through a 12 gauge black oxided steel bracket into metal inserts embedded in the end panel. Each Z bar bracket shall be attached to the work surface and keel by means of eight #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 7000/3660 OAK 36-1/2 W x 63-1/2 L x HGT 7000/3660-M MAPLE 36-1/2 W x 63-1/2 L x HGT 7000/3672 OAK 36-1/2 W x 75-1/2 L x HGT 7000/3672-M MAPLE 36-1/2 W x 75-1/2 L x HGT 7000/3690 OAK 36-1/2 W x 93-1/2 L x HGT 7000/3690-M MAPLE 36-1/2 W x 93-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4260 OAK 42-1/2 W x 63-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4260-M MAPLE 42-1/2 W x 63-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4272 OAK 42-1/2 W x 75-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4272-M MAPLE 42-1/2 W x 75-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4290 OAK 42-1/2 W x 93-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4290-M MAPLE 42-1/2 W x 93-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4860 OAK 48-1/2 W x 63-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4860-M MAPLE 48-1/2 W x 63-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4872 OAK 48-1/2 W x 75-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4872-M MAPLE 48-1/2 W x 75-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4890 OAK 48-1/2 W x 93-1/2 L x HGT 7000/4890-M MAPLE 48-1/2 W x 93-1/2 L x HGT 10 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

11 Academy Casegoods ACADEMY OPAC HEX Individual work surfaces shall be adjustable to 26-1/2, 29, 32, or 39 heights and shall meet ADA requirements at the 29 height. END & INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate shall be 1-3/16 thick x 35 wide x 48 high, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium Grade A oak or maple veneer face and back. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1-3/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple, blind tenoned, splined or doweled to the panel. Glued up stock is not permitted for bands. Top and bottom bands shall lap vertical bands. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. Panels shall be fitted with brass threaded inserts at work surface positions and shall have a 3 grommet for electrical interconnection. The panels shall be fitted with three concealed spring tension Mod-eez clips, which engage on shoulder screws installed on each triangular post. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 1-3/16 thick x 24 wide x 48 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium Grade "A" oak or maple veneer face and back. The panel shall be banded on the top and bottom edges with 1-3/16 thick x 2-1/2 solid oak band. Each back shall be fitted with six (three per edge) concealed spring tension Mod-eez clips which engage on shoulder screws installed on each triangular post. ACCESS PANELS: The access panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium Grade "A" oak or maple veneers on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1-3/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple edge bands. The panel shall be split in two parts 12 from the bottom. The panel shall be fitted with six (three per edge) concealed spring tension Mod-eez clips which engage on shoulder screws installed in each triangular post. The top section shall be pre-drilled on the back side at top for 16 long 14 gauge black oxided steel Z -bar brackets and attached to the panel by means of three #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws for supporting the hex lids. Two 1/8 pilot holes shall be bored at the bottom edge of the top section for the attachment of a cleat by two #10 x 1-3/4 FHW screws. The top section shall be bored through and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC grommet. The bottom section shall have two 1/4 holes bored through for #10 x 1-3/4 FHW screws used to secure the lower section to the cleat. TRIANGULAR POSTS: The triangular posts shall be 1-1/4 per side extruded aluminum, powder coated black, machined on all sides for shoulder screws. The post shall be fitted at the top with an injection molded cap, and the bottom shall be fitted with a threaded insert for a rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glide with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. HEX LID: The full and half hex lid shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. Each lid shall be supported by three 16 long 14 gauge black oxided steel Z -bar brackets. WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4" thick x 28" (30"O.A.) deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050" high pressure laminate face and.028" backer on the underside. The front edge shall be banded with a 5/8" thick x 1-5/8" wide solid oak external drop edge band with a 1/16" radius along top and bottom corners. The back edge shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end for black oxided metal "Z-bar" brackets. the underside of the top shall be fitted with a V-shaped steel keel. MINI-WORK SURFACE: The mini-work surface shall be 1-1/4" thick 19-1/2" deep constructed the same as the top. PAPER SHELVES: The paper shelves shall be 3/4 thick x 10 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with a 1/8 solid oak or maple edge band. The back edge shall be banded with 1/32 oak or maple veneer tape. Both ends shall be machined and fitted on the underside to have two Rafix knock-down fittings for attachment to the end or intermediate panels. The underside shall be pre-drilled with 1/8 pilot holes for the attachment of J -channel hanger brackets and duplex brackets with #8 x 5/8 PHSM screws. DISPLAY SHELVES: The display shall be 3/4" thick x 12" deep, 3-ply particle board construction with select grade "A" oak or maple veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with 5/16" solid oak and maple. Both ends shall be machined on the underside to receive shelf pins. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the J-channel there shall be a 1-1/8" deep x 2-1/2 wide extruded black PVC J-channel with a 1-11/16" lip on the face side screwed to the back panel. GLIDES: Each intermediate panel shall be equipped with a leveling glide located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: All O.P.A.C. units shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QWAZ). 7000/HCT HEX, OAK 124 DIAMETER x 48 H 7000/HCT-M HEX, MAPLE 124 DIAMETER x 48 H Closed Back 7000/HCT-1 CLOSED BACK, OAK 52 D x 124 W x 48 H 7000/HCT-1-M CLOSED BACK, MAPLE 52 D x 124 W x 48 H 7000/HCT-2 OPEN BACK WITH W/S, OAK 52 D x 124 W x 48 H 7000/HCT-2-M OPEN BACK WITH W/S, MAPLE 52 D x 124 W x 48 H Open Back w/ W/S Open Back w/ Shelves 7000/HCT-3 OPEN BACK W/ SHELVES, OAK 52 D x 124 W x 48 H 7000/HCT-3-M OPEN BACK W/ SHELVES, MAPLE 52 D x 124 W x 48 H The Worden Company Source Book October

12 Academy Casegoods ACADEMY STUDY CARREL Each single-face initial unit shall consist of two end panels, a back panel, a shelf, and a work surface. Each single-face additional unit shall consist of an intermediate panel, a back panel, a shelf, and a work surface. END PANEL: The end panel shall be 1-3/4 thick x 31 wide x 48 high, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particle board panel with premium Grade "A" oak or maple veneer face and back, a 1-3/4 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple frame on four sides and three 1/2 thick x 1-7/8 wide vertical slats. Glued up stock shall not be used for frame or slats. Frame shall be blind tenoned, splined or doweled to panel and adjoining band. Top and bottom members shall lap vertical members. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. INTERMEDIATE UPRIGHT: The intermediate shall be 1-3/16 thick x 31 wide x 48 high, consisting of a a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particle board panel with premium Grade "A" oak or maple veneer face and back. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with1-3/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple, blind tenoned, splined or doweled to the panel. Glued up stock is not permitted for bands. Top and bottom bands shall lap vertical bands. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 1-3/16 thick x 45 high, the width of the back is to match the top width, 3-ply particle board construction with premium Grade A oak or maple veneer face and back. The panel shall be banded on the top edge with 1-3/16 thick x 2-3/8 solid oak or maple band and 5/8 thick band on the bottom. Each back shall be fitted with six (three per edge) concealed spring tension Mod-eez clips which engage on shoulder screws installed on the end and intermediate panels. The back shall be recessed 1/8 from the top and shall be 2-3/4 above the floor. WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-3/16 thick x 28 deep x 34-1/2 or 48" wide, produced using 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The front edge shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 solid oak or maple external band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL using PVA glue and Radio Frequency (RF) cured. The band shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The top shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end and back for 21-3/16 long black oxided metal Z bar brackets. Each bracket shall be attached to the top by means of three #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws to the end panels and back panel by means of four #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the intermediate panels by means of four 3/16-24 x 1-3/4 THM screws and nuts. SHELF: The storage shelf shall be 1 thick x 34-1/2 or 48" wide x 10 deep, 3-ply particle board construction surfaced face and back with select Grade A oak or maple veneer and banded on the exposed edge with 1/8 solid oak or maple. The shelf shall be located 15-1/2 above the work surface and shall be secured to the end and intermediate panels with Mod-eez clips and shoulder screws and to the back panel by means of two 1-1/4 #10 deep thread flat head screws engaged into plastic shelf block on the underside of the shelf. GLIDES: Each end and intermediate panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Modular carrels shall be listed (UL or equivalent under Office Furnishings Standard (QWAZ or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Starter & Adder 7000/SC SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 38 W x 48 H 7000/SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x W x 48 H 7000/SC-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 D x 38 W x 48 H 7000/SC-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 D x W x 48 H 7048/SC SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 51.5 W x 48 H 7048/SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x W x 48 H 7048/SC-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 D x 51.5 W x 48 H 7048/SC-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 D x W x 48 H Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Starter & Adder 7000/DSC DF STARTER, OAK D x 38 W x 48 H 7000/DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK Dx W x 48 H 7000/DSC-M DF STARTER, MAPLE D x 38 W x 48 H 7000/DSC-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE Dx W x 48 H 7048/DSC DF STARTER, OAK D x 51.5 W x 48 H 7048/DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK D x W x48 H 7048/DSC-M DF STARTER, MAPLE D x 51.5 W x 48 H 7048/DSC-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE D x W x 48 H 7000/QSC QUAD CARREL, OAK D x W x 48 H 7000/QSC-M QUAD CARREL, MAPLE D x W x 48 H Quad Carrel 12 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

13 Academy Casegoods ACADEMY WORKSTATION Individual work surfaces shall be adjustable to 26-1/2, 29, 32, or 39 heights and shall meet ADA requirements at the 29 height. END PANEL: The end panel shall be 1-3/4 thick x 31" wide x 48" high, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium Grade "A" oak or maple veneer face and back, a 1-3/4 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple frame on four sides and three 1/2 thick x 1-7/8 wide vertical slats. Glued up stock shall not be used for frame or slats. Frame shall be blind tenoned, splined or doweled to panel and adjoining band. Top and bottom members shall lap vertical members. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. The panel shall be pre-drilled for location of shoulder screws for shelf and back attachment and threaded inserts at adjustable work surface positions. INTERMEDIATE UPRIGHT: The intermediate shall be 1-3/16 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium Grade "A" oak or maple veneer face and back. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak. Both sides of the panel shall be drilled for shelf and work surface attachment, and fitted with a pass-through grommet below the J -channel shelf. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1-3/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak, blind tenoned, splined or doweled to the panel. Glued up stock is not permitted for bands. Top and bottom bands shall lap vertical bands. All edges and corners shall be radiused 1/16. The panel shall be fitted with inserts for top adjustment on both sides and a 3 grommet for electrical and data cabling. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium Grade "A" plain sliced book-matched oak or maple veneer face and back. The panel shall be banded on the top edge with 1-3/16 thick x 2-5/8 solid oak or maple band and 5/8 thick band on the bottom. Each back shall be fitted with six (three per edge) concealed spring tension Mod-eez clips which engage on shoulder screws installed on the end and intermediate panels. The back shall be recessed 1/8 from the top and shall be 2-3/4 above the floor. WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-3/16 thick, held forward of the back panel 2 to form a cord drop. The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The exposed edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 solid oak or maple external band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL. The band shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines and radiused top and bottom 1/16. The back edge shall have a black aluminum re. The top shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end for 21-3/16 long, 14 gauge black oxided metal Z bar brackets. Each bracket shall be attached to the work surface by means of three #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the end and intermediate panels by means of four M6 x 10-mm PHM screws, screwing into metal inserts embedded in the panel. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the J-channel, there shall be a 1-1/8" deep x 2-1/2" wide extruded black PVC J-channel with a 1-11/16" lip on the face side screwed to the back panel. J-CHANNEL SHELF: The J-channel shelf shall be 3/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused laminate face and back. The exposed edge shall be banded with.02" thick black PVC. The shelf shall be attached with cams. SHELF: The shelf shall be 1" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select "A" grade oak or maple veneer faces. The front edge shall be banded with 1/8" thick hardwood band of matching specie. The bottom side of the shelf shall be fitted with four cam type fasteners, allowing locations above or below the work surface, 44" or 21-3/4" off the floor repectively. GLIDES: Each end and intermediate panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Work stations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QWAZ) or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Starter & Adder 7000/WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 38 W x 48 H 7000/WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x W x 48 H 7000/WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 D x 38 W x 48 H 7000/WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 D x W x 48 H 7048/WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 51.5 W x 48 H 7048/WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x W x 48 H 7048/WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 D x 51.5 W x 48 H 7048/WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 D x W x 48 H 7072/WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 72 W x 48 H 7072/WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x 72 W x 48 H 7072/WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 D x 72 W x 48 H 7072/WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 D x 72 W x 48 H Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Starter & Adder 7000/DWS DF STARTER, OAK D x 38 W x 48 H 7000/DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK Dx W x 48 H 7000/DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE D x 38 W x 48 H 7000/DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE Dx W x 48 H 7048/DWS DF STARTER, OAK D x 51.5 W x 48 H 7048/DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK D x W x48 H 7048/DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE D x 51.5 W x 48 H 7048/DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE D x W x48 H 7072/DWS DF STARTER, OAK D x 72 W x 48 H 7072/DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK D x 72 W x 48 H 7072/DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE D x 72 W x 48 H 7072/DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE D x 72 W x 48 H The Worden Company Source Book October

14 Addenda Casegoods ADDENDA ATLAS STAND TOP: Sloped reference top assembly shall be fabricated of 3/4 particleboard with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate facing. The incline of top shall be from low to high point on assembly. There shall be a 5/8 x 5/8 solid oak retaining strip located 5/8 up from lower edge of top surface. Underside of cross rail assembly shall be dadoed to receive finished back. The top shall be screwed to the end panel with 1 3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The panel shall be mortised and tenoned flush on the back side to a 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. No glued-up stock shall be permitted for the bands. The bands shall be shaped to a 3/8 radius on the back edge and a 3/8 radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a 1/8 high x 1-3/8 wide raised reveal and a 1/4 wide recessed reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined and radiused 3/8. BASE: The base shall be 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on the exposed face. Front and back edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak external edge banding shaped to a 2-1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The back edge shall be dadoed to receive the back panel. The base shall be fitted with full width 3/4 x 3/4 wood cleats and screwed to the end panels with 1-3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. BACK: The back shall be 3/4, 3-ply particleboard with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. Back shall be rabbeted top and bottom and screw cleated to case sides. STORAGE SHELVES: Slide-out storage shelves shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on face and any sound back. Front stop rail shall be 1/2 thick x 1-1/2 wide x 25-7/8 long solid oak, tongue and grooved to shelf panel. Shelves shall slide on full extension ball bearing drawer slides.shelves shall be positioned so that each opening provides a clear area 26 wide x 24-1/2 deep x 3-3/8 high. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. 2000/AS 2000/AS-J HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, JUV HGT, OAK 28-7/8 Dx28-3/8 Wx44-3/4 H 28-7/8 Dx28-3/8 Wx34-1/2 H ADDENDA DICTIONARY STAND TOP: Sloped reference top assembly shall be fabricated of 3/4 particleboard with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate facing. The incline of top shall be from low to high point on assembly. There shall be a 5/8 x 5/8 solid oak retaining strip located 5/8 up from lower edge of top surface. Underside of cross rail of assembly shall be dadoed to receive finished back. The top shall be screwed to the end panel with 1-3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The panel shall be mortised and tenoned flush on the back side to a 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. No glued-up stock shall be permitted for the bands. The bands shall be shaped to a 3/8 radius on the back edge and a 3/8 radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a 1/8 high x 1-3/8 wide raised reveal and a 1/4 wide recessed reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined and radiused 3/8. BASE: The base shall be 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on the exposed face and any sound veneer back. Front and back edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak external edge banding shaped to a 2-1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The back edge shall be dadoed to receive the back panel. The base shall be fitted with full width 3/4 x 3/4 wood cleats and screwed to the end panels with 1-3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. BACK: The back shall be 3/4, 3-ply particleboard with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. Back shall be rabbeted top and bottom and screw cleated to case sides. ADJUSTABLE SHELF: The adjustable shelf shall be 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select oak veneer on the face and any sound veneer on the back. The exposed edges shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak external bands. Shelf adjustment shall be provided by K-V shelf support routed flush into the ends. A 1-1/2 high book stop shall be attached to the back edge of the shelf. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4 20 x 15/16 threaded stem. 2000/DS HPL TOP, OAK 28-7/8 Dx28-3/8 Wx44-3/4 H 2000/DS-J HPL TOP, JUV HGT, OAK 28-7/8 Dx28-3/8 Wx34-1/2 H 14 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

15 Addenda Casegoods ADDENDA LECTURN TOP: The sloped top assembly shall be fabricated of 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer face and any sound back. Lower edge shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak positioned on the panel to form a retaining strip. Top shall be attached to end panels with 3/4 x 3/4 wood cleats and 1-3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The panel shall be mortised and tenoned flush on the back side to a 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. No glued-up stock shall be permitted for the bands. The bands shall be shaped to a 3/8 radius on the back edge and a 3/8 radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a 1/8 high x 1-3/8 wide raised reveal and a 1/4 wide recessed reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined and radiused 3/8. BACK: The back panel shall be 3/4 thick x 24 wide x 30 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick external bands radiused 1/8. Back shall be attached to end panels by means of Mod-eez clips and shoulder screws. SHELF: The shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 19 deep x 24 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer face and any sound back. Exposed edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak external band radiused 1/8. Shelf shall be attached to ends and back panel by means of 3/4 x 3/4 wood cleats and 1-1/4 #10 flat head wood screws. Shelf shall be located 27 above floor and shall have a clear space of 13 between top and shelf. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 1-15/16 threaded stem. 2000/LT OAK 21 D x 27-1/2 W x 45 H ADDENDA NEWSPAPER RACK TOP FRAME ASSEMBLY: The frame shall be constructed of 1-3/16 thick solid oak members mortised and tenoned together forming a 25-1/2 long x 21-3/4 wide opening in the center. The long edges of the frame shall be banded with a 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 solid oak internal edge band shaped to a 2 1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The frame shall be faced with.050 high pressure laminate. Mounted at each end of the opening there shall be a 1-/4 x 1-1/4 solid oak newspaper holder rail notched to receive ten (10) newspaper holders. Each end of the frame shall be grooved on the underside at each end for three 9-9/16 long 14 gauge black oxided steel Z bar brackets. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The panel shall be mortised and tenoned flush on the back side to a 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. No glued-up stock shall be permitted for the bands. The bands shall be shaped to a 3/8 radius on the back edge and a 3/8 radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a 1/8 high x 1-3/8 wide raised reveal and a 1/4 wide recessed reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined and radiused 3/8. KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keel shall be 1 thick x 6 wide, plywood construction with select grade B oak veneer face and back. Top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak. The ends of the keel shall be fitted with Mod-eez clips for attachment to end panels. NEWSPAPER HOLDERS: The holders shall be 15/16 diameter hardwood turnings slotted longitudinally into six segments and with 5 long turned handle at one end. Overall length of holder shall be 35 and it shall be furnished complete with rubber o ring binder at open slotted end. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4 20 x 1-15/16 threaded stem. 2000/NR 10 STICKS, OAK 27-1/2 D x 42-1/2 W x 29 H The Worden Company Source Book October

16 Addenda Casegoods ADDENDA BROWSER DISPLAY TROUGH: The display trough shall be 45 wide x 19 deep x 12-1/2 high overall (8-1/4 high at front) divided into up to six equal width compartments. The dis- play trough shall consist of a sloped back, a straight back, a straight front, two ends, five removable dividers and a bottom. The back, front and ends shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces and banded on all exposed edges with 1/8 solid oak. The bottom shall be 3/4 thick particleboard lined with ribbed rubber mat. The front and back shall be blind tenoned or dowelled to the end panels. The bottom shall be rabbeted and pinned into the sides, back and front. The dividers shall be 1/4 diameter zinc plated removable steel rods, screwed into threaded inserts embedded in the front panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The panel shall be mortised and tenoned flush on the back side to a 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. No glued-up stock shall be permitted for the bands. The bands shall be shaped to a 3/8 radius on the back edge and a 3/8 radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a 1/8 high x 1-3/8 wide raised reveal and a 1/4 wide recessed reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined and radiused 3/8. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4 20 x 15/16 threaded stem. KEEL: (Single Tier Only) The longitudinal stabilizing keel shall be 1 thick x 6 wide, plywood construction with select grade A oak face and back. Top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak. The ends of the keel shall be fitted with recessed Mod-eez clips for attachment to end panels. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. 2000/SDRB SF, DOUBLE TIER, OAK 20-1/2 Dx47-3/8 Wx40-1/2H 2000/SRB SF, SINGLE TIER, OAK 20-1/2 Dx47-3/8 Wx40-1/2H Double Tier Single Tier ADDENDA INDEX TABLE TOP: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face, balanced with a.028 backer sheet. The two (2) long edges of top are banded with 5/8 x 1-5/8 solid oak external drop edge band and bullnose shaped. END PANELS: Panel ends are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The panel is mortised and tenoned flush on the back side to a 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. The band is shaped to a 3/8 radius on the back edge and a 3/8 radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a panel reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined, and radiused 3/8. End panels extend 1/2 above and 1/2 beyond outside edges of top. KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keels are 1 thick x 8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with Thermally Fused Melamine on both faces. Keels are attached to the underside of top and to end panels. 60 and 30 wide units will have one keel. INDEX RACK: The dividers, back and shelves, are constructed of 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard with exposed edges banded with 5/16 solid oak. The end and divider panels have 5/8 radius on the upper corners. All bands are continuous bullnose shaped. The rack assembly is secured to top by screws passing through the underside of the top and into the dividers. The shelves are adjustable and removable to accommodate computer equipment. GLIDES: Each end panel is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 29 H. Optional 27 height may be specified. UL LISTING: Index tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 2000/3090-ID SF/DT 26 H RACK ADJ SHELF, OAK 31 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT Single-Faced, Double Tier Double-Faced, Double Tier 2000/6060-ID DF/DT 26 H RACK ADJ SHELF, OAK 60-1/2 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 2000/6090-ID DF/DT 26 H RACK ADJ SHELF, OAK 61-1/2 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 16 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

17 Addenda Casegoods ADDENDA TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The two long edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak external edge band applied to the core after lamination of HPL and shaped to a bullnose profile. The work surface shall be grooved on the underside at each end for three 9-9/16 long 14 gauge black oxided steel Z bar brackets. Each bracket shall be attached to the work surface by means of four (4) #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the ends by means of four (4) M6-10 PHM screws screwing into metal inserts embedded in the end panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The panel shall be mortised and tenoned flush on the back side to a 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. No glued-up stock shall be permitted for the bands. The bands shall be shaped to a 3/8 radius on the back edge and a 3/8 radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a 1/8 high x 1-3/8 wide raised reveal and a 1/4 wide recessed reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined and radiused 3/8. The end panels shall extend 1/2 above and 1/2 beyond the outside of the work surface. KEELS: The longitudinal stabilizing keel shall be 1 thick x 8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused malmine on both faces. The keel shall be attached to the underside of the work surface by means of 9 9/16" long 14 gauge black oxided steel "Z" bar brackets and at the bottom by means of a 5/15 x 3/4 black oxided THM scrw passing through bracket in into threaded inserts embedded in the end panel. Each "Z" bar bracket shall be attached to the work surface and keel by means of eight #12 x 5/8" PHSM screws. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Model # Description Dimensions 2000/3060 OAK 31.5 W x L x HGT 2000/3660 OAK 37-1/2 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 2000/3672 OAK 37-1/2 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 2000/3690 OAK 37-1/2 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 2000/4260 OAK 43-1/2 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 2000/4272 OAK 43-3/8 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 2000/4290 OAK 43-1/2 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 2000/4860 OAK 49-1/2 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 2000/4872 OAK 49-1/2 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 2000/4890 OAK 49-1/2 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

18 Addenda Casegoods ADDENDA COMPUTER & REFERENCE TABLE TOP: The table top shall be 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The two long edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1 5/8 wide solid oak external edge and bullnose shaped. Each end of the top shall be grooved to receive two 9-9/16 long metal Z-bars screwed to the top with #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the ends with M6-10 PHM screws screwed into metal inserts embedded in the end panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The panel shall be mortised and tenoned flush on the back side to a 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. No glued-up stock shall be permitted for the bands. The bands shall be shaped to a 3/8 radius on the back edge and a 3/8 radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a 1/8 high x 1-3/8 wide raised reveal and a 1/4 wide recessed reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined and radiused 3/8. KEELS: The longitudinal stabilizing keel shall be 1 thick x 18 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused malmine on both faces. The keel shall be attached to the underside of the work surface by means of 9-9/16" long 17 gauge black oxided steel "Z" bar brackets and at the bottom by means of a 5/18 x 3/4 black oxided THM screw passing through bracket into threaded inserts embedded in the end panel. Each "Z" bar bracket shall be attached to the work surface and keel by means of eight #12x5/8" PHSM screws. CALL SLIP BOX: Table shall be equipped with three compartment call slip units, constructed of Baltic birch veneer core finished to match with reference table. The finished unit is positioned at the center of the reference table and on each end of the computer table edge, and screwed to the underside of the table top. Interior dimensions of each compartment are 3-1/2" wide and 5" deep. TABLE RACK: (Computer Table) The shall be constructed of 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers and all exposed edges banded with solid oak bands. The rack will be 10 high and screwed to the table top. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 2000/3072-CT WITH ONE CALL SLIP BOX, OAK 31-1/2 Wx74-3/8 Lx39-1/2 H Computer Table Reference Table 2000/3072-RT WITH ONE CALL SLIP BOX, OAK 31-1/2 Wx74-3/8 Lx39-1/2 H 18 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

19 Addenda Casegoods ADDENDA OPAC Individual work surfaces shall be adjustable to 26-1/2, 29, 32, or 39 heights and shall meet ADA requirements at the 29 height. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16" thick x 3-ply particleboard contruction with premium "A" oak veneer on both faces The panel shall be modified and tenoned flushed on the back side to a 1-3/16" thick x 3" wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. No glued-up stock shall be permitted for the bands. The bands shall be shaped to a 3/8" radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a 1/8" high x 1-3/8" wide raised reveal and 1/4" wide recessed reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined and radiused 3/8". INTERMEDIATE PANEL: The intermediate panel shall be 1-3/16 thick x 35 wide x 48 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The top, bottom, and front edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick solid oak external bands shaped to a 1-7/8 radiused bullnose profile. The exposed corners shall be radiused 5/8 and shaped to a bullnose profile. Panels shall be fitted with brass threaded inserts at work surface positions and shall have a 3 grommet for electrical interconnection. The panels shall be fitted with three concealed spring tension Mod-eez* clips, which engage on shoulder screws installed on each triangular post. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 1-3/16 thick x 24 wide x 48 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer face and back. The panel shall be banded on the top and bottom edges with 5/16 thick solid oak bands. Each back shall be fitted with six (three per edge) concealed Mod-eez clips which engage on shoulder screws installed on each triangular post. ACCESS PANELS: The access panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick solid oak bands. The panel shall be split in two parts 12 from the bottom. The panel shall be fitted with six (three per edge) concealed Mod-eez clips which engage on shoulder screws installed in each triangular post. The top section shall be pre-drilled on the back side at top for 16 long 14 gauge black oxided steel Z -bar brackets and attached to the panel by means of three #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws for supporting the hex lids. Two 1/8 pilot holes shall be bored at the bottom edge of the top section for the attachment of a cleat by two #10 x 1-3/4 FHW screws. The top section shall be bored through and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC grommet. The bottom section shall have two 1/4 holes bored through for #10 x 1-3/4 FHW screws used to secure the lower section to the cleat. TRIANGULAR POSTS: The triangular posts shall be 1-1/4 per side extruded aluminum, powder coated black, machined on all sides for shoulder screws. The post shall be fitted at the top with an injection molded cap, and the bottom shall be fitted with a threaded insert for a rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glide with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. FULL AND HALF HEX LID: The full and half hex lid shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. Each lid shall be supported by black oxided metal "Z-bar" brackets. WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 28 deep, held forward of the back panel 2 to form a cord drop. The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The exposed edge shall be banded with a 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak internal band applied to the core prior to lamination of the HPL using PVA glue and Radio Frequency (RF) cured. The band shall be shaped to a 2-1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The back edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak. The top shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end for 21-3/16 long, 14 gauge black oxided metal Z bar brackets. Each bracket shall be attached to the work surface by means of three #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the intermediate panels by means of four M6 x 10-mm PHM screws, screwing into metal inserts embedded in the panel. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with a 42 long V shaped 14 gauge steel keel screwed to the work surface with ten #14 x 1 PHSM screws. MINI-WORK SURFACE: The mini-work surface shall be 1-1/4" thick x 19-1/2" deep constructed the same as the top. PAPER SHELVES: The paper shelves shall be 3/4 thick x 10 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with a 1/8 solid oak edge band. The back edge shall be banded with 1/32 oak veneer tape. Both ends shall be machined and fitted on the underside to have two Rafix knock-down fittings for attachment to the end or intermediate panels. The underside shall be pre-drilled with 1/8 pilot holes for the attachment of J -channel hanger brackets and duplex brackets with #8 x 5/8 PHSM screws. DISPLAY SHELF: The display shelf shall be 3/4" thick x 12" deep 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade "A" oak veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with 5/16" solid oak. Both ends shall be machined on the underside to receive shelf pins. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the J-channel, there shall be a 1-1/8" deep x 2-1/2" wide extruded black PVC J-channel with a 1-11/16" lip on the face side screwed to the back panel. GLIDES: Each intermediate panel shall be equipped with a leveling glide located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Work stations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). 2000/HCT HEX, OAK 123-3/4 x 48 H 2000/HCT-1 CLOSED BACK, OAK 54 D x 123-3/4 W x 48 H Full Hex Closed Back 2000/HCT-2 OPEN BACK W/ W/S, OAK 54 D x 123-3/4 W x 48 H 2000/HCT-3 OPEN BACK, ADJ SHELVES, OAK 54 D x 123-3/4 W x 48 H Open Back w/ W/S Open Back w/ Shelves The Worden Company Source Book October

20 Addenda Casegoods ADDENDA STUDY CARREL END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The panel shall be mortised and tenoned flush on the back side to a 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. No glued-up stock shall be permitted for the bands. The bands shall be shaped to a 3/8 radius on the back edge and a 3/8 radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a 1/8 high x 1-3/8 wide raised reveal and a 1/4 wide recessed reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined and radiused 3/8 The ends shall be pre-drilled for location of shoulder screws for shelf and back attachment and threaded inserts at adjustable work surface positions. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: Intermediate panels are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneers on both faces. All four edges of the panel are banded with 5/8 solid oak. All four corners of panel profile are shaped to a 3/8 radius and edges continuous bullnose shaped. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 1-3/16 thick x 34-1/2 wide x 41-1/4 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick solid oak and bullnose shaped. Each back shall be fitted with six (three per edge) concealed Mod-eez clips which engage on shoulder screws installed on the end and intermediate panels. Back panel shall be located 3/4 from the top of end panels and 6 above the floor. WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-5/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The exposed edge shall be banded with a 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak external drop edge band. The band shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The top shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end and back for 21-3/16 long, 14 gauge black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. Each bracket shall be attached to the top, by means of three #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the end panels and back panel by means of four #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws, and to the intermediate panels by means of four 3/16-24 x 1-3/4 THM screws and nuts. SHELF: The storage shelf shall be 1 thick x 10" deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with both faces surfaced with select grade A oak veneers and banded on the exposed edge with 1/8 solid oak. The shelf shall be located 15 above the work surface and secured to the end and intermediate panels with Mod-eez clips and shoulder screws and to the back panel by means of two 1-1/4 #10 deep thread flat head screws engaged into plastic shelf block on the underside of the shelf. CENTER POST (Quad Carrel only): The center post shall be 1-3/16 square x 48 high, constructed of solid oak. All four sides of the post shall be pre-drilled for shoulder screws. GLIDES: Each end and intermediate panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Work stations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 2000/SC SF STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 H 2000/SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 35-11/16 W x 48 H 2048/SC SF STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H 2048/SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 49-3/16 W 48 H Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder 2000/DSC DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 38 W x 48 H 2000/DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 35-11/16 W x 48 H 2048/DSC DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H 2048/DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 49-3/16 W x 48 H Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder Quad Carrel 2000/QSC QUAD CARREL, OAK 73-3/4 D x73-3/4 W x 48 H 20 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

21 Addenda Casegoods ADDENDA WORKSTATION Individual work surfaces shall be adjustable to 26-1/2, 29, 32, or 39 heights and shall meet ADA requirements at the 29 height. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick x 31-1/2 deep x 48 high, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. The panel shall be mortised and tenoned flush on the back side to a 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak band produced from 6/4 stock. No glued-up stock shall be permitted for the bands. The bands shall be shaped to a 3/8 radius on the back edge and a 3/8 radiused bead on the two face corners, creating a 1/8 high x 1-3/8 wide raised reveal and a 1/4 wide recessed reveal. All exposed corners are mitered, splined and radiused 3/8 The ends shall be pre-drilled for location of shoulder screws for shelf and back attachment and threaded inserts at adjustable work surface positions. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate shall be 1-3/16 thick x 31-1/2 wide x 48 high, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick solid oak external bands shaped to a 1-7/8 radiused bullnose profile. All four corners shall be radiused 5/8 and shaped to a bullnose profile. The panel shall be through drilled for shoulder screws and threaded inserts for top adjustments on both sides and a 3 grommet for electrical and data cabling. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak veneer face and back. The panel shall be banded on the top and bottom edges with 5/8 thick solid oak external bends shaped to a 1-7/8 radiused bullnose profile. Each back shall be fitted with six (three per edge) concealed Modeez* clips which engage on shoulder screws installed on the end and intermediate panels. The back shall be recessed 3/4 from the top and shall be 6 above the floor. WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-3/16 thick x 26 deep, held forward of the back panel 2 to form a cord drop. The back edge shll have a black aluminum retaining lip extending 5/8 above the work surface. The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The exposed edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 solid oak external band. The band shall be shaped to a 2-1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The top shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end for 21-3/16 long, 14 gauge black oxided metal Z bar brackets. Each bracket shall be attached to the work surface by means of three #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the end and intermediate panels by means of four M6 x 10-mm PHM screws, screwing into metal inserts embedded in the panel. SHELF: The shelf shall be 1" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select "A" grade oak veneer faces. The front edge shall be banded with 1/8" thick hardwood band. The bottom side of the shelf shall be fitted with four cam type fasteners, allowing locations above or below the work surface, 44" or 21-3/4" off the floor respectively. J-CHANNEL SHELF: The J-channel shelf shall be 3/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused laminate face and back. The exposed edge shall be banded with.02" thick black PVC. The shelf shall be attached with cams. GLIDES: Each end and intermediate panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Work stations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder 2000/WS SF STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 H 2000/WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 35-11/16 W x 48 H 2048/WS SF STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H 2048/WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 49-3/16 W x 48 H 2072/WS SF STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 74-3/8 W x 48 H 2072/WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 73-3/16 D x 48 H Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder 2000/DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 H 2000/DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 35-11/16 W x 48 H 2048/DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H 2048/DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 x 49-3/16 x 48 H 2072/DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 74-3/8 W x 48 H 2072/DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 73-3/16 W x 48 H The Worden Company Source Book October

22 American Classics Casegoods (Alcott) ALCOTT TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick high-pressure laminate face and a.028 thick backer on the underside. The entire perimeter shall be externally banded with 5/8 thick x 1-1/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry edge band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL. On round tables the edge band shall be steam bent. The edge bands shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The bands shall be shaped from 5/8 thick at the legs to 1/8 thick beyond the legs. The bands shall be radiused 1/8 on the top and bottom edges and all outside corners. The inside corners shall be radiused 1/2. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with five metal inserts at each leg position. Tables 60 long and longer shall have a V-shaped steel keel. Tables 48 wide and 60 long or longer shall have two V-shaped keels. The keels shall extend to within 9 of the ends of the work surface and shall be 14-gauge steel powder coated black. The keels shall be screwed to the underside of the work surface with two #14 x 1 PHSM screws every 10. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/4 square solid oak, maple or cherry stock, made from a single piece, or glued-up face to face from two or three solid blanks. The four vertical edges shall be shaped to a 1/8 radius and the bottom shaped to receive a ferrule. The ferrule shall be 2-1/4 high overall x 2 square at the top and shall have a 2-1/2 square x 1/4 high bead at the bottom. The ferrule shall be constructed of aluminum with a brushed finish and all edges and corners eased. The ferrule shall be relieved on the bottom to allow for partially recessing the glide. The ferrule shall be secured to the bottom of the leg by means of countersunk flat head screws. The top of the legs shall be machined to receive a leg plate. The plate shall have a tongue extending from the edge of the plate. The tongue shall be recessed into the leg so that it does not penetrate the outside face(s) of the leg. On rectangle and square tables, the plate shall be 5 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of two (2) 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear corner of the leg. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of five (5) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. On round tables, the plate shall be 4 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of a 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear of the leg. The gusset shall be screwed to the back face of the leg with a #10 flat head screw. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of four (4) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. The face of the leg shall be recessed 3/32 from the edge of the work surface. APRON RAILS: There shall be 2 high apron rail on all four sides of rectangle and square tables extending between the legs and recessed 3/32 from the narrowest part of each edge band profile. The trim rail shall have a brushed aluminum on the exposed face and shall be screwed to the underside of the work surface. On tables than must meet ADA requirements the rails shall extend 5 from each leg and shall be cut at the exposed end to a 45 angle. The exposed end shall be closed and finished. Round tables shall not have apron rails. GLIDES: Each leg shall be provided with a resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glide with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem partially recessed into the leg. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). ALCOTT ROUND TABLE AL/048 OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT AL/048-C CHERRY 48 DIAMETER x HGT AL/048-M MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT ALCOTT SQUARE TABLE AL/4848 OAK 48 W x 48 L x HGT AL/4848-ADA OAK 48 W x 48 L; ADA OPTION AL/4848-C CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT AL/4848-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 48 L; ADA OPTION AL/4848-M MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT AL/4848-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 48 L; ADA OPTION 22 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

23 American Classics Casegoods (Alcott) ALCOTT RECTANGULAR TABLE Model # Description Dimensions AL/3660 AL/3660-ADA AL/3660-C AL/3660-C-ADA AL/3660-M AL/3660-M-ADA AL/3672 AL/3672-ADA AL/3672-C AL/3672-C-ADA AL/3672-M AL/3672-M-ADA AL/3690 AL/3690-ADA AL/3690-C AL/3690-C-ADA AL/3690-M AL/3690-M-ADA AL/4260 AL/4260-ADA AL/4260-C AL/4260-C-ADA AL/4260-M AL/4260-M-ADA AL/4272 AL/4272-ADA AL/4272-C AL/4272-C-ADA AL/4272-M AL/4272-M-ADA AL/4290 AL/4290-ADA AL/4290-C AL/4290-C-ADA AL/4290-M AL/4290-M-ADA AL/4860 AL/4860-ADA AL/4860-C AL/4860-C-ADA AL/4860-M AL/4860-M-ADA AL/4872 AL/4872-ADA AL/4872-C AL/4872-C-ADA AL/4872-M AL/4872-M-ADA AL/4890 AL/4890-ADA AL/4890-C AL/4890-C-ADA AL/4890-M AL/4890-M-ADA OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION The Worden Company Source Book October

24 American Classics Casegoods (Alcott) ALCOTT WORKSTATION WORK SURFACE: Work surfaces shall be 1-1/4 thick 26 deep x 34-1/2 or, 42 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The front edge shall be externally banded with 1-3/16 thick x 1-3/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry. The bands shall be shaped to a 3-7/8 radius on the top surface and the edges radiused 1/8. The back edge of the work surface shall be held 2 from the back panel to form a cord drop and shall be fitted with a black aluminum extrusion forming a 5/8 retaining ledge. The work surface is attached to the side panels by means of a black oxided metal Z-bar brackets screwed to the underside of the work surface and secured to the end and intermediate panels with M6 PHM screws, screwing into metal inserts embedded in the panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/8 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer face and back. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1-3/8 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry with a 1-1/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide x 2-1/4 high stainless steel ferrule and a 1/4 thick matching bead on four sides of the bottom edge of the ferrule.. The top edge shall be banded with 1-3/8 thick x 1-1/2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry. The top rail shall be 1-3/8 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry. The spacer blocks fretwork shall be 3/4 thick x 1-1/2 wide x 1-1/2 high brushed stainless steel.. All bands shall be flush on the inside face. All members shall be tenoned or doweled. End panels shall be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. The end panels shall be pre-drilled for the location of two shoulder screws for shelf attachment above and below the work surface.. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be 1-3/16 thick with the same band details as the end panels. The bands shall be set flush on both faces. Panels are through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet located 17 on center above the floor. BACK PANEL: Back panel is 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges are banded with 1/8 solid oak, maple or cherry. The panel is set down 1/8 from top of side panels and terminates 2-5/8 above floor at bottom. Double face back panels shall have a 3 grommet located 16-1/4 on center above the floor. SHELF: The shelf is 3/4 thick x 10 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer on each face and the front edge banded with 1/8 solid oak, maple or cherry. The removable shelf may be located above the work surface, 42-7/8 above the floor or below the work surface 22-1/4 above the floor. UL LISTING: Workstations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder AL-36-WS SF STARTER, OAK 36 W AL-36-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 36 W AL-36-WS-C SF STARTER, CHERRY 36 W AL-36-WS-A-C SF ADDER, CHERRY 36 W AL-36-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 36 W AL-36-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 36 W AL-42-WS SF STARTER, OAK 42 W AL-42-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 42 W AL-42-WS-C SF STARTER, CHERRY 42 W AL-42-WS-A-C SF ADDER, CHERRY 42 W AL-42-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 42 W AL-42-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 42 W Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder AL-36-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 36 W AL-36-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 36 W AL-36-DWS-C DF STARTER, CHERRY 36 W AL-36-DWS-A-C DF ADDER, CHERRY 36 W AL-36-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 36 W AL-36-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 36 W AL-42-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 42 W AL-42-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 42 W AL-42-DWS-C DF STARTER, CHERRY 42 W AL-42-DWS-A-C DF ADDER, CHERRY 42 W AL-42-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 42 W AL-42-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 42 W 24 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

25 American Classics Casegoods (Alcott) ALCOTT COMPUTER CENTER WORK SURFACE: Work surfaces shall be 1-1/4 thick 32 deep x 61-3/8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The front edge shall be externally banded with 1-3/16 thick x 1-3/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry sectored band. The bands shall be shaped to a 3-7/8 radius on the top surface and the edges radiused 1/8. The outside edge of the top shall be shaped to a 44 radius. The back edge of the work surface shall be held 2 from the back panel to form a cord drop and shall be fitted with a black aluminum extrusion forming a 5/8 retaining ledge. The work surface is attached to the side panels by means of a black oxided metal Z-bar brackets screwed to the underside of the work surface and secured to the end and intermediate panels with M6 PHM screws, screwing into metal inserts embedded in the panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer face and back. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1-3/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry with a 1-1/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide x 2-1/4 high stainless steel ferrule and a 1/4 thick matching bead on four sides of the bottom edge of the ferrule.. The top edge shall be banded with 1-3/16 thick x 1-1/2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry. The top rail shall be 1-3/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry. The spacer blocks fretwork shall be 3/4 thick x 1-1/2 wide x 1-1/2 high brushed stainless steel.. All bands shall be flush on both faces. All members shall be tenoned or doweled. End panels shall be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. The end panels shall be pre-drilled for the location of two shoulder screws for shelf attachment above and below the work surface.. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be 1-3/16 thick with the same band details as the end panels. Panels shall be through drilled and fitted with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet located 17 on center above the floor. BACK PANEL: Back panel is 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges are banded with 1/8 solid oak, maple or cherry. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1/2 solid oak, maple or cherry and beveled to a 45 degree angle. The panel is set down 1-3/4 from top of side panels and terminates 5 above floor at bottom. The panel shall be secured with bronze cam fasteners. Each panel shall be furnished with 3 grommet located 16-1/2 on center above the floor. Model # Description Dimensions AL-2CS AL-2CS-C AL-2CS-M 2-STATION, OAK 2-STATION, CHERRY 2-STATION, MAPLE 91-1/2 Wx46-3/4 Dx48-1/8H 91-1/2 Wx46-3/4 Dx48-1/8H 91-1/2 Wx46-3/4 Dx48-1/8H 2-Station 4-Station AL-4CS AL-4CS-C AL-4CS-M 4-STATION, OAK 4-STATION, MAPLE 4-STATION, CHERRY 91-1/2 DIAM x 48-1/8 H 91-1/2 DIAM x 48-1/8 H 91-1/2 DIAM x 48-1/8 H ALCOTT ATLAS STAND The assembly shall consist of two end panels, a sloped top, a back, a bottom shelf and five pull-out shelves. All components shall be oak, maple or cherry solids and veneers. The end panels shall be 1-3/8 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply panel with the vertical edges banded with 1-3/8 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid hardwood with a 1-1/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide x 2-1/4 high stainless steel ferrule and a 1/4 thick matching bead on four sides of the bottom edge. The top edge shall be banded with 1-3/8 thick x 1-1/2 wide solid hardwood. The top rail shall be 1-3/8 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid hardwood with 3/4 thick x 1-1/2 wide x 1-1/2 high brushed stainless steel spacer blocks fretwork between the rail and band. The sloped top assembly shall have a plastic laminate facing and an arched solid hardwood retaining strip located on lower edge. The pull-out shelves shall be 3/4 thick with a 1-1/2 high retainer at the front edge. The shelves shall operate on full extension ball bearing slides with stops to prevent removal. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. The assembly shall have adjustable leveling glides. AL-AS OAK 26-1/2 Dx28-3/8 Wx48-1/4H AL-AS-C CHERRY 26-1/2 Dx28-3/8 Wx48-1/4H Model AL-AS-M # Description MAPLE Dimensions 26-1/2 Dx28-3/8 Wx48-1/4H ALCOTT DICTIONARY STAND The assembly shall consist of two end panels, a sloped top, a back, a bottom shelf and an adjustable shelf. All components shall be oak, maple or cherry solids and veneers. The end panels shall be 1-3/8 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply panel with the vertical edges banded with 1-3/8 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid hardwood with a 1-1/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide x 2-1/4 high stainless steel ferrule and a 1/4 thick matching bead on four sides of the bottom edge. The top edge shall be banded with 1-3/8 thick x 1-1/2 wide solid hardwood. The top rail shall be 1-3/8 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid hardwood with 3/4 thick x 1-1/2 wide x 1-1/2 high brushed stainless steel spacer blocks fretwork between the rail and band. The sloped top assembly shall have a plastic laminate facing and an arched solid hardwood retaining strip located on lower edge. The adjustable storage shelf shall be 3/4 thick with a 1-1/2 high book stop at the back edge. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. The assembly shall have adjustable leveling glides. AL-DS OAK 20 D x 36-3/8 W x48-1/4 H AL-DS-C CHERRY 20 D x 36-3/8 W x48-1/4 H AL-DS-M MAPLE 20 D x 36-3/8 W x48-1/4 H The Worden Company Source Book October

26 American Classics Casegoods (Hawthorne) HAWTHORNE TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick high-pressure laminate face and a.028 thick backer on the underside. The entire perimeter shall be externally banded with 5/8 thick x 1-1/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry edge band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL. On round tables the edge band shall be steam bent. The edge bands shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The bands shall be shaped to a 1/8 radius on the top edge and outside corners and a reverse stop beveled and blended at the leg to match the profile of the apron rail. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with five metal inserts at each leg position. Tables 60 long and longer shall have a V-shaped steel keel. Tables 48 wide and 60 long or longer shall have two V-shaped keels. The keels shall extend to within 9 of the ends of the work surface and shall be 14-gauge steel powder coated black. The keels shall be screwed to the underside of the work surface with two #14 x 1 PHSM screws every 10. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/4 square solid oak, maple or cherry stock, made from a single piece, or glued-up face to face from two or three solid blanks. The four vertical edges shall be shaped to a 1/8 radius and the bottom 4 tapered on all four sides to 1-3/8 square. The top of the legs shall be machined to receive a leg plate. The plate shall have a tongue extending from the edge of the plate. The tongue shall be recessed into the leg so that it does not penetrate the outside face(s) of the leg. On rectangle and square tables, the plate shall be 5 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of two (2) 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear corner of the leg. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of five (5) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. On round tables, the plate shall be 4 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of a 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear of the leg. The gusset shall be screwed to the back face of the leg with a #10 flat head screw. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of four (4) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. The face of the leg shall be recessed 3/32 from the edge of the work surface. APRON RAILS: There shall be 2 high solid oak, maple or cherry apron rail on all four sides of rectangle and square tables extending between the legs and recessed 19/32 from the edge band. The trim rail shall be profiled to a reverse bevel and shall be screwed to the underside of the work surface. On tables than must meet ADA requirements the rails shall extend 5 from each leg and shall be cut at the exposed end to a 45 degree angle. The exposed end shall be closed and finished. Round tables shall not have apron rails. GLIDES: Each leg shall be provided with a resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glide with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). HAWTHORNE ROUND TABLE HW/048 OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT HW/048-C CHERRY 48 DIAMETER x HGT HW/048-M MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT HAWTHORNE SQUARE TABLE HW/4848 OAK 48 W x 48 L x HGT HW/4848-ADA OAK 48 W x 48 L; ADA OPTION HW/4848-C CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT HW/4848-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 48 L; ADA OPTION HW/4848-M MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT HW/4848-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 48 L; ADA OPTION 26 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

27 American Classics Casegoods (Hawthorne) HAWTHORNE RECTANGULAR TABLE Model # Description Dimensions HW/3660 HW/3660-ADA HW/3660-C HW/3660-C-ADA HW/3660-M HW/3660-M-ADA HW/3672 HW/3672-ADA HW/3672-C HW/3672-C-ADA HW/3672-M HW/3672-M-ADA HW/3690 HW/3690-ADA HW/3690-C HW/3690-C-ADA HW/3690-M HW/3690-M-ADA HW/4260 HW/4260-ADA HW/4260-C HW/4260-C-ADA HW/4260-M HW/4260-M-ADA HW/4272 HW/4272-ADA HW/4272-C HW/4272-C-ADA HW/4272-M HW/4272-M-ADA HW/4290 HW/4290-ADA HW/4290-C HW/4290-C-ADA HW/4290-M HW/4290-M-ADA HW/4860 HW/4860-ADA HW/4860-C HW/4860-C-ADA HW/4860-M HW/4860-M-ADA HW/4872 HW/4872-ADA HW/4872-C HW/4872-C-ADA HW/4872-M HW/4872-M-ADA HW/4890 HW/4890-ADA HW/4890-C HW/4890-C-ADA HW/4890-M HW/4890-M-ADA OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L; ADA OPTION The Worden Company Source Book October

28 American Classics Casegoods (Thoreau) THOREAU ATLAS STAND The assembly shall consist of two end panels, a sloped top, a back, a bottom shelf and five pull-out shelves. All components shall be oak, maple or cherry solids and veneers. The end panels shall be 1-7/8 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply panel with the vertical edges banded with 1-5/16 thick x 2 wide solid hardwood. The top edge shall be banded with 1-5/16 thick x 3-1/2 wide solid hardwood shaped on the inside to a 45-3/4 radius. The top cap shall be 3/4 thick x 1-7/8 wide solid hardwood with a 1/4 60 degree chamfer on four edges. The bottom shall have a sabot consisting of a 1-3/16 thick x 3-3/4 wide solid hardwood member and a hardwood bead 3/4 thick x 1-7/8 wide with a 1/4 60 degree chamfer on four edges. The sloped top assembly shall have a plastic laminate facing and an arched solid hardwood retaining strip located on lower edge. The pull-out shelves shall be 3/4 thick with a 1-1/2 high retainer at the front edge. The shelves shall operate on full extension ball bearing slides with stops to prevent removal. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. The assembly shall have adjustable leveling glides. TH-AS OAK 27-3/4 Dx28-5/8 Wx48 H TH-AS-C CHERRY 27-3/4 Dx28-5/8 Wx48 H TH-AS-M Model # Description MAPLE Dimensions 27-3/4 Dx28-5/8 Wx48 H THOREAU DICTIONARY STAND The assembly shall consist of two end panels, a sloped top, a back, a bottom shelf and an adjustable shelf. All components shall be oak, maple or cherry solids and veneers. The end panels shall be 1-7/8 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply panel with the vertical edges banded with 1-5/16 thick x 2 wide solid hardwood. The top edge shall be banded with 1-5/16 thick x 3-1/2 wide solid hardwood shaped on the inside to a 22-3/4 radius. The top cap shall be 3/4 thick x 1-7/8 wide solid hardwood with a 1/4 60 degree chamfer on four edges. The bottom shall have a sabot consisting of a 1-3/16 thick x 3-3/4 wide solid hardwood member and a hardwood bead 3/4 thick x 1-7/8 wide with a 1/4 60 degree chamfer on four edges. The sloped top assembly shall have a plastic laminate facing and an arched solid hardwood retaining strip located on lower edge. The adjustable storage shelf shall be 3/4 thick with a 1-1/2 high book stop at the back edge. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. The assembly shall have adjustable leveling glides. TH-DS OAK 20-3/4 Dx26-5/8 Wx48 H TH-DS-C CHERRY 20-3/4 Dx26-5/8 Wx48 H Model TH-DS-M # Description MAPLE Dimensions 20-3/4 Dx26-5/8 Wx48 H THOREAU COMPUTER CENTER WORK SURFACE: Work surfaces shall be 1-1/4 thick 32 deep x 61-3/8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The front edge shall be externally banded with 1-3/16 thick x 1-3/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry sectored band. The bands shall be shaped to a 3-7/8 radius on the top surface and the edges radiused 1/8. The outside edge of the top shall be shaped to a 44 radius. The back edge of the work surface shall be held 2 from the back panel to form a cord drop and shall be fitted with a black aluminum extrusion forming a 5/8 retaining ledge. The work surface is attached to the side panels by means of a black oxided metal Z-bar brackets screwed to the underside of the work surface and secured to the end and intermediate panels with M6 PHM screws, screwing into metal inserts embedded in the panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer face and back. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1-3/16 thick x 2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry. The top edge shall be banded with 1-3/16 thick x 3-1/2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry band shaped on the inside to a 75-3/4 radius. The top cap shall be 3/4 thick x 1-7/8 wide solid oak, maple or cherry with a 1/4 60 degree chamfer on four edges. The bottom shall have a sabot consisting of a 1-3/16 thick x 3-3/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry member and a bead 3/4 thick x 1-7/8 wide solid oak, maple or cherry with a 1/4 60 degree chamfer on four edges. All bands shall be flush on both faces. All members shall be tenoned or doweled. End panels shall be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be 1-3/16 thick with the same band details as the end panels. Panels shall be through drilled and fitted with threaded brass inserts on both sides. The panels shall be fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet located 16-1/2 on center above the floor. BACK PANEL: Back panel is 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges are banded with 1/8 solid oak, maple or cherry. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1/2 solid oak, maple or cherry and beveled to a 45 degree angle. The panel is set down 1-3/4 from top of side panels and terminates 5 above floor at bottom. The panel shall be secured with bronze cam fasteners. Each panel shall be furnished with 3 grommet located 16-1/2 on center above the floor. TH-2CS 2-STATION OAK 91-1/2 Wx46-7/8 Dx48-1/4H TH-2CS-C 2-STATION CHERRY 91-1/2 Wx46-7/8 Dx48-1/4H TH-2CS-M 2-STATION MAPLE 91-1/2 Wx46-7/8 Dx48-1/4H 2-Station 4-Station TH-4CS 4-STATION OAK 91-1/2 DIAM x 48-1/8 H TH-4CS-C 4-STATION CHERRY 91-1/2 DIAM x 48-1/8 H TH-4CS-M 4-STATION MAPLE 91-1/2 DIAM x 48-1/8 H 28 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

29 American Classics Casegoods (Thoreau) THOREAU WORKSTATION WORK SURFACE: Work surfaces shall be 1-1/4" thick 26" deep x 34-1/2" or, 42" wide, 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050" high pressure laminate face and.028" backer on the underside. The front edge shall be externally banded with 1-3/16" thick x 1-3/4" wide solid oak, maple or cherry. The bands shall be shaped to a 3-7/8 radius on the top surface and the edges radiused 1/8". The back edge of the work surface shall be held 2" from the back panel to form a cord drop and shall be fitted with a black aluminum extrusion forming a 5/8" retaining ledge. The work surface is attached to the side panels by means of a black oxided metal "Z-bar" brackets screwed to the underside of the work surface and secured to the end and intermediate panels with M6 PHM screws, screwing into metal inserts embedded in the panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-7/8" thick, consisting of a 1-3/16" thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer face and back. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1-5/16" thick x 2" wide solid oak, maple or cherry. The top edge shall be banded with 1-5/16" thick x 3-1/2" wide solid oak, maple or cherry band shaped on the inside to a 62-5/8" radius. The top cap shall be 3/4" thick x 1-7/8" wide solid oak, maple or cherry with a 1/4" 60 degree chamfer on four edges. The bottom shall have a sabot consisting of a 1-5/8" thick x 3-3/4" wide solid oak, maple or cherry member and a bead 3/4" thick x 1-7/8" wide solid oak, maple or cherry with a 1/4" 60 degree chamfer on four edges. The horizontal and vertical mullions shall be 1-5/16" thick x 1-1/2" wide solid oak, maple or cherry. All bands and mullions shall be flush on the inside face. All members shall be tenoned or doweled. The glazed or wood panels shall be 12" high set between the end bands, mullions and top band, and secured by solid oak, maple or cherry molding. End panels shall be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights of 26-1/2", 29", and 32". The end panels shall be pre-drilled for the location of two shoulder screws for shelf attachment. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be 1-3/16" thick with the same band details as the end panels only without the glazed panels and mullions. The bands shall be set flush on both faces. Panels are through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2" PVC pass through grommet located 17" on center above the floor. BACK PANEL: Back panel is 1-3/16" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade "A" oak, maple or cherry veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges are banded with 1/8" solid oak, maple or cherry. The panel is set down 1-7/8" from top of side panels and terminates 5" above floor at bottom. Double face back panels shall have a 3" grommet located 17" on center above the floor. SHELF: The shelf is 3/4" thick x 10" wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer on each face and the front edge banded with 1/8" solid oak, maple or cherry. The removable shelf may be located above the work surface, 45-1/4" above the floor. J-CHANNEL SHELF: The J-channel shelf shall be 3/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with black thermally fused laminate face and back. The exposed edge shall be banded with 1 mm black PVC. The shelf shall be located 21-5/8" above the floor and attached with cams. GLIDES: Each leg shall have a 1-3/16" diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glide with a 15/16" threaded stem. UL LISTING: Workstations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Model # Description Dimensions Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder TH-36-WS TH-36-WS-A TH-36-WS-C TH-36-WS-A-C TH-36-WS-M TH-36-WS-A-M TH-36-DWS TH-36-DWS-A TH-36-DWS-C TH-36-DWS-A-C TH-36-DWS-M TH-36-DWS-A-M SF STARTER, OAK SF ADDER, OAK SF STARTER, CHERRY SF ADDER, CHERRY SF STARTER, MAPLE SF ADDER, MAPLE SF STARTER, OAK SF ADDER, OAK SF STARTER, CHERRY SF ADDER, CHERRY SF STARTER, MAPLE SF ADDER, MAPLE 31-3/4 Dx37-11/16 Wx48 H 31-3/4 Dx35-11/16 Wx48 H 31-3/4 Dx37-11/16 Wx48 H 31-3/4 Dx35-11/16 Wx48 H 31-3/4 Dx37-11/16 Wx48 H 31-3/4 Dx35-11/16 Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx37-11/16 Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx35-11/16 Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx37-11/16 Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx35-11/16 Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx37-11/16 Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx35-11/16 Wx48 H Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder TH-42-WS TH-42-WS-A TH-42-WS-C TH-42-WS-A-C TH-42-WS-M TH-42-WS-A-M TH-42-DWS TH-42-DWS-A TH-42-DWS-C TH-42-DWS-A-C TH-42-DWS-M TH-42-DWS-A-M DF STARTER, OAK DF ADDER, OAK DF STARTER, CHERRY DF ADDER, CHERRY DF STARTER, MAPLE DF ADDER, MAPLE DF STARTER, OAK DF ADDER, OAK DF STARTER, CHERRY DF ADDER, CHERRY DF STARTER, MAPLE DF ADDER, MAPLE 31-3/4 Dx Wx48 H 31-3/4 Dx43-3/16 Wx48 H 31-3/4 Dx Wx48 H 31-3/4 Dx43-3/16 Wx48 H 31-3/4 Dx Wx48 H 31-3/4 Dx43-3/16 Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx43-3/16 Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx43-3/16 Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx Wx48 H 61-3/4 Dx43-3/16 Wx48 H The Worden Company Source Book October

30 American Classics Casegoods (Twain) TWAIN ATLAS STAND The assembly shall consist of two end panels, a sloped top, a back, a bottom shelf and five pull-out shelves. All components shall be oak, maple or cherry solids and veneers. The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, consisting of a panel, a pediment and a leg base. The panel shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply with the pediment being 1-3/16 thick x 3-1/4 high at the midpoint arching to 1-1/4 at the ends. The pediment shall have 1/8 x 1/8 vertical reveal at the midpoint on both faces. The base shall consist of two solid hardwood legs, 1-3/16 thick x 2-1/4 wide at the top tapered on the inside face to 1-1/4 at the bottom. The legs shall joined by 1-3/16 x 2 solid oak, maple or cherry apron rails. Between the top element and base there shall be a 1/4 black bead detail on four sides of the panel.. The sloped top assembly shall have a plastic laminate facing and an arched solid hardwood retaining strip located on lower edge. The pull-out shelves shall be 3/4 thick with a 1-1/2 high retainer at the front edge. The shelves shall operate on full extension ball bearing slides with stops to prevent removal. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. The assembly shall have adjustable leveling glides. TW-AS OAK 26-1/2 D x28-3/8 Wx48-1/4H TW-AS-C CHERRY 26-1/2 D x28-3/8 Wx48-1/4H TW-AS-M MAPLE 26-1/2 D x28-3/8 Wx48-1/4H TWAIN DICTIONARY STAND The assembly shall consist of two end panels, a sloped top, a back, a bottom shelf and an adjustable shelf. All components shall be oak, maple or cherry solids and veneers. The end panels shall consist of a panel, a pediment and a leg base. The panel shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply with the pediment being 1-3/16 thick x 3 high at the midpoint arching to 1 at the ends. The pediment shall have 1/8 x 1/8 vertical reveal at the midpoint on both faces. The base shall consist of two solid hardwood legs, 1-3/16 thick x 2-1/4 wide at the top tapered on the inside face to 1-1/4 at the bottom. The legs shall joined by 1-3/16 x 2 solid oak, maple or cherry apron rails. Between the top ele- ment and base there shall be a 1/4 black bead detail on four sides of the panel.. The sloped top assembly shall have a plastic laminate facing and an arched solid hardwood retaining strip located on lower edge. The adjustable storage shelf shall be 3/4 thick with a 1-1/2 high book stop at the back edge. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. The assembly shall have adjustable leveling glides. TW-DS OAK 20 D x 26-3/8 W x 48-1/4 H TW-DS-C CHERRY 20 D x 26-3/8 W x 48-1/4 H TW-DS-M MAPLE 20 D x 26-3/8 W x 48-1/4 H TWAIN I TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick high-pressure laminate face and a.028 thick backer on the underside. On round tables the edge band shall be steam bent. The edge bands shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The bands shall be shaped to a 1-3/8 radius bullnose profile on rectangular tables. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with five metal inserts at each leg position. Tables 60 long and longer shall have a V-shaped steel keel. Tables 48 wide and 60 long or longer shall have two V-shaped keels. The keels shall extend to within 9 of the ends of the work surface and shall be 14-gauge steel powder coated black. The keels shall be screwed to the underside of the work surface with two #14 x 1 PHSM screws every 10. EDGE BAND: Bow shape: The entire perimeter shall be externally banded with 1 thick x 1-1/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry edge band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL and machined to bow tapering to 1/8 thick at the ends. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/4 square solid oak, maple or cherry stock, made from a single piece, or glued-up face to face from two or three solid blanks. The turned leg shall be turned from 2-1/4" diameter 4" from the top of the leg to 1-1/2" diameter at the bottom. The top of the legs shall be machined to receive a leg plate. The plate shall have a tongue extending from the edge of the plate. The tongue shall be recessed into the leg so that it does not penetrate the outside face(s) of the leg. On rectangle and square tables, the plate shall be 5 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of two (2) 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear corner of the leg. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of five (5) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. On round tables, the plate shall be 4 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of a 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear of the leg. The gusset shall be screwed to the back face of the leg with a #10 flat head screw. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of four (4) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. The face of the leg shall be recessed 1-3/16 from the edge of the work surface. APRON RAILS: There shall be 2" high solid oak, maple or cherry apron rail on all four sides of rectangle and square tables extending between the legs and recessed 3/32" from the face of the leg. The aprons shall be radiused 1/16" on the bottom edges. On tables that must meet ADA requirements the rails shall extend 5" from each leg and shall be cut at the exposed end to a 45 angle. The exposed end shall be closed and finished. Round tables shall not have apron rails. GLIDES: Each leg shall be provided with a resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glide with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). TWAIN I ROUND TABLE TW1/048 OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT TW1/048-C CHERRY 48 DIAMETER x HGT TW1/048-M MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT 30 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

31 American Classics Casegoods (Twain) TWAIN I SQUARE TABLE TW1/4848 OAK 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW1/4848-ADA OAK 48 W x 48 L x ADA TW1/4848-C CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW1/4848-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x ADA TW1/4848-M MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW1/4848-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x ADA TWAIN I RECTANGULAR TABLE TW1/3660 TW1/3660-ADA TW1/3660-C TW1/3660-C-ADA TW1/3660-M TW1/3660-M-ADA TW1/3672 TW1/3672-ADA TW1/3672-C TW1/3672-C-ADA TW1/3672-M TW1/3672-M-ADA TW1/3690 TW1/3690-ADA TW1/3690-C TW1/3690-C-ADA TW1/3690-M TW1/3690-M-ADA TW1/4260 TW1/4260-ADA TW1/4260-C TW1/4260-C-ADA TW1/4260-M TW1/4260-M-ADA TW1/4272 TW1/4272-ADA TW1/4272-C TW1/4272-C-ADA TW1/4272-M TW1/4272-M-ADA TW1/4290 TW1/4290-ADA TW1/4290-C TW1/4290-C-ADA TW1/4290-M TW1/4290-M-ADA TW1/4860 TW1/4860-ADA TW1/4860-C TW1/4860-C-ADA TW1/4860-M TW1/4860-M-ADA TW1/4872 TW1/4872-ADA TW1/4872-C TW1/4872-C-ADA TW1/4872-M TW1/4872-M-ADA TW1/4890 TW1/4890-ADA TW1/4890-C TW1/4890-C-ADA TW1/4890-M TW1/4890-M-ADA OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L ADA 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L ADA 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L ADA 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L ADA 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L ADA 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L ADA 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L ADA 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L ADA 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L ADA 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 H ADA 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 H ADA 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 H ADA 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L ADA 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L ADA 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L ADA 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L ADA 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L ADA 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L ADA 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x ADA 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x ADA 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x ADA 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x ADA 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x ADA 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x ADA 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x ADA 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x ADA 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x ADA The Worden Company Source Book October

32 American Classics Casegoods (Twain) TWAIN II TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick high-pressure laminate face and a.028 thick backer on the underside. On round tables the edge band shall be steam bent. The edge bands shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The bands shall be shaped to a 1-3/8 radius bullnose profile on rectangular tables. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with five metal inserts at each leg position. Tables 60 long and longer shall have a V-shaped steel keel. Tables 48 wide and 60 long or longer shall have two V-shaped keels. The keels shall extend to within 9 of the ends of the work surface and shall be 14-gauge steel powder coated black. The keels shall be screwed to the underside of the work surface with two #14 x 1 PHSM screws every 10. EDGE BAND: Straight shape: The entire perimeter shall be externally banded with 1/4 thick x 1-1/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry edge band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/4 square solid oak, maple or cherry stock, made from a single piece, or glued-up face to face from two or three solid blanks. The two inside faces of the tapered legs of rectangle and square tables and the three inside faces of round tables shall be tapered to 1-1/8 at the bottom. The top of the legs shall be machined to receive a leg plate. The plate shall have a tongue extending from the edge of the plate. The tongue shall be recessed into the leg so that it does not penetrate the outside face(s) of the leg. On rectangle and square tables, the plate shall be 5 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of two (2) 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear corner of the leg. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of five (5) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. On round tables, the plate shall be 4 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of a 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear of the leg. The gusset shall be screwed to the back face of the leg with a #10 flat head screw. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of four (4) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. The face of the leg shall be recessed 1-3/16 from the edge of the work surface. APRON RAILS: There shall be 2" high solid oak, maple or cherry apron rail on all four sides of rectangle and square tables extending between the legs and recessed 3/32" from the face of the leg. The aprons shall be radiused 1/16" on the bottom edges. On tables that must meet ADA requirements the rails shall extend 5" from each leg and shall be cut at the exposed end to a 45 angle. The exposed end shall be closed and finished. Round tables shall not have apron rails. GLIDES: Each leg shall be provided with a resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glide with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). TWAIN II ROUND TABLE TW2/048 TW2/048-C TW2/048-M OAK CHERRY MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT 48 DIAMETER x HGT 48 DIAMETER x HGT TWAIN II SQUARE TABLE TW2/4848 OAK 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW2/4848-ADA OAK 48 W x 48 L x ADA TW2/4848-C CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW2/4848-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x ADA TW2/4848-M MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW2/4848-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x ADA 32 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

33 American Classics Casegoods (Twain) TWAIN II RECTANGULAR TABLE TW2/3660 OAK 36 W x 60 L x HGT TW2/3660-ADA OAK 36 W x 60 L ADA TW2/3660-C CHERRY 36 W x 60 L x HGT TW2/3660-C-ADA CHERRY 36 W x 60 L ADA TW2/3660-M MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT TW2/3660-M-ADA MAPLE 36 W x 60 L ADA TW2/3672 OAK 36 W x 72 L x HGT TW2/3672-ADA OAK 36 W x 72 L ADA TW2/3672-C CHERRY 36 W x 72 L x HGT TW2/3672-C-ADA CHERRY 36 W x 72 L ADA TW2/3672-M MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT TW2/3672-M-ADA MAPLE 36 W x 72 L ADA TW2/3690 OAK 36 W x 90 L x HGT TW2/3690-ADA OAK 36 W x 90 L ADA TW2/3690-C CHERRY 36 W x 90 L x HGT TW2/3690-C-ADA CHERRY 36 W x 90 L ADA TW2/3690-M MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT TW2/3690-M-ADA MAPLE 36 W x 90 L ADA TW2/4260 OAK 42 W x 60 L x HGT TW2/4260-ADA OAK 42 W x 60 H ADA TW2/4260-C CHERRY 42 W x 60 L x HGT TW2/4260-C-ADA CHERRY 42 W x 60 H ADA TW2/4260-M MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT TW2/4260-M-ADA MAPLE 42 W x 60 H ADA TW2/4272 OAK 42 W x 72 L x HGT TW2/4272-ADA OAK 42 W x 72 L ADA TW2/4272-C CHERRY 42 W x 72 L x HGT TW2/4272-C-ADA TW2/4272-M CHERRY MAPLE 42 W x 72 L ADA 42 W x 72 L x HGT TW2/4272-M-ADA MAPLE 42 W x 72 L ADA TW2/4290 OAK 42 W x 90 L x HGT TW2/4290-ADA OAK 42 W x 90 L ADA TW2/4290-C CHERRY 42 W x 90 L x HGT TW2/4290-C-ADA CHERRY 42 W x 90 L ADA TW2/4290-M MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT TW2/4290-M-ADA MAPLE 42 W x 90 L ADA TW2/4860 OAK 48 W x 60 L x HGT TW2/4860-ADA OAK 48 W x 60 L x ADA TW2/4860-C CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT TW2/4860-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x ADA TW2/4860-M MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT TW2/4860-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x ADA TW2/4872 OAK 48 W x 72 L x HGT TW2/4872-ADA OAK 48 W x 72 L x ADA TW2/4872-C CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT TW2/4872-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x ADA TW2/4872-M MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT TW2/4872-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x ADA TW2/4890 OAK 48 W x 90 L x HGT TW2/4890-ADA OAK 48 W x 90 L x ADA TW2/4890-C CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT TW2/4890-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x ADA TW2/4890-M MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT TW2/4890-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x ADA The Worden Company Source Book October

34 American Classics Casegoods (Twain) TWAIN III TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick high-pressure laminate face and a.028 thick backer on the underside. On round tables the edge band shall be steam bent. The edge bands shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The bands shall be shaped to a 1-3/8 radius bullnose profile on rectangular tables. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with five metal inserts at each leg position. Tables 60 long and longer shall have a V-shaped steel keel. Tables 48 wide and 60 long or longer shall have two V-shaped keels. The keels shall extend to within 9 of the ends of the work surface and shall be 14-gauge steel powder coated black. The keels shall be screwed to the underside of the work surface with two #14 x 1 PHSM screws every 10. EDGE BAND: Straight shape: The entire perimeter shall be externally banded with 1/4 thick x 1-1/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry edge band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/4 square solid oak, maple or cherry stock, made from a single piece, or glued-up face to face from two or three solid blanks. The turned leg shall be turned from 2-1/4 diameter 4 from the top of the leg to 1-1/2 diameter at the bottom. The top of the legs shall be machined to receive a leg plate. The plate shall have a tongue extending from the edge of the plate. The tongue shall be recessed into the leg so that it does not penetrate the outside face(s) of the leg. On rectangle and square tables, the plate shall be 5 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of two (2) 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear corner of the leg. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of five (5) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. On round tables, the plate shall be 4 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of a 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear of the leg. The gusset shall be screwed to the back face of the leg with a #10 flat head screw. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of four (4) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. The face of the leg shall be recessed 1-3/16 from the edge of the work surface. APRON RAILS: There shall be 2" high solid oak, maple or cherry apron rail on all four sides of rectangle and square tables extending between the legs and recessed 3/32" from the face of the leg. The aprons shall be radiused 1/16" on the bottom edges. On tables that must meet ADA requirements the rails shall extend 5" from each leg and shall be cut at the exposed end to a 45 angle. The exposed end shall be closed and finished. Round tables shall not have apron rails. GLIDES: Each leg shall be provided with a resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glide with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). TWAIN III ROUND TABLE TW3/048 OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT TW3/048-C CHERRY 48 DIAMETER x HGT TW3/048-M MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT TWAIN III SQUARE TABLE Model # TW3/4848 Description OAK Dimensions 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW3/4848-ADA OAK 48 W x 48 L x ADA TW3/4848-C CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW3/4848-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x ADA TW3/4848-M MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW3/4848-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x ADA 34 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

35 American Classics Casegoods (Twain) TWAIN III RECTANGULAR TABLE TW3/3660 TW3/3660-ADA TW3/3660-C TW3/3660-C-ADA TW3/3660-M TW3/3660-M-ADA TW3/3672 TW3/3672-ADA TW3/3672-C TW3/3672-C-ADA TW3/3672-M TW3/3672-M-ADA TW3/3690 TW3/3690-ADA TW3/3690-C TW3/3690-C-ADA TW3/3690-M TW3/3690-M-ADA TW3/4260 TW3/4260-ADA TW3/4260-C TW3/4260-C-ADA TW3/4260-M TW3/4260-M-ADA TW3/4272 TW3/4272-ADA TW3/4272-C TW3/4272-C-ADA TW3/4272-M TW3/4272-M-ADA TW3/4290 TW3/4290-ADA TW3/4290-C TW3/4290-C-ADA TW3/4290-M TW3/4290-M-ADA TW3/4860 TW3/4860-ADA TW3/4860-C TW3/4860-C-ADA TW3/4860-M TW3/4860-M-ADA TW3/4872 TW3/4872-ADA TW3/4872-C TW3/4872-C-ADA TW3/4872-M TW3/4872-M-ADA TW3/4890 TW3/4890-ADA TW3/4890-C TW3/4890-C-ADA TW3/4890-M TW3/4890-M-ADA OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE OAK OAK CHERRY CHERRY MAPLE MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L ADA 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L ADA 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L ADA 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L ADA 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L ADA 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L ADA 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L ADA 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L ADA 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L ADA 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 H ADA 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 H ADA 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 H ADA 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L ADA 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L ADA 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L ADA 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L ADA 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L ADA 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L ADA 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x ADA 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x ADA 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x ADA 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x ADA 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x ADA 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x ADA 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x ADA 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x ADA 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x ADA The Worden Company Source Book October

36 American Classics Casegoods (Twain) TWAIN IV TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick high-pressure laminate face and a.028 thick backer on the underside. On round tables the edge band shall be steam bent. The edge bands shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The bands shall be shaped to a 1-3/8 radius bullnose profile on rectangular tables. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with five metal inserts at each leg position. Tables 60 long and longer shall have a V-shaped steel keel. Tables 48 wide and 60 long or longer shall have two V-shaped keels. The keels shall extend to within 9 of the ends of the work surface and shall be 14-gauge steel powder coated black. The keels shall be screwed to the underside of the work surface with two #14 x 1 PHSM screws every 10. EDGE BAND: Bow shape: The entire perimeter shall be externally banded with 1 thick x 1-1/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry edge band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL and machined to tapering to 1/8 thick at the ends. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/4 square solid oak, maple or cherry stock, made from a single piece, or glued-up face to face from two or three solid blanks. The two inside faces of the tapered legs of rectangle and square tables and the three inside faces of round tables shall be tapered to 1-1/8 at the bottom. The top of the legs shall be machined to receive a leg plate. The plate shall have a tongue extending from the edge of the plate. The tongue shall be recessed into the leg so that it does not penetrate the outside face(s) of the leg. On rectangle and square tables, the plate shall be 5 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of two (2) 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear corner of the leg. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of five (5) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. On round tables, the plate shall be 4 minimum square x 5/16 minimum thick black powder coated steel, joined to the leg by means of a 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear of the leg. The gusset shall be screwed to the back face of the leg with a #10 flat head screw. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of four (4) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. The face of the leg shall be recessed 1-3/16 from the edge of the work surface. APRON RAILS: There shall be 2" high solid oak, maple or cherry apron rail on all four sides of rectangle and square tables extending between the legs and recessed 3/32" from the face of the leg. The aprons shall be radiused 1/16" on the bottom edges. On tables that must meet ADA requirements the rails shall extend 5" from each leg and shall be cut at the exposed end to a 45 angle. The exposed end shall be closed and finished. Round tables shall not have apron rails. GLIDES: Each leg shall be provided with a resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glide with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). TWAIN IV ROUND TABLE TW4/048 TW4/048-C TW4/048-M OAK CHERRY MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT 48 DIAMETER x HGT 48 DIAMETER x HGT TWAIN IV SQUARE TABLE Model # TW4/4848 Description OAK Dimensions 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW4/4848-ADA OAK 48 W x 48 L x ADA TW4/4848-C CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW4/4848-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x ADA TW4/4848-M MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT TW4/4848-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x ADA 36 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

37 TWAIN IV RECTANGULAR TABLE TW4/3660 OAK 36 W x 60 L x HGT TW4/3660-ADA OAK 36 W x 60 L ADA TW4/3660-C CHERRY 36 W x 60 L x HGT TW4/3660-C-ADA CHERRY 36 W x 60 L ADA TW4/3660-M MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT TW4/3660-M-ADA MAPLE 36 W x 60 L ADA TW4/3672 OAK 36 W x 72 L x HGT TW4/3672-ADA OAK 36 W x 72 L ADA TW4/3672-C CHERRY 36 W x 72 L x HGT TW4/3672-C-ADA CHERRY 36 W x 72 L ADA TW4/3672-M MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT TW4/3672-M-ADA MAPLE 36 W x 72 L ADA TW4/3690 OAK 36 W x 90 L x HGT TW4/3690-ADA OAK 36 W x 90 L ADA TW4/3690-C CHERRY 36 W x 90 L x HGT TW4/3690-C-ADA CHERRY 36 W x 90 L ADA TW4/3690-M MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT TW4/3690-M-ADA MAPLE 36 W x 90 L ADA TW4/4260 OAK 42 W x 60 L x HGT TW4/4260-ADA OAK 42 W x 60 H ADA TW4/4260-C CHERRY 42 W x 60 L x HGT TW4/4260-C-ADA CHERRY 42 W x 60 H ADA TW4/4260-M MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT TW4/4260-M-ADA MAPLE 42 W x 60 H ADA TW4/4272 OAK 42 W x 72 L x HGT TW4/4272-ADA OAK 42 W x 72 L ADA TW4/4272-C CHERRY 42 W x 72 L x HGT TW4/4272-C-ADA CHERRY 42 W x 72 L ADA TW4/4272-M MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT TW4/4272-M-ADA MAPLE 42 W x 72 L ADA TW4/4290 OAK 42 W x 90 L x HGT TW4/4290-ADA OAK 42 W x 90 L ADA TW4/4290-C CHERRY 42 W x 90 L x HGT TW4/4290-C-ADA CHERRY 42 W x 90 L ADA TW4/4290-M MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT TW4/4290-M-ADA MAPLE 42 W x 90 L ADA TW4/4860 OAK 48 W x 60 L x HGT TW4/4860-ADA OAK 48 W x 60 L x ADA TW4/4860-C CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT TW4/4860-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x ADA TW4/4860-M MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT TW4/4860-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x ADA TW4/4872 OAK 48 W x 72 L x HGT TW4/4872-ADA OAK 48 W x 72 L x ADA TW4/4872-C CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT TW4/4872-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x ADA TW4/4872-M MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT TW4/4872-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x ADA TW4/4890 OAK 48 W x 90 L x HGT TW4/4890-ADA OAK 48 W x 90 L x ADA TW4/4890-C CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT TW4/4890-C-ADA CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x ADA TW4/4890-M MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT TW4/4890-M-ADA MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x ADA The Worden Company Source Book October

38 American Classics Casegoods (Twain) TWAIN WORKSTATION WORK SURFACE: Work surfaces shall be 1-1/4 thick 26 deep x 34-1/2 or 42 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The front edge shall be externally banded with 1-3/16 thick x 1-3/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry. The bands shall be shaped to a 3-7/8 radius on the top surface and the edges radiused 1/8. The back edge of the work surface shall be held 2 from the back panel to form a cord drop and shall be fitted with a black aluminum extrusion forming a 5/8 retaining ledge. The work surface is attached to the side panels by means of a black oxided metal Z-bar brackets screwed to the underside of the work surface and secured to the end and intermediate panels with M6 PHM screws, screwing into metal inserts embedded in the panel. END PANELS: The panel shall be 1-3/16 thick, consisting of a main panel field, vertical side bands forming legs at the bottom, an arched top rail and straight bottom rail. The panel shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply construction with premium A grade faces, available in red oak, maple and cherry. The top rail shall be matching hardwood and shall arch to 3 high in the center and taper to 1 at the outer edges. A 1/8 reveal shall be cut on the vertical center line of the rail, along both faces. Both vertical edges of the panel shall be banded with a 1-3/16 thick x 2-9/16 wide, matching hardwood band. These bands shall form tapered legs, extending below the bottom rail of the panel and tapering to 1-1/4 wide at the bottom. The bottom of the legs shall be fitted with adjustable leveling glides. The panel bottom rail shall be 1-3/16 thick x 2-9/16 wide and shall span the distance between the vertical leg bands. All bands shall be fastened to the panel field with blind tenons and shall receive a compressed biscuit at all intersections. The panel shall feature two ¼ wide black PVC accent moldings applied to the perimeter of the panel and placed at the intersections between the panel field and the arched top band and straight bottom bands. All corners shall receive a 1/16 radius. Panels are drilled and fitted with brass inserts, allowing mounting and relocation of the top at heights of 26-1/2, 29 and 32 and the shelf at locations of 43-3/4 and 23 above the floor. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be 1-3/16 thick with the same details as the end panels only the panels shall be through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet located 16-1/2 on center above the floor. BACK PANEL: Back panel is 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges are banded with 1/8 solid oak, maple or cherry. The panel is set down 4-3/4 from top of side panels and terminates 10-3/8 above floor at bottom. Double face back panels shall have a 3 grommet located 16-1/2 on center above the floor. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the J channel, there shall be a 1-1/8 deep x 2-1/2 wide extruded black PVC J-channel with a 1-11/16 w lip on the face side for attachment to the back panel. J-CHANNEL SHELF: The J-channel shelf shall be ¾ thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused laminate face and back. The exposed edge shall be banded with.020 t black PVC. The shelf shall be bored to accept electrical components on the bottom face and shall install with cam fasteners machined into the bottom side. SHELF: The shelf shall be 1 thick x 10 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select A grade oak or maple veneer faces. The front edge shall be banded with a 1/8 thick hardwood band of matching specie. The bottom side of the shelf shall be fitted with four cam type fasteners, allowing locations above or below the work surface, 44 or 21-3/4 off the floor respectively. UL LISTING: Workstations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder TW-36-WS SF STARTER, OAK 36 W TW-36-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 36 W TW-36-WS-C SF STARTER, CHERRY 36 W TW-36-WS-A-C SF ADDER, CHERRY 36 W TW-36-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 36 W TW-36-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 36 W TW-42-WS SF STARTER, OAK 42 W TW-42-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 42 W TW-42-WS-C SF STARTER, CHERRY 42 W TW-42-WS-A-C SF ADDER, CHERRY 42 W TW-42-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 42 W TW-42-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 42 W Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder TW-36-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 36 W TW-36-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 36 W TW-36-DWS-C DF STARTER, CHERRY 36 W TW-36-DWS-A-C DF ADDER, CHERRY 36 W TW-36-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 36 W TW-36-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 36 W TW-42-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 42 W TW-42-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 42 W TW-42-DWS-C DF STARTER, CHERRY 42 W TW-42-DWS-A-C DF ADDER, CHERRY 42 W TW-42-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 42 W TW-42-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 42 W 38 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

39 American Classics Casegoods (Twain) TWAIN COMPUTER CENTER WORK SURFACE: Work surfaces shall be 1-1/4 thick 32 deep x 61-3/8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The front edge shall be externally banded with 1-3/16 thick x 1-3/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry sectored band. The bands shall be shaped to a 3-7/8 radius on the top surface and the edges radiused 1/8. The outside edge of the top shall be shaped to a 44 radius. The back edge of the work surface shall be held 2 from the back panel to form a cord drop and shall be fitted with a black aluminum extrusion forming a 5/8 retaining ledge. The work surface is attached to the side panels by means of a black oxided metal Z-bar brackets screwed to the underside of the work surface and secured to the end and intermediate panels with M6 PHM screws, screwing into metal inserts embedded in the panel. END PANELS: The panel shall be 1-3/16 thick, consisting of a main panel field, vertical side bands forming legs at the bottom, an arched top rail and straight bottom rail. The panel shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply construction with premium A grade faces, available in red oak, maple and cherry. The top rail shall be matching hardwood and shall arch to 3 high in the center and taper to 1 at the outer edges. A 1/8 reveal shall be cut on the vertical center line of the rail, along both faces. Both vertical edges of the panel shall be banded with a 1-3/16 thick x 2-9/16 wide, matching hardwood band. These bands shall form tapered legs, extending below the bottom rail of the panel and tapering to 1-1/4 wide at the bottom. The bottom of the legs shall be fitted with adjustable leveling glides. The panel bottom rail shall be 1-3/16 thick x 2-9/16 wide and shall span the distance between the vertical leg bands. All bands shall be fastened to the panel field with blind tenons and shall receive a compressed biscuit at all intersections. The panel shall feature two ¼ wide black PVC accent moldings applied to the perimeter of the panel and placed at the intersections between the panel field and the arched top band and straight bottom bands. All corners shall receive a 1/16 radius. Panels are drilled and fitted with brass inserts, allowing mounting and relocation of the top at heights of 26-1/2, 29 and 32 and the shelf at locations of 43-3/4 and 23 above the floor. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be 1-3/16 thick with the same details as the end panels only the panels shall be through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet located 16-1/2 on center above the floor. BACK PANEL: Back panel is 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges are banded with 1/8 solid oak, maple or cherry. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1/2 solid oak, maple or cherry and beveled to a 45 degree angle. The panel is set down 1-3/4 from top of side panels and terminates 5 above floor at bottom. The panel shall be secured with bronze cam fasteners. Each panel shall be furnished with 3 grommet located 16-1/2 on center above the floor. J-CHANNEL SHELF: The J-channel shelf shall be ¾ thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused laminate face and back. The exposed edge shall be banded with.020 t black PVC. The shelf shall be bored to accept electrical components on the bottom face and shall install with cam fasteners machined into the bottom side. TOP CENTER CAP: The top center cap shall be 1-3/16 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 t high pressure laminate face and.028 t backer on the underside. The perimeter of the part shall be painted black. When installed, the part shall close off the center portion of the four station assembly and shall rest on wood cleats attached to the inner faces of the unit back panels. TW-2CS 2-STATION, OAK 91-1/2 Wx46-3/4 Dx48-1/8H TW-2CS-C 2-STATION, CHERRY 91-1/2 Wx46-3/4 Dx48-1/8H TW-2CS-M 2-STATION, MAPLE 91-1/2 Wx46-3/4 Dx48-1/8H 2-Station 4-Station TW-4CS 4-STATION, OAK 91-1/2 DIAM x 48-1/8 H TW-4CS-C 4-STATION, CHERRY 91-1/2 DIAM x 48-1/8 H TW-4CS-M 4-STATION, MAPLE 91-1/2 DIAM x 48-1/8 H The Worden Company Source Book October

40 CRI Casegoods CRI GENERAL CONSTRUCTION: Units employ European construction using the 32-mm system with exposed cam fasteners for the front panel, toe kick, and fixed shelves. Two black oxided metal Z-bar brackets are used to attach work surfaces. Adjustable shelves, hinged doors, and drawers are mounted using 32-mm hole system. TOP: Desk top is 1-1/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050" high pressure laminate on the face and.028" backer on the underside. The front and back edges of the top are banded with 5/8" thick x 1-1/4" wide external solid oak or maple radiused top x bottom 1/2". Inside edges on the adjustable top are square and self-edged with matching plastic laminate. Top overhang is 9/16" and set back 1/2" from front edge of end/intermediate panel. Top is recessed 1/8" from top edge of end/intermediate panels and is attached with black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. END PANELS: Panel ends are 1-3/16" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. All four edges of the panel are banded with solid oak or maple. Top and bottom edges are flat with edges eased. Front and back edges are bullnose shaped. A pair of end panels is required for each desk assembly. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: Intermediate panels are 1-3/16" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. All four edges of the panel are banded with solid oak or maple. Top and bottom edges are flat with edges eased. Front and back edges are bullnose shaped. Holes in intermediate panels are bored through and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2" PVC pass through grommet. An intermediate panel is required between each unit. FRONT PANEL: Units employ European construction using the 32-mm system with exposed cam lock fasteners. All desk modules are of recessed front panel design. The front panels are 3/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple face veneer. Exterior face is selected for color and grain. Bottom edge of panel at toespace is banded with 1/8" thick solid oak or maple. Toe kick is 4" high, recessed 3/4" deep, and painted black. KNEE SPACE PANEL: Knee space support is a 9" deep vertical panel, faced with select grade A oak or maple veneer on both sides, and banded on four sides with solid oak or maple. Top and bottom bands are flat with eased edges. Attached to one side of the vertical panel is a knife bracket, made of solid oak or maple, and adjustable at 32mm intervals to provide work surface support. ADJUSTABLE SHELVES: Adjustable storage shelves are 3/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple face veneer, back and exposed edge. Back edge of shelf is banded with retaining lip. The underside of shelf is routed to receive shelf pins. HINGED DOORS: Doors are 3/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on back and all edges. Faces are select grade A oak or maple. Each door will be attached to cabinet by means of two concealed 95 door hinges. Each door will be fitted with a black pull. STORAGE DRAWERS: All drawer fronts are 3/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on front and all edges. Drawer box is constructed of solid beech and beech plywood. Drawer bottoms are of 3/16" thick beech plywood. All storage drawers operate on side mounted, ball bearing, 3/4" extension drawer slides having a load bearing capacity of 60 lbs. per drawer. File drawer slides are rated at 135 lbs. per drawer and operate on full extension drawer slides. Each drawer is fitted with a black pull. PULL-OUT SHELVES: Pull-out shelves are of 3/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer face and back. Front and back edge of shelf is banded with retaining lip. Shelves are mounted using ball bearing slides. HEIGHTS: Standard height is 39-5/16", optional 33" and 29-1/4" heights (select units) may be specified. GLIDES: Each panel shall be fitted with a pair of 1-3/16" diameter adjustable glides with a 15/16" stem. DIMENSIONS: Standard Module Width: 34-1/2" Standard Module Depth: 30" Thickness of Upright Panels: 1-3/16" (Intermediate and End) Depth of Upright Panels: 31" Heights of Circulation Desk (w/glides): Work surface /16" Upright panel /16" Heights for Juvenile Desk (w/glides): Work surface - 33" Upright panel /8" Heights for Reference Desk (w/glides): Work surface /4" Upright panel /8" Transaction Ledge: 8"D x 6-3/16"H x 34-1/2"W Corner Unit: 30"D x 30"W Extended Corner Unit: 50-3/4"W x 30" D UL LISTING: CRI desks are listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). 40 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

41 CRI Casegoods CRI DESK UNIT CRI/3036/DE ADJ WORKSURFACE, OAK 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/DE-M ADJ WORKSURFACE, MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/DE/RM RECESSED MONITOR, OAK 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/DE/RM-M RECESSED MONITOR, MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/DE-J JUV HGT, ADJ W/S, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/DE-J-M JUV HGT, ADJ W/S, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/DE-R ADJ WORKSURFACE, OAK 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/DE-R-M ADJ WORKSURFACE, MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3048/DE ADJ WORKSURFACE, OAK 48 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3048/DE-M ADJ WORKSURFACE, MAPLE 48 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3048/DE/RM RECESSED MONITOR, OAK 48 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3048/DE/RM-M RECESSED MONITOR, MAPLE 48 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3048/DE-J JUV HGT, ADJ W/S, OAK 48 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3048/DE-J-M JUV HGT, ADJ W/S, OAK 48 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3048/DE-R ADJ WORKSURFACE, OAK 48 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3048/DE-R-M ADJ WORKSURFACE, MAPLE 48 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H Desk module has an adjustable top which can be positioned at either 39-5/16, 33, 29-1/4, or 26-7/8 high. This moduled is supplied with a fixed shelf wide at the bottom rear of module. CRI WIDE DESK UNIT Model # CRI/3070/DE Description ADJ WORKSURFACE, OAK Dimensions 70-3/16 Wx30 Dx 39-5/16 H CRI/3070/DE-M ADJ WORKSURFACE, MAPLE 70-3/16 Wx30 Dx 39-5/16 H CRI/3070/DE-J JUV HGT, ADJ W/S, OAK 70-3/16 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3070/DE-J-M JUV HGT, ADJ W/S- OAK 70-3/16 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3070/DE-R ADJ WORKSURFACE, OAK 70-3/16 Wx30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3070/DE-R-M ADJ WORKSURFACE, MAPLE 70-3/16 Wx30 D x 29-1/4 H Desk module has an adjustable top which can be positioned at either 39-5/16, 33, 29-1/4, or 26-7/8 high. This moduled is supplied with a fixed shelf wide at the bottom rear of cabinet. Center of top is supported by a knife bracket which also adjusts to the desired top height. Extended desk moduled is 70-3/16 wide. CRI BOOK RETURN UNIT Model # CRI/3036/BRU Description OAK Dimensions 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/BRU-M MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/BRU-J JUV HGT, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/BRU-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/BRU-R REF, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/BRU-R-M REF, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H Book Return Modules are designed for use with the depressible book truck sold separately. For 39-5/16 and 33 high units; the unit front panel incorporates a 4 h x 18 w opening framed in hardwood, with a chute mounted towards the inside of the unit. The chute is designed to assure gentle dropping of books into the depressible book truck located directly below. For the 29-1/4 high unit; the top incorporates a 4 wide x 18 long, laminate lined opening, allowing books to drop directly into the depressible book truck. Note: Specify adult height book trucks for 39-1/4 high units and juvenile height book trucks for both 33 and 29-1/4 high units. The Worden Company Source Book October

42 CRI Casegoods CRI OPEN STORAGE UNIT Open storage unit CRI/3036/O OAK 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/O-M MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/O-J JUV HGT, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/O-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/O-R REF, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/O-R-M REF, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H O Units: Open storage units are supplied with a full width fixed base shelf and two full width adjustable shelves for the 39-5/16 high unit and one each for the 33 and 29-1/4 high units. Open storage unit w/ drawer CRI/3036/O-1 1 DRAWER, OAK 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/O-1-M 1 DRAWER, MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/O-1-J JUV HGT, 1 DRAWER, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/O-1-J-M JUV HGT, 1 DRAWER, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/O-1-R REF, 1 DRAWER, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/O-1-R-M REF, 1 DRAWER, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H O-1 Units: Drawer over open storage units include a full width locking box drawer oriented over a full width fixed base shelf and one full width adjustable shelf. Open storage unit w/ computer compartment Juv height open storage unit w/computer compartment CRI/3036/O-DD HARD DRIVE STORAGE, OAK 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/O-DD-M HARD DRIVE STORAGE, MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/O-DD-J JUV HARD DRIVE STORAGE, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/O-DD-J-M JUV HARD DRIVE STORAGE, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/O-DD-R REF HARD DRIVE STORAGE, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/O-DD-R-M REF HARD DRIVE STORAGE, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H O-DD Units: Open storage module with CPU storage cabinet with drawer. Units include pull-out shelves located in the open storage compartment; three shelves for the 39-5/16 high unit and two each for the 33 and 29-1/4 high units. A locking box drawer is supplied with the 39-5/16 high unit, both the 33 and 29-1/4 high units are supplied without a drawer. The CPU storage area is 10-1/4 wide and 24-1/4 high and includes a hinged door. CRI CUPBOARD STORAGE UNIT Model # Description Dimensions Cupboard storage unit CRI/3036/HD CRI/3036/HD-M CRI/3036/HD-J CRI/3036/HD-J-M CRI/3036/HD-R CRI/3036/HD-R-M OAK MAPLE JUV HGT, OAK JUV HGT, MAPLE REF HGT, OAK REF HGT, MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H HD Units: Cupboard storage units include a pair of locking, hinged doors, a full width fixed base shelf and two full width adjustable shelves for the 39-5/16 high unit and one each for the 33 and 29-1/4 high units. Model # Description Dimensions Cupboard storage unit w/ drawer CRI/3036/HD-1 1 DRAWER, OAK 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/HD-1-M 1 DRAWER, MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/HD-1-J JUV HGT, 1 DRAWER, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/HD-1-J-M JUV HGT, 1 DRAWER, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/HD-1-R REF HGT, 1 DRAWER OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/HD-1-R-M REF HGT, 1 DRAWER MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H HD-1 Units: Drawer over cupboard storage units include a full width locking box drawer oriented over a pair of hinged doors, a full width fixed base shelf and one full width adjustable shelf. Cupboard storage unit w/ 1 box, 2 file drawers (locks) Juv height cupboard storage unit w/ 1 box, 2 drawers (no locks) CRI/3036/HD-3 1 BOX 2 FILE DRAWERS, OAK 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/HD-3-M 1 BOX 2 FILE DRAWERS, MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/HD-3-J JUV HGT, 2 FILE DRAWERS, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/HD-3-J-M JUV HGT, 2 FILE DRAWERS, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/HD-3-R REF, 1 BOX 1 FILE DRAWER, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/HD-3-R-M REF, 1 BOX 1 FILE DRAWER, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H HD-3 Units: Cupboard storage with drawers. Units include a hinged door to left with a bank of drawers oriented to the right. The door is provided with a lock on the 39-5/16 high unit, 33 and 29-1/4 high units are provided without locks. A fixed base shelf is located behind the hinged door with two adjustable shelves provided for the 39-5/16 high unit and one each for the 33 and 29-1/4 high units. 39-5/16 high units are supplied with one box drawer oriented over two file drawers, 33 high units are supplied with two file drawers and 29-1/4 high units are supplied with one box drawer oriented over one file drawer. Box drawer are supplied with locks. 42 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

43 CRI Casegoods CRI KNEESPACE UNIT Model # CRI/3036/K Description OAK Dimensions 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/K-M MAPLE 34-1/2 Wx30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/3036/K-J JUV HGT, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/K-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/K-R REF HGT, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/K-R-M REF HGT, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H K Units: Open kneespace with two drawers and fixed shelf at rear. Drawers are oriented side by side at top of unit. Both drawers include a lock and the small drawer includes a removable coin tray. A fixed shelf is located above the toe kick at the rear of the unit. CRI RECESSED FRONT UNIT Juvenile height CRI/3036/ADA-J JUV HGT, ADA, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/ADA-J-M JUV HGT, ADA, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/3036/ADA-R REF HGT, ADA, OAK 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/3036/ADA-R-M REF HGT, ADA, MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H Unit is provided with a full height modesty panel, positioned 19 in from the leading edge on the patron side of the desk, allowing for wheel chair access. The librarian s side is open knee space. CRI 90 SQUARE CORNER UNIT CRI/90/SQ OAK 30 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/SQ-M MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/SQ-J JUV HGT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/SQ-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/SQ-R REF HGT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/90/SQ-R-M REF HGT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H Square corner unit has finished front panel. It provides a fully closed corner. CRI 90 ROUNDED CORNER UNIT CRI/90/RC CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/RC-M CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/RC-J JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/RC-J-M JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/RC-R REF CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/90/RC-R-M REF CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H Round corner unit has finished front panel. It provides a fully closed corner. CRI 90 FLAT FRONT CORNER UNIT Model # Model # CRI/90/EC Description Description CORNER UNIT, OAK Dimensions CRI/90/TRI CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/TRI-M CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/TRI-J JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/TRI-J-M JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/TRI-R REF CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/90/TRI-R-M REF CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H Flat front corner unit has finished front panel. It provides a fully closed corner. CRI 90 EXTENDED CORNER UNIT Dimensions 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/EC-M CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/EC-J JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/EC-J-M JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/EC-R REF CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/90/EC-R-M REF CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 D x 29-1/4 H EC Units: Extended curved corner units include a top that may be adjusted from the height specified to lower positions; heights include 39-5/16, 33, 29-1/4 and 26-7/8. The unit includes two fixed shelves located at the lower rear of the unit. Center of top is supported by a knife bracket which also adjusts to the desired top height. The unit is 71-3/4 wide at the widest point and 29-3/8 wide at the kneespace opening. The Worden Company Source Book October

44 CRI Casegoods CRI 90 EXTENDED FLAT FRONT UNIT Model # CRI/90/EC-FF Model # CRI/45/TRI Description CORNER UNIT, OAK Description CORNER UNIT, OAK Dimensions 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/EC-FF-M CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/EC-FF-J JUV CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/EC-FF-J-M JUV CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/EC-FF-R REF CORNER UNIT OAK 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/90/EC-FF-R-M REF CORNER UNIT MAPLE 30 D x 29-1/4 H EC-FF Units: Extended flat front corner units include a top that may be adjusted from the height specified to lower positions; heights include 39-5/16, 33, 29-1/4 and 26-7/8. The unit includes two fixed shelves located at the lower rear of the unit. Center of top is supported by a knife bracket which also adjusts to the desired top height. The unit is 71-3/4 wide at the widest point and 29-3/8 wide at the kneespace opening. CRI 45 ROUNDED CORNER UNIT Model # CRI/45/RC Description CORNER UNIT, OAK Dimensions 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/45/RC-M CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/45/RC-J JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 D x 33 H CRI/45/RC-J-M JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 D x 33 H CRI/45/RC-R REF CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/45/RC-R-M REF CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 D x 29-1/4 H Round corner unit has finished front panel. It provides a fully closed corner. CRI 45 FLAT FRONT CORNER UNIT Dimensions 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/45/TRI-M CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/45/TRI-J JUV CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 D x 33 H CRI/45/TRI-J-M JUV CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 D x 33 H CRI/45/TRI-R REF CORNER UNIT OAK 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/45/TRI-R-M REF CORNER UNIT MAPLE 30 D x 29-1/4 H Corner unit has finished front panel. It provides a fully closed corner. CRI 90 ROUND OPEN DISPLAY CORNER UNIT CRI/90/RC-OD CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/RC-OD-M CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/RC-OD-J JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/RC-OD-J-M JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/RC-OD-R REF HGT, CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/90/RC-OD-R-M REF HGT, CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H Unit provides a 90 degree round corner top and base, open to the patron side for display. The unit includes a bottom panel and open adjustable display shelves (two adjustable shelves are included with the 39 h unit all other heights include one). CRI 90 FLAT FRONT DISPLAY CORNER Model # CRI/90/TRI-OD Description CORNER UNIT, OAK Dimensions 30 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/TRI-OD-M CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 39-5/16 H CRI/90/TRI-OD-J JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/TRI-OD-J-M JUV HGT, CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 33 H CRI/90/TRI-OD-R REF HGT, CORNER UNIT, OAK 30 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H CRI/90/TRI-OD-R-M REF HGT, CORNER UNIT, MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 29-1/4 H Unit provides a 90 degree flat corner top and base, open to the patron side for display. The unit includes a bottom panel and open adjustable display shelves (two adjustable shelves are included with the 39 h unit all other heights include one). CRI KNEESPACE SUPPORT Model # CRI/30/KS Description Panel is used in place of intermediate panel when a clear knee space is desired between two open desk units. This item allows for top adjustment at all designated heights as long as adjacent units are placed at the same height. 44 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011 OAK Dimensions 1-3/16 Tx22-7/8 Dx29-3/8H CRI/30/KS-M MAPLE 1-3/16 Tx22-7/8 Dx29-3/8H CRI/32/KS OAK 1-3/16 Tx22-7/8 Dx33-1/8H CRI/32/KS-M MAPLE 1-3/16 Tx22-7/8 Dx33-1/8H CRI/40/KS OAK 1-3/16 Tx22-7/8Dx39-7/16H CRI/40/KS-M MAPLE 1-3/16 Tx22-7/8Dx39-7/16H

45 CRI Casegoods CRI FINISHED END PANEL CRI/30/EP OAK 1-3/16 T x 31 D x29-3/8 H CRI/30/EP-M MAPLE 1-3/16 T x 31 D x29-3/8 H CRI/32/EP OAK 1-3/16 T x 31 D x33-1/8 H CRI/32/EP-M MAPLE 1-3/16 T x 31 D x33-1/8 H CRI/40/EP OAK 1-3/16 T x 31 D x39-7/16h CRI/40/EP-M MAPLE 1-3/16 T x 31 D x39-7/16h Panel end shall be 1-3/16 thick x 31 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer both faces. All four edges of the panel shall be banded with solid oak or maple. Top and bottom edges shall be flat with edges eased. Front and back edges shall be shaped with a 1/2 radius. The ends shall have holes on 32-mm for attachment of functional components and brass spreading inserts for attachment of work surface at 39-5/16, 33, 29-1/4 and 26-7/8 heights. The bottom of the panel shall be fitted with two adjustable leveling glides screwed into propeller nuts. CRI RECESSED FRONT END PANEL CRI/32/EP-ADA CRI/32/EP-ADA-M CRI/30/EP-ADA CRI/30/EP-ADA-M OAK MAPLE OAK MAPLE 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx33-1/8 H 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx33-1/8 H 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx29-3/8 H 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx29-3/8 H Panel is utilized whenever a recessed front unit is desired and is positioned at the end of the desk. These panels match the standard end, but provide the necessary holes for mounting the recessed front units. Specify RH or LH configuration. CRI OUTSIDE DISPLAY END PANEL Model # CRI/40/EP-OD Description OAK Dimensions 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx39-7/16 H CRI/40/EP-OD-M MAPLE 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx39-7/16 H CRI/32/EP-OD OAK 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx33-1/8 H CRI/32/EP-OD-M MAPLE 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx33-1/8 H CRI/30/EP-OD OAK 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx29-3/8 H CRI/30/EP-OD-M MAPLE 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx29-3/8 H Panel is utilized whenever a round or flat display corner unit is specified at the end of a desk assembly. These panels match the standard end, but provide the necessary holes for mounting the display units. Specify RH or LH configuration. CRI INTERMEDIATE PANEL CRI/30/IP OAK 1-3/16 T x 31 D x29-3/8 H CRI/30/IP-M MAPLE 1-3/16 T x 31 D x29-3/8 H CRI/32/IP OAK 1-3/16 T x 31 D x33-1/8 H CRI/32/IP-M MAPLE 1-3/16 T x 31 D x33-1/8 H CRI/40/IP OAK 1-3/16 T x 31 D x39-7/16h CRI/40/IP-M MAPLE 1-3/16 T x 31 D x39-7/16h Intermediate panels shall be 1-3/16 thick x 31 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer both faces. All four edges of the panel shall be banded with solid oak or maple. Top and bottom edges shall be flat with edges eased. Front and back edges shall be shaped with a 1/2 radius. Holes for functional components shall be through drilled. Brass spreading inserts for work surface attachment shall be on both sides permitting adjustment at 39-5/6, 33, 29-1/4 and 26-7/8 heights. Each panel shall be fitted with a 3 I.D. PVC grommet for cable passage. The bottom of the panel shall be fitted with two adjustable leveling glides screwed into propeller nuts. CRI RECESSED FRONT INTERMEDIATE PANEL CRI/32/IP-ADA OAK 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx33-1/8 H CRI/32/IP-ADA-M MAPLE 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx33-1/8 H Model CRI/30/IP-ADA # Description OAK Dimensions 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx29-3/8 H CRI/30/IP-ADA-M MAPLE 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx29-3/8 H Panel is utilized whenever a recessed front unit is desired and is positioned at an intermediate location within the desk assembly. These panels match the standard end, but provide the necessary holes for mounting the recessed front units. Specify RH or LH configuration. The Worden Company Source Book October

46 CRI Casegoods CRI OUTSIDE DISPLAY INTERMEDIATE PANEL CRI/40/IP-OD OAK 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx39-7/16 H CRI/40/IP-OD-M MAPLE 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx39-7/16 H CRI/32/IP-OD OAK 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx33-1/8 H CRI/32/IP-OD-M MAPLE 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx33-1/8 H CRI/30/IP-OD OAK 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx29-3/8 H CRI/30/IP-OD-M MAPLE 1-3/16 THKx31 Dx29-3/8 H Panel is utilized whenever a round or flat display corner unit is specified at an intermediate location within the desk assembly. These panels match the standard end, but provide the necessary holes for mounting the display units. Specify RH or LH configuration. CRI TRANSACTION LEDGE Model # Description Dimensions CRI/36/STTF CRI/36/STTF-M CRI/48/STTF CRI/48/STTF-M CRI/70/STTF CRI/70/STTF-M TOP & FRONT OAK TOP & FRONT MAPLE TOP & FRONT, OAK TOP & FRONT; MAPLE TOP & FRONT OAK TOP & FRONT MAPLE 34-1/2 W x 6-3/16 H x 8 D 34-1/2 W x 6-3/16 H x 8 D 48 W x 6-3/16 H x 8 D 48 W x 6-3/16 H x 8 D 70-3/16 W x 6-3/16 Hx 8 D 70-3/16 W x 6-3/16 Hx 8 D CRI/90/CTTF TOP & FRONT, OAK 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/90/CTTF-M TOP & FRONT, MAPLE 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/90/TCTTF TOP AND FRONT, OAK 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/90/TCTTF-M TOP AND FRONT, MAPLE 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/90/SQTTF TOP AND FRONT, OAK 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/90/SQTTF-M TOP AND FRONT, MAPLE 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/90/ETTF TOP & FRONT, OAK 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/90/ETTF-M TOP & FRONT, MAPLE 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/90/FFETTF FLAT FRONT, TOP & FRONT, OAK 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/90/FFETTF-M FLAT FRONT, TOP & FRONT, MAPLE 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/45/CTTF TOP & FRONT, OAK 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/45/CTTF-M TOP & FRONT, MAPLE 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/45/TCTTF TOP AND FRONT, OAK 6-3/16 H x 8 D CRI/45/TCTTF-M TOP AND FRONT, MAPLE 6-3/16 H x 8 D The transaction ledge has a top and front surface of high pressure plastic laminate to match the work surface. The top surface is banded front and back with bullnose shaped solid oak or maple edge bands. CRI/TEP FINISHED END PANEL, OAK 6-3/16 H x 9 D CRI/TEP-M FINISHED END PANEL, MAPLE 6-3/16 H x 9 D End panels have select grade A oak veneer on both sides and are banded on four sides with solid oak or maple. The top and bottom edges of the panels are flat and shaped at either end to match the bullnose form of the front and back edge bands. Intermediate panels are the same as end panels except through drilled. CRI/TIP INTERMEDIATE PANEL, OAK 6-3/16 H x 9 D CRI/TIP-M INTERMEDIATE PANEL, MAPLE 6-3/16 H x 9 D 46 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

47 Circulation Desks CIRCULATION TOP: All assembiles have continuous tops composed of longest sections possible. Joints are secured with splines and mechanical joint fasteners. Desk top is 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate on the face and.028 backer on the underside. A. Teres: Edges and well cutouts are square and self-edged with plastic laminate. Top overhang is 3/8 on the back and 1-1/2 on the front and ends. B. Marlborough The front, or public edges of top are externally banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple and bullnose shaped. Working side edges and well cutouts are square and self-edged with plastic laminate. Top overhang is 3/8 on the back and 1-1/2 on the front. C. Diametron: The front or public edges of the top shall be externally banded with 5/8 x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple radiused top and bottom 1/16. Working side edges and well cutouts are sef-edged with plastic laminate. Top overhang is 3/8 on the back and 1-1/2 on the front. CABINET CONSTRUCTION: All desk modules are flush front design of 3/4 solid panel construction. The front panels will be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer. Exterior face is matched for color and grain, and sequence matched across the complete assembly. Bottom edge of panel at toespace is banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple. The 6 high recessed toespace is painted black as standard. The side panels will be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on interior face. All exposed edges at working side are banded with solid oak. NOTE: one pair of finished end panels are required for each complete desk assembly. CLOSED BASE: All closed base desk assemblies have a closure structure extending continuously across the front and back of the assembly to form a recessed toespace 6 high x 3 deep. The bottom shelf is removable, providing access to the all electrical and low voltage stub-ins. FOOTREST BASE: The footrest shall be 3/4 thick x 5-3/4 wide with rubber tread cover, and is inclined. ADJUSTABLE SHELVES Adjustable storage shelves are 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer and banded on one exposed edge with solid oakor maple. Shelves are adjustable on metal K-V shelf supports routed flush into end panels with four clip-in metal shelf supports. HINGED DOORS: Doors are 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces, all four edges are banded with 1/8 solid oak and maple. Each door will be attached to the cabinet by means of two concealed 176 door hinges. Each door will be fitted with a pull and lock. STORAGE DRAWERS: All drawer fronts are 3/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade "A" oak or maple veneer on the face and all edges. Drawer box is constructed of solid beech and beech plywood. Drawer bottoms are 3/16" thick beech plywood. All storage drawers operate on side mounted, ball bearing, 3/4" extension drawer slides having a load bearing capacity of 60 lbs. per drawer. HEIGHTS: Standard heights are 39", 32" and 29" UL LISTING: Circulation Desk shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). CIRC KNEESPACE UNIT Model # T-K Description TERES STYLE, OAK Dimensions 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-K-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-K-30 T-K-30-M M-K M-K-30 M-K-30-M DXE DXE M TERES STYLE, OAK TERES STYLE, MAPLE MARLB STYLE, OAK MARLB STYLE, OAK MARLB STYLE, MAPLE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT Kneespace unit is equipped with two drawers. The larger drawer at right contains a pencil storage tray (I.D. 4 H x 15 W x 15-3/4 D). The smaller drawer is equipped with a lock. This unit is supplied with a fixed rubber covered footrest in the base of the cabinet. CIRC DESK UNIT Desk unit has a worksurface height at 26 or 29. T-DE TERES STYLE, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-DE-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-DE-26 TERES STYLE, 26 WS, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-DE-26 -M TERES STYLE, 26 WS, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-DE TERES STYLE, 26 WS, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-DE M TERES STYLE, 26 WS, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-DE-29 TERES STYLE, 29 WS, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-DE-29 -M TERES STYLE, 29 WS, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-DE TERES STYLE, 29 WS, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-DE M TERES STYLE, 29 WS, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE DIAMETRON STYLE, 26 WS, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT DXE M DIAMETRON STYLE, 26 WS, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT DXE DIAMETRON STYLE, 26 WS, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE M DIAMETRON STYLE, 26 WS, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE DIAMETRON STYLE, 29 WS, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT DXE M DIAMETRON STYLE, 29 WS, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT DXE DIAMETRON STYLE, 29 WS, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE M DIAMETRON STYLE, 29 WS, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

48 Circulation Desks CIRC DESK UNIT cont'd Desk unit has a worksurface height at 26 or 29. M-DE MARLB STYLE, OAK 36 W X 25-1/2 D X HGT M-DE-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 36 W X 25-1/2 D X HGT M-DE-26 MARLB STYLE, 26 WS, OAK 36 W X 25-1/2 D X HGT M-DE-26 -M MARLB STYLE, 26 WS, MAPLE 36 W X 25-1/2 D X HGT M-DE-29 MARLB STYLE, 29 WS, OAK 36 W X 25-1/2 D X HGT M-DE-29 -M MARLB STYLE, 29 WS, MAPLE 36 W X 25-1/2 D X HGT M-DE MARLB STYLE, 26 WS, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-DE M MARLB STYLE, 26 WS, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-DE MARLB STYLE, 29 WS, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-DE M MARLB STYLE, 29 WS, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT CIRCULATION OPEN STORAGE UNIT Model # T-O Description TERES STYLE, OAK Dimensions 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-O-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-O-30 TERES STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-O-30-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-O-1-30 TERES STYLE, 1 DRAWER, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-O-1-30-M TERES STYLE, 1 DRAWER, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-O-DD-30 TERES STYLE, HARD DRIVE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-O-DD-30-M TERES STYLE, HARD DRIVE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT DXE M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT DXE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-O MARLB STYLE, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT M-O-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT M-O-30 MARLB STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-O-30-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-O-1-30 MARLB STYLE, 1 DRAWER, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-O-1-30-M MARLB STYLE, 1 DRAWER, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-O-DD-30 MARLB STYLE, HARD DRIVE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-O-DD-30-M MARLB STYLE, HARD DRIVE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT Unit is open with a fixed base shelf & adjustable shelves. The shelves are adjustable every ½. Two shelves are supplied with a 39 h unit & one shelf with all lower height units. CIRCULATION CUPBOARD STORAGE UNIT T-HD TERES STYLE, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-HD-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-HD-30 TERES STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-HD-30-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-HD-1-30 TERES STYLE 1 DRAWER, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-HD-1-30-M TERES STYLE 1 DRAWER, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-HD-3-30 TERES STYLE 2 FILE DRAWER, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-HD-3-30-M TERES STYLE 2 FILE DRAWER, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT DXE M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT DXE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-HD MARLB STYLE, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT M-HD-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT M-HD-30 MARLB STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-HD-30-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-HD-1-30 MARLB STYLE 1 DRAWER, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-HD-1-30-M MARLB STYLE 1 DRAWER, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-HD-3-30 MARLB STYLE 2 FILE DRAWER, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-HD-3-30-M MARLB STYLE 2 FILE DRAWER, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT Unit is similar to the open storage unit but has a pair of doors with concealed 176 door hinges, and a lock, catch, and black pulls. Two shelves are supplied with a 39" unit and one shelf with all lower height units. 48 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

49 Circulation Desks CIRCULATION BOOK RETURN UNIT Model # T-BRU Description TERES STYLE, OAK Dimensions 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-BRU-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT T-BRU-30 TERES STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-BRU-30-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-BRU-30 TERES STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT T-BRU-30-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT DXE M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 25-1/2 D x HGT DXE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-BRU MARLB STYLE, OAK 36 W X 25-1/2 D X HGT M-BRU MARLB STYLE, OAK 36 W X 25-1/2 D X HGT M-BRU-30 MARLB STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT M-BRU-30-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x HGT Book Return Modules are designed for use with the depressible book truck sold separately. For 39 and 32 high units; the unit front panel incorporates a 4 h x 18 w opening framed in hardwood, with a chute mounted towards the inside of the unit. The chute is designed to assure gentle dropping of books into the depressible book truck located directly below. For the 29 high unit; the top incorporates a 4 wide x 18 long, laminate lined opening, allowing books to drop directly into the depressible book truck. Note: Specify adult height depressible book trucks for 39 high units and juvenile height depressible book trucks for both 32 and 29 high units. CIRCULATION ADA/RECESSED FRONT Patron View Librarian View T-ADA-32 H-30 TERES STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x 32 H T-ADA-32 H-30-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x 32 H DXE-ADA-32 H-30 DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x 32 H DXE-ADA-32 H-30-M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x 32 H M-ADA-32 H-30 MARLB STYLE, OAK 36 W x 28-1/8 D x 32 H M-ADA-32 H-30-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 28-1/8 D x 32 H Unit is provided with a full height modesty panel, positioned 19 in from the leading edge on the patron side of the desk, allowing for wheel chair access. The librarian s side is open knee space. CIRCULATION DESCENDING BOOK TRUCK with bumpers T-320-DBT OAK 26 W x 22 D x 28-3/4 H T-320-DBT-M MAPLE 26 W x 22 D x 28-3/4 H T-320-DBT-J JUV HGT, OAK 26 W x 22 D x 21-1/2 H T-320-DBT-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 26 W x 22 D x 21-1/2 H T-320-DBT-R W/ BUMPERS, OAK 27 W x 23 D x 28-3/4 H T-320-DBT-R-M W/ BUMPERS, MAPLE 27 W x 23 D x 28-3/4 H T-320-DBT-R-J JUV HGT, W/ BUMPERS, OAK 27 W x 23 D x 21-1/2 H T-320-DBT-R-J-M JUV HGT, W/ BUMPERS, MAPLE 27 W x 23 D x 21-1/2 H The ends, bottom, front and back of the book trucks are constructed of 3-ply panels, 3/4 thick. The platform will descend as books are added and raise as books are taken out. The book truck has four swivel twin wheel casters, 4 diameter. Rubber bumper option: steel reinforced rubber bumpers on all four vertical corners. The Worden Company Source Book October

50 Circulation Desks CIRCULATION SQUARE, TRIANGLAR & ROUND CORNER UNITS T-SQC T-SQC-M T-SQC-30 T-SQC-30-M M-SQC M-SQC-M M-SQC-30 M-SQC-30-M DXE DXE M DXE DXE M TERES STYLE, OAK TERES STYLE, MAPLE TERES STYLE, OAK TERES STYLE, MAPLE MARLB STYLE, OAK MARLB STYLE, MAPLE MARLB STYLE, OAK MARLB STYLE, MAPLE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 25-3/4 SQ x HGT 25-3/4 SQ x HGT 28-1/8 SQ x HGT 28-1/8 SQ x HGT 25-3/4 SQ x HGT 25-3/4 SQ x HGT 28-1/8 SQ x HGT 28-1/8 SQ x HGT 25-3/4 SQ x HGT 25-3/4 SQ x HGT 25-3/4 SQ x HGT 25-3/4 SQ x HGT T-TRI T-TRI-M M-TRI M-TRI-M DXE DXE M TERES STYLE, OAK TERES STYLE, MAPLE MARLB STYLE, OAK MARLB STYLE, MAPLE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE T-90RC-30 T-90RC-30-M M-90RC-30 M-90RC-30-M DXE-90RC-30 DXE-90RC-30-M TERES STYLE, OAK TERES STYLE, MAPLE MARLB STYLE, OAK MARLB STYLE, MAPLE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT 28-1/8 D x HGT 28-1/8 D x HGT 28-1/8 D x HGT 28-1/8 D x HGT 28-1/8 D x HGT Unit has front panel that is flush construction designed to blend with fronts of adjoining desk units providing a fully closed corner. CIRCULATION 90º EXTENDED CORNER Model # T-90EC-30 Description TERES STYLE, OAK Dimensions 28-1/8 D x HGT T-90EC-30-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT M-90EC-30 MARLB STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT M-90EC-30-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE-90EC-30 DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE-90EC-30-M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT CIRCULATION 45º FLAT FRONT & ROUNDED CORNER UNITS T-TRI-30 TERES STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT T-TRI-30-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT M-TRI-30 MARLB STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT M-TRI-30-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE-TRI-30 DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE-TRI-30-M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT T-45RC-30 TERES STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT T-45RC-30-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT M-45RC-30 MARLB STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT M-45RC-30-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE-45RC-30 DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE-45RC-30-M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT Unit has front panel that is flush construction designed to blend with fronts of adjoining desk units providing a fully closed corner. 50 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

51 Circulation Desks CIRCULATION 90º ROUND OPEN DISPLAY CORNER UNIT T-90RC-OD-30 TERES STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT T-90RC-OD-30-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT M-90RC-OD-30 MARLB STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT M-90RC-OD-30-M DXE-90RC-OD-30 MARLB STYLE, MAPLE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE-90RC-OD-30-M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT Unit provides a 90 degree round corner top and base, open to the patron side for display. The unit includes a bottom panel and open adjustable display shelves (two adjustable shelves are included with the 39 h unit all other heights include one). CIRCULATION 90º FLAT FRONT OPEN DISPLAY CORNER UNIT T-90FF-OD-30 TERES STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT T-90FF-OD-30-M TERES STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT M-90FF-OD-30 MARLB STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT M-90FF-OD-30-M DXE-90FF-OD-30 MARLB STYLE, MAPLE DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 28-1/8 D x HGT 28-1/8 D x HGT DXE-90FF-OD-30-M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 28-1/8 D x HGT Unit provides a 90 degree flat corner top and base, open to the patron side for display. The unit includes a bottom panel and open adjustable display shelves (two adjustable shelves are included with the 39 h unit all other heights include one). CIRCULATION DOUBLE ACTING GATE OPEN DISPLAY Model # Description T-G Double Acting Gate Assembly for 29 H Unit Actual Gate Size: Gate is 36 W x 18-1/8 H x 1-3/16 T Gate with Hinge and Wall Cleat: 37-5/8 W x 21-3/4 H x 4 T Required Opening: 39-1/2 Clear Width and 29 H Desk Final Open Clearance: 36 W T-G Double Acting Gate Assembly for 32 h Unit Actual Gate Size: Gate is 36 W x 21-1/8 H x 1-3/16 T Gate with Hinge and Wall Cleat: 37-5/8 W x 24-3/4 H x 4 T Required Opening: 39-1/2 Clear Width and 32 H Desk Final Open Clearance: 36 W T-G Double Acting Gate Assembly for 39 h Unit Actual Gate Size: Gate is 36 W x 28-1/8 H x 1-3/16 T Gate with Hinge and Wall Cleat: 37-5/8 W x 31-3/4 H x 4 T Required Opening: 39-1/2 Clear Width and 39 H Desk Final Open Clearance: 36 W Gate Specification: Gates are fabricated from 1-1/8 t particle board core with select grade veneer faces. All exposed edges are banded with 5/16 t matching hardwood. A 1-1/4 t x 4 w matching hardwood hinge cleat and heavy duty double action hinge is supplied with each assembly. The cleats are supplied with six 1-3/4 #10 flat head wood screws to allow attachment to desk end panels. The hinge is mounted to the gate and hinge cleat with (10) 1-1/4 #12 flat head wood screws. Hardware for mounting to building walls to be supplied by the installer. The Worden Company Source Book October

52 Circulation Desks CIRCULATION END PANELS T-EP T-EP-M T-EP-30 T-EP-30-M TERES STYLE, OAK TERES STYLE, MAPLE TERES STYLE, OAK TERES STYLE, MAPLE 3/4 Tx25-1/2 W x 31-3/4 H 3/4 Tx25-1/2 W x 31-3/4 H 3/4 TK x 28-1/8 W x HGT 3/4 TK x 28-1/8 W x HGT Teres end panels are ¾ t 3-ply construction with the vertical and bottom edge banded. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates above the finished toe kick and bellow the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. 7000/EP ACADEMY STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 T x 28-7/8 W x HGT 7000/EP-M ACADEMY STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 T x 28-7/8 W x HGT 7000/EP-30 ACADEMY STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT 7000/EP-30-M ACADEMY STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT Academy end panels are 1-3/16 t 3-ply construction with 1-3/4 t x 2-1/2 w hardwood boarder along the vertical and horizontal edges. Three ½ t x 1-7/8 w slats are centered on the face side of the panel. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates at the floor and above the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. 2000/EP ADDENDA STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 T x 28-7/8 W x HGT 2000/EP-M ADDENDA STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 T x 28-7/8 W x HGT 2000/EP-30 ADDENDA STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT 2000/EP-30-M ADDENDA STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT Addenda end panels are 1-3/16 t 3-ply construction with a 3 w hardwood rail mitered around the panel. The exterior face of the rail is shaped to crate a raised panel appearance. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates at the floor and above the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. DG-EP-30 DEGILDE STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT DG-EP-30-M DEGILDE STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT degilde end panels are 1-3/16 t 3-ply construction with a 1/8 t hardwood band on both vertical and horizontal edges. The vertical edges of the panel receive a decorative black metal strap, held in place with black machine screws. The exterior face of the panel receives an arched, black metal appliqué, held in place with black machine screws. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates at the floor and above the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. D-EP-30 DIAMETRON STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT D-EP-30-M DIAMETRON STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT Diametron end panels are 1-3/16 t 3-ply construction. The vertical and horizontal edges of the panel are banded with hardwood. The vertical edges of the panel are coped and receive a 1-1/2 diameter finished metal tube. The tube is capped with a dome insert on the top and black glide on the bottom. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates at the floor and above the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. 1100/EP MARLB STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TKx28-7/8 WxHGT 1100/EP-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TKx28-7/8 WxHGT 1100/EP-30 MARLB STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT 1100/EP-30-M MARLB STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT Marlboro end panels are 1-3/16 t 3-ply construction. The vertical and horizontal edges of the panel are banded with 9/16 t hardwood and receive a profiled shape. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates at the floor and above the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. 52 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

53 Circulation Desks CIRCULATION END PANELS cont'd 5000/EP TEMPUS STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 T x 28-7/8 W x HGT 6000/EP TEMPUS STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 T x 28-7/8 W x HGT 5000/EP-30 TEMPUS STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT 6000/EP-30 TEMPUS STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT Tempus end panels are 1-3/16 t 3-ply construction. The panels feature an arched top, 3 h hardwood base and recessed vertical accent strip. The top and both vertical edges are banded with 1/8 t hardwood. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates at the floor and above the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. AL-EP-30 ALCOTT STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT AL-EP-30-M ALCOTT STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT Alcott end panels are 1-3/16 t 3-ply construction. The vertical and top edges of the panel receive a 1-5/16 t x 2-1/2 w hardwood band. The panel receives a 2-1/4 h hardwood base with a ¼ t aluminum accent foot. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates at the floor and above the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. TH-EP-30 THOREAU STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT TH-EP-30-M THOREAU STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT Thoreau end panels are 1-3/16 t 3-ply construction. The vertical edges receive a 1-5/16 t x 2 w hardwood band. The top receives a 1-5/16 t x 3-1/2 w hardwood band with an internal arched profile. The panel is fitted with a 3-3/4 h hardwood base rail and features a decorative top cap molding and matching base cap molding. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates at the floor and above the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. TW-EP-30 TWAIN STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT TW-EP-30-M TWAIN STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT Twain end panels are 1-3/16 t 3-ply construction. The vertical edges receive 1/8 t hardwood. The base receives a 3 h hardwood base rail. The top of the panel receives a 3 h arched hardwood rail with a 1/8 reveal placed at the center and running vertical. A black accent molding is applied to the panel at the intersection of the base and top rails to the panel field, the molding runs horizontally across the face of the panel and returns back along both edges. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates at the floor and above the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. MWS-EP-30 MWS STYLE, OAK 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT MWS-EP-30-M MWS STYLE, MAPLE 1-3/16 TK x 30 W x HGT MWS end panels are 1-3/16 t 3-ply construction. The vertical and horizontal edges of the panel are banded with 5/8 t hardwood, all of the corners are square and eased. This end assembles to the circulation desk end cabinet and terminates at the floor and above the finished desk work surface. Six threaded fasteners are used to attach the finished end. The Worden Company Source Book October

54 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE DISPLAY Base/End Panels C M O F Cherry Maple Oak Steel Frame Edge Band/Top CC CP MM MP OO OP PP Cherry bands/ Cherry bands/ Maple bands/ Maple bands/ Oak bands/ Oak bands/ PVC bands/ Cherry veneer HPL Maple veneer HPL Oak veneer HPL HPL END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick x 25-1/2 wide x 48 high consisting of a panel, a trim rail and a decorative face plate. The panel shall be 3-ply particle board construction with a premium grade A veneer face and back. The vertical edge shall be banded with 1-3/16 thick x 1-5/16 wide solid maple. The top edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid wood and the bottom edge shall be arched 3 between the vertical bends and veneer banded. The vertical edge shall be fitted with a 12 gauge x 1-1/2 wide HRPO steel trim rail finished with a black textured powder coat and heat cured. The trim rail shall be secured by means of M6-12 black oxided button head cap screws passing through 1/16 x 7/8 black stand-off inserts embedded along the edge. Both sides of the end panels shall be fitted with threaded metal inserts at the top support, and face plate locations. Each insert shall be internally and externally threaded and flanged to allow for a finished flush fit. The inserts shall be black zinc plated. The face plate laser cut from 12 gauge HRPO steel and epoxy powder coated and heat cured.the plate shall be attached by means of 5/16-18 x 3/4 black oxide button head cap screws. The panel shall be attached to the back post by means of Mod-eez clips. BACK POST: The back post shall be 1-1/2 square, 16 gauge HRPO tubular steel with the top welded closed and ground flush and the bottoms fitted with a 5/16-18 grater clip glide insert. The post shall be fitted with threaded inserts at the Mod-eez clip locations and 5/16-18 threaded inserts at the base frame attachment. All inserts shall be flush mounted. BACK PANEL: The panel shall be 1-3/16 thick x 34-1/2 wide x 43-1/2 high, 3-ply particle board construction with premium grade A veneer face and back. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid wood. The vertical edges shall be fitted with spring tension Mod-eez clips which engage on shoulder screws installed on the leg posts. The back panel shall be flush at the top to the end panel and shall be 4-1/2 above the floor. SLOPED TOP: The top shall be sloped, shall be 1-3/16 thick x 25-5/8 deep x 34 1/2 wide providing a height of 39 1/2 at the front and 44 1/2 at the back. The top shall be 3-ply particle board construction with premium grade A veneer panel and any sound veneer on the underside. The front edge shall be rabbeted to receive a 1-7/8 wide black anodized or black powder coated aluminum extrusion forming a 5/8 retainer lip. The top shall be secured to the ends and the back panel by means of 21 3/16 long black oxided steel Z-bar brackets each secured with seven # 12 x 5/8 PHSM screws. BASE SHELF: The base shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 24 3/4 deep x 34 13/16 wide located 12 5/8 above the floor. Construction shall be the same as sloped top except the face and back shall be black thermally fused laminate and the exposed edge shall be banded with 3mm black PVC. The base shelf shall be secured to the ends and back or with 21 3/16 long black oxided metal Z-bars and joined by means of #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws. STORAGE SHELVES: The slide-out storage shelves shall be 3/4 thick x 34 1/4 wide x 24 3/4 deep 3-ply particle board construction with black thermally fused laminate face and back. The shelves shall be machined and fitted on the front edge with the same retainer as the top. The shelves shall be suspended on KV or Accuride full extension ball bearing slides providing 22 extension of shelf. DEGILDE ATLAS STAND Model # Description 37-1/2 W X 27 D X 48 H DG-AS-C-CC DG-AS-C-CP DG-AS-C-PP DG-AS-M-MM DG-AS-M-MP DG-AS-M-PP DG-AS-O-OO DG-AS-O-OP DG-AS-O-PP CHERRY END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP The atlas stand shall consist of two end panels, two back posts, a back, a sloped top, a base shelf, and five slide out storage shelves. DEGILDE DICTIONARY STAND Model # Description 37-1/2 W X 27 D X 48 H DG-DS-C-CC DG-DS-C-CP DG-DS-C-PP DG-DS-M-MM DG-DS-M-MP DG-DS-M-PP DG-DS-O-OO DG-DS-O-OP DG-DS-O-PP CHERRY END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP The dictionary stand shall consist of two end panels, two back posts, a sloped top, a base shelf, and an adjustable shelf. 54 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

55 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE TABLE Base/End Panels C M O F Cherry Maple Oak Steel Frame Edge Band/Top CC CP MM MP OO OP PP Cherry bands/ Cherry bands/ Maple bands/ Maple bands/ Oak bands/ Oak bands/ PVC bands/ GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS: Cherry veneer HPL Maple veneer HPL Oak veneer HPL HPL TOP: The work surface will have either veneer or HPL as a surface material. Work surfaces with veneer shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A veneer face and any sound veneer back. All edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands. Work surfaces can also be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick HPL face and.028 thick backer sheet. All four edges shall be banded with either 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands or 3mm thick PVC bands. Bottom side of top shall be fitted with (64) flush countersunk black oxide threaded inserts to allow table to be assembled as freestanding or ganged together with more tables. Work surfaces shall be adjustable to either 28-1/2 or 27 heights. TOP SUPPORT: The underside of rectangular tables shall be fitted with a solid maple stretcher finished with black textured finish. Stretcher shall be fitted with flush countersunk black oxide threaded inserts. 12 gauge universal steel mounting brackets and stretcher saddle brackets shall be attached to stretcher by bolting through brackets into inserts in bottom side of top and end panel assembly. END ASSEMBLY: Two end assemblies shall be available: PANEL END 1-3/16 thick particleboard construction with premium grade A veneer faces. Top edge shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid hardwood band. Vertical edges shall be banded with 1-5/16 thick solid hardwood band fitted with brass threaded inserts in the edges. A 12 gauge decorative steel strap with black texture powder coated finish shall be bolted into threaded inserts in the ends of assembly. Arched bottom edge shall be banded with 1/32 thick veneer. FRAME END 1-1/2 square 16 gauge tubular HRPO welded steel frame shall be fitted with inserts in both faces for attaching stretcher assembly, universal mounting brackets and decorative end plates. Frame shall be finished with black texture powder coat. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT) DEGILDE RECTANGULAR TABLE Model # Description 36 WIDE X 48 LONG X HEIGHT. DG-3648-C-CC DG-3648-C-CP DG-3648-C-PP DG-3648-F-CC DG-3648-F-CP DG-3648-F-MM DG-3648-F-MP DG-3648-F-OO DG-3648-F-OP DG-3648-F-PP DG-3648-M-MM DG-3648-M-MP DG-3648-M-PP DG-3648-O-OO DG-3648-O-OP DG-3648-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. 30 WIDE X 60 LONG X HEIGHT DG-3060-C-CC DG-3060-C-CP DG-3060-C-PP DG-3060-F-CC DG-3060-F-CP DG-3060-F-MM DG-3060-F-MP DG-3060-F-OO DG-3060-F-OP DG-3060-F-PP DG-3060-M-MM DG-3060-M-MP DG-3060-M-PP DG-3060-O-OO DG-3060-O-OP DG-3060-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGEBANDS, & VENEER TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. The Worden Company Source Book October

56 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE RECTANGULAR TABLE cont d Model # Description 36 WIDE X 60 LONG x HEIGHT DG-3660-C-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-3660-C-CP DG-3660-C-PP DG-3660-F-CC DG-3660-F-CP DG-3660-F-MM DG-3660-F-MP DG-3660-F-OO DG-3660-F-OP DG-3660-F-PP DG-3660-M-MM DG-3660-M-MP DG-3660-M-PP DG-3660-O-OO DG-3660-O-OP DG-3660-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 36 WIDE X 72 LONG X HEIGHT DG-3672-C-CC DG-3672-C-CP DG-3672-C-PP DG-3672-F-CC DG-3672-F-CP DG-3672-F-MM DG-3672-F-MP DG-3672-F-OO DG-3672-F-OP DG-3672-F-PP DG-3672-M-MM DG-3672-M-MP DG-3672-M-PP DG-3672-O-OO DG-3672-O-OP DG-3672-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 36 WIDE X 90 LONG X HEIGHT DG-3690-C-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-3690-C-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3690-C-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3690-F-CC STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-3690-F-CP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3690-F-MM STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-3690-F-MP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3690-F-OO STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-3690-F-OP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3690-F-PP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3690-M-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-3690-M-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3690-M-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3690-O-OO OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-3690-O-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3690-O-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 42 WIDE X 48 LONG DG-4248-C-CC DG-4248-C-CP DG-4248-C-PP DG-4248-F-CC DG-4248-F-CP DG-4248-F-MM DG-4248-F-MP DG-4248-F-OO DG-4248-F-OP DG-4248-F-PP DG-4248-M-MM DG-4248-M-MP DG-4248-M-PP DG-4248-O-OO DG-4248-O-OP DG-4248-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 56 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

57 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE RECTANGULAR TABLE cont d Model # Description 42 WIDE X 60 LONG DG-4260-C-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-4260-C-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4260-C-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4260-F-CC STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-4260-F-CP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4260-F-MM STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-4260-F-MP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4260-F-OO STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-4260-F-OP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4260-F-PP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4260-M-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-4260-M-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4260-M-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4260-O-OO OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-4260-O-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4260-O-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 42 WIDE X 72 LONG DG-4272-C-CC DG-4272-C-CP DG-4272-C-PP DG-4272-F-CC DG-4272-F-CP DG-4272-F-MM DG-4272-F-MP DG-4272-F-OO DG-4272-F-OP DG-4272-F-PP DG-4272-M-MM DG-4272-M-MP DG-4272-M-PP DG-4272-O-OO DG-4272-O-OP DG-4272-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 42 WIDE X 90 LONG DG-4290-C-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-4290-C-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4290-C-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4290-F-CC STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-4290-F-CP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4290-F-MM STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-4290-F-MP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4290-F-OO STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-4290-F-OP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4290-F-PP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4290-M-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-4290-M-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4290-M-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4290-O-OO OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-4290-O-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4290-O-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 48 WIDE X 60 LONG DG-4860-C-CC DG-4860-C-CP DG-4860-C-PP DG-4860-F-CC DG-4860-F-CP DG-4860-F-MM DG-4860-F-MP DG-4860-F-OO DG-4860-F-OP DG-4860-F-PP DG-4860-M-MM DG-4860-M-MP DG-4860-M-PP DG-4860-O-OO DG-4860-O-OP DG-4860-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP The Worden Company Source Book October

58 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE RECTANGULAR TABLE cont d Model # Description 48 WIDE X 72 LONG DG-4872-C-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-4872-C-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4872-C-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4872-F-CC STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-4872-F-CP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4872-F-MM STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-4872-F-MP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4872-F-OO STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-4872-F-OP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4872-F-PP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4872-M-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-4872-M-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4872-M-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4872-O-OO OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-4872-O-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-4872-O-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 48 WIDE X 90 LONG DG-4890-C-CC DG-4890-C-CP DG-4890-C-PP DG-4890-F-CC DG-4890-F-CP DG-4890-F-MM DG-4890-F-MP DG-4890-F-OO DG-4890-F-OP DG-4890-F-PP DG-4890-M-MM DG-4890-M-MP DG-4890-M-PP DG-4890-O-OO DG-4890-O-OP DG-4890-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DEGILDE SQUARE TABLE Model # Description 36 WIDE X 36 LONG DG-3636-CC-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-3636-CC-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-CC-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-CF-CC CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & VENEER TOP DG-3636-CF-CP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-CF-PP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-FF-CC STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-3636-FF-CP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-FF-MM STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-3636-FF-MP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-FF-OO STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-3636-FF-OP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-FF-PP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-MM-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-3636-MM-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-MM-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-MF-MM MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & VENEER TOP DG-3636-MF-MP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-MF-PP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-OO-OO OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-3636-OO-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-OO-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-OF-OO OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-3636-OF-OP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-3636-OF-PP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 58 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

59 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE SQUARE TABLE cont d Model # 42 WIDE X 42 LONG DG-4242-CC-CC DG-4242-CC-CP DG-4242-CC-PP DG-4242-CF-CC DG-4242-CF-CP DG-4242-CF-PP DG-4242-FF-CC DG-4242-FF-CP DG-4242-FF-MM DG-4242-FF-MP DG-4242-FF-OO DG-4242-FF-OP DG-4242-FF-PP DG-4242-MM-MM DG-4242-MM-MP DG-4242-MM-PP DG-4242-MF-MM DG-4242-MF-MP DG-4242-MF-PP DG-4242-OO-OO DG-4242-OO-OP DG-4242-OO-PP DG-4242-OF-OO DG-4242-OF-OP DG-4242-OF-PP Description CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS & VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS,& VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 48 WIDE X 48 LONG DG-4848-CC-CC DG-4848-CC-CP DG-4848-CC-PP DG-4848-CF-CC DG-4848-CF-CP DG-4848-CF-PP DG-4848-FF-CC DG-4848-FF-CP DG-4848-FF-MM DG-4848-FF-MP DG-4848-FF-OO DG-4848-FF-OP DG-4848-FF-PP DG-4848-MM-MM DG-4848-MM-MP DG-4848-MM-PP DG-4848-MF-MM DG-4848-MF-MP DG-4848-MF-PP DG-4848-OO-OO DG-4848-OO-OP DG-4848-OO-PP DG-4848-OF-OO DG-4848-OF-OP DG-4848-OF-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS & VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS & VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 60 WIDE X 60 LONG DG-6060-CC-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-6060-CC-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-CC-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-CF-CC CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-6060-CF-CP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-CF-PP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-FF-CC STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-6060-FF-CP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-FF-MM STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-6060-FF-MP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-FF-OO STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-6060-FF-OP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-FF-PP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-MM-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-6060-MM-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-MM-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-MF-MM MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-6060-MF-MP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP The Worden Company Source Book October

60 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE SQUARE TABLE cont d Model # Description 60 WIDE X 60 LONG DG-6060-MF-PP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-OO-OO OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-6060-OO-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-OO-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-OF-OO OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-6060-OF-OP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-6060-OF-PP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DEGILDE ROUND TABLE Model # Description 36 DIAMETER DG-36-CC-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-36-CC-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-CC-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-CF-CC CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-36-CF-CP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-CF-PP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-FF-CC STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-36-FF-CP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-FF-MM STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-36-FF-MP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-FF-OO STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-36-FF-OP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-FF-PP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-MM-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-36-MM-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-MM-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-MF-MM MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-36-MF-MP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-MF-PP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-OO-OO OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-36-OO-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-OO-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-OF-OO OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-36-OF-OP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-OF-PP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 42 DIAMETER DG-42-CC-CC DG-42-CC-CP DG-42-CC-PP DG-42-CF-CC DG-42-CF-CP DG-42-CF-PP DG-42-FF-CC DG-42-FF-CP DG-42-FF-MM DG-42-FF-MP DG-42-FF-OO DG-42-FF-OP DG-42-FF-PP DG-42-MM-MM DG-42-MM-MP DG-42-MM-PP DG-42-MF-MM DG-42-MF-MP DG-42-MF-PP DG-42-OO-OO DG-42-OO-OP DG-42-OO-PP DG-42-OF-OO DG-42-OF-OP DG-42-OF-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 60 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

61 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE ROUND TABLE cont d Model # Description 48 DIAMETER DG-48-CC-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-48-CC-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-CC-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-CF-CC CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-48-CF-CP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-CF-PP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-FF-CC STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-48-FF-CP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-FF-MM STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-48-FF-MP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-FF-OO STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-48-FF-OP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-FF-PP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-MM-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-48-MM-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-MM-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-MF-MM MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-48-MF-MP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-MF-PP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-OO-OO OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-48-OO-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-OO-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-OF-OO OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-48-OF-OP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-48-OF-PP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 60 DIAMETER DG-60-CC-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-60-CC-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-CC-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-CF-CC CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS & VENEER TOP DG-60-CF-CP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-CF-PP CHERRY BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-FF-CC STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-60-FF-CP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-FF-MM STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-60-FF-MP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-FF-OO STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-60-FF-OP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-FF-PP STEEL FRAME BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-MM-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-60-MM-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-MM-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-MF-MM MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS & VENEER TOP DG-60-MF-MP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-MF-PP MAPLE BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-OO-OO OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-60-OO-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-OO-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-OF-OO OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-60-OF-OP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-60-OF-PP OAK BASE PANELS, STEEL FRAME END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP The Worden Company Source Book October

62 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE WORKSTATION Base/End Panels C M O F Cherry Maple Oak Steel Frame Edge Band/Top CC CP MM MP OO OP PP Cherry bands/ Cherry bands/ Maple bands/ Maple bands/ Oak bands/ Oak bands/ PVC bands/ Cherry veneer HPL Maple veneer HPL Oak veneer HPL HPL TOP: The work surface will have either veneer or HPL (High Pressure Laminate) as a surface material. Work surfaces with veneer shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A veneer and any sound veneer back. All edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands. Work surfaces can also be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick HPL face and.028 thick backer sheet. All four edges shall be banded with either 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands or 3mm thick PVC bands. The work surface shall be attached to the side panels by bolting through 12 gauge powder coated steel universal mounting brackets into black oxide threaded inserts countersunk flush in side panels and bottom of work surface. Work surfaces shall be adjustable to 39, 37-1/2, 28-1/2 or 27 heights. END/INTERMEDIATE PANELS: Panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with veneers on both faces. The top edge shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid hardwood band. The front edge shall be banded with 1-5/16 wide solid hardwood band. The front edge of the panel shall be fitted with a 12 gauge x 1-1/2 wide metal strap held away from the band with1 /16 spacer washers. The strap shall be powder coated with a black textured finish and bolted into threaded inserts in front edge of the panel. The arched bottom edge is banded with 1/32 thick veneer. Each panel to be joined to posts with concealed Mod-eez clips in panels. Black oxide threaded inserts are countersunk flush in positions to allow different heights for work surfaces and shelves. BACK PANEL: Back panel shall be 1-3/16 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A veneers on both faces. Panels shall have 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands on top and bottom. Panels shall be attached to posts with concealed Mod-eez clips in panel. Panels shall be pre-drilled for electrical attachment. SHELF: The shelf shall be 10 deep constructed the same as work surface ordered (veneer or HPL and solid hardwood bands or PVC). Shelf shall be fastened to end/intermediate panels by 12 gauge steel powder coat brackets bolted to shelf and end/intermediate panel. The shelf shall be located above the work surface 43-1/2 above the floor or below the work surface, 20-1/2 or 22 above the floor. POSTS: 1-1/2 square, 16 gauge HRPO tubular steel posts in 2-way, 3-way and 4-way configurations shall be available. Post shall have insert in bottom for adjustable glide and top of post is capped. Posts shall be finished with textured black powder coat and shall have an adjustable glide in bottom of post. UL LISTING: Work Stations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). NOTE: Optional electrical components are described in the electrical section. The degilde series requires electric compenents designed specifically for the degilde series. 62 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

63 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE WORKSTATION (SINGLE FACED) Model # Description 37-1/2 WIDE X 29-1/4 DEEP X 48 HIGH. DG-36-WS-C-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-36-WS-C-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-WS-C-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-WS-M-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-36-WS-M-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-WS-M-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-WS-O-OO OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP Starter DG-36-WS-O-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-WS-O-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP 49-1/2 WIDE X 29-1/4 DEEP X 48 HIGH. Starter DG-48-WS-C-CC DG-48-WS-C-CP DG-48-WS-C-PP DG-48-WS-M-MM DG-48-WS-M-MP DG-48-WS-M-PP DG-48-WS-O-OO DG-48-WS-O-OP DG-48-WS-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP\ 73-1/2 WIDE X 29-1/4 DEEP X 48 HIGH Starter DG-72-WS-C-CC DG-72-WS-C-CP DG-72-WS-C-PP DG-72-WS-M-MM DG-72-WS-M-MP DG-72-WS-M-PP DG-72-WS-O-OO DG-72-WS-O-OP DG-72-WS-O-PP CHERRY END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 36 WIDE X 29-1/4 DEEP X 48 HIGH DG-36-WS-A-C-CC CHERRY END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-36-WS-A-C-CP DG-36-WS-A-C-PP DG-36-WS-A-M-MM DG-36-WS-A-M-MP DG-36-WS-A-M-PP DG-36-WS-A-O-OO CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP Adder DG-36-WS-A-O-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-WS-A-O-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 49-1/2 WIDE X 29-1/4 DEEP X 48 HIGH Adder DG-48-WS-A-C-CC DG-48-WS-A-C-CP DG-48-WS-A-C-PP DG-48-WS-A-M-MM DG-48-WS-A-M-MP DG-48-WS-A-M-PP DG-48-WS-A-O-OO DG-48-WS-A-O-OP DG-48-WS-A-O-PP CHERRY END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 72 WIDE X 29-1/4 DEEP X 48 HIGH. Adder DG-72-WS-A-C-CC DG-72-WS-A-C-CP DG-72-WS-A-C-PP DG-72-WS-A-M-MM DG-72-WS-A-M-MP DG-72-WS-A-M-PP DG-72-WS-A-O-OO DG-72-WS-A-O-OP DG-72-WS-A-O-PP CHERRY END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP The Worden Company Source Book October

64 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE WORKSTATION (DOUBLE FACED) 37-1/2 WIDE X 57 DEEP X 48 HIGH Model # Description Starter DG-36-DWS-C-CC DG-36-DWS-C-CP DG-36-DWS-C-PP DG-36-DWS-M-MM DG-36-DWS-M-MP DG-36-DWS-M-PP DG-36-DWS-O-OO DG-36-DWS-O-OP DG-36-DWS-O-PP CHERRY END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 49-1/2 WIDE X 57 DEEP X 48 HIGH Starter DG-48-DWS-C-CC DG-48-DWS-C-CP DG-48-DWS-C-PP DG-48-DWS-M-MM DG-48-DWS-M-MP DG-48-DWS-M-PP DG-48-DWS-O-OO DG-48-DWS-O-OP DG-48-DWS-O-PP CHERRY END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 73-1/2 WIDE X 57 DEEP X 48 HIGH Starter DG-72-DWS-C-CC DG-72-DWS-C-CP DG-72-DWS-C-PP DG-72-DWS-M-MM DG-72-DWS-M-MP DG-72-DWS-M-PP DG-72-DWS-O-OO DG-72-DWS-O-OP DG-72-DWS-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 36 WIDE X 57 DEEP X 48 HIGH Adder DG-36-DWS-A-C-CC DG-36-DWS-A-C-CP DG-36-DWS-A-C-PP DG-36-DWS-A-M-MM DG-36-DWS-A-M-MP DG-36-DWS-A-M-PP DG-36-DWS-A-O-OO DG-36-DWS-A-O-OP DG-36-DWS-A-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 48 WIDE X 57 DEEP X 48 HIGH Adder DG-48-DWS-A-C-CC DG-48-DWS-A-C-CP DG-48-DWS-A-C-PP DG-48-DWS-A-M-MM DG-48-DWS-A-M-MP DG-48-DWS-A-M-PP DG-48-DWS-A-O-OO DG-48-DWS-A-O-OP DG-48-DWS-A-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 72 WIDE X 57 DEEP X 48 HIGH Adder DG-72-DWS-A-C-CC DG-72-DWS-A-C-CP DG-72-DWS-A-C-PP DG-72-DWS-A-M-MM DG-72-DWS-A-M-MP DG-72-DWS-A-M-PP DG-72-DWS-A-O-OO DG-72-DWS-A-O-OP DG-72-DWS-A-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 64 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

65 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE CARREL Base/End Panels C M O F Cherry Maple Oak Steel Frame Edge Band/Top CC CP MM MP OO OP PP Cherry bands/ Cherry bands/ Maple bands/ Maple bands/ Oak bands/ Oak bands/ PVC bands/ Cherry veneer HPL Maple veneer HPL Oak veneer HPL HPL TOP: The work surface will have either veneer or HPL (High Pressure Laminate) as a surface material. Work surfaces with veneer shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A veneer face and any sound veneer back. All edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands. Work surfaces can also be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick HPL face and.028 thick backer sheet. All four edges shall be banded with either 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands or 3mm thick PVC bands. The work surface shall be attached to the side panels by bolting through 12 gauge powder coated steel universal mounting brackets into black oxide threaded inserts flush countersunk in side panels and bottom of work surface. Work surfaces shall be adjustable to either 28-1/2 or 27 heights. END/INTERMEDIATE PANELS: Panels shall be 1-3/16 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A veneers face and back. The top edge shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid hardwood band. The front edge shall be banded with 1-5/16 thick solid hardwood band. The front edge of the panel shall be fitted with a 12 gauge x 1-1/2 wide metal strap held away from the band with 1/16 spacer washers. The strap shall be powder coated with a black textured finish and bolted into threaded inserts in front edge of the panel. Each upper panel to be joined to steel table frame with concealed spring tension clips in panels. BACK PANEL: Back panel shall be 1-3/16 thick x 34-1/2 or 48 wide x 43-1/2 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A veneers face and back. Panels shall have 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands on top and bottom. Panels shall be attached to legs with concealed spring tension clips in panel. Panels shall be pre-drilled for electrical attachment. SHELF: The shelf shall be 10 deep constructed the same as work surface ordered (veneer or HPL and solid hardwood bands or PVC). Shelf shall be fastened to end/intermediate panels by 12 gauge steel powder coat finished bracket on either end of shelf bolting into threaded inserts in panels. POSTS: 1-1/2 square, 16 gauge HRP tubular steel posts in 2-way, 3-way, and 4-way configurations shall be available. Posts shall be finished with textured black powder coat and shall have an adjustable glide in bottom of post. UL LISTING: Carrels shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). NOTE: Optional electrical components are described in the electrical section. The degilde series requires electric compenents designed specifically for the degilde series. DEGILDE CARREL (SINGLE FACED) 37-1/2 WIDE X 29-1/4 DEEP X 48 HIGH Model # Description Starter DG-36-SC-C-CC DG-36-SC-C-CP DG-36-SC-C-PP DG-36-SC-M-MM DG-36-SC-M-MP DG-36-SC-M-PP DG-36-SC-O-OO DG-36-SC-O-OP DG-36-SC-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. 49-1/2 WIDE X 29-1/4 DEEP X 48 HIGH Starter DG-48-SC-C-CC DG-48-SC-C-CP DG-48-SC-C-PP DG-48-SC-M-MM DG-48-SC-M-MP DG-48-SC-M-PP DG-48-SC-O-OO DG-48-SC-O-OP DG-48-SC-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. 36 WIDE X 29-1/4 DEEP X 48 HIGH Adder DG-36-SC-A-C-CC DG-36-SC-A-C-CP DG-36-SC-A-C-PP DG-36-SC-A-M-MM DG-36-SC-A-M-MP DG-36-SC-A-M-PP DG-36-SC-A-O-OO DG-36-SC-A-O-OP DG-36-SC-A-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. The Worden Company Source Book October

66 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE CARREL (SINGLE FACED) cont d 48 WIDE X 29-1/4 DEEP X 48 HIGH Model # Description Adder DG-48-SC-A-C-CC DG-48-SC-A-C-CP DG-48-SC-A-C-PP DG-48-SC-A-M-MM DG-48-SC-A-M-MP DG-48-SC-A-M-PP DG-48-SC-A-O-OO DG-48-SC-A-O-OP DG-48-SC-A-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. DEGILDE CARREL (Double Faced) 37-1/2 WIDE X 57 DEEP X 48 HIGH Model # Description Starter DG-36-DSC-C-CC DG-36-DSC-C-CP DG-36-DSC-C-PP DG-36-DSC-M-MM DG-36-DSC-M-MP DG-36-DSC-M-PP DG-36-DSC-O-OO DG-36-DSC-O-OP DG-36-DSC-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. 49-1/2 WIDE X 57 DEEP X 48 HIGH Starter DG-48-DSC-C-CC DG-48-DSC-C-CP DG-48-DSC-C-PP DG-48-DSC-M-MM DG-48-DSC-M-MP DG-48-DSC-M-PP DG-48-DSC-O-OO DG-48-DSC-O-OP DG-48-DSC-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & VENEER TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & HPL TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE BANDS, & VENEER TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. 36 WIDE X 57 DEEP X 48 HIGH Adder DG-36-DSC-A-C-CC DG-36-DSC-A-C-CP DG-36-DSC-A-C-PP DG-36-DSC-A-M-MM DG-36-DSC-A-M-MP DG-36-DSC-A-M-PP DG-36-DSC-A-O-OO DG-36-DSC-A-O-OP DG-36-DSC-A-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & VENEER TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY BANDS, & HPL TOP. CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE BANDS, & VENEER TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE BANDS, & HPL TOP. MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP. OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC BANDS, & HPL TOP. 48 WIDE X 57 DEEP X 48 HIGH Adder DG-48-DSC-A-C-CC DG-48-DSC-A-C-CP DG-48-DSC-A-C-PP DG-48-DSC-A-M-MM DG-48-DSC-A-M-MP DG-48-DSC-A-M-PP DG-48-DSC-A-O-OO DG-48-DSC-A-O-OP DG-48-DSC-A-O-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DEGILDE HALF ROUND TABLE - Option for Index Table (See Next Page) Top view Side view Front view Model # DG-HR-C-CC DG-HR--C-CP DG-HR--C-PP DG-HR--M-MM DG-HR--M-MP DG-HR--M-PP DG-HR--O-OO DG-HR--O-OP Description CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 66 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

67 degilde Casegoods DEGILDE INDEX/REFERENCE TABLES Base/End Panels C M O F Cherry Maple Oak Steel Frame Edge Band/Top CC CP MM MP OO OP PP Cherry bands/ Cherry bands/ Maple bands/ Maple bands/ Oak bands/ Oak bands/ PVC bands/ Cherry veneer HPL Maple veneer HPL Oak veneer HPL HPL TOP: The work surface will have either veneer or HPL (High Pressure Laminate) as a surface material. Work surfaces with veneer shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction premium grade A veneer face and any sound veneer back. All edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands. Work surfaces can also be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick HPL face and.028 thick backer sheet. All four edges shall be banded with either 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands or 3mm thick PVC bands. The work surface shall be attached to the side panels by bolting through 12 gauge powder coated steel universal mounting brackets into black oxide threaded inserts countersunk flush in side panels, back panels, and bottom of work surface. Work surfaces shall be adjustable to either 39, 37-1/2, 28-1/2 or 27 heights. END/INTERMEDIATE PANELS: Panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A veneer face and back. The top edge shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid hardwood band. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1-5/16 wide solid hardwood band. The vertical edges of the panel shall be fitted with 12 gauge x 1-1/2 wide metal straps held off the band with 1/16 spacer washers. The straps shall be powder coated with a black textured finish and bolted into threaded inserts in the edges of the panel. Panels shall be fitted with threaded inserts for attachment of work surface and shelves. Black oxide threaded inserts are countersunk in positions to allow differ- ent height work surfaces and shelves. BACK PANEL: Back panel shall be 1-3/16 thick x 34-1/2 wide x 51 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A veneer face and back. Panels shall have 1/8 thick solid hardwood bands on top and bottom. Panels are attached to end panels with concealed Mod-eez clips and shoulder screws. SHELF: The shelf shall be 10 deep constructed the same as work surface ordered (veneer or HPL and solid hardwood bands or PVC). Shelf shall be fastened to end/intermediate panels by 12 gauge steel powder coat finished brackets bolted to shelf and end/intermediate panels. Shelf may be positioned above the work surface 43-1/2 above the floor or below the work surface 10-1/2 above the floor. On reference shelving units shelves are located 10-1/2, 27, and 43-1/2 above the floor. UL LISTING: Index tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). (INITIAL) 37-1/2 WIDE X 48 DEEP X 55-1/2 HIGH Model # Description DG-36-ID-C-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-36-ID-C-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-ID-C-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-ID-M-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-36-ID-M-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-ID-M-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP Starter DG-36-ID-O-OO DG-36-ID-O-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-ID-O-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 37-1/2 WIDE X 27 DEEP X 55-1/2 HIGH DG-36-ID-A-C-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-36-ID-A-C-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-ID-A-C-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-ID-A-M-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-36-ID-A-M-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-ID-A-M-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP Adder DG-36-ID-A-O-OO DG-36-ID-A-O-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-ID-A-O-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP (INITIAL) 36 WIDE X 48 DEEP X 55-1/2 HIGH DG-36-IS-C-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-36-IS-C-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-IS-C-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-IS-M-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-36-IS-M-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-IS-M-PP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP Starter DG-36-IS-O-OO DG-36-IS-O-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-IS-O-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 36 WIDE X 27 DEEP X 55-1/2 HIGH DG-36-IS-A-C-CC CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & CHERRY VENEER TOP DG-36-IS-A-C-CP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, CHERRY EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-IS-A-C-PP CHERRY BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP DG-36-IS-A-M-MM MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & MAPLE VENEER TOP DG-36-IS-A-M-MP MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, MAPLE EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP Adder DG-36-IS-A-M-PP DG-36-IS-A-O-OO MAPLE BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & OAK VENEER TOP DG-36-IS-A-O-OP OAK BASE/END PANELS, OAK EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP The Worden Company Source Book October 2011 DG-36-IS-A-O-PP OAK BASE/END PANELS, PVC EDGE BANDS, & HPL TOP 67

68 Diametron Casegoods DIAMETRON ATLAS STAND Sloped top is 1-1/4 thick with a.050 high pressure laminate face. Cabinet has end panels of 1 thick particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple face veneer. Vertical edges are banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple banding. The closed back panel is 1/4 thick oak or maple veneer plywood set into end panels. This unit has five pull-out shelves operating on full extension ball bearing slides with stops to prevent removal. Each shelf has a clear area 26 wide x 24-1/2 deep x 3-3/8 high. Shelves are 3/4 thick plywood with oak or maple face and 1-1/2 wide front retainer. Base consists of die cast aluminum hubs, black epoxy powder coated, 2-1/2 diameter, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel legs, with 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon adjustable glides. Apron rails are 1 x 2, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel. DRA DRA M DRA J DRA J-M HPL TOP, OAK VENEER CASE HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER CASE HPL TOP, OAK VENEER CASE HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER CASE 29 W x 26 D x 43 H 29 W x 26 D x 43 H 29 W x 26 D x 34-1/2 H 29 W x 26 D x 34-1/2 H DIAMETRON DICTIONARY STAND Sloped top is 1-1/4 thick with a.050 high pressure laminate face and a.028 backer on the underside. Cabinet has end panels of 1 thick particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple face veneer. Vertical edges are banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple banding. The closed back panel is 1/4 thick oak or maple veneer plywood set into end panels. The unit has one adjustable shelf 3/4 thick, with oak or maple veneer face and 1/8 solid oak band on front edge. Shelf is adjustable. Base consists of die cast aluminum hubs, black epoxy powder coated, 2-1/2 diameter, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel legs, with 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon adjustable glides. Apron rails are 1 x 2, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel. DRA DRA M DRA J DRA J-M HPL TOP, OAK VENEER CASE HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER CASE HPL TOP, OAK VENEER CASE HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER CASE 24 W x 14-1/2 D x 43 H 24 W x 14-1/2 D x 43 H 24 W x 14-1/2 D x 34-1/2 H 24 W x 14-1/2 D x 34-1/2 H DIAMETRON DISPLAY TABLE Display case has an extruded aluminum frame with dark bronze finish. The case has 3/16 annealed float glass at sides and top. The top of the case is hinged with continu- ous piano-type hinge and is equipped with 2 point lock and lid supports. The bottom is offered with optional tackable surface covered with neutral beige colored fabric. Glass case size is 59 wide x 29 deep x 9-11/16 high. This display case is screwed to top surface of table. Top is 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and a.028 backer on the underside. All edges are banded with 5/8 x 1-1/4" oak or maple external edgebands, radiused 1/2. Base is die cast aluminum hubs, black epoxy powder coated, 2-1/2 diameter, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel legs, with 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon adjustable glides. Apron rails are 1 x 2, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel. DRA HPL TOP, OAK 31-1/4 W x 61-1/4 L DRA M HPL TOP, MAPLE 31-1/4 W x 61-1/4 L 68 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

69 Diametron Casegoods DIAMETRON RECTANGULAR TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The four corners of the core shall be radiused 2-1/8 and the entire perimeter of the work surface shall be externally banded with a 5/8 x 1-1/4" thick solid oak or maple band, radiused top and bottom 1/2. The four corners shall be fitted with a sectored band having a 2-1/8 i.d. radius and a 2-3/4 o.d. radius providing a uniform 3/16 thick band detail. The bands shall be applied to the core with PVA glues and electronically radio frequency (RF) cured. Hot melt or contact adhesives are not permitted for band application. The bands shall be set flush to the high pressure laminate with no reveals or vein lines permitted at the joint. HUB: The hub shall be die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated black and heat cured and attached to the table top by means of 5/16-18 x 1 socket cap screws. The hub shall be designed to receive the leg and apron rails. The outside fo the hub shall conform to the sectored band detail of the top. Add: Tables 48 x 90" shall be fitted with (2) 14 gauge steel longitudinal "v" braces. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/2 diameter, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel, meeting Commercial Quality Standards, fitted with a 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon adjustable glide and insert. Legs shall be finished with an epoxy powder coat. The legs shall fit into the hub and shall be secured by means of a set screw on the back side of the hub. APRON RAILS: The four sides of the table shall be fitted with 1 x 2, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel apron rails, meeting Commercial Quality Standards, epoxy powder coated, and heat cured. The apron rails shall fit onto the die cast tongue of the hub and shall be held in position by means of hidden tension screws. UL LISTING: Table shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M DIA DIA M HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE VENEER TOP, OAK VENEER TOP, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT 30 W x 60 L x HGT 30 W x 60 L x HGT 30 W x 60 L x HGT 30 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

70 Diametron Casegoods DIAMETRON ROUND TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The entire perimeter of the work surface shall be externally banded with a 5/8 x 1-1/4" thick steam bent solid oak or maple band, radiused top and bottom 1/2. The bands shall be applied to the core with PVA glues and electronically radio frequency (RF) cured. Hot melt or contact adhesives are not permitted for band application. The bands shall be set flush to the high pressure laminate with no reveals or vein lines permitted at the joint. HUB: The hub shall be die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated black and heat cured and attached to the table top by means of 5/16-18 x 1 socket cap screws. The hub shall be designed to receive the leg and apron rails. The outside of the hub shall conform to the sectored band detail of the top. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/2 diameter, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel, meeting Commercial Quality Standards, fitted with a 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon adjustable glide and insert. Legs shall be epoxy powder coated and heat cured. The legs shall fit into the hub and shall be secured by means of a set screw on the back side of the hub. APRON RAILS: The four sides of the table shall be fitted with 1 x 2, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel apron rails, meeting Commercial Quality Standards, epoxy powder coated, and heat cured. The apron rails shall fit onto the die cast tongue of the hub and shall be held in position by means of hidden tension screws. UL LISTING: Table shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). DIA HPL TOP, OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT DIA M HPL TOP, MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT DIA VENEER TOP, OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT DIA M VENEER TOP, MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT DIAMETRON SQUARE TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The entire perimeter of the work surface shall be externally banded with a 5/8 x 1-1/4"thick solid oak or maple band, radiused top and bottom 1/2. The bands shall be applied to the core with PVA glues and electronically radio frequency (RF) cured. The bands shall be set flush to the high pressure laminate with no reveals or vein lines permitted at the joint. HUB: The hub shall be die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated black and heat cured and attached to the table top by means of 5/16-18 x 1 socket cap screws. The hub shall be designed to receive the leg and apron rails. The outside of the hub shall conform to the sectored band detail of the top. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/2 diameter, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel, meeting Commercial Quality Standards, fitted with a 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon adjustable glide and insert. Legs shall be epoxy powder coated and heat cured. The legs shall fit into the hub and shall be secured by means of a set screw on the back side of the hub. APRON RAILS: The four sides of the table shall be fitted with 1 x 2, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel apron rails, meeting Commercial Quality Standards, epoxy powder coated, and heat cured. The apron rails shall fit onto the die cast tongue of the hub and shall be held in position by means of hidden tension screws. UL LISTING: Table shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). DIA HPL TOP, OAK 42 W x 42 L x HGT DIA M HPL TOP, MAPLE 42 W x 42 L x HGT DIA VENEER TOP, OAK 42 W x 42 L x HGT DIA M VENEER TOP, MAPLE 42 W x 42 L x HGT 70 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

71 Diametron Casegoods DIAMETRON CARREL TOP: The work surface is 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050 high pressure laminate face and a.028 backer on the underside. The exposed edge shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-1/4 wide solid oak or maple external edge band laminated to core after lamination of the face plastic. The edges shall be radiused 1/2 on the top and bottom edges. The top is attached by means of black oxided metal Z-bar brackets secured to the underside of the work surface. Top is 28 deep x either 34-1/2 or 48 wide. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick solid oak or maple external bands radiused 1/16. The vertical edges shall be banded with a 5/16 thick solid oak or maple edge band, coped and chamfered to receive a 1-1/2 diameter steel post. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be the same as the end panels except through drilled for shelf shoulder screws and top bolts. BACK PANEL: Back panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick solid oak or maple external bands radiused 1/16. The vertical edges shall be banded with a 5/16 thick solid oak or maple edge band, coped and chamfered to receive a 1-1/2 diameter steel post. POSTS: Posts shall be 1-1/2 diameter, 13 gauge CREW steel tube, finished with an epoxy powder coat. The top of the post shall be fitted with a tamper resistant alloy dome cap finished to match post. The bottom of the post shall be fitted with a 1-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 high adjustable black nylon glide. SHELF: Storage shelf is 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple face veneer on both faces. Front edge to be banded with solid oak or maple with an eased edge. The shelf is 10 deep and is positioned 15 above the desk top. WORK SURFACE HEIGHTS: Standard height is 29 H. Optional 27 height may be specified. UL LISTING: Carrels shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder DKE-36-SC SF STARTER, OAK 49 Hx37-3/16 Wx30-7/8 D DKE-36-SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 49 Hx35-11/16 Wx30-7/8 H DKE-36-SC-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 49 Hx37-3/16 Wx30-7/8 D DKE-36-SC-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 49 Hx35-11/16 Wx30-7/8 H DKE-48-SC SF STARTER, OAK 49 Hx50-11/16 Wx30-7/8 D DKE-48-SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 49 H x 49-3/16 Wx30-7/8 D DKE-48-SC-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 49 Hx50-11/16 Wx30-7/8 D DKE-48-SC-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 49 H x 49-3/16 Wx30-7/8 D Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder DKE-36-DSC DF STARTER, OAK 49 Hx37-3/16 Wx60-1/4 D DKE-36-DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 49 Hx35-11/16 Wx60-1/4 D DKE-36-DSC-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 49 Hx37-3/16 Wx60-1/4 D DKE-36-DSC-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 49 Hx35-11/16 Wx60-1/4 D DKE-48-DSC DF STARTER, OAK 49 H x50-11/16 Wx60-1/4 H DKE-48-DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 49 H x 49-3/16 Wx60-1/4 H DKE-48-DSC-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 49 H x50-11/16 Wx60-1/4 H DKE-48-DSC-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 49 H x 49-3/16 Wx60-1/4 H Quad DKE-36-QSC QUAD CARREL, OAK 72-3/8 W x 72-3/8 L x HGT DKE-36-QSC-M QUAD CARREL, MAPLE 72-3/8 W x 72-3/8 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

72 Diametron Casegoods DIAMETRON CARREL TABLE TOP: Tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The four corners are radiused 2-1/8. The entire perimeter of the top is externally banded with 5/8 x 1-1/4" thick oak or maple and radiused top and bottom 1/2 The four corners are sectored to provide a uniform 5/8 x 1-1/4" thick band detail. The bands are set flush to the high pressure laminate. No reveals or vein lines are permitted at the joint. Optional wood veneer tops have 3-ply veneered, particleboard core with edge bands set flush to the top surface. CARREL RACK: The carrel rack is constructed of 1, 3-ply veneered particleboard core material with all exposed edges banded with 5/16 oak or maple edge banding. LEG ASSEMBLY: Each assembly consists of a die cast aluminum hub, black epoxy powder coated and heat cured, attached to the table top with 5/16-18 x 1 socket cap screws. Hub is designed to receive the leg and apron rails. The outside radius of the hub conforms to the sectored band detail of the top. The legs are 2-1/2 diameter, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel, fitted with 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon adjustable glides. Legs are epoxy powder coated and heat cured. APRONS: The four sides of the table are fitted with 1 x 2, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel apron rails, epoxy powder coated and heat cured. The apron rails fit onto the die cast tongue of the leg assembly hub and are held in position by means of hidden tension screws. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 29 H. Optional 25 or 27 heights may be specified. UL LISTING: Carrel tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). DIAMETRON CARREL TABLE DNA DNA M DNA DNA M HPL TOP, OAK CURB HPL TOP, MAPLE CURB OAK VENEER TOP & CURB MAPLE VENEER TOP & CURB 24 W X36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT DIAMETRON CARREL TABLE SINGLE FACED CENTER PANEL DNA HPL TOP OAK VENEER RACK 24 W x 36 L x HGT DNA M HPL TOP MAPLE VENEER RACK 24 W x 36 L x HGT DNA OAK VENEER TOP & RACK 24 W x 36 L x HGT DNA M MAPLE VENEER TOP & RACK 24 W x 36 L x HGT DIAMETRON CARREL TABLE SINGLE FACED FULL PANEL DNA HPL TOP, OAK RACK 24 W x 36 L x HGT DNA M HPL TOP, MAPLE RACK 24 W x 36 L x HGT DNA OAK VENEER TOP & RACK 24 W x 36 L x HGT DNA M MAPLE VENEER TOP & RACK 24 W x 36 L x HGT DIAMETRON CARREL TABLE DOUBLE FACED CENTER PANEL DNA HPL TOP, OAK RACK 36 W x 48 L x HGT DNA M DNA DNA M HPL TOP, MAPLE RACK OAK VENEER TOP & RACK MAPLE VENEER TOP & RACK 36 W x 48 L x HGT 36 W x 48 L x HGT 36 W x 48 L x HGT DIAMETRON CARREL TABLE DOUBLE FACED FULL PANEL DNA HPL TOP, OAK RACK 36 W x 48 L x HGT DNA M HPL TOP, MAPLE RACK 36 W x 48 L x HGT DNA OAK VENEER TOP & RACK 36 W x 48 L x HGT DNA M MAPLE VENEER TOP & RACK 36 W x 48 L x HGT 72 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

73 Diametron Casegoods DIAMETRON 4 STATION DOUBLE FACED TABLE DNA DNA M DNA DNA M HPL TOP, RACK, OAK HPL TOP, RACK, MAPLE OAK TOP & RACK MAPLE TOP & RACK 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT DIAMETRON INDEX TABLE TOP: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and a.028 backer on the underside. The four corners are radiused 2-1/8. The entire perimeter of the top is externally banded with 5/8 x 1-1/4" thick oak or maple and radiused top and bottom 1/2. The four corners shall be sectored to provide a uniform 5/8 x 1-1/4" thick band detail. The bands are set flush to the high pressure laminate. No reveals or vein lines are permitted at the joint. Optional wood veneer tops have 3-ply veneered, particleboard core with edge bands set flush to the top surface. The undersides of the index table top will be fitted with two V-shaped, 14 gauge steel reinforcing keels. Keels are securely attached to the underside of the top by screws, and are parallel to the length of the table. LEG ASSEMBLY: Each assembly consists of a die cast aluminum hub, black epoxy powder coated and heat cured, attached to the table top with 5/16-18 x 1 socket cap screws. Hub is designed to receive the leg and apron rails. The outside radius of the hub conforms to the sectored band detail of the top. The legs are 2-1/2 diameter, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel, fitted with 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon adjustable glides. Legs are epoxy powder coated and heat cured. APRONS: The four sides of the table are fitted with 1 x 2, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel apron rails, epoxy powder coated and heat cured. The apron rails fit onto the die cast tongue of the leg assembly hub and are held in position by means of hidden tension screws. INDEX RACK: The dividers, back and shelves, are constructed of 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard with exposed edges banded with 5/16 solid oak or maple. The end and divider panels have 5/8 radius on the upper corners. All bands are continuous bullnose shaped. The rack assembly is secured to top by screws passing through the underside of the top and into the dividers. The shelves are adjustable and removable to accommodate computer equipment. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 29 H. Optional 25 and 27 heights may be specified. UL LISTING: Index tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). DHA DF/DT, HPL TOP, OAK 60 W x 60 L x HGT DHA M DF/DT, HPL TOP, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT DHA DF/DT, VENEER TOP, OAK 60 W x 60 L x HGT DHA M DF/DT, VENEER TOP, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT DHA DF/DT, HPL TOP, OAK 60 W x 90 L x HGT DHA M DF/DT, HPL TOP, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT DHA DF/DT, VENEER TOP, OAK 60 W x 90 L x HGT DHA M DF/DT, VENEER TOP, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

74 Diametron Casegoods DIAMETRON COMPUTER & REFERENCE TABLE TOP: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The four corners are radiused 2-1/8. The entire perimeter of the top is externally banded with 5/8 x 1-1/4" thick oak or maple and radiused top and bottom 1/2. The four corners are sectored to provide a uniform 5/8 x 1-1/4" thick band detail. The bands are set flush to the high pressure laminate. No reveals or vein permitted at the joint. Optional wood veneer tops have 3-ply veneered, particleboard core with edge bands set flush to the top surface. LEG ASSEMBLY: Each assembly consists of a die cast aluminum hub, black epoxy powder coated and heat cured, attached to the table top with 5/16-18 x 1 socket cap screws. Hub shall be designed to receive the leg and apron rails. Outside radius of the hub shall conform to the sectored band detail of the top. The legs are 2-1/2 diameter, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel, fitted with 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon adjustable glides. Legs are to be epoxy powder coated and heat cured. APRONS: The four sides of the table are fitted with 1 x 2, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel apron rails, epoxy powder coated and heat cured. The apron rails fit onto the die cast tongue of the leg assembly hub and are held in position by hidden tension screws. CALL SLIP BOX: Tables are equipped with a three compartment call slip unit, constructed of Baltic birch veneer core finished to match with reference table. The finished unit is positioned at the center of the Reference and at each end of the Computer table and screwed to underside of table top. Interior dimensions of each compartment are 3-1/2 high x 3-1/2 wide x 5 deep. TABLE RACK: The rack is constructed of 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select garde A veneers and all exposed edges banded with solid oak or maple bands. Racks are 10-1/2 high and screwed to table tops. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). DGA CT W/ RACK, HPL TOP, OAK 30 W x 72 L x 39 H DGA CT-M W/ RACK, HPL TOP, MAPLE 30 Wx72 Lx39 H DGA CT W/ RACK VENEER TOP, OAK 30 W x 72 L x 39 H DGA CT-M W/ RACK VENEER TOP, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x 39 H Reference Computer DGA HPL TOP, OAK 30 W x 72 L x 39 H DGA M HPL TOP, MAPLE 30 Wx72 Lx39 H DGA VENEER TOP, OAK 30 W x 72 L x 39 H DGA M VENEER TOP, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x 39 H 74 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

75 Diametron Casegoods DIAMETRON WORKSTATION TOP: The top shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and.028 thick backer sheet. The front edge shall receive a 5/8 wide x 1-3/16 thick, solid oak or maple band with a ½ radius along the top and bottom edges. The top shall be 26 deep and shall attach to the side panels by means of a black metal Z bar. The rear edge shall receive a black aluminum retaining lip, extending 5/8 above the top. The top shall be held 2 from the back panel to provide a cord drop. The width of the top shall be sized to match the specified unit width and may be placed at adjustable heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple faces. The top, bottom and vertical edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick, solid oak or maple, external bands. The top and bottom bands shall receive a 1/16 radius along the corners; the vertical edges shall be coped and chamfered to receive a 1-1/2 diameter steel post and fitted with concealed metal fasteners. Panels shall be fitted with threaded inserts on the inside face to allow attachment of tops at the heights described above. Additional inserts are positioned to allow mounting of the shelf; above or below the worksurface and the J-channel shelf at a lower position. The panel shall be positioned ¼ off the floor. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels are constructed the same as the end panels and fitted with threaded inserts on both faces and a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet. BACK PANELS: The back panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple faces. The top, bottom and vertical edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick, solid oak or maple, external bands. The top and bottom bands shall receive a 1/16 radius along the corners; the vertical edges shall be coped and chamfered to receive a 1-1/2 diameter steel post and fitted with concealed metal fasteners. When used in double faced configuration; back shall be fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the J channel, there shall be a 1-1/8 deep x 2-1/2 wide extruded black PVC J-channel with a 1-11/16 w lip on the face side for attachment to the back panel. J-CHANNEL SHELF: The J-channel shelf shall be ¾ thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused laminate face and back. The exposed edge shall be banded with.020 t black PVC. The shelf shall be bored to accept electrical components on the bottom face and shall install with cam fasteners machined into the bottom side. SHELF: The shelf shall be 1 thick x 10 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select A grade oak or maple veneer faces. The front edge shall be banded with a 1/8 thick hardwood band of matching specie. The bottom side of the shelf shall be fitted with four cam type fasteners, allowing locations above or below the work surface, 44 or 21-3/4 off the floor respectively. POSTS: Posts shall be 1-1/2 diameter, 13 gauge CREW steel tube, finished with an epoxy powder coat. The top of the post shall be fitted with a tamper resistant alloy dome cap, finished to match the post. The bottom of the post shall be fitted with a 1-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 high, adjustable black nylon foot. UL LISTING: Workstations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder DDE-36-WS SF STARTER, OAK 30-7/8 D x 36-7/8 W x49 H DDE-36-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 30-7/8 Dx35-11/16 W x49 H DDE-36-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 30-7/8 Dx35-11/16 W x49 H DDE-36-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 30-7/8 D x 36-7/8 W x49 H DDE-48-WS SF STARTER, OAK 30-7/8 Dx 50-11/16 Wx49 H DDE-48-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 30-7/8 D x 49-3/16 Wx49 H DDE-48-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 30-7/8 D x 49-3/16 Wx49 H DDE-48-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 30-7/8 Dx 50-11/16 Wx49 H DDE-72-WS SF STARTER, OAK 30-7/8 D x 74-3/8 W x 48 DDE-72-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 30-7/8 D x 73-3/16 W x 48 DDE-72-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 30-7/8 D x 73-3/16 W x DDE-72-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 30-7/8 D x 74-3/8 W x Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder DDE-36-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 36-7/8 W x49 H DDE-36-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 Dx35-11/16 W x49 H DDE-36-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-1/4 Dx35-11/16 Wx49 H DDE-36-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-1/4 D x 36-7/8 W x49 H DDE-48-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 Dx 50-11/16 Wx49 H DDE-48-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 49-3/16 Wx49 H DDE-48-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-1/4 Dx49-3/16 W x49 H DDE-48-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-1/4 Dx50-11/16 Wx49 H DDE-72-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 74-3/8 D x 48H DDE-72-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 W x 73-3/16 D x 48 H DDE-72-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-1/4 W x 73-3/16 D x 48H DDE-72-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-1/4 Dx74-3/8 Dx48 H The Worden Company Source Book October

76 Diametron Casegoods DIAMETRON OPAC HEX TOPS: Tops shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and.028 thick backer sheet. The front edge shall receive a 5/8 wide x 1-3/16 thick, solid oak or maple band with a ½ radius along the top and bottom edges. The top shall be 28 deep and shall attach to the side panels by means of a black metal Z bar. The rear edge shall receive a black aluminum retaining lip, extending 5/8 above the top. The top shall be held 1-1/2 from the back panel to provide a cord drop. The width of the top shall be 58-7/8 at the front and taper to 26 at the rear, tops are adjustable and may be placed at heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple faces. The top, bottom and front vertical edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick, solid oak or maple, external bands. The top and bottom bands shall receive a 1/16 radius along the corners; the front vertical edge shall be coped and chamfered to receive a 1-1/2 diameter steel post and fitted with concealed metal fasteners. The rear edge of the panel shall mount to a triangular, aluminum connecting post. Panels shall be fitted with threaded inserts on the inside face to allow attachment of tops at the heights described above. Additional inserts are positioned to allow mounting of the shelf below the top at 20 above the floor. J-channels mount to the bottom side of the shelf. The panel shall be positioned 1- ¼ off the floor. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels are constructed the same as the end panels and fitted with threaded inserts on both faces and a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet. BACK PANELS: The back panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick, solid oak or maple, external bands, the bands shall receive a 1/16 radius along the corners; the vertical edges shall be fitted with concealed fasteners and shall mount to triangular, aluminum connecting posts. The rear face of each back panel is fitted with inserts, allowing for half hex units to incorporate tops, caps, shelves and closure panels. Enclosed units shall include one back panel that is equipped with a removable access door and 3-1/2 PVC grommet accessing the yolk. PAPER SHELVES: Paper shelves shall be ¾ thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer faces. The front edge shall be banded with a 1/8 thick oak or maple band, the rear edge shall be banded with.020 t veneer. The bottom side of the shelf shall be fitted with four cam type fasteners allowing the shelf to be fastened to the unit end and intermediate panels. The shelf is held 1-1/2 away from the unit back panels. The bottom side of the shelf is drilled to accept J-channels. TOP CENTER CAP: Top center caps shall be available for both full and half hex units. The top center cap shall be 1-3/16 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 t high pressure laminate face and.028 t backer on the underside. The perimeter of the part shall be painted black. When installed, the part shall close off the center portion of the assembly and shall rest on wood cleats attached to the inner faces of the unit back panels. HALF HEX DISPLAY SHELVES: Half hex display shelves are ¾ thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer faces. The front and back edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick oak or maple bands. The shelf shall be machined along the bottom side to rest securely on adjustable shelf pins located on the adjacent back panels. MINI WORKSURFACE: The mini worksurface shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and.028 thick backer sheet. The front and back edges shall receive a 5/16 wide x 1-3/16 thick, solid oak or maple band with a 1/4 radius along the top and bottom edges. The top shall be 19-1/4 deep overall and shall attach to the side panels by means of a black metal Z bar. The top shall be held 1-1/2 from the back panel to provide a cord drop. The width of the top shall be 48-1/4 at the front and taper to 26 at the rear, tops are adjustable and may be placed at heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. HALF HEX CLOSURE PANEL: The half hex closure panel is ¾ thick 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer faces. The top and bottom edges of the panel are banded with a 5/16 thick solid oak or maple band. The panel shall be held in place with six bronze screws with cup washers. The screws pass through the closure panel and engage cleats fastened along the inside faces of the adjacent back panels. TRIANGULAR POSTS: The triangular posts shall be 1-1/4 per side, extruded aluminum, powder coated black and machined on all sides for shoulder screws. The top of the post shall be fitted with an injection molded, black plastic cap and the bottom shall be fitted with a threaded insert for a rubber cushioned, adjustable glide. GLIDES: Vertical panels are fitted with leveling glides. Levelers shall be 1-3/16 diameter, rubber cushioned chrome with a ¼ -20 x 15/16 long threaded stem, engaging a propeller nut imbedded in the bottom edge of the panels. POSTS: Posts shall be 1-1/2 diameter, 13 gauge CREW steel tube, finished with an epoxy powder coat. The top of the post shall be fitted with a tamper resistant alloy dome cap, finished to match the post. The bottom of the post shall be fitted with a 1-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 high, adjustable black nylon foot. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the J channel, there shall be a 1-1/8 deep x 2-1/2 wide extruded black PVC J-channel with a 1-11/16 w lip on the face side for attachment to the back panel. UL LISTING: Workstations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) or Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Model # Description Dimensions D-120-HCT OAK /2 DIAMETER, 49 H D-120-HCT-M MAPLE /2 DIAMETER, 49 H D-120-HCT-1 D-120-HCT-1-M CLOSED BACK, OAK CLOSED BACK, MAPLE /2 Wx53-1/4 Dx49 H /2 Wx53-1/4 Dx49 H D-120-HCT-2 D-120-HCT-2-M OPEN BACK W/ W/S, OAK OPEN BACK W/ W/S, MAPLE /2 Wx53-1/4 Dx49 H /2 Wx53-1/4 Dx49 H D-120-HCT-3 D-120-HCT-3-M OPEN BACK, ADJ SHELVES, OAK OPEN BACK, ADJ SHELVES, MAPLE /2 Wx53-1/4 Dx49 H /2 Wx53-1/4 Dx49 H 76 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

77 Diametron Casegoods DIAMETRON DISPLAY KIOSK DRE DRE M BASE & DIAKOTE POST/RAILS BASE & DIAKOTE POST/RAILS 35 x 35 x 62 H 35 x 35 x 62 H The core unit consists of a steel frame of 2 x 1, 16 gauge steel rails, cast aluminum, black epoxy powder coated hubs, and 2-1/2 diameter CREW steel tube posts. The top cap and base platform are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with select grade A oak or maple veneer on both sides, and oak or maple veneer edge bands. The base is enclosed with 3/4 thick black panels, and finished with 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon, adjustable glides. DIAMETRON MEDIA CAROUSEL Model # Description DRE04/VC DRE04/VC-M VIDEO TOWER, 5 TIER, OAK VIDEO TOWER, 5 TIER, MAPLE Video cassette carrousel: capacity=60 VCR tapes, two towers per face NOTE: These towers are for use in Kiosk, they are not functional without the core unit. DRE04/CD CD KIOSK, 8 TIER, OAK DRE04.CD-M CD KIOSK, 8 TIER, MAPLE Compact disc carrousel: capacity= 440 compact discs, one tower per face DRE04/PB DRE04/PB-M PAPERBACK, 6 TIER, OAK PAPERBACK, 6 TIER, MAPLE Paperback book carrousel: capacity=120 3/4 thick books, two towers per face DIAMETRON SLATWALL DISPLAY DRE04/SWP FIXED PANEL, OAK 28-1/2"W x 49-1/16" H DRE04/SWP-M DRE04/SWD FIXED PANEL, MAPLE HINGED DOOR, LOCK, OAK 28-1/2"W x 49-1/16" H 28-1/2"W x 48-3/16" H DRE04/SWD-M HINGED DOOR, LOCK, MAPLE 28-1/2"W x 48-3/16" H The solid oak frame, 1-1/4 thick x 1-3/4 wide, contains a 1 thick slatwall panel of plain sliced oak or maple veneer face and plastic inserts. DIAMETRON TACKBOARD KIOSK DRE04/TBD HINGED DOOR, LOCK, OAK 28-1/2"W x 49-1/16" H DRE04/TBD-M HINGED DOOR, LOCK, MAPLE 28-1/2"W x 49-1/16" H DRE04/TBP REMOVEABLE PANEL, OAK 28-1/2"W x 48-3/16" H DRE04/TBP-M REMOVEABLE PANEL, MAPLE 28-1/2"W x 48-3/16" H The solid oak or maple frame, 1-1/4 thick x 1-1/4 wide, borders a 1 thick tackboard panel, faced with 1/4 thick cork. DIAMETRON GLASS KIOSK DRE04/GLP DRE04/GLP-M FIXED PANEL - OAK FIXED PANEL - MAPLE 28-1/2"W x 49-1/16" H 28-1/2"W x 49-1/16" H DRE04/GLD HINGED DOOR, LOCK - OAK 28-1/2"W x 48-3/16" H DRE04/GLD-M HINGED DOOR, LOCK - OAK 28-1/2"W x 48-3/16" H The solid oak frame, 1-1/4 thick x 1-3/4 wide, contains a 1/4 panel of tempered glass. DIAMETRON GLASS & WOOD SHELF DRE04/GS 1/4 THK PLATE GLASS 30-1/4 x 30-13/16 DRE04/WS 3/4 THK ADJ. SHELF, OAK 30-1/4 x 30-13/16 DRE04/WS-M 3/4 THK ADJ. SHELF, MAPLE 30-1/4 x 30-13/16 Glass Shelf: Adjustable plate glass Wood Shelf: Adjustable oak or maple veneer shelf. The Worden Company Source Book October

78 Folio Casegoods FOLIO SQUARE TABLE TABLE TOP: Top shall be a 3-ply particleboard construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-3/16. The tops shall be externally banded with a 1-1/4 wide by 1-9/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band on all edges, and the bands shall form a miter joint at the corners. TABLE LEGS: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter, chrome glide with a 1 stem. Legs shall be attached to the underside of the table tops by means of a 5 square by 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and two flat head machine bolts. The leg assembly is then attached to the table top with five machine cap screws and threaded inserts. Model # Description Dimensions F-4242-B-C CHERRY 42 W x 42 L x HGT F-4242-B-M MAPLE 42 W x 42 L x HGT F-4848-B-C CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-B-M MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-6060-B-C CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-B-M MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT FOLIO ROUND TABLE TABLE TOP: Top shall be a 3-ply particleboard construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-3/16. The tops shall be externally banded with a series of 1-1/4 wide by 1-9/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band segments. TABLE LEGS: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter, chrome glide with a 1 stem. Legs shall be attached to the underside of the table tops by means of a 5 square by 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and two flat head machine bolts. The leg assembly is then attached to the table top with five machine cap screws and threaded inserts. Model # Description Dimensions F-042-B-C CHERRY 42 DIAMETER F-042-B-M MAPLE 42 DIAMETER F-048-B-C CHERRY 48 DIAMETER F-048-B-M MAPLE 48 DIAMETER F-060-B-C CHERRY 60 DIAMETER F-060-B-M MAPLE 60 DIAMETER 78 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

79 Folio Casegoods FOLIO RECTANGULAR TABLE TABLE TOPS: Study Table Tops: Tops shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-1/4. The edges of rectangular tops shall be externally banded on the short edges with a 1/4 wide by 1-9/16 high, flat solid hardwood band; and on the long edges with a 1-1/4 wide by 1-9/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band. The 1-1/4 wide bands shall extend over the 1/4 wide bands to form a butt joint at the corners. Tops which are 60 long and longer and less than 48 wide shall be fitted with one V-shaped, 14 gauge steel keel securely fastened to the underside of the top running parallel with its length. Tops which are 48 wide by 60 long and longer shall receive two of the aforementioned keels running parallel with the length of the top. Tops which are 60 wide by 60 long and longer shall receive four keels. When an electrical device is installed on the centerline of the worksurface, two V-keels will be installed on tops which are less than 48 wide and 60 long or longer. TABLE LEGS: Basic Study/Carrel Table Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter, chrome glide with a 1 stem. Legs shall be attached to the underside of rectangular and square table tops by means of a 5 square by 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and two flat head machine bolts engaging the barrel nut that is embedded in the leg. The leg assembly is then attached to the table top with five machine cap screws and threaded inserts. Legs shall be attached to the underside of round table tops by means of a 4 square by 5/16 thick steel plate which has a tang extending down from the bottom surface of the plate. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and one flat head machine bolt, as well as one wood screw through the tang and into the leg. The leg assembly is then attached to the table top with four machine cap screws and threaded inserts. bolts connecting the leg plate to the leg engage the barrel nut that is embedded in the leg 2-bar and 3-bar Study/Carrel Table Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter, chrome glide with a 1 stem. Legs shall be attached to the underside of rectangular and square table tops by means of a 5 square by 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and two flat head machine bolts. The leg assembly is then attached to the table top with five machine cap screws and threaded inserts. Floating Panel, Floating Metal Frame, and Floating Wood Frame Study/Carrel Table Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, an aluminum ferrule with powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter, chrome glide with a 1 stem. Legs shall be attached to the underside of rectangular and square table tops by means of a 5 square by 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and two flat head machine bolts. The leg assembly is then attached to the table top with five machine cap screws and threaded inserts. TABLE END OPTIONS: Basic End Stretchers: End stretchers shall be 1-1/2 square solid hardwood. Stretchers shall attach to the leg assemblies at each end by means of a dowel nut and a decorative head bolt. 2-Bar and 3-Bar End Frames: End frames shall be fabricated from various sizes of roll formed square steel tubing with a powder coat finish. Frames shall be assembled by means of internally integrated nuts and external decorative head bolts. Frames are mounted between the leg assemblies by means of decorative head bolts. When specified, optional insert panels shall be mounted into the 2-bar end frame by means of steel L-brackets; and, either collaborative barrel nuts and button head screws, or wood screws. The bottom stretcher in the end frame assemblies shall include a hole for fastening an optional trestle assembly. The hole shall be fitted with a decorative head bolt when no trestle is present. Floating Panel Ends: Floating panels shall be a 3-ply construction, consisting of medium density particleboard faced with material as specified, such as veneer or high pressure laminate, to achieve a nominal overall thickness of 1-1/4. The panel shall be externally banded with solid hardwood bands or self edged. The panels shall be suspended between the leg assemblies by means of four steel standoffs with a powder coat finish and decorative head bolts. Floating Wood Frame Ends: Wood frame ends shall be fabricated from solid hardwood and incorporate full lap and dowel joints unless the selected insert panel material allows for edge banding. Frames may be fitted with a wide variety of insert panels, including acrylic, or particleboard core covered with veneer or high pressure laminate. Frames shall be suspended between the leg assemblies by means of four steel standoffs with a powder coat finish and decorative head bolts. Floating Metal Frame Ends: Metal frame ends shall consist of a metal frame and an insert panel. The insert panel may be a wide variety of materials, such as acrylic, or particleboard core covered with veneer or high pressure laminate. The insert panels shall be fastened into the steel frame by means of L-brackets; and, either collaborative barrel nuts and button head screws, or wood screws. The steel frame shall be fabricated from roll formed steel tubing with welded and polished joints and a powder coat finish. The frame and panel assembly shall be suspended between the leg assemblies by means of four steel standoffs, which are welded to the metal frame, and decorative head bolts. The bottom horizontal member in the welded steel frame assemblies shall include a hole for fastening an optional trestle assembly. The hole shall be fitted with a decorative head bolt when no trestle is present. Optional Panel Materials: Panel materials for 2-bar end frames, wood frame ends, steel frame ends, and to some extent, floating ends may be selected from a wide variety of materials. Examples of such materials are: patterned or perforated decorative metal sheets, non-breakable glazing, fabric wrapped panels, figured veneers, high pressure laminates, colored acrylic or other translucent panels, or approved customer s own material. Durable printing options are also available using approved customer s own graphics. Contact your Worden Salesperson or Customer Service Representative for more information regarding panel options. The Worden Company Source Book October

80 Folio Casegoods FOLIO 2-BAR TABLE F C-1 CHERRY 36 W x 60 L x HGT F M-1 MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT F C-1 CHERRY 36 W x 72 L x HGT F M-1 MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT F C-1 CHERRY 36 W x 90 L x HGT F M-1 MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT F C-1 CHERRY 42 Wx 60 L x HGT F M-1 MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT F C-1 CHERRY 42 Wx 72 L x HGT F M-1 MAPLE 42 Wx 72 L x HGT F C-1 CHERRY 42 Wx 90 L x HGT F M-1 MAPLE 42 Wx 90 L x HGT F C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT FOLIO 3-BAR TABLE F C CHERRY 36 W x 60 L x HGT F M MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT F C CHERRY 36 W x 72 L x HGT F M MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT F C CHERRY 36 W x 90 L x HGT F M MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT F C CHERRY 42 W x 60 L x HGT F M MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT F C CHERRY 42 W x 72 L x HGT F M MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT F C CHERRY 42 W x 90 L x HGT F M MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT F C CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F M MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F C CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F M MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F C CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F M MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT FOLIO BASIC TABLE F-3660-B-C CHERRY 36 W x 60 L x HGT F-3660-B-M MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT F-3672-B-C CHERRY 36 W x 72 L x HGT F-3672-B-M MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT F-3690-B-C CHERRY 36 W x 90 L x HGT F-3690-B-M MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT F-4260-B-C CHERRY 42 W x 60 L x HGT F-4260-B-M MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT F-4272-B-C CHERRY 42 W x 72 L x HGT F-4272-B-M MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT F-4290-B-C CHERRY 42 W x 90 L x HGT F-4290-B-M MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT F-4860-B-C CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-B-M MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-B-C CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-B-M MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-B-C CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT 80 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

81 Folio Casegoods FOLIO FLOATING PANEL TABLE F-3660-FP-C-1 F-3660-FP-M-1 F-3672-FP-C-1 F-3672-FP-M-1 F-3690-FP-C-1 F-3690-FP-M-1 F-4260-FP-C-1 F-4260-FP-M-1 F-4272-FP-C-1 F-4272-FP-M-1 F-4290-FP-C-1 F-4290-FP-M-1 F-4860-FP-C-1 F-4860-FP-M-1 F-4872-FP-C-1 F-4872-FP-M-1 F-4890-FP-C-1 F-4890-FP-M-1 CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 60 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 72 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L x HGT 42 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT FOLIO METAL FRAME TABLE F-3660-MF-C-1 CHERRY 36 W x 60 L x HGT F-3660-MF-M-1 MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT F-3672-MF-C-1 CHERRY 36 W x 72 L x HGT F-3672-MF-M-1 MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT F-3690-MF-C-1 CHERRY 36 W x 90 L x HGT F-3690-MF-M-1 MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT F-4260-MF-C-1 CHERRY 42 W x 60 L x HGT F-4260-MF-M-1 MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT F-4272-MF-C-1 CHERRY 42 W x 72 L x HGT F-4272-MF-M-1 MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT F-4290-MF-C-1 CHERRY 42 W x 90 L x HGT F-4290-MF-M-1 MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT F-4860-MF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-MF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-MF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-MF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-MF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-MF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT FOLIO WOOD FRAME TABLE F-3660-WF-C-1 CHERRY 36 W x 60 L x HGT F-3660-WF-M-1 MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT F-3672-WF-C-1 CHERRY 36 W x 72 L x HGT F-3672-WF-M-1 MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT F-3690-WF-C-1 CHERRY 36 W x 90 L x HGT F-3690-WF-M-1 MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT F-4260-WF-C-1 CHERRY 42 W x 60 L x HGT F-4260-WF-M-1 MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT F-4272-WF-C-1 CHERRY 42 W x 72 L x HGT F-4272-WF-M-1 MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT F-4290-WF-C-1 CHERRY 42 W x 90 L x HGT F-4290-WF-M-1 MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT F-4860-WF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-WF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-WF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-WF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-WF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-WF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

82 Folio Casegoods FOLIO CARREL CARREL TABLE TOPS: Tops shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-1/4. The edges of all carrel table tops shall be externally banded on the end edges with a 1/4 wide by 1-9/16 high, flat solid hardwood band; and on the user edges with a 1-1/4 wide by 1-9/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band. The 1-1/4 wide bands shall extend over the 1/4 wide bands to form a butt joint at the corners. Tops which are 60 long and longer and less than 48 wide shall be fitted with one V-shaped, 14 gauge steel keel securely fastened to the underside of the top running parallel with its length. Tops which are 48 wide by 60 long and longer shall receive two of the aforementioned keels running parallel with the length of the top. Tops which are 60 wide by 60 long and longer shall receive four keels. When an electrical device is installed on the centerline of the worksurface, two V-keels will be installed on tops which are less than 48 wide and 60 long or longer. TABLE LEGS: Basic Study/Carrel Table Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter, chrome glide with a 1 stem. Legs shall be attached to the underside of rectangular and square table tops by means of a 5 square by 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and two flat head machine bolts engaging the barrel nut that is embedded in the leg. The leg assembly is then attached to the table top with five machine cap screws and threaded inserts. 2-bar and 3-bar Study/Carrel Table Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter, chrome glide with a 1 stem. Legs shall be attached to the underside of rectangular and square table tops by means of a 5 square by 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and two flat head machine bolts. The leg assembly is then attached to the table top with five machine cap screws and threaded inserts. Floating Panel, Floating Metal Frame, and Floating Wood Frame Study/Carrel Table Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, an aluminum ferrule with powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter, chrome glide with a 1 stem. Legs shall be attached to the underside of rectangular and square table tops by means of a 5 square by 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and two flat head machine bolts. The leg assembly is then attached to the table top with five machine cap screws and threaded inserts. TABLE END OPTIONS: Basic End Stretchers: End stretchers shall be 1-1/2 square solid hardwood. Stretchers shall attach to the leg assemblies at each end by means of a dowel nut and a decorative head bolt. 2-Bar and 3-Bar End Frames: End frames shall be fabricated from various sizes of roll formed square steel tubing with a powder coat finish. Frames shall be assembled by means of internally integrated nuts and external decorative head bolts. Frames are mounted between the leg assemblies by means of decorative head bolts. When specified, optional insert panels shall be mounted into the 2-bar end frame by means of steel L-brackets; and, either collaborative barrel nuts and button head screws, or wood screws. The bottom stretcher in the end frame assemblies shall include a hole for fastening an optional trestle assembly. The hole shall be fitted with a decorative head bolt when no trestle is present. Floating Panel Ends: Floating panels shall be a 3-ply construction, consisting of medium density particleboard faced with material as specified, such as veneer or high pressure laminate, to achieve a nominal overall thickness of 1-1/4. The panel shall be externally banded with solid hardwood bands or self edged. The panels shall be suspended between the leg assemblies by means of four steel standoffs with a powder coat finish and decorative head bolts. Floating Wood Frame Ends: Wood frame ends shall be fabricated from solid hardwood and incorporate full lap and dowel joints unless the selected insert panel material allows for edge banding. Frames may be fitted with a wide variety of insert panels, including acrylic, or particleboard core covered with veneer or high pressure laminate. Frames shall be suspended between the leg assemblies by means of four steel standoffs with a powder coat finish and decorative head bolts. Floating Metal Frame Ends: Metal frame ends shall consist of a metal frame and an insert panel. The insert panel may be a wide variety of materials, such as acrylic, or particleboard core covered with veneer or high pressure laminate. The insert panels shall be fastened into the steel frame by means of L-brackets; and, either collaborative barrel nuts and button head screws, or wood screws. The steel frame shall be fabricated from roll formed steel tubing with welded and polished joints and a powder coat finish. The frame and panel assembly shall be suspended between the leg assemblies by means of four steel standoffs, which are welded to the metal frame, and decorative head bolts. The bottom horizontal member in the welded steel frame assemblies shall include a hole for fastening an optional trestle assembly. The hole shall be fitted with a decorative head bolt when no trestle is present. Optional Panel Materials: Panel materials for 2-bar end frames, wood frame ends, steel frame ends, and to some extent, floating ends may be selected from a wide variety of materials. Examples of such materials are: patterned or perforated decorative metal sheets, non-breakable glazing, fabric wrapped panels, figured veneers, high pressure laminates, colored acrylic or other translucent panels, or approved customer s own material. Durable printing options are also available using approved customer s own graphics. Contact your Worden Salesperson or Customer Service Representative for more information regarding panel options. CARREL RACKS/DIVIDERS: 36 High Carrel Rack: Racks shall consist of end panels, back panels, and intermediate panels when required. End and intermediate panels shall be fabricated from 1 thick veneered medium density particleboard core with 1/8 thick solid hardwood edge bands. The top edge of the end and intermediate panels shall have an arc with the narrowest portion of the panel at the front edge. End and intermediate panels shall be attached to and elevated from the worksurface at each end of the panel by means of steel standoffs with a powder coat finish. The back panel shall be fabricated from 1 thick veneered medium density particleboard core with 1/8 thick solid hardwood edge bands. The back panel shall attach between the ends and intermediate panels by means of concealed hardware. 42 and 48 High Carrel Rack: Racks shall consist of end panels, back panels, and intermediate panels when required. The back panel shall be fabricated from 1 thick veneered medium density particleboard core and shall be surrounded on three edges by a fabricated steel frame with a powder coat finish. The frame shall attach to the worksurface at each end by means of decorative feet which shall be bolted to the table through the worksurface. End and intermediate panels shall be fabricated from 1 thick veneered medium density particleboard core with 1/8 thick solid hardwood edge bands. The top edge of the end and intermediate panels shall have an arc with the narrowest portion of the panel at the front edge. End and intermediate panels shall be attached to, and elevated from the worksurface at the front end of the panel by means of steel standoffs with a powder coat finish. The end and intermediate panels shall be attached to the back panel by means of concealed fasteners. 82 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

83 Folio Casegoods FOLIO CARREL cont'd Center Dividers: Dividers shall be fabricated from 1 thick veneered medium density particleboard core with 1/8 thick solid hardwood edge bands. The top edge of the panel shall have an arc with the narrowest portion of the panel at each end. The ends of the panel are to receive a steel post with a powder coat finish which shall be attached by means of concealed fasteners. The posts shall attach to the worksurface by means of decorative feet which shall be bolted to the table through the worksurface. FOLIO CENTER DIVIDER 2-BAR TABLE F-4836-CDC-2-C-1 F-4836-CDC-2-M-1 F-4842-CDC-2-C-1 F-4842-CDC-2-M-1 F-4848-CDC-2-C-1 F-4848-CDC-2-M-1 F-4860-CDC-2-C-1 F-4860-CDC-2-M-1 F-4872-CDC-2-C-1 F-4872-CDC-2-M-1 F-4890-CDC-2-C-1 CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-CDC-2-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-6036-CDC-2-C-1 F-6036-CDC-2-M-1 F-6042-CDC-2-C-1 F-6042-CDC-2-M-1 F-6048-CDC-2-C-1 F-6048-CDC-2-M-1 F-6060-CDC-2-C-1 F-6060-CDC-2-M-1 F-6072-CDC-2-C-1 F-6072-CDC-2-M-1 F-6090-CDC-2-C-1 F-6090-CDC-2-M-1 CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT FOLIO CENTER DIVIDER 3-BAR TABLE F-4836-CDC-3-C CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-CDC-3-M MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4842-CDC-3-C CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-CDC-3-M MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4848-CDC-3-C CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-CDC-3-M MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4860-CDC-3-C CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-CDC-3-M MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-CDC-3-C CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-CDC-3-M MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-CDC-3-C CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-CDC-3-M MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-6036-CDC-3-C CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-CDC-3-M MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6042-CDC-3-C CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-CDC-3-M MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6048-CDC-3-C CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-CDC-3-M MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6060-CDC-3-C CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-CDC-3-M MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6072-CDC-3-C CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-CDC-3-M MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6090-CDC-3-C CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-CDC-3-M MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

84 Folio Casegoods FOLIO CENTER DIVIDER BASIC TABLE F-4836-CDC-B-C F-4836-CDC-B-M F-4842-CDC-B-C F-4842-CDC-B-M F-4848-CDC-B-C F-4848-CDC-B-M F-4860-CDC-B-C F-4860-CDC-B-M F-4872-CDC-B-C F-4872-CDC-B-M F-4890-CDC-B-C F-4890-CDC-B-M F-6036-CDC-B-C F-6036-CDC-B-M F-6042-CDC-B-C F-6042-CDC-B-M F-6048-CDC-B-C CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-CDC-B-M MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6060-CDC-B-C F-6060-CDC-B-M F-6072-CDC-B-C F-6072-CDC-B-M F-6090-CDC-B-C F-6090-CDC-B-M CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT FOLIO CENTER DIVIDER FLOATING PANEL TABLE F-4836-CDC-FP-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-CDC-FP-M-1 F-4842-CDC-FP-C-1 F-4842-CDC-FP-M-1 F-4848-CDC-FP-C-1 F-4848-CDC-FP-M-1 F-4860-CDC-FP-C-1 F-4860-CDC-FP-M-1 F-4872-CDC-FP-C-1 F-4872-CDC-FP-M-1 F-4890-CDC-FP-C-1 F-4890-CDC-FP-M-1 F-6036-CDC-FP-C-1 F-6036-CDC-FP-M-1 F-6042-CDC-FP-C-1 F-6042-CDC-FP-M-1 F-6048-CDC-FP-C-1 F-6048-CDC-FP-M-1 F-6060-CDC-FP-C-1 F-6060-CDC-FP-M-1 F-6072-CDC-FP-C-1 F-6072-CDC-FP-M-1 F-6090-CDC-FP-C-1 F-6090-CDC-FP-M-1 MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE CHERRY MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT 84 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

85 Folio Casegoods FOLIO CENTER DIVIDER METAL FRAME TABLE F-4836-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4842-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4848-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4860-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-6036-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6042-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6048-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6060-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6072-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6090-CDC-MF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-CDC-MF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT FOLIO CENTER DIVIDER WOOD FRAME TABLE CHERRY F-4836-CDC-WF-C-1 F-4836-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4842-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4848-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4860-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-6036-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6042-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6048-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6060-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6072-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6090-CDC-WF-C-1 CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-CDC-WF-M-1 MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

86 Folio Casegoods FOLIO DOUBLE FACED CARREL RACK 2-BAR TABLE Model # F-4836-DC36-2-C-1 Description SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY Dimensions 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC36-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC42-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC42-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC48-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC48-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4842-DC36-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC36-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC42-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC42-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC48-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC48-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4848-DC36-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC36-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC42-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC42-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC48-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC48-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4860-DC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-DC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC42-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC42-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC48-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC48-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-6036-DC36-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC36-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC42-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC42-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC48-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC48-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6042-DC36-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC36-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC42-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC42-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC48-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC48-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6048-DC36-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC36-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC42-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC42-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC48-2-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC48-2-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6060-DC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6072-DC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6090-DC36-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC36-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC42-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC42-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC48-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC48-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT 86 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

87 Folio Casegoods FOLIO DOUBLE FACED CARREL RACK 3-BAR TABLE Model # Description Dimensions Double Opening Carrel Rack The Worden Company Source Book October 2011 F-4836-DC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4842-DC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4848-DC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4860-DC36-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC36-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC42-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC42-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC48-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC48-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-DC36-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC36-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC42-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC42-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC48-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC48-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC42-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC42-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC48-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC48-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-6036-DC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6042-DC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6048-DC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6060-DC36-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC36-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC42-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC42-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC48-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC48-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6072-DC36-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC36-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC42-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC42-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC48-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC48-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6090-DC36-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC36-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC42-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC42-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC48-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC48-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT 87

88 Folio Casegoods FOLIO DOUBLE FACED CARREL RACK BASIC TABLE Double Opening Carrel Rack F-4836-DC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4842-DC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4848-DC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4860-DC36-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC36-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC42-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC42-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC48-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC48-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-DC36-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC36-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC42-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC42-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC48-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC48-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC42-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC42-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC48-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC48-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-6036-DC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6042-DC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6048-DC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6060-DC36-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC36-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC42-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC42-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC48-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC48-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6072-DC36-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC36-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC42-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC42-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC48-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC48-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6090-DC36-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC36-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC42-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC42-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC48-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC48-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT 88 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

89 Folio Casegoods FOLIO DOUBLE FACED CARREL RACK FLOATING PANEL TABLE Double Opening Carrel Rack F-4836-DC36-FP-C-1 F-4836-DC36-FP-M-1 F-4836-DC42-FP-C-1 F-4836-DC42-FP-M-1 F-4836-DC48-FP-C-1 F-4836-DC48-FP-M-1 F-4842-DC36-FP-C-1 F-4842-DC36-FP-M-1 F-4842-DC42-FP-C-1 F-4842-DC42-FP-M-1 F-4842-DC48-FP-C-1 F-4842-DC48-FP-M-1 F-4848-DC36-FP-C-1 F-4848-DC36-FP-M-1 F-4848-DC42-FP-C-1 F-4848-DC42-FP-M-1 F-4848-DC48-FP-C-1 F-4848-DC48-FP-M-1 F-4860-DC36-FP-C-1 F-4860-DC36-FP-M-1 F-4860-DC42-FP-C-1 F-4860-DC42-FP-M-1 F-4860-DC48-FP-C-1 F-4860-DC48-FP-M-1 F-4872-DC36-FP-C-1 F-4872-DC36-FP-M-1 F-4872-DC42-FP-C-1 F-4872-DC42-FP-M-1 F-4872-DC48-FP-C-1 F-4872-DC48-FP-M-1 F-4890-DC36-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 42 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 48 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 60 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 72 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-FP-M-1 F-4890-DC42-FP-C-1 F-4890-DC42-FP-M-1 F-4890-DC48-FP-C-1 F-4890-DC48-FP-M-1 F-6036-DC36-FP-C-1 F-6036-DC36-FP-M-1 F-6036-DC42-FP-C-1 F-6036-DC42-FP-M-1 F-6036-DC48-FP-C-1 F-6036-DC48-FP-M-1 F-6042-DC36-FP-C-1 F-6042-DC36-FP-M-1 F-6042-DC42-FP-C-1 F-6042-DC42-FP-M-1 F-6042-DC48-FP-C-1 F-6042-DC48-FP-M-1 F-6048-DC36-FP-C-1 F-6048-DC36-FP-M-1 F-6048-DC42-FP-C-1 F-6048-DC42-FP-M-1 F-6048-DC48-FP-C-1 F-6048-DC48-FP-M-1 F-6060-DC36-FP-C-1 F-6060-DC36-FP-M-1 F-6060-DC42-FP-C-1 F-6060-DC42-FP-M-1 F-6060-DC48-FP-C-1 F-6060-DC48-FP-M-1 F-6072-DC36-FP-C-1 F-6072-DC36-FP-M-1 F-6072-DC42-FP-C-1 F-6072-DC42-FP-M-1 F-6072-DC48-FP-C-1 F-6072-DC48-FP-M-1 F-6090-DC36-FP-C-1 F-6090-DC36-FP-M-1 F-6090-DC42-FP-C-1 F-6090-DC42-FP-M-1 F-6090-DC48-FP-C-1 F-6090-DC48-FP-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 48 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 36 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 42 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT 60 W x 48 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 60 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 72 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT 60 W x 90 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

90 Folio Casegoods FOLIO DOUBLE FACED CARREL RACK METAL FRAME TABLE Double Opening Carrel Rack F-4836-DC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT F-4842-DC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4848-DC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4860-DC36-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC36-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC42-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC42-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC48-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC48-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-DC36-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC36-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC42-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC42-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC48-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC48-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC42-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC42-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC48-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC48-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-6036-DC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6042-DC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6048-DC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6060-DC36-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC36-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC42-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC42-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC48-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC48-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6072-DC36-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC36-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC42-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC42-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC48-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC48-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6090-DC36-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC36-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC42-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC42-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC48-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC48-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT 90 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

91 Folio Casegoods FOLIO DOUBLE FACED CARREL RACK WOOD FRAME TABLE Double Opening Carrel Rack The Worden Company Source Book October 2011 F-4836-DC36-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC36-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC42-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC42-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC48-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-4836-DC48-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-4842-DC36-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC36-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC42-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC42-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC48-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4842-DC48-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 42 L x HGT F-4848-DC36-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC36-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC42-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC42-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC48-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4848-DC48-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 48 L x HGT F-4860-DC36-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC36-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC42-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC42-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC48-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4860-DC48-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT F-4872-DC36-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC36-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC42-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC42-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC48-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4872-DC48-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-WF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC36-WF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC42-WF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC42-WF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC48-WF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-4890-DC48-WF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT F-6036-DC36-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC36-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC42-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC42-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC48-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6036-DC48-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 36 L x HGT F-6042-DC36-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC36-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC42-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC42-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC48-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6042-DC48-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 42 L x HGT F-6048-DC36-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC36-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC42-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC42-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC48-WF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6048-DC48-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 48 L x HGT F-6060-DC36-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC36-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC42-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC42-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC48-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6060-DC48-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 60 L x HGT F-6072-DC36-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC36-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC42-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC42-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC48-WF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6072-DC48-WF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 72 L x HGT F-6090-DC36-WF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC36-WF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC42-WF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC42-WF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC48-WF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 60 W x 90 L x HGT F-6090-DC48-WF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 60 W x 90 L x HGT 91

92 Folio Casegoods FOLIO SINGLE FACED CARREL RACK 2-BAR TABLE Double Opening Carrel Rack F-2436-SC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2442-SC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2448-SC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2460-SC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2472-SC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2490-SC36-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC36-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC42-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC42-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC48-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC48-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-3036-SC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3042-SC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3048-SC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3060-SC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3072-SC36-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC36-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC42-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC42-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC48-2-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC48-2-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3090-SC36-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC36-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC42-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC42-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC48-2-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC48-2-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT 92 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

93 Folio Casegoods FOLIO SINGLE FACED CARREL RACK 3-BAR TABLE Double Opening Carrel Rack The Worden Company Source Book October 2011 F-2436-SC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2442-SC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2448-SC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2460-SC36-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC36-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC42-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC42-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC48-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC48-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2472-SC36-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC36-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC42-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC42-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC48-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC48-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2490-SC36-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC36-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC42-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC42-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC48-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC48-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-3036-SC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3042-SC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3048-SC36-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC36-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC42-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC42-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC48-3-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC48-3-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3060-SC36-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC36-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC42-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC42-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC48-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC48-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3072-SC36-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC36-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC42-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC42-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC48-3-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC48-3-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3090-SC36-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC36-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC42-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC42-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC48-3-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC48-3-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT 93

94 Folio Casegoods FOLIO SINGLE FACED CARREL RACK BASIC TABLE Double Opening Carrel Rack F-2436-SC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2442-SC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2448-SC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2460-SC36-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC36-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC42-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC42-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC48-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC48-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2472-SC36-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC36-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC42-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC42-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC48-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC48-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2490-SC36-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC36-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC42-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC42-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC48-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC48-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-3036-SC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3042-SC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3048-SC36-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC36-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC42-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC42-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC48-B-C SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC48-B-M SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3060-SC36-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC36-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC42-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC42-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC48-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC48-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3072-SC36-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC36-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC42-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC42-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC48-B-C DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC48-B-M DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3090-SC36-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC36-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC42-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC42-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC48-B-C TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC48-B-M TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT 94 The Worden Company Source Book 2008

95 Folio Casegoods FOLIO SINGLE FACED CARREL RACK FLOATING PANEL TABLE Double Opening Carrel Rack F-2436-SC36-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC36-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC42-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC42-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC48-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC48-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2442-SC36-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC36-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC42-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC42-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC48-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC48-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2448-SC36-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC36-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC42-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC42-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC48-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC48-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2460-SC36-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC36-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC42-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC42-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC48-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC48-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2472-SC36-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC36-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC42-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC42-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC48-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC48-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2490-SC36-FP-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC36-FP-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC42-FP-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC42-FP-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC48-FP-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC48-FP-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-3036-SC36-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC36-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC42-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC42-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC48-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC48-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3042-SC36-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC36-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC42-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC42-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC48-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC48-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3048-SC36-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC36-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC42-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC42-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC48-FP-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC48-FP-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3060-SC36-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC36-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC42-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC42-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC48-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC48-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3072-SC36-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC36-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC42-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC42-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC48-FP-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC48-FP-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3090-SC36-FP-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC36-FP-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC42-FP-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC42-FP-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC48-FP-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC48-FP-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book

96 Folio Casegoods FOLIO SINGLE FACED CARREL RACK METAL FRAME TABLE Double Opening Carrel Rack F-2436-SC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2436-SC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT F-2442-SC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2442-SC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 42 L x HGT F-2448-SC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2448-SC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 48 L x HGT F-2460-SC36-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC36-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC42-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC42-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC48-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2460-SC48-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 60 L x HGT F-2472-SC36-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC36-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC42-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC42-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC48-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2472-SC48-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 72 L x HGT F-2490-SC36-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC36-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC42-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC42-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC48-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-2490-SC48-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 90 L x HGT F-3036-SC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3036-SC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 36 L x HGT F-3042-SC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3042-SC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 42 L x HGT F-3048-SC36-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC36-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC42-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC42-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC48-MF-C-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3048-SC48-MF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 48 L x HGT F-3060-SC36-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC36-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC42-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC42-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC48-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3060-SC48-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT F-3072-SC36-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC36-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC42-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC42-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC48-MF-C-1 DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3072-SC48-MF-M-1 DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x HGT F-3090-SC36-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC36-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC42-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC42-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC48-MF-C-1 TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY 30 W x 90 L x HGT F-3090-SC48-MF-M-1 TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 30 W x 90 L x HGT 96 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

97 Folio Casegoods FOLIO SINGLE FACED CARREL RACK WOOD FRAME TABLE Model # Description Dimensions Double Opening Carrel Rack F-2436-SC36-WF-C-1 F-2436-SC36-WF-M-1 F-2436-SC42-WF-C-1 F-2436-SC42-WF-M-1 F-2436-SC48-WF-C-1 F-2436-SC48-WF-M-1 F-2442-SC36-WF-C-1 F-2442-SC36-WF-M-1 F-2442-SC42-WF-C-1 F-2442-SC42-WF-M-1 F-2442-SC48-WF-C-1 F-2442-SC48-WF-M-1 F-2448-SC36-WF-C-1 F-2448-SC36-WF-M-1 F-2448-SC42-WF-C-1 F-2448-SC42-WF-M-1 F-2448-SC48-WF-C-1 F-2448-SC48-WF-M-1 F-2460-SC36-WF-C-1 F-2460-SC36-WF-M-1 F-2460-SC42-WF-C-1 F-2460-SC42-WF-M-1 F-2460-SC48-WF-C-1 F-2460-SC48-WF-M-1 F-2472-SC36-WF-C-1 F-2472-SC36-WF-M-1 F-2472-SC42-WF-C-1 F-2472-SC42-WF-M-1 F-2472-SC48-WF-C-1 F-2472-SC48-WF-M-1 F-2490-SC36-WF-C-1 F-2490-SC36-WF-M-1 F-2490-SC42-WF-C-1 F-2490-SC42-WF-M-1 F-2490-SC48-WF-C-1 F-2490-SC48-WF-M-1 F-3036-SC36-WF-C-1 F-3036-SC36-WF-M-1 F-3036-SC42-WF-C-1 F-3036-SC42-WF-M-1 F-3036-SC48-WF-C-1 F-3036-SC48-WF-M-1 F-3042-SC36-WF-C-1 F-3042-SC36-WF-M-1 F-3042-SC42-WF-C-1 F-3042-SC42-WF-M-1 F-3042-SC48-WF-C-1 F-3042-SC48-WF-M-1 F-3048-SC36-WF-C-1 F-3048-SC36-WF-M-1 F-3048-SC42-WF-C-1 F-3048-SC42-WF-M-1 F-3048-SC48-WF-C-1 F-3048-SC48-WF-M-1 F-3060-SC36-WF-C-1 F-3060-SC36-WF-M-1 F-3060-SC42-WF-C-1 F-3060-SC42-WF-M-1 F-3060-SC48-WF-C-1 F-3060-SC48-WF-M-1 F-3072-SC36-WF-C-1 F-3072-SC36-WF-M-1 F-3072-SC42-WF-C-1 F-3072-SC42-WF-M-1 F-3072-SC48-WF-C-1 F-3072-SC48-WF-M-1 F-3090-SC36-WF-C-1 F-3090-SC36-WF-M-1 F-3090-SC42-WF-C-1 F-3090-SC42-WF-M-1 F-3090-SC48-WF-C-1 F-3090-SC48-WF-M-1 SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE SINGLE OPENING, CHERRY SINGLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE DOUBLE OPENING, CHERRY DOUBLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE TRIPLE OPENING, CHERRY TRIPLE OPENING, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 42 L x HGT 24 W x 42 L x HGT 24 W x 42 L x HGT 24 W x 42 L x HGT 24 W x 42 L x HGT 24 W x 42 L x HGT 24 W x 48 L x HGT 24 W x 48 L x HGT 24 W x 48 L x HGT 24 W x 48 L x HGT 24 W x 48 L x HGT 24 W x 48 L x HGT 24 W x 60 L x HGT 24 W x 60 L x HGT 24 W x 60 L x HGT 24 W x 60 L x HGT 24 W x 60 L x HGT 24 W x 60 L x HGT 24 W x 72 L x HGT 24 W x 72 L x HGT 24 W x 72 L x HGT 24 W x 72 L x HGT 24 W x 72 L x HGT 24 W x 72 L x HGT 24 W x 90 L x HGT 24 W x 90 L x HGT 24 W x 90 L x HGT 24 W x 90 L x HGT 24 W x 90 L x HGT 24 W x 90 L x HGT 30 W x 36 L x HGT 30 W x 36 L x HGT 30 W x 36 L x HGT 30 W x 36 L x HGT 30 W x 36 L x HGT 30 W x 36 L x HGT 30 W x 42 L x HGT 30 W x 42 L x HGT 30 W x 42 L x HGT 30 W x 42 L x HGT 30 W x 42 L x HGT 30 W x 42 L x HGT 30 W x 48 L x HGT 30 W x 48 L x HGT 30 W x 48 L x HGT 30 W x 48 L x HGT 30 W x 48 L x HGT 30 W x 48 L x HGT 30 W x 60 L x HGT 30 W x 60 L x HGT 30 W x 60 L x HGT 30 W x 60 L x HGT 30 W x 60 L x HGT 30 W x 60 L x HGT 30 W x 72 L x HGT 30 W x 72 L x HGT 30 W x 72 L x HGT 30 W x 72 L x HGT 30 W x 72 L x HGT 30 W x 72 L x HGT 30 W x 90 L x HGT 30 W x 90 L x HGT 30 W x 90 L x HGT 30 W x 90 L x HGT 30 W x 90 L x HGT 30 W x 90 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

98 Folio Casegoods/Electrical FOLIO ELECTRICAL/DATA Trestle Assembly: Trestle assemblies shall be fabricated from various sizes of roll formed square steel tubing and sheet metal with a powder coat finish. The welded portion of the assembly consists of a horizontal U-channel, and two vertical members, each welded at the top to a steel bracket which shall be attached to the underside of the worksurface. The assembly also consists of two removable formed sheet metal covers, which, when installed, form a wire management chase from the underside of the worksurface down to the floor. One such cover contains two fabricated brackets which are welded to the inside face of the cover to provide a means for spooling excess wire or cable. The trestle assembly shall be mounted by means of wood screws into the underside of the worksurface, and decorative head bolts which attach to the table ends. Top Mount Grommet Assembly: The top mount grommet assembly shall be fabricated from formed 14 gauge steel with a powder coat finish. The grommet is recessed into the table top and rests on a formed steel flange. A fabricated steel lid is fitted into the grommet housing and is held in place by means of wing nuts and washers accessible only from the underside to prevent tampering. The lid also features black filament brushes at each end. The entire grommet assembly shall be fastened to the worksurface by means of a wood screw into the edge of the worksurface cutout. Table Top Power/Data Device: The table top power/data device shall be fabricated from formed 14 gauge steel with a powder coat finish. Each device shall be fitted with four 15 amp grounded simplexes and four data knock-outs. The unit shall be mounted to the table top by means of two concealed studs, wing nuts, and self centering brackets, accessible only from the underside to prevent tampering. A 9 cord with a 15 amp grounded straight plug shall exit the center, bottom side of the assembly; data ports are accessible at each end through the bottom of the box assembly. Table Top Reading Light: Table top reading lights include lamp housing, three bar stem assembly and a table top power/data device. The lamp housing is extruded aluminum with metal end cap assemblies. A pair of T-5 fluorescent bulbs, operating ballast, reflector panel and extruded refractive lenses are concealed within the housing. The lamps are operated by a single rocker switch, located at the bottom center of the lamp housing. The three bar stem assembly is fabricated from tubular steel with a formed metal mounting bracket at the top. The power/data device features one simplex and two data port knockouts per face. A single 9 power cord with 15 amp, grounded straight plug exits the bottom of the unit. Two formed metal brackets are supplied to firmly hold the unit into a hole cut through the table top. All metal components receive a powder coat finish. Data jacks are sold separately. FOLIO DOUBLE FACED POWER/DATA F-PD W/ 4 RECEPTACLES & 3"W x 9"L x 1-5/8"H 4 DATA KNOCKOUTS (OPEN) see electrical section for data jack options F-PD-P W/ 4 RECEPTACLES & 3"W x 9"L x 1-5/8"H 4 DATA KNOCKOUTS W/ COVERS see electrical section for data jack options FOLIO GROMMET F-GR GROMMET W/ COVER 3"W x 9"L FOLIO LIGHT FIXTURE F-LIGHT W/ 2 RECEPTACLES (1 PER FACE) 4"W x 52-1/2"L x 19"H 4 DATA KNOCK-OUTS (OPEN) 15-13/16" TO BOTTOM SIDE - 9' CORD see electrical section for data jack options F-LIGHT-P W/ 2 RECEPTACLES (1 PER FACE) 4"W x 52-1/2"L x 19"H 4 DATA KNOCK-OUTS W/COVERS 15-13/16" TO BOTTOM SIDE - 9' CORD see electrical section for data jack options FOLIO TRESTLE Model # Dimensions F-T-36 F-T-42 F-T-48 F-T-60 F-T-72 F-T W x HGT 42 W x HGT 48 W x HGT 60 W x HGT 72 W x HGT 90 W x HGT 98 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

99 Franklin Casegoods FRANKLIN ATLAS STAND FR-AS STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK 24-1/4 W x 24-1/4 D x 44-7/8"H FR-AS-J STRAIGHT EDGE, JUV HGT, OAK 24-1/4 W x 24-1/4 D x 34-7/8"H Juvenile Sloped top assembly is 1-1/4 thick with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face. All edges are self-edged. A wood retaining strip is provided on the face of the top, along the front edge. End panels are 1 thick, 3-ply balanced particleboard construction with oak veneers. All four edges of the panels are banded with 3mm oak banding. Pull-out storage shelves are 3/4 thick, TFL over particleboard, operating on 3/4 extension epoxy slides. Unit comes equipped with adjustable leveling glides. FRANKLIN COMPUTER STAND FR-CS STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK 24 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FR-CS-J STRAIGHT EDGE, JUV HGT, OAK 24 W x 24 D x 34-7/8 H Juvenile Adjustable worksurface is 1-1/4 thick with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face. The front edge is self edged with a 3mm oak band. The worksurface is attached to the side and back panels by means of a black oxided metal Z-bar secured to the underside of the worksurface. A 2 cord drop is provided at the rear of the top, adjustable shelf and bottom. End panels are 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with oak veneers. All four edges of the panels are banded with 3mm oak banding. The unit has one adjustable shelf and one base shelf. Both shelves are veneer faced with oak banding. The unit comes equipped with adjustable leveling glides. FRANKLIN DICTIONARY STAND FR-DS STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK 24-1/4 W x 24-1/4 D x 44-7/8"H FR-DS-J STRAIGHT EDGE, JUV HGT, OAK 24-1/4 W x 24-1/4 D x 44-7/8"H Juvenile Sloped top assembly is 1-1/4 thick with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face. All edges are self-edged. A wood retaining strip is provided on the face of the top, along the front edge. End panels are 1 thick, 3-ply balanced particleboard construction with oak veneers. All four edges of the panels are banded with 3mm oak banding. The unit has one adjustable shelf and one base shelf. Both shelves are veneer faced with oak banding. The unit comes equipped with adjustable leveling glides. The Worden Company Source Book October

100 Franklin Casegoods FRANKLIN TABLE TABLE TOP: Tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, including a.050 thick high-pressure laminate top surface and a backing sheet.028 thick. Edges are banded with 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak internal drop edge band. Straight Edge: profiled to be a straight edge Bullnose Edge: 1-1/2 radius Tapered Edge: 13 degree tapered bevel with a ¼ radius on the top edge The computer table will have one grommet in the back center of the table. LEGS: Legs will be 2-1/4 square, solid oak. Legs will attach to table tops by means of a 5 square x 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is attached to the leg by two 5/16 x 3 machine bolts engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut inserted into the leg. The steel plate is attached to the table top by five (5) 5/16 x 1 machine bolts engaging threaded inserts in the underside of the table top. Leg plates will be positioned behind, and hidden by the extended table top edge band. RACK (COMPUTER TABLE): Rack is 1 thick x 10-1/2 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with oak veneers. All exposed edges are banded with 3mm oak bands. Racks are screwed to the table tops. TABLE TOP SUPPORT: For maximum rigidity, rectangular tables, 60 or longer, will receive a V-shaped, 14 gauge steel keel securely fastened to the underside of the table top. Tables 48 deep and 60 wide or longer will receive two steel keels parallel to the length of the table. TABLE TOP HEIGHT: All tables will be 29, except when 25 or 27 heights are specified. GLIDES: Each leg will have a 1-3/16 diameter adjustable rubber cushioned leveling glide with a 15/16 stem. FRANKLIN RECTANGULAR TABLE Model # Description Dimensions FRB-2436 FRB-3048 FRB-3060 FRB-3072 FRB-3660 FRB-3672 FRB-4260 FRB-4272 FRB-4860 FRB-4872 FRS-2436 FRS-3048 FRS-3060 FRS-3072 FRS-3660 FRS-3672 FRS-4260 FRS-4272 FRS-4860 FRS-4872 FRT-2436 FRT-3048 FRT-3060 FRT-3072 FRT-3660 FRT-3672 FRT-4260 FRT-4272 FRT-4860 FRT-4872 BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK TAPERED EDGE, OAK TAPERED EDGE, OAK TAPERED EDGE, OAK TAPERED EDGE, OAK TAPERED EDGE, OAK TAPERED EDGE, OAK TAPERED EDGE, OAK TAPERED EDGE, OAK TAPERED EDGE, OAK TAPERED EDGE, OAK 36 W x 24 D x HGT 48 W x 30 D x HGT 60 W x 30 D x HGT 72 W x 30 D x HGT 60 W x 36 D x HGT 72 W x 36 D x HGT 60 W x 42 D x HGT 72 W x 42 D x HGT 60 W x 48 D x HGT 72 W x 48 D x HGT 36 W x 24 D x HGT 48 W x 30 D x HGT 60 W x 30 D x HGT 72 W x 30 D x HGT 60 W x 36 D x HGT 72 W x 36 D x HGT 60 W x 42 D x HGT 72 W x 42 D x HGT 60 W x 48 D x HGT 72 W x 48 D x HGT 36 W x 24 D x HGT 48 W x 30 D x HGT 60 W x 30 D x HGT 72 W x 30 D x HGT 60 W x 36 D x HGT 72 W x 36 D x HGT 60 W x 42 D x HGT 72 W x 42 D x HGT 60 W x 48 D x HGT 72 W x 48 D x HGT 100 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

101 Franklin Casegoods FRANKLIN ROUND TABLE FRB-042 BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK 42 DIA x HGT FRB-048 BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK 48 DIA x HGT FRB-060 BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK 60 DIA x HGT FRS-042 STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK 42 DIA x HGT FRS-048 STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK 48 DIA x HGT FRS-060 STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK 60 DIA x HGT FRT-042 TAPERED EDGE, OAK 42 DIA x HGT FRT-048 TAPERED EDGE, OAK 48 DIA x HGT FRT-060 TAPERED EDGE, OAK 60 DIA x HGT FRANKLIN SQUARE TABLE FRB-4242 BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK 42 W x 42 D x HGT FRB-4848 BULLNOSE EDGE, OAK 48 W x 48 D x HGT FRS-4242 STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK 42 W x 42 D x HGT FRS-4848 STRAIGHT EDGE, OAK 48 W x 48 D x HGT FRT-4242 TAPERED EDGE, OAK 42 W x 42 D x HGT FRT-4848 TAPERED EDGE, OAK 48 W x 48 D x HGT FRANKLIN RECTANLULAR COMPUTER TABLE FRB-2436-CT W/ SHEILD BULLNOSE EDGE 36 W x 24 L x HGT FRB-3048-CT W/ SHEILD BULLNOSE EDGE 48 W x 30 L x HGT FRS-2436-CT W/ SHEILD STRAIGHT EDGE 26 W x 24 L x HGT FRS-3048-CT W/ SHEILD STRAIGHT EDGE 48 W x 30 L x HGT FRT-2436-CT W/ SHEILD TAPERED EDGE 36 W x 24 L x HGT FRT-3048-CT W/ SHEILD TAPERED EDGE 48 W x 30 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

102 Franklin Casegoods FRANKLIN WORKSTATION WORKSURFACE: Tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, including a.050 thick high-pressure laminate top surface and a backing sheet.028 thick. Front edges are banded with 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak internal drop edge band. Straight Edge: profiled to be a straight edge, Bullnose Edge: 1-1/2 radius, Tapered Edge: 13 degree tapered bevel with a ¼ radius on the top edge Back edge will have a black PVC retaining lip extending 5/8 above the worksurface. The worksurface will be held away from the back panel 2 to provide a cord drop. The worksurface is attached to the side panel by means of a black oxided metal Z-bar secured to the underside of the worksurface. Worksurface is 36, 42 or 48 wide (36 wide only on Quad Workstations). Units are available in nominal depths of 24 and 30. END PANELS: End panels will be 1 thick, 3-ply balanced particleboard construction with oak veneers. Panels will be banded on all four edges with 3mm oak bands. All four corners of panel are to be a straight edge. End panels will be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable worksurface heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. INTERMEDIATE PANEL: The intermediate panels will be the same as the end panels and will be through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and will be machined to allow passage of electrical and data cables. BACK PANEL: Back panel is 1 thick, 3-ply balanced particleboard construction with oak veneers. Top and bottom edges are banded with 1.6mm oak bands with a straight edge. The panel is set down 1/8 from top of side panels and terminates 6 above floor (varies with glide extension). SHELF: The shelf is 1 thick, 3-ply balanced particleboard construction with oak veneers. The shelf may be located above the worksurface, 44 above the floor, or below the worksurface, 21-3/4 above the floor (varies with glide extension). Shelves will be attached with cams. GLIDES: Each panel will have a pair of 1-3/16 diameter adjustable rubber cushioned leveling glide with a 15/16 stem. ELECTRICAL AND WIRE MANAGEMENT: All wire management and electrical channels (when specified) will be attached to the back panel. Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Starter & Adder FRB-2436-W SF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE 36 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-2436-W-A SF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 36 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-2442-W SF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE 42 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-2442-W-A SF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 42 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-2448-W SF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE 48 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-2448-W-A SF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 48 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-3036-W SF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE 36 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-3036-W-A SF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 36 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-3042-W SF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE SF,42 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-3042-W-A SF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 42 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-3048-W SF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE SF,48 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-3048-W-A SF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 48 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-2436-W SF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE SF,36 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-2436-W-A SF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 36 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-2442-W SF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE SF,42 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-2442-W-A SF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 42 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-2448-W SF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE SF,48 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-2448-W-A SF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 48 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-3036-W SF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE SF,36 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-3036-W-A SF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 36 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-3042-W SF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE SF,42 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-3042-W-A SF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 42 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-3048-W SF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE SF,48 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-3048-W-A SF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 48 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-2436-W SF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 36 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-2436-W-A SF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 36 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-2442-W SF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 42 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-2442-W-A SF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 42 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-2448-W SF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 48 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-2448-W-A SF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 48 W x 24 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-3036-W SF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 36 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-3036-W-A SF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 36 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-3042-W SF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 42 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-3042-W-A SF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 42 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-3048-W SF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 48 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-3048-W-A SF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 48 W x 30 D x 44-7/8 H 102 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

103 Franklin Casegoods FRANKLIN WORKSTATION cont'd Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Starter & Adder FRB-4836-DW DF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE DF,36 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-4836-DW-A DF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 36 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-4842-DW DF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE DF,42 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-4842-DW-A DF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 42 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-4848-DW DF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE DF,48 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-4848-DW-A DF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 48 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-6036-DW DF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE DF,36 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-6036-DW-A DF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 36 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-6042-DW DF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE DF,42 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-6042-DW-A DF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 42 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-6048-DW DF STARTER, BULLNOSE EDGE DF,48 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRB-6048-DW-A DF ADDER, BULLNOSE EDGE 48 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-4836-DW DF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE DF,36 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-4836-DW-A DF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 36 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-4842-DW DF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE 42 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-4842-DW-A DF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 42 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-4848-DW DF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE 48 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-4848-DW-A DF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 48 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-6036-DW DF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE 36 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-6036-DW-A DF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 36 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-6042-DW DF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE 42 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-6042-DW-A DF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 42 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-6048-DW DF STARTER, STRAIGHT EDGE 48 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRS-6048-DW-A DF ADDER, STRAIGHT EDGE 48 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-4836-DW DF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 36 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-4836-DW-A DF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 36 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-4842-DW DF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 42 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-4842-DW-A DF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 42 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-4848-DW DF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 48 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-4848-DW-A DF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 48 W x 48 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-6036-DW DF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 36 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-6036-DW-A DF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 36 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-6042-DW DF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 42 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-6042-DW-A DF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 42 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-6048-DW DF STARTER, TAPERED EDGE 48 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRT-6048-DW-A DF ADDER, TAPERED EDGE 48 W x 60 D x 44-7/8 H FRB WQ FRB WQ WKSTN/QUAD/24 D WKSF WKSTN/QUAD/30 D WKSF 72W X 72D X 44-7/8 H 72W X 72D X 44-7/8 H FRS WQ FRS WQ WKSTN/QUAD/24 D WKSF WKSTN/QUAD/30 D WKSF 72W X 72D X 44-7/8 H 72W X 72D X 44-7/8 H Quad Carrel FRT WQ FRT WQ WKSTN/QUAD/24 D WKSF WKSTN/QUAD/30 D WKSF 72W X 72D X 44-7/8 H 72W X 72D X 44-7/8 H The Worden Company Source Book October

104 Liberty Desk LIBERTY ASSEMBLY: The Liberty Desk Series is modular in design allowing for reconfiguration after initial installation. Individual units are fully assembled in the factory. Each unit is supplied with an individual top. Units are fully finished and are joined using a series of connector nuts and bolts. Each unit is equipped with a panel mount leveling glides. TOPS: Tops shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-1/4. All edges of the tops shall be externally banded with a 1.6mm (1/16 ) thick solid wood band. CABINET CONSTRUCTION: Cabinet components shall be constructed from 3/4 thick particle board with maple or red oak veneer. All modules shall be flush inset style on the functional side. On the patron side, the front shall overlap the ends. All exposed edges of cabinet components shall be banded with a 0.5mm (+1/64 ) thick solid wood band. All modules shall have adjustable glides. Cabinets shall be assembled using modular hardware. END PANELS: End panels shall be ordered individually. Two end panels are required for a typical desk assembly. CLOSED BASE: All modules which have a closed base shall have toe-kick panels faced with veneer and finished to match the case. The bottom shelf shall be removable, providing access to building electrical. ADJUSTABLE SHELVES: Adjustable storage shelves shall be 3/4 thick in units 36 wide or less, and 1 thick in units over 36 wide. They shall be constructed using 3-ply particle board with veneer on both faces. Shelves shall rest on steel shelf pins which are adjustable on 32mm increments. HINGED DOORS: Doors shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particle board with veneer on both faces. Each door shall be attached to the cabinet by means of two European style door hinges. Each door shall be fitted with a black pull. One lock shall be fitted into each set of doors. DRAWERS: Drawer boxes shall be constructed using 1/2 hardwood plywood with maple veneer on both faces, matching PVC bands along the top edge and shall incorporate dowel joinery. The bottom panel shall be 1/4 thick plywood. Drawers are mounted using full extension, 100lb rated, ball bearing, telescoping slides. All drawers shall be lockable. TRANSACTION LEDGES: A transaction ledge top and front is available for each width of unit and for each corner unit. The transaction ledge assembly shall attach to the underside of the top with a steel bracket. ADA ROUND EDGE TOP: An optional extended top with a round front edge is available for 36 wide units. MODULE INSTALLATION: Modules shall be attached together by means of connector nuts and bolts with decorative heads. ELECTRICAL: Side panels of each unit shall be machined for wire passage. Electrical passage channels shall consist of two part, rear mount, formed metal channels with black powder coat finish. Channels may be ordered with a series of outlets and optional data ports. HEIGHTS: Standard height is 39 ; juvenile height is 32-5/8. LIBERTY BOOK RETURN UNIT L-CD-BRU OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-BRU-M MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-BRU-J JUV HGT, OAK 33'H x 36"W x 30"D L-CD-BRU-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33'H x 36"W x 30"D Unit shall have an open base. The front panel shall have an open slot to drop books through. A book chute of metal is provided to guide books into book truck, ordered separately. LIBERTY UNIT WITH FIXED WORKSURFACE L-CD-DE-36 OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-36-M MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-36-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-36-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-42 OAK 39 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-42-M MAPLE 39 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-42-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-42-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-48 OAK 39 H x 48 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-48-M MAPLE 39 H x 48 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-48-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 48 W x 30 D L-CD-DE-48-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 48 W x 30 D L-CD-DEX-60 L-CD-DEX-60-M L-CD-DEX-60-J L-CD-DEX-60-J-M L-CD-DEX-72 L-CD-DEX-72-M L-CD-DEX-72-J L-CD-DEX-72-J-M OAK MAPLE JUV HGT, OAK JUV HGT, MAPLE OAK MAPLE JUV HGT, OAK JUV HGT, MAPLE 39"H x 60"W x 30"D 39"H x 60"W x 30"D 33"H x 60"W x 30"D 33"H x 60"W x 30"D 39"H x 72"W x 30"D 39"H x 72"W x 30"D 33"H x 72"W x 30"D 33"H x 72"W x 30"D 104 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

105 Liberty Desk LIBERTY UNIT WITH ADJUSTABLE WORKSURFACE L-CD-DEA-36 OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-36-M MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-36-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-36-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-42 OAK 39 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-42-M MAPLE 39 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-42-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-42-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-48 OAK 39 H x 48 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-48-M MAPLE 39 H x 48 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-48-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 48 W x 30 D L-CD-DEA-48-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 48 W x 30 D Unit shall have an open base. The worksurface shall be adjustable down to 32-5/8, 29, and 27-5/8 high. LIBERTY UNIT WITH EXTENDED ADJUSTABLE WORKSURFACE Model # L-CD-DEAX-60 Description OAK Dimensions 39 H x 60 W x 30 D L-CD-DEAX-60-M MAPLE 39 H x 60 W x 30 D L-CD-DEAX-60-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 60 W x 30 D L-CD-DEAX-60-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 60 W x 30 D L-CD-DEAX-72 OAK 39 H x 72 W x 30 D L-CD-DEAX-72-M MAPLE 39 H x 72 W x 30 D L-CD-DEAX-72-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 72 W x 30 D L-CD-DEAX-72-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 72 W x 30 D Unit shall have an open base. The worksurface shall be adjustable down to 32-5/8, 29, and 27-5/8 high. A gusset shall be provided to support the top. LIBERTY FIXED WORKSURFACE WITH DRAWER L-CD-DED-36 OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-36-M MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-36-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-36-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-42 OAK 39 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-42-M MAPLE 39 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-42-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-42-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 42 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-48 OAK 39 H x 48 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-48-M MAPLE 39 H x 48 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-48-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H x 48 W x 30 D L-CD-DED-48-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H x 48 W x 30 D Unit shall have an open base. One full width drawer shall be provided under the worksurface. The Worden Company Source Book October

106 Liberty Desk LIBERTY CLOSED STORAGE UNIT L-CD-HD ADJ SHELVES, OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HD-M ADJ SHELVES, MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HD-J JUV HGT, ADJ SHELF, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HD-J-M JUV HGT, ADJ SHELF, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 30 D Unit shall have two adjustable shelves, a closed base, and two doors. Juvenile height unit shall have one adjustable shelf. L-CD-HDD ADJ SHELF W/DRAWER, OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HDD-M ADJ SHELF W/DRAWER, MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HDD-J JUV ADJ SHELF W/DRAWER, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HDD-J-M JUV ADJ SHELF W/DRAWER, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 30 D Unit shall have two adjustable shelves, one full width drawer at the top, two doors below the drawer, and a closed base. Juvenile height shall have one adjustable shelf. L-CD-HDFF W/ B/F/F DRAWERS, OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HDFF-M W/ B/F/F DRAWERS, MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HDFF-J JUV W/ B/F/F DRAWERS, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HDFF-J-M JUV W/ B/F/F DRAWERS, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 30 D On one side, the unit shall have two adjustable shelves and a door, and the other side shall have one box and two file drawers. The units shall be ordered with either a left hand or a right hand door. The unit shall have a closed base. Juvenile height unit shall have one adjustable shelf on one side, and the other side shall have two file drawers. LIBERTY 1/2 CLOSED STORAGE UNIT L-CD-HDO 1/2 OPEN/ADJ SHELVES, OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HDO-M 1/2 OPEN/ADJ SHELVES, MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HDO-J JUV 1/2 OPEN/ADJ SHELVES, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-HDO-J-M JUV 1/2 OPEN/ADJ SHELVES, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 30 D On one side, the unit shall have two adjustable shelves and a door, and the other side shall have two adjustable shelves only. The units shall be ordered with either a left hand or a right hand door. The unit shall have a closed base. Juvenile height unit shall have one adjustable shelf and a door, and the other side shall have one adjustable shelf only. LIBERTY RECESSED FRONT UNIT L-CD-O-ADA-J JUV HGT, ADA, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 36 D L-CD-O-ADA-J-M JUV HGT, ADA, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 36 D Unit shall have a closed base and one 12 deep adjustable shelf on the librarian side, and shall have an open base for ADA access on the patron side. L-ADATOP OAK 36 W x 36 D L-ADATOP-M MAPLE 36 W x 36 D Top only supplied to allow field installation over any 36" unit. 106 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

107 Liberty Desk LIBERTY OPEN STORAGE UNIT L-CD-O ADJ SHELVES, OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-O-M ADJ SHELVES, MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-O-J JUV HGT, ADJ SHELF, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-O-J-M JUV HGT, ADJ SHELF, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 30 D Unit shall have two adjustable shelves, and a closed base. Juvenile height unit shall have one adjustable shelf. L-CD-OD ADJ SHELF W/ DRAWER, OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-OD-M ADJ SHELF W/ DRAWER, MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-OD-J JUV ADJ SHELF W/DRAWER, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-OD-J-M JUV ADJ SHELF W/DRAWER, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 30 D Unit shall have two adjustable shelves, one full width drawer at the top, and a closed base. Juvenile height unit shall have one adjustable shelf. L-CD-OFF W/ B/F/F DRAWERS, OAK 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-OFF-M W/ B/F/F DRAWERS, MAPLE 39 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-OFF-J JUV W/ B/F/F DRAWERS, OAK 33 H x 36 W x 30 D L-CD-OFF-J-M JUV W/ B/F/F DRAWERS, MAPLE 33 H x 36 W x 30 D On one side, the unit shall have two adjustable shelves, and the other side shall have one box and two file drawers. The unit shall have a closed base. Juvenile height unit shall have one adjustable shelf on one side, and the other side shall have two file drawers. LIBERTY 90 ROUND CORNER UNIT Closed Corner L-CD-RND90 CLOSED CORNER, OAK 39 H L-CD-RND90-M CLOSED CORNER, MAPLE 39 H L-CD-RND90-J JUV CLOSED CORNER, OAK 33 H L-CD-RND90-J-M JUV CLOSED CORNER, MAPLE 33 H Unit shall have a closed base, and a curved front panel. L-CD-RND90-S OPEN W/SHELVES, OAK 39 H L-CD-RND90-S-M OPEN W/SHELVES, MAPLE 39 H L-CD-RND90-S-J JUV OPEN W/SHELVES, OAK 33 H L-CD-RND90-S-J-M JUV OPEN W/SHELVES, MAPLE 33 H Open Corner with Shelves Unit shall have a closed base, and two adjustable shelves accessible from the patron side. Juvenile height unit shall have one adjustable shelf. LIBERTY 90 STRAIGHT CORNER UNIT L-CD-TRI90 CLOSED CORNER, OAK 39 H L-CD-TRI90-M CLOSED CORNER, MAPLE 39 H L-CD-TRI90-J JUV CLOSED CORNER, OAK 33 H L-CD-TRI90-J-M JUV CLOSED CORNER, MAPLE 33 H Closed Corner Unit shall have a closed base, and a flat front panel. L-CD-TRI90-S OPEN W/SHELVES, OAK 39 H L-CD-TRI90-S-M OPEN W/SHELVES, MAPLE 39 H L-CD-TRI90-S-J JUV OPEN W/SHELVES, OAK 33 H L-CD-TRI90-S-J-M JUV OPEN W/SHELVES, MAPLE 33 H Open Corner with Shelves Unit shall have a closed base, and two adjustable shelves accessible from the patron side. Juvenile height unit shall have one adjustable shelf. The Worden Company Source Book October

108 Liberty Desk LIBERTY EXTENDED ROUND CORNER UNIT L-CD-RNDA ADJ W/S ROUND FRONT, OAK 39 H L-CD-RNDA-M ADJ W/S ROUND FRONT, MAPLE 39 H L-CD-RNDA-J JUV ADJ W/S ROUND FRONT, OAK 33 H L-CD-RNDA-J-M JUV ADJ W/S ROUND FRONT, MAPLE 33 H Adjustable Worksurface Unit shall have an open base, and a curved front panel. The unit will be open from the librarian side. Work surface adjustment is from the unit height downward on 1-1/4" increments. L-CD-RND FIXED W/S ROUND FRONT, OAK 39 H L-CD-RND-M FIXED W/S ROUND FRONT, MAPLE 39 H L-CD-RND-J JUV FIX W/S ROUND FRONT, OAK 33 H L-CD-RND-J-M JUV FIX W/S ROUND FRONT, MAPLE 33 H Fixed Worksurface Unit shall have an open base, and a curved front panel. The unit will be open from the librarian side. LIBERTY EXTENDED FLAT FRONT CORNER UNIT Adjustable Worksurface L-CD-TRIA ADJ W/S FLAT FRONT, OAK 39 H L-CD-TRIA-M ADJ W/S FLAT FRONT, MAPLE 39 H L-CD-TRIA-J JUV ADJ W/S FLAT FRONT, OAK 33 H L-CD-TRIA-J-M JUV ADJ W/S FLAT FRONT, MAPLE 33 H Unit shall have an open base, and a flat front panel. The unit will be open from the librarian side. Work surface adjustment is from the unit height downward on 1-1/4" increments. L-CD-TRI FIXED WS FLAT FRONT, OAK 39 H L-CD-TRI-M FIXED W/S FLAT FRONT, MAPLE 39 H L-CD-TRI-J JUV FIX W/S FLAT FRONT, OAK 33 H L-CD-TRI-J-M JUV FIX W/S FLAT FRONT, MAPLE 33 H Fixed Worksurface Unit shall have an open base, and a flat front panel. The unit will be open from the librarian side. LIBERTY 45 ROUND FRONT UNIT L-CD-TRIR45 L-CD-TRIR45-M L-CD-TRIR45-J L-CD-TRIR45-J-M CLOSED CORNER, OAK CLOSED CORNER, MAPLE JUV CLOSED CORNER, OAK JUV CLOSED CORNER, MAPLE 39 H 39 H 33 H 33 H Unit shall have a closed base, and a curved front panel. LIBERTY 45 STRAIGHT FRONT UNIT L-CD-TRIS45 CLOSED CORNER, OAK 39 H L-CD-TRIS45-M CLOSED CORNER, MAPLE 39 H L-CD-TRIS45-J JUV CLOSED CORNER, OAK 33 H L-CD-TRIS45-J-M JUV CLOSED CORNER, MAPLE 33 H Unit shall have a closed base, and a flat front panel. 108 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

109 Liberty Desk LIBERTY END PANEL L-EP OAK 39 H L-EP-M MAPLE 39 H L-EP-J JUV HGT, OAK 33 H L-EP-J-M JUV HGT, MAPLE 33 H Finished end panels shall be 3/4 thick x 30-1/4 deep and shall extend 1/8 above the top. LIBERTY CLOSED MOBILE PEDESTAL L-PED-CL 2 ADJ SHLVS/2 DOORS, OAK 26 H x 24 W x 20 D L-PED-CL-M 2 ADJ SHLVS/2 DOORS, MAPLE 26 H x 24 W x 20 D Unit shall be a 20-5/8 wide x 20-7/8 deep x 22 high mobile pedestal with one adjustable shelf and two doors. L-PED-O 2 ADJ SHELVES, OAK 26 H x 24 W x 20 D L-PED-O-M 2 ADJ SHELVES, MAPLE 26 H x 24 W x 20 D Unit shall be a 20-5/8 wide x 20-7/8 deep x 22 high mobile pedestal with one adjustable shelf. LIBERTY TRANSACTION LEDGE L-RTL45 L-RTL45-M L-RTL90 L-RTL90-M TRANS LEDGE W/ENDS, OAK TRANS LEDGE W/ENDS, MAPLE TRANS LEDGE W/ENDS, OAK TRANS LEDGE W/ENDS, MAPLE 6-1/4 H x 8 D 6-1/4 H x 8 D 6-1/4 H x 8 D 6-1/4 H x 8 D L-STL45 L-STL45-M L-STL90 L-STL90-M TRANS LEDGE W/ENDS, OAK TRANS LEDGE W/ENDS, MAPLE TRANS LEDGE W/ENDS OAK TRANS LEDGE W/ENDS MAPLE 6-1/4 H x 8 D 6-1/4 H x 8 D 6-1/4 H x 8 D 6-1/4 H x 8 D L-XRTL90 EXT TRANS LEDGE, OAK 6-1/4 H x 8 D L-XRTL90-M EXT TRANS LEDGE, MAPLE 6-1/4 H x 8 D L-XSTL90 EXT TRANS LEDGE, OAK 6-1/4 H x 8 D L-XSTL90-M EXT TRANS LEDGE, MAPLE 6-1/4 H x 8 D L-STL-30 OAK 30 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-30-M MAPLE 30 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-36 OAK 36 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-36-M MAPLE 36 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-42 OAK 42 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-42-M MAPLE 42 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-48 OAK 48 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-48-M MAPLE 48 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-60 OAK 60 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-60-M MAPLE 60 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-72 OAK 72 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 L-STL-72-M MAPLE 72 L x 6-1/4 H x 8 A 6-1/4 high x 8 deep transaction ledge top and front may be specified for any unit. The Worden Company Source Book October

110 Marlborough Casegoods MARLBOROUGH ATLAS STAND TOP: Sloped reference top assembly shall be fabricated of 3/4 particleboard with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate facing. There shall be a 5/8 x 5/8 solid oak retaining strip located 5/8 up from lower edge of top surface. Underside of cross rail assembly shall be dadoed to receive finished back. The top shall be screwed to the end panel with 1 3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick solid oak external bands shaped to a 1-7/8 radiused bullnose profile. All four corners shall be radiused 5/8 and shaped to a bullnose profile. BASE: The base shall be 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on the exposed face. Front and back edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak external edge banding shaped to a 2-1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The back edge shall be dadoed to receive the back panel. The base shall be fitted with full width 3/4 x 3/4 wood cleats and screwed to the end panels with 1-3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. BACK: The back shall be 3/4, 3-ply particleboard with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. Back shall be rabbeted top and bottom and screw cleated to case sides. STORAGE SHELVES: Slide-out storage shelves shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on face and any sound back. Front stop rail shall be 1/2 thick x 1-1/2 wide x 25-7/8 long solid oak, tongue and grooved to shelf panel. Shelves shall slide on full extension ball bearing drawer slides.shelves shall be positioned so that each opening provides a clear area 26 wide x 24-1/2 deep x 3-3/8 high. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4 20 x 15/16 threaded stem. 1100/AS HPL TOP 44-3/4 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D 1100/AS-J HPL TOP, JUV HGT 34-1/2 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D MARLBOROUGH DICTIONARY STAND TOP: Sloped reference top assembly shall be fabricated of 3/4 particleboard with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate facing. There shall be a 5/8 x 5/8 solid oak retaining strip located 5/8 up from lower edge of top surface. Underside of cross rail of assembly shall be dadoed to receive finished back. The top shall be screwed to the end panel with 1-3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick solid oak external bands shaped to a 1-7/8 radiused bullnose profile. All four corners shall be radiused 5/8 and shaped to a bullnose profile. BASE: The base shall be 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on the exposed face and any sound veneer back. Front and back edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak external edge banding shaped to a 2-1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The back edge shall be dadoed to receive the back panel. The base shall be fitted with full width 3/4 x 3/4 wood cleats and screwed to the end panels with 1-3/4 #10 flat head wood screws. BACK: The back shall be 3/4, 3-ply particleboard with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. Back shall be rabbeted top and bottom and screw cleated to case sides. ADJUSTABLE SHELF: The adjustable shelf shall be 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select oak veneer on the face and any sound veneer on the back. The exposed edges shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak external bands. Shelf adjustment shall be provided by K-V shelf support routed flush into the ends. A 1-1/2 high book stop shall be attached to the back edge of the shelf. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4 20 x 15/16 threaded stem. 1100/DS HPL TOP 44-3/4 Hx26-3/8 Wx20-7/8D 1100/DS-J HPL TOP, JUV HGT 34-1/2 Hx26-3/8 Wx20-7/8D MARLBOROUGH NEWSPAPER RACK TOP FRAME ASSEMBLY: The frame shall be constructed of 1-1/4 thick solid oak members mortised and tenoned together forming a 25-1/2 long x 21-3/4 wide opening in the center. The long edges of the frame shall be banded with a 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 solid oak internal edge band shaped to a 2 1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The frame shall be faced with.050 high pressure laminate. Mounted at each end of the opening there shall be a 1-/4 x 1-1/4 solid oak newspaper holder rail notched to receive ten (10) newspaper holders. Each end of the frame shall be grooved on the underside at each end for three 9-9/16 long 14 gauge black oxided steel Z bar brackets. 110 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

111 Marlborough Casegoods MARLBOROUGH NEWSPAPER RACK cont' d END PANEL: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick solid oak external bands shaped to a 1-7/8 radiused bullnose profile. All four corners shall be radiused 5/8 and shaped to a bullnose profile. End panels shall extend 1/2 above and 1/2 beyond outside edges of the top frame assembly. KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keel shall be 1 thick x 6 wide, 3-ply plywood construction with veener on both faces. Top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak. The ends of the keel shall be fitted with Mod-eez clips for attachment to end panels. NEWSPAPER HOLDERS: The holders shall be 15/16 diameter hardwood turnings slotted longitudinally into six segments and with 5 long turned handle at one end. Overall length of holder shall be 35 and it shall be furnished complete with rubber o ring binder at open slotted end. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4 20 x 1-15/16 threaded stem. 1100/NR INCLUDES 10 STICKS 29 H x42-3/8 W x 27-1/2 D MARLBOROUGH LECTERN TOP: The sloped top assembly shall be fabricated of 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer face and any sound back. Lower edge shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak positioned on the panel to form a retaining strip. Top shall be attached to side panels with wood cleats and screens. END PANEL: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick solid oak external bands shaped to a 1-7/8 radiused bullnose profile. All four corners shall be radiused 5/8 and shaped to a bullnose profile. BACK: The back panel shall be 3/4 thick x 24 wide x 30 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick external bands radiused 1/8. Back shall be attached to end panels by means of Mod-eez clips and shoulder screws. SHELF: The shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 19 deep x 24 wide, 3ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer face and any sound back. Exposed edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak external band radiused 1/8. Shelf shall be attached to ends and back panel by means of 3/4 x 3/4 wood cleats and 1 1/4 #10 flat head wood screws. Shelf shall be located 27 above floor and shall have a clear space of 13 between top and shelf. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 1-15/16 threaded stem. 1100/LT OAK 45 H x 26-3/8 W x 21 D MARLBOROUGH BROWSER SINGLE FACED SINGLE TIER DISPLAY TROUGH: The display trough shall be 45 wide x 19 deep and 8-1/4 high at the front edge and divided into up to six equal width compartments. The trough shall be constructed from select grade A oak veneer with 1/8 thick oak bands along exposed edges. The bottom of the trough shall be lined with a ribbed mat. The dividers shall be ¼ diameter zinc plated, removable steel rods, screwed into inserts imbedded in the front panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges shall receive a 5/8 thick solid oak external band, shaped to a bullnose profile. KEEL: The longitudinal keel shall be 1 thick x 6 wide plywood construction with select grade A oak veneer faces and 1/8 thick oak bands along the exposed edges. The keel shall fasten to the inside face of the end panels with concealed fasteners. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be provided with two resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a ¼ -20 x 15/16 threaded stem. CAPACITY: 220 CDs / 160 DVDs per trough. 1100/SRB SF SINGLE TIER BROWSER 47-3/8 W x20-1/2dx40-1/2h The Worden Company Source Book October

112 Marlborough Casegoods MARLBOROUGH BROWSER SINGLE FACED DOUBLE TIER DISPLAY TROUGH: The display trough shall be 45 wide x 19 deep and 8-1/4 high at the front edge and divided into up to six equal width compartments. The trough shall be constructed from select grade A oak veneer with 1/8 thick oak bands along exposed edges. The bottom of the trough shall be lined with a ribbed mat. The dividers shall be ¼ diameter zinc plated, removable steel rods, screwed into inserts imbedded in the front panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges shall receive a 5/8 thick solid oak external band, shaped to a bullnose profile. KEEL: The longitudinal keel shall be 1 thick x 6 wide plywood construction with select grade A oak veneer faces and 1/8 thick oak bands along the exposed edges. The keel shall fasten to the inside face of the end panels with concealed fasteners. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be provided with two resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a ¼ -20 x 15/16 threaded stem. CAPACITY: 220 CDs / 160 DVDs per trough. 1100/SDRB SF DOUBLE TIER BROWSER 47-3/8 W x20-1/2dx40-1/2h MARLBOROUGH DISPLAY TABLE DISPLAY CASE: The display case shall have extruded aluminium frame with dark bronze finish, having inter-locking construction using concealed screws. The case shall have 3/16 tempered glass at sides and top, set into frame with crimped springs and sealed to make dustproof. The top of the case shall be hinged with continuous piano type hinge and equipped with 2 point lock and lid supports. Glass case shall be 59 wide x 29 deep x 9-11/16 high. BOTTOM (optional): When specified, the bottom shall be furnished with a 1/2 thick tackable surface covered with a neutral beige 100% nylon fabric. TOP: The table top shall be 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.028 backer on the underside. The two long edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak external edge band shaped to a 2-1/2 radiused bullnose profile. Each end of the top shall be grooved to receive two 9-9/16 long, 14 gauge black oxided steel Z-bars screwed to the top with #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws, and to to the end panels with M6-10 PHM screws screwed into metal inserts embedded in the end panel. END PANEL: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick solid oak external bands shaped to a 1-7/8 radiused bullnose profile. All four corners shall be radiused 5/8 and shaped to a bullnose profile. End panels shall extend 1/2 above and 1/2 beyond outside edges of table top. KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keel shall be 1 thick x 8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused malmine on both faces. Bottom edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak and machined to receive a steel bracket. The keel shall be attached to the underside of the top by means of three 9-9/16 long metal Z-bars screwed to the keel and work surface with #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws, and at the bottom by means of a 5/16-18 x 3/4 black oxided truss head machine screw passing through bracket into Rosans embedded in the end panel. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 1-15/16 threaded stem. 1100/3060-EXC BRONZE CASE 9-3/4 H 31 Dx32-3/2 Wx38/11/16 H MARLBOROUGH REFERENCE & COMPUTER TABLE TOP: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure laminate face,and a.028 backer on the underside. The two (2) long edges of top are banded with 5/8 x 1-5/8 solid oak external edge band and bullnose shaped. END PANELS: Panel ends are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces and banded on all four(4) edges with solid oak. All four (4) corners of panel profile are shaped to a 5/8 radius and edges are continuous bullnose shaped. End panels extend 1/2 above and 1/2 beyond outside edges of top. KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keel is 1 thick x 18 wide, 3-ply plywood construction with thermally fused malmine on both faces. The keel is attached to the underside of top and to end panels. CALL SLIP BOX: Table shall be equipped with a three compartment call slip unit, constructed of Baltic birch veneer core finished to match with reference table. The finished unit is positioned at the center of the Reference table and on each end of the Computer table edge, and screwed to underside of table top. Interior dimensions of each compartment are 3-1/2 high x 3-1/2 wide x 5 deep. Note: Call slip boxes are not included on the computer table center access unit. TABLE RACK: The rack is constructed of 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers and all exposed edges banded with solid oak bands. Racks are screwed to table tops. Note: Table rack is not included on the computer table center access unit. GLIDES: Each panel is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 112 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

113 Marlborough Casegoods MARLBOROUGH REFERENCE & COMPUTER TABLE cont'd Reference Computer 1100/3072-RT REF. TABLE W/ 2 CALL SLIP BOXES 31 W x 74-3/8 L x 39 H 1100/3072-CT COMP. TABLE W/ 2 CALL SLIP BOXES 31 W x 74-3/8 L x 39 H 1100/6072-CA DF, W/ CENTER CABLE ACCESS 61"W x 74-3/8"L x HGT MARLBOROUGH SLOPE TABLE The slope top table shall consist of two sloped table halves, two end panels, one keel and an under top frame support. The sloped tops shall be 26 h at the low edge, sloping upward to 29 h at the center. The tops are placed to the inside of the end panels. TOP HALVES: the top halves shall be 3-ply particle board construction with a.050 thick decorative laminate face and.028 thick balancing backer. The rear edge shall be internally banded with solid oak, the front edge shall be fitted with an extruded black aluminum retainer lip. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges shall receive a 5/8 thick solid oak external band, shaped to a bullnose profile. KEEL: The longitudinal keel shall be 1 thick x 8 wide plywood construction with select grade A oak veneer faces. The keel shall fasten to the inside face of the end panels with metal brackets. UNDER TOP FRAME SUPPORT: The frame support shall be 1 thick plywood construction with wood cleats provided for assembly to the sloped top sections. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be provided with two resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a ¼ -20 x 15/16 threaded stem. 1100/3072-DST DOUBLE SLOPE TOP TABLE 29-1/2 Hx31 Wx74-3/8 L MARLBOROUGH INDEX TABLE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The two long edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak internal edge band shaped to a 2-1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The work surface shall be grooved on the underside at each end for three 9-9/16 long 14 gauge black oxided steel Z bar brackets. Each bracket shall be attached to the work surface by means of four #12x5/8 PHSM screws and to the ends by means of four M6-10 PHM screws screwing into metal inserts embedded in the end panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick solid oak external bands shaped to a 1-7/8 radiused bullnose profile. All four corners shall be radiused 5/8 and shaped to a bullnose profile. The end panels shall extend 1/2 above and 1/2 beyond the outside of the work surface. KEELS: The longitudinal stabilizing keel shall be 1 thick x 8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused malmine on both faces. The keel shall be attached to the underside of the work surface by means of 9-9/16 long 14 gauge black oxided steel Z bar brackets and at the bottom by means of a 5/16-18 x 3/4 black oxided THM screw passing through bracket into threaded inserts embedded in the end panel. Each Z bar bracket shall be attached to the work surface and keel by means of eight #12x5/8 PHSM screws. INDEX RACK: Index racks are provided in single or double faced configurations, depending on table orientation. Racks are divided into equal sections; two wide for 60" wide tables and three wide for 90" tables. One adjustable shelf is provided per section, allowing the sections to be divided into two vertical compartments. Shelves are adjustable on 1-1/4" increments. All rack components are 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade "A" oak faces and 5/16" thick oak bands along exposed edges. All components shall be 3-ply particleboard construction surfaced face and back with select grade A oak veneer and banded on the exposed edges with 5/16 thick x 1 wide solid oak external bands with all edges shaped to a 1-7/8 radiused bullnose profile and corners radiused 5/8. All components shall be joined to each other by means of Mod-eez clips and shoulder screws. Shelves shall be routed on the underside to receive shelf pins. The rack shall be secured to the top by means of #10x2-1/4 FHW wood screws, screwed from the underside of the top. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be equipped with a pair of leveling glides located 2 on center from the panel edges. Levelers shall be rubber cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4 20x15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Index tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 1100/6060-ID 1100/6090-ID DF/DT, 26 H RACK W/ SHELF DF/DT, 26 H RACK W/ SHELF 61 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 61 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT The table shall be double-faced, double tier, consisting of a work surface, two (2) end panels, two (2) keels, and an index rack. The table shall comply with ADA requirements at 29 work surface height 1100/3090-ID SF/DT, 26 H RACK W/ SHELF 31 W/X 92-3/8 L X HGT The Worden Company Source Book October 2011 The table shall be single-faced, double tier, consisting of a work surface, two (2) end panels, one keel, and an index rack. The table shall comply with ADA requirements at 29 work surface height. 113

114 Marlborough Casegoods MARLBOROUGH RECTANGULAR TABLE TOPS: Tops shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and.028 thick backer sheet. The two (2) long edges of the top receive an external 5/8 wide x 1-5/8 thick, solid oak band with a bullnose profile. END PANELS: Panel ends are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four (4) edges of panel are banded with solid oak. All four corners of panel profile are shaped to a 5/8 radius and edges are continuous bullnose shaped. End panels extend 1/2 above and 1/2 beyond outside edges of top. KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keel is of 1 thick x 8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused melamine on both faces. All tables 48 wide have two (2) longitudinal stabilizing keels. GLIDES: Each panel end is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 29 H. Optional 27 height may be specified at no additional cost. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Model # Description Dimensions 1100/2436 OAK 25-1/2 W x 38-3/8 L x HGT 1100/3060 OAK 31-1/2 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 1100/3660 OAK 37-1/2 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 1100/3672 OAK 37-1/2 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 1100/3690 OAK 37-1/2 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 1100/4260 OAK 43-1/2 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 1100/4272 OAK 43-1/2 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 1100/4290 OAK 43-1/2 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 1100/4860 OAK 49-1/2 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 1100/4872 OAK 49-1/2 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 1100/4890 OAK 49-1/2 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT MARLBOROUGH TRESTLE & PEDESTAL TABLE TOPS: Tops shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and.028 thick backer sheet. The perimeter edges shall be receive an external 5/16 wide x 1-3/16 thick, solid oak band with a bullnose profile. TRESTLE BASE: Base members are of solid oak stock 1-3/16 x 4 and shaped with full radius on all edges and exposed ends. Horizontal base and vertical column members are butt joined with a vertical member coped to fit over radiused edge of base member and doweled and glued. Vertical member has radiused edge vein line in center. KEEL: The longitudinal keel shall be 1 thick x 8 wide plywood construction with select grade A oak veneer faces. The keel shall fasten to the inside face of the ends and underside of the top with concealed metal brackets. PEDESTAL BASE: Base members are of solid oak stock and shaped with full radius on all edges and exposed ends. Pedestal assembly is of a four (4) component assembly fastened together forming a pinwheel base. Pedestal members are securely glued together. A metal spider plate is mechanically attached to top of column. Top is attached to spider and secured to threaded inserts in top core. GLIDES: Each base member is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 29 H. Optional 27 height may be specified. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Tables Standard (WWJT). PT-3060 PT-3660 PT-3672 PT-3690 TRESTLE BASE, OAK TRESTLE BASE, OAK TRESTLE BASE, OAK TRESTLE BASE, OAK 30 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 60 L x HGT 36 W x 72 L x HGT 36 W x 90 L x HGT PT-042 ROUND TABLE, OAK 42 DIA x HGT PT-048 ROUND TABLE, OAK 48 DIA x HGT PT-4242 SQUARE TABLE, OAK 42 x 42 x HGT 114 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

115 Marlborough Casegoods MARLBOROUGH CARREL TOP: The work surface is 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer sheet on the underside. The front edges of tops are banded with 5/8 x 1-5/8 solid oak external edge band and bullnose shaped. The work surface is attached to the side and back panels by means of a black oxided metal Z-bar brackets secured to the underside of the work surface. Top is 28 deep x either 34-1/2 or 48 wide. END AND INTERMEDIATE ASSEMBLY: Panels are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four (4) edges of panel are banded with 5/8 solid oak. All four (4) corners of panel profile are shaped to a 5/8 radius and edges are continuous bullnose shaped. BACK PANEL: Back panels are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges are banded with 5/8 solid oak and bullnose shaped. The panel is set down 3/4 from top of side panels and terminates 6 above floor at bottom. SHELF: Storage shelf is 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak face veneer on both faces. Front edge to be banded with 1/8 solid oak with eased edges. The shelf is 10 deep and is positioned 44 above the floor. GLIDES: Each panel end is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable glides with 15/16 stem. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 29 H. Optional 27 or 32 height may be. UL LISTING: Carrels shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder 1100/SC SF STARTER, OAK 48 H x 36-7/8 Wx 31-1/2 D 1100/SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 48 H x35-11/16 Wx31-1/2 D 1148/SC SF STARTER, OAK 48 H x 50-3/8 W x31-1/2 D 1148/SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 48 H x49-3/16 W x31-1/2 D Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder 1100/DSC DF STARTER, OAK 48 H x 36-7/8 Wx 60-1/4 D 1100/DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 48 H x35-11/16 Wx60-1/4 D 1148/DSC DF STARTER, OAK 48 H x 50-3/8 W x60-1/4 D 1148/DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 48 H x49-3/16 W x60-1/4 D The Worden Company Source Book October

116 Marlborough Casegoods MARLBOROUGH OPAC TOP: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick x 28 (30 O.A.) deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The front edge shall be banded with a 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak external drop edge band and bullnose shaped. The back edge shall have a black aluminum retaining lip extending 5/8 above the work surface. The top shall be held 2 from the back panel to provide a cord drop. The top shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end for black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. The underside of the top shall be fitted with a V-shaped 14 gauge steel keel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers on both faces. The top, bottom and front edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick solid oak external edge bands, bullnose shaped. All four corners shall be radiused 5/8 and shaped to a bullnose profile. End panels shall be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. The end panels shall be pre-drilled for the location of two shoulder screws for shelf attachment. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be the same as the end panels and through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet. BACK PANELS: The back panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick solid oak edge bands. Back panels shall be fitted on the back side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights. The back side of the panels shall have boring for the location of shelf pins for display shelves and for black oxided metal Z-bar brackets for supporting the hex lids. ENCLOSURE PANELS: The enclosure panels shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers on both faces. The top and bottom shall be banded with 5/16 solid oak edge bands. The edges on both sides shall be beveled, pre-drilled and attached to the back panels by means of cleats. ACCESS PANELS: The access panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick solid oak. The panels shall be split in two parts 12 from the bottom. The top section shall be pre-drilled on the back side at top for black oxided metal Z-bar brackets and attached to the panel to support the hex lids. The top section shall be bored through and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC grommet. TRIANGULAR POSTS: The triangular posts shall be 1-1/2 per side extruded aluminum, powder coated black, machined on all sides for shoulder screws. The post shall be fitted at the top with an injection molded cap, and the bottom fitted with a threaded insert for a glide. MINI-WORK SURFACE: The mini-work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick x 19-1/2 deep constructed the same as the top. PAPER SHELF: The paper shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 12 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak. The back edge shall be banded with 1/32 veneer. The underside of the paper shelf is pre-drilled to receive J channel. DISPLAY SHELF: The display shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 12 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with 5/16 solid oak. Both ends shall be machined on the underside to receive shelf pins. FULL AND HALF HEX LID: The full and half hex lid shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. Each lid shall be supported by black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. GLIDES: Each end panel, intermediate panel and post shall be fitted with one 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. OPTIONAL MINI J CHANNEL SHELF: The mini J channel shelf is used to electrify the mini-work surface and shall be 3/4 thick x 12 deep x 40-7/16 wide at the front and 26-9/16 wide at the back, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with a 1/8 solid oak edge band. The back edge shall be banded with 1/32 veneer. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the J -channel, there shall be a 1-1/8 deep x 2-1/2 wide extruded black PVC J -channel with a 1-11/16 lip on the face side screwed to the back panel. UL LISTING: OPAC units shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). 1100/HCT HEX 123-3/4 x 48 H The full hex carrel has six adjustable work surfaces, paper shelves and closed inner hub Hex Closed Back 1100/HCT-1 1/2 HEX CLOSED BACK 54 D x 123-3/4 W x 48 H The closed half hex has three adjustable work surfaces, and paper shelves, half hex lid and an enclosure panel. Open Back w/ W/S Open Back w/ Shelves 1100/HCT-2 1/2 HEX OPEN BACK W/ WS 54 D x 123-3/4 W x 48 H This half hex has three adjustable work surfaces, paper shelves, an open back and a mini-work surface. 1100/HCT-3 1/2 HEX OPEN BACK W/ SHLV 54 D x 123-3/4 W x 48 H This half hex has three adjustable work surfaces, paper shelves and 3 display shelves. 116 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

117 Marlborough Casegoods MARLBOROUGH WORKSTATION TOP: The work surface is 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and.028 thick backer sheet. The front edges of tops are banded with 5/8 x 1-5/8 solid oak external edge band and bullnose shaped. The work surface is attached to the side and back panels by means of a black oxided metal Z-bar secured to underside of work surface. Top is 26 deep x 34-1/2, 48, or 72 wide. The back edge shall have a black aluminum retaining lip extending 5/8 above the work surface. The top shall be held 2 from the back panel to provide a cord drop. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneers on both faces. All four(4) edges of panel are banded with solid oak. All four(4) corners of panel profile to be a 5/8 radius and edges are continuous bullnose shaped. All four corners shall be radiused 5/8 and shaped to a bullnose profile. End panels shall be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. The end panels shall be pre-drilled for the location of two shoulder screws for shelf attachment. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be the same as the end panels and through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet. BACK PANEL: Back panel is 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges are banded with 5/8 solid oak and bullnose shaped. The panel is set down 1/2 from top of side panels and terminates 6 above floor at bottom. SHELF: The shelf is 1 thick x 10" deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select "A" grade oak veneer faces. The front edge shall be banded with a 1/8" thick hardwood band of matching specie. The bottom side of the shelf shall be fitted with four cam type fasteners, allowing locations above or below the worksurface, 44" or 21-3/4" off the floor. GLIDES: Each end and intermediate panel is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the J -channel, there shall be a 1-1/8 deep x 2-1/2 wide extruded black PVC J -channel with a 1-11/16 lip on the face side screwed to the back panel. J-CHANNEL SHELF: The J-Channel shelf shall be 3/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused face and back. The exposed edge shall be banded with.02" thick black PVC. The shelf shall be attached with arms. UL LISTING: Work stations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder 1100/WS SF STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 36-7/8 W x48 H 1100/WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31-1/2 D x35-11/16 Wx48 H 1148/WS SF STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 50-3/8 W x48 H 1148/WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 49-3/16 W x48 H 1172/WS SF STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 74-3/8 W x /WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31-1/2 D x 73-3/16 x 48 Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder 1100/DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 36-7/8 W x48 H 1100/DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 Dx35-11/16 Wx48 H 1148/DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 50-3/8 W x48 H 1148/DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 D x49-3/16 W x48 H 1172/DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 74-3/8 W x /DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 D x 72 W x48 H The Worden Company Source Book October

118 Marlborough Casegoods MARLBOROUGH DESK TOPS: Tops shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and.028 thick backer sheet. The inside edge of the top shall receive a 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 high solid oak band with bullnose shape. The outside edge of the top shall receive a 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 high solid oak band with a bullnose shape. Tops attach to the inside face of the end panels with concealed fasteners. END ASSEMBLY: Panel ends are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer both faces. All four edges of panel are banded with solid oak. All four corners of panel are shaped to a 5/8 radius and edges are continuous bullnose shaped. Panel ends extend 1/2 above and 1/2 beyond the outside edges of desk top. PEDESTAL CONSTRUCTION: Case of desk is constructed of 3/4 thick flush 3-ply panels. Front of desk has 3/4 thick, 3-ply modesty panel continuous width between end panels. The bottom of the modesty panel shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak. PEDESTAL: The side panels will be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak face veneer on exposed faces. All exposed edges at working side are banded with solid oak. Pedestals are attached to tops and panel ends using countersunk wood screws as required. Desks have a center pencil drawer with lock. PEDESTAL/CREDENZA CABINET: The typing return or credenza unit is of the same design, dimension and construction as drawer pedestals. These cabinets are finished with select oak face veneers on the inside as well as on exposed outside surfaces. HINGED DOORS: Storage compartment doors will be of 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a 3/4 solid oak edge band on the 2 vertical edges, 1/8 solid oak edge band on the bottom and covered with select grade A red oak veneers on both faces. The top of each door will be banded with 1/32 thick oak veneer. Each door will be attached to the cabinet by means of two concealed 176* door hinges. Door face shall be flush with drawer fronts of adjacent units and uses continuous edge routing to serve as finger pull. DRAWERS: All drawer fronts are 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with a 3/4 thick solid oak edge band on the two vertical edges, 1/8 solid oak edge band on the bottom edge and covered with select grade A red oak veneers on both faces. The fronts use a continuous vertical routing to serve as a finger pull. The top of each drawer front is banded with 1/32 thick oak veneer. Drawer box is constructed of 7/16 thick solid beech and beech plywood. Drawer bottoms are of 3/16 thick beech plywood. All storage drawers operate on side mounted, ball bearing, 3/4 extension drawer slides having a load bearing capacity of 60 lbs. per drawer. File drawer slides are rated at 135 lbs. per drawer and operate on full extension drawer slides. GLIDES: Each panel end is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. LOCKS: Center drawer is equipped with a lock as standard. Desk pedestal lock mechanisms may be specified and are located in the upper right hand corner of the top dr face. Locks on each desk are keyed alike. Master keying is available upon request. MARLBOROUGH SECRETARY DESK 1166/PED RT 48 W X 22-1/4 D X 26 H 68-3/8 W x 31 D x 29 Secretarial desk (right or left return must be identified by adding -L or -R to the product number) has one box drawer and one file drawer. The center drawer is equipped withpencil tray and a lock. Desk return pedestal has three box drawers furnished as standard. Modesty panel is provided on desk and return with return panel forming a gallery. 1166/TD RT 36 W X 22-1/4 D X 26 H 68-3/8 W x 31 D x 29 Secretarial desk (right or left return must be identified by adding -L or -R to the product number) has one box drawer and one file drawer. The center drawer is equipped with pencil tray and a lock. Modesty panel is provided on desk and return with return panel forming a gallery. MARLBOROUGH DESK 11360/D 1160/D 1166/D DOUBLE PEDESTAL DOUBLE PEDESTAL DOUBLE PEDESTAL 29 H x 62-3/8 W x 37 D 29 H x 62-3/8 W x 31 D 29 H x 68-3/8 W x 31 D Left pedestal has one box drawer at the top and a lower file drawer below equipped with metal file bars. The right pedestal has three box drawers. The center drawer is equipped with pencil tray and lock 118 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

119 Marlborough Casegoods MARLBOROUGH CREDENZA 1123/CR 3 MODULE 29 Hx 61-3/16 W x22-1/4 D This model must be equipped with any 3 of the functional drawer or door combinations listed as add-on options. 1124/CR 4 MODULE 29 H x 81 W x 22-1/4 D This model must be equipped with any 4 of the functional drawer or door combinations listed as add-on options. MARLBOROUGH CREDENZA (options) Model # F Description File Drawer Insert Option has one box drawer at top and on file drawer below B Box Drawer Insert Option has three box drawers G Storage Cabinet Insert Option has storage cabinet with door, with concealed 176 door hinge. Indicate if hinge is left or right. Compartment has one adjustable shelf. D Open Storage Option has open storage space containing one adjustable shelf. PLM Pedestal Lock Mechanism no photo available Pedestal lock mechanism allows drawers to be closed after lock has been activated. Locks are keyed alike. Master keying available on request. The Worden Company Source Book October

120 MWS Casegoods MWS END PANELS: Panel ends are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on both faces. All four edges of panel are banded with 5/8 thick solid oak. All four corners of the panel profile are shaped to a 5/8 radius and edges are continuous bullnose shaped. End panels extend 1/2 above and 1/2 beyond the outside edge of the top. INTERMEDIATE PANEL: All intermediate panels are same construction as end panels except with a 1/8 thick solid oak edge band and 1/8 radius along all edges and corners. Intermediate panels extend 1/8 above the work surface and beyond the front panel. Panel has 3 grommet for cable passage. KNEESPACE PANEL: All kneespace panels are same construction as end panels except with a 1/8 solid oak banding and 1/8 radius along all edges and corners. Kneespace panels extend 1/8 above the top of the work surface and 1/8 beyond the front panel. Panels are angled and stepped back 15 from working side. Panel has 3 grommet for cable passage. TOP: The work surface is 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The working side edge is banded with 5/8 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak applied after the top is laminated. The edge is square with a 1/8 radius top and bottom. FRONT PANEL: The front panel is 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with vertical grain select grade A oak veneer on both faces. The top and bottom of the panel are banded with 1/8 solid oak. The band is square with a 1/8 radius along front and back edge. The edge of panel is exposed and flush at the top and extends to 1/8 above the bottom of the panel end or intermediate panel. RAISED FRONT PANEL: The raised front panel is the same construction as the front panel except the raised front panel extends 10 above the work surface. GLIDES: Each end and intermediate panel is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. UL LISTING MWS units are listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QWAZ). MWS PANEL Model # Description Dimensions MWS/2930/M-EP SF, END PANEL 29-1/2 H x 31 W MWS/2960/M-EP DF, END PANEL 29-1/2 H x 62 W MWS-2930-IP MWS-2960-IP SF, INTERMEDIATE PANEL DF, INTERMEDIATE PANEL 29-1/8 H x 30-1/4 W 29-1/8 H x 60-1/2 W MWS-2930-KP MWS-2960-KP SF, KNEESPACE PANEL DF, KNEESPACE PANEL 29-1/8 H x 30-1/4 W 29-1/8 H x 60-1/2 W MWS ARTICULATED TOP MWS/30/AAT MWS/45/AAT MWS/90/AET ARTICULATED ANGULAR TOP ARTICULATED ANGULAR TOP ARTICULATED EXTENDED TOP 30º ANGLE, 30"D x 21"W x 29"H 45º ANGLE, 30"D x 29"W x 29"H 28 W, 90 ANGLE, 30"D x 67-3/4"W x 27"W x 29"H MWS MODULE WORKSURFACE MWS/3030/TF MODULE WORKSURFACE 30 Dx 30 W x 29 H MWS/3036/TF MODULE WORKSURFACE 30 Dx 36 W x 29 H MWS/3048/TF MODULE WORKSURFACE 30 Dx 48 W x 29 H MWS/3060/TF MODULE W/S, W/ GUSSET 30 D x 60 W x 29 H MWS/3072/TF MODULE W/S, W/ GUSSET 30 D x 72 W x 29 H MWS/6030/TF DOUBLE FACED MODULE 60 D x 30 W x 29 H MWS/6036/TF DOUBLE FACED MODULE 60 D x 36 W x 29 H MWS/6048/TF DOUBLE FACED MODULE 60 D x 48 W x 29 H MWS/6060/TF DF MODULE W/ GUSSET 60 D x 60 W x 29 H MWS/6072/TF DF MODULE W/ GUSSET 60 D x 72 W x 29 H MWS FRONT MODULE WORKSURFACE MWS/3030/TRF FRONT MODULE W/S 30 D x 30 W x 29 H MWS/3036/TRF FRONT MODULE W/S 30 D x 36 W x 29 H MWS/3048/TRF FRONT MODULE W/S 30 D x 48 W x 29 H MWS/3060/TRF FRONT MODULE W/S W/ GUSSET 30 D x 60 W x 29 H MWS/3072/TRF FRONT MODULE W/S W/ GUSSET 30 D x 72 W x 29 H MWS/6030/TRF DF FRONT MODULE 60 D x 30 W x 29 H MWS/6036/TRF DF FRONT MODULE 60 D x 36 W x 29 H MWS/6048/TRF DF FRONT MODULE 60 D x 48 W x 29 H MWS/6060/TRF DF FRONT MODULE W/ GUSSET 60 D x 60 W x 29 H MWS/6072/TRF DF FRONT MODULE W/ GUSSET 60 D x 72 W x 29 H 120 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

121 MWS Casegoods MWS CORNER UNIT MWS/90/SC-TF 90º CLOSED 31-1/2 D x 31-1/2 W x29 H 90* closed square corner with (2) front panels and top. MWS/90/SC-TRF 90º CLOSED, RAISED FRONT 31-1/2 D x 31-1/2 W x39 H 90* closed square corner with (2) raised front panels and top. ACCESSORIES Model # Description AKT/1224 KEYBOARD ARM AND TRAY Each keyboard arm consists of a four-way articulating mechanism and a keyboard tray. Arm & Tray Pull Out Tray KT/1322 PULL OUT KEYBOARD TRAY Pull-out keyboard tray with slides. Black plastic tray. Pencil Drawer PD/1720 PENCIL DRAWER Wood pencil drawer with pencil and slip tray and lock. TDT-2428 ROTATING COMPUTER STAND 24 x 28 teardrop shaped turntable with grommet sleeve. 1-1/4 3-ply particleboard construction with HPL face and self-edged Rotating Stand TDT-2428-SD ROTATING COMPUTER STAND 24 x 28 teardrop shaped turntable with rear shield and grommet sleeve. 1-1/4 3-ply particleboard construction with HPL face and self-edged. PEDESTALS PEDESTAL CONSTRUCTION: The pedestal top, side, and back are 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak veneer on the exposed faces with any sound grade veneer on the interiors surfaces. The exposed edges are banded with 1/8 solid oak. The bottom is 3/4 thick particleboard or MDF board painted black. The drawer fronts are 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a 3/4 thick solid oak edge band on the vertical edges. The bottom edge is banded with 1/8 solid oak. Drawer fronts have select grade A oak veneer both faces. The top of each drawer front is banded with 1/32 thick oak veneer. The fronts use continuous vertical routing to serve as a finger pull. Drawer boxes are constructed of 7/16 thick solid beech and beech plywood. Drawer bottoms are of 3/16 thick beech plywood. All storage drawers operate on side mounted, ball bearing, 3/4 extensions drawer slides and have a load bearing capacity of 60 lbs. per drawer. File drawer slides are rated at 135 lbs. per drawer and operate on full extensions drawer slides. The case is assembled with European construction using the 32mm system with concealed cam fasteners. Each pedestal is counter weighted to restrain from tipping. Closed base under pedestal is 2-3/8 high. Mobile pedestals are equipped with four 2-3/8 high dual wheel hooded casters. WFP/4F WOOD FILE, 4 DRAWERS 18-1/4 Wx20-1/2Dx51-3/4 H Wood file with four file drawers. Letter size paper is filed front to back. Legal size paper is filed side to side. WHP/BF HANGING, BOX & FILE DRAWR 18-1/4 W x20-5/8 D x 18 H WFP/4F WHP/BF WHP/3B Wood hanging pedestal, with one (1) box drawer and one (1) file drawer. WHP/3B HANGING, 3 BOX DRAWERS 18-1/4 W x20-5/8 D x 18 H Wood hanging pedestal, with three (3) box drawers. WMP/2F MOBILE, 2 FILE DRAWERS 18-1/4Wx20-5/8 Dx27-1/8 Wood mobile pedestal, with two (2) file drawers WMP/2F WMP/BBF WMP/BBF MOBILE, 2 BOX, 1 FILE DRW 18-1/4Wx20-5/8 Dx27-1/8 Wood mobile pedestal, with two (2) box drawers and one (1) file drawer WSP/2F STATIONARY, 2 FILE DRAWER 18-1/4Wx20-5/8 Dx27-1/8 Wood stationary pedestal, with two (2) file drawers WSP/2F WSP/BBF WSP/BBF STATIONARY, 2 BOX & 1 FILE 18-1/4Wx20-5/8 Dx27-1/8 Wood stationary pedestal, with two (2) boxdrawers and one (1) file drawer The Worden Company Source Book October

122 Pavilion Casegoods PAVILION ATLAS STAND P-AS- ATLAS STAND 31-7/16"W x 31-3/8"D x 46"H P-ASJ- ATLAS STAND, JUV HGT 31-7/16"W x 31-3/8"D x 39"H The Pavilion atlas stand features Pavilion style end panels and universal panel connectors along with a veneer cabinet that includes a sloped laminate top and five veneer pull-out shelves. PAVILION DICTIONARY STAND Model # Description P-DS- DICTIONARY STAND 31-7/16"W x 31-3/8"D x 46"H P-DSJ- DICTIONARY STAND, JUV HEIGHT 31-7/16"W x 31-3/8"D x 39"H The Pavilion dictionary stand features Pavilion style end panels and universal panel connectors along with a veneer cabinet that includes a sloped laminate top, fixed veneer bottom panel and one adjustable shelf. PAVILION PANEL VERTICAL PANELS: The panels shall be 1-3/16 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak, maple, or cherry veneers face and back. The panels shall be banded on the top and bottom with 1/8 solid oak, maple, or cherry. The vertical edges shall be fitted with 1-1/2 wide, 12 gauge steel straps powder coated with a color as selected by owner. The strap shall be secured to the universal panel connector with 1/16 thick stand-off washers and shoulder screws, and to the panels with spring tension Mod-eez clips. Panels 24 wide or less shall have one pass-through edge grommet and cover. Panels 30 wide and over shall have two pass-through edge grommets and covers. The grommets shall be three-sided 3-5/8 wide x 3-3/4 high constructed of.90 thick PVC UL rated 94 HB or better. The grommet shall fit within slots machined in the panels and shall be incapable of removal after final installation. The cover shall be 3-3/4 wide x 4 high formed 16 gauge metal with thirty six 5/32 diameter holes perforated on 1/2 centers. The cover shall be screwed to the inside face of the universal panel connector and panel to provide tamper resistance, and to lock panels to the universal panel connector. The cover shall be capable of being installed vertically to form a decorative cover, or horizontally to provide a pass-through. The cover shall be powder coated. Model # Description Dimensions P-PN1234- P-PN1241- P-PN1248- P-PN1255- P-PN1262- P-PN1834- P-PN1841- P-PN1848- P-PN1855- P-PN1862- P-PN2429- P-PN2434- P-PN2441- P-PN2448- P-PN2455- P-PN2462- VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL 12 W x 34 H 12 W x 41 H 12 W x 48 H 12 W x 55 H 12 W x 62 H 18 W x 34 H 18 W x 41 H 18 W x 48 H 18 W x 55 H 18 W x 62 H 24 W x 29 H 24 W x 34 H 24 W x 41 H 24 W x 48 H 24 W x 55 H 24 W x 62 H P-PN3029- P-PN3034- P-PN3041- P-PN3048- P-PN3055- P-PN3062- P-PN3634- P-PN3641- P-PN3648- P-PN3655- P-PN3662- P-PN4234- P-PN4241- P-PN4248- P-PN4255- P-PN4262- VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL 30 W x 29 H 30 W x 34 H 30 W x 41 H 30 W x 48 H 30 W x 55 H 30 W x 62 H 36 W x 34 H 36 W x 41 H 36 W x 48 H 36 W x 55 H 36 W x 62 H 42 W x 34 H 42 W x 41 H 42 W x 48 H 42 W x 55 H 42 W x 62 H P-PN4834- P-PN4841- P-PN4848- P-PN4855- P-PN4862- VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL VERTICAL PANEL 48 W x 34 H 48 W x 41 H 48 W x 48 H 48 W x 55 H 48 W x 62 H 122 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

123 Pavilion Casegoods PAVILION PANEL CONNECTOR UNIVERSAL PANEL CONNECTOR: The universal panel connector shall be an aluminum extruded cruciform 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 with 1 slots on 1 centers machined the entire height of the leg along the recess on each of the four corners. The top of the universal panel connector shall have a die cast aluminum cap matching the profile of the universal panel connector and secured with a tamper proof grater-type clip. The bottom shall be fitted with a glide insert and an adjustable glide with a black 3 diameter aluminum contact surface and a 1/4-20 x 1 threaded stem. All four sides of the universal panel connector shall be pre-machined for panel and strap attachment. The universal panel connectors and cap shall be powder coated. P-UC29- UNIVERSAL PANEL CONNECTOR 29 H P-UC34- UNIVERSAL PANEL CONNECTOR 24 H P-UC41- UNIVERSAL PANEL CONNECTOR 41 H P-UC48- UNIVERSAL PANEL CONNECTOR 48 H P-UC55- UNIVERSAL PANEL CONNECTOR 55 H P-UC62- UNIVERSAL PANEL CONNECTOR 65 H PAVILION TABLE LEG TABLE LEG: The leg shall be a cruciform shape consisting of a post, a plate, four channels, and a glide. The post shall be 1-1/2 square 16 gauge steel welded from the inside to a 1/4 thick x 6-1/2 diameter steel plate. Each channel shall be a U -shape, 1/2 x 1-1/2 constructed of 16 gauge steel and secured to the post with #8-32 x 1 RHM screws and spacers holding the channel 1/16 off of post. The channels shall be designed to be repositioned to create cable chases and separation of power and data cables. The bottom of the post shall be fitted with a glide insert and an adjustable glide with a black 3 diameter aluminum contact surface and a 1/4-20 x 1 threaded stem. Each leg shall be secured to the work surface with four 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwed into threaded inserts embedded in the underside of the work surface. Table legs shall be powder coated. Model # P-TL16- Description TABLE LEG Dimensions 16 HIGH P-TL22- TABLE LEG 22 HIGH P-TL25- TABLE LEG 25 HIGH P-TL27- TABLE LEG 27 HIGH P-TL29- TABLE LEG 29 HIGH P-TL39- TABLE LEG 39 HIGH PAVILION JOINER The joiner plate shall be 4 x 5 constructed of 12 gauge steel powder coated black. The plate shall be secured to the adjoining work surface by means of six #12 x 1 PHSM screws engaging pre-drilled holes. Model # P-JP PAVILION INLINE WORK SURFACE INLINE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 thick high pressure laminate face and.028 thick backer on the underside. All four edges shall be externally banded with 5/16 solid oak, maple, or cherry applied to the core after lamination of the HPL face. The band shall be set flush to the HPL without the use of reveals or vein lines. The entire perimeter shall be shaped to a 1/2 x 3/16 chamfered bead profile. The back edge shall have a grommet 2-1/8 deep x 3-5/8 wide at the back corners and 2-1/8 deep x 3-3/4 wide intermediate grommet (one on 90 wide tops and two on 84 and 96 wide tops). The grommets shall be of the same material and profile as the panel grommets and shall be non-removable after assembly of work surfaces. Each of the four corners shall be pre-drilled and furnished with 9 brackets positioned in either front-to-back or side-to-side positions. The working side corners shall be fitted with threaded inserts for leg plate attachment, and pre-drilled for joiner plate attachment. Work surfaces 60 wide or wider, shall be pre-drilled for two additional 18 long brackets positioned at various universal panel connector location possibilities. Work surfaces shall provide an integral structure that is adjustable from 25 above the floor to the top of the panel and after installation enables the work station to be lifted by work surface without disengagement or loosening. P-W2424- WORKSURFACE 24 D x 24 W P-W2430- WORKSURFACE 24 D x 30 W P-W2436- WORKSURFACE 24 D x 36 W P-W2442- WORKSURFACE 24 D x 42 W P-W2448- WORKSURFACE 24 D x 48 W P-W2460- WORKSURFACE 24 D x 60 W P-W2472- WORKSURFACE 24 D x 72 W P-W3024- WORKSURFACE 30 D x 24 W P-W3030- WORKSURFACE 30 D x 30 W P-W3036- WORKSURFACE 30 D x 36 W P-W3042- WORKSURFACE 30 D x 42 W P-W3048- WORKSURFACE 30 D x 48 W P-W3060- WORKSURFACE 30 D x 60 W P-W3072- WORKSURFACE 30 D x 72 W The Worden Company Source Book October

124 Pavilion Casegoods PAVILION INLINE WORKSURFACE cont'd P-W2484- WORKSURFACE 24 D x 84 W P-W2496- WORKSURFACE 24 D x 96 W P-W3084- WORKSURFACE 30 D x 84 W P-W3096- WORKSURFACE 30 D x 96 W P-W2490- WORKSURFACE 24 D x 90 W P-W3090- WORKSURFACE 30 D x 90 W PAVILION PENINSULA WORKSURFACE PENINSULA WORK SURFACE: Peninsula work surface shall be rectangular, half round, or D shaped constructed the same as standard work surfaces except rounded edges shall be externally banded with 5/16 thick steam bent oak, maple, or cherry. The edge shall be shapped to a 1/2" x 3/16" chamfered bead profile. One edge grommet, 2-1/8 deep x 3-3/4 wide shall be provided on the back edge of 30, 36 and 42 deep work surfaces, and 3-5/8 deep x 6-1/4 wide edge grommets shall be provided on 36, 48, and 60 deep work surfaces. Peninsula work surfaces shall be pre-drilled and furnished with a pair of brackets at the ends and, on 36 and 48 deep units, an additional pair of brackets shall be furnished at the center when a leg is not planned. The connecting corners shall be fitted with threaded inserts for leg plates, and pre-drilled for joiner plate. The D-shaped peninsula work surfaces shall be pre-drilled for a leg located at the vertex of the radius. The 60 half round peninsula work surface shall be pre-drilled for a leg located 4-1/2 off center from the outside edge. All legs and joiner plates must be ordered separately. Model # Description Dimensions P-WP48HR- P-WP60HR- P-WW48HR- P-WW60HR- 1/2 ROUND WRAP 1/2 ROUND WRAP 1/2 ROUND WRAP 1/2 ROUND WRAP 48 HALF 60 HALF 48 HALF 60 HALF P-WP4860- P-WP4872- P-WW4860- P-WW4872- WRAP AROUND WRAP AROUND WRAP AROUND WRAP AROUND 48 D x 60 W 48 D x 72 W 48 D x 60 W 48 D x 72 W P-WP4824- P-WP6030- P-WW4824- P-WW6030- WRAP AROUND WRAP AROUND WRAP AROUND WRAP AROUND 48 D x 24 W 60 D x 30 W 48 D x 24 W 60 D x 30 W P-WP4860D- P-WP4872D- P-WW4860D- P-WW4872D- WRAP AROUND WRAP AROUND WRAP AROUND WRAP AROUND 48 D x 60 W 48 D x 72 W 48 D x 60 W 48 D x 72 W P-WP3060- P-WP3072- P-WP3660- P-WP3672- P-WP4260- P-WP4272- NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND 30 D x 60 W 30 D x 72 W 36 D x 60 W 36 D x 72 W 42 D x 60 W 42 D x 72 W P-WP3060D- P-WP3072D- P-WP3660D- P-WP3672D- P-WP4260D- NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND 30 D x 60 W 30 D x 72 W 36 D x 60 W 36 D x 72 W 42 D x 60 W P-WP4272D- P-WP2424D- P-WP3024D- P-WW2424D- P-WW3024D- NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND NON WRAP AROUND 42 D x 72 W 24 D x 24 W 30 D x 24 W 24 D x 24 W 30 D x 24 W 124 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

125 Pavilion Casegoods PAVILION CORNER WORKSURFACE Corner Work Surfaces: The corner work surfaces shall be the same construction as the standard work surfaces except the working side edge shall be radiused and banded with 5/16 steam bent oak, maple, or cherry. The edge shall be shapped to a 1/2" x 3/16" chamfered bead profile. The rear corner grommets shall be 3-5/8 deep x 3-3/4 wide with the axis set on a 45 angle. Corner work surfaces shall be pre-drilled and furnished with brackets positioned in either front-to-back or side-to-side positions. The working side corners shall be fitted with threaded inserts for leg plate attachment, and pre-drilled for joiner plate attachment. P-WC4224- CORNER, STANDARD 42 D x 24 W P-WC4824- CORNER, STANDARD 48 D x 24 W P-WC4830- CORNER, STANDARD 48 D x 30 W P-WCE4224- CORNER, EXTENDED 2 SIDES 42 D x 24 W P-WCE4824- CORNER, EXTENDED 2 SIDES 48 D x 24 W P-WCE4830- CORNER, EXTENDED 2 SIDES 48 D x 30 W P-WCL4224- CORNER, EXTENDED LEFT 42 D x 24 W P-WCL4824- CORNER, EXTENDED LEFT 48 D x 24 W P-WCL4830- CORNER, EXTENDED LEFT 48 D x 30 W P-WCR4224- CORNER, EXTENDED RIGHT 42 D x 24 W P-WCR4824- CORNER, EXTENDED RIGHT 48 D x 24 W P-WCR4830- CORNER, EXTENDED RIGHT 48 D x 30 W The Worden Company Source Book October

126 Pavilion Casegoods PAVILION SHELF SHELF: The shelves shall be 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 thick high pressure laminate face and.028 thick backer on the underside. All four edges shall be externally banded with 5/16 thick solid oak, maple, or cherry applied to the core after lamination of the HPL. The band shall be profiled to match the work surface. The rear corners shall have a 3/16 (1 when shelf is located in forward position) x 3-5/8 notch to serve as a cord drop. The shelves shall be furnished with a pair of brackets (9 for 12 deep shelves and 18 for 18 deep shelves) at each end in a back -to-front position. Shelves 60 wide or wider shall be provided with two additional brackets located for various universal panel connector locations. Shelves long shall be pre-drilled for task lights of multiple lengths. P-S1224- SHELF 12 D x 24 W P-S1230- SHELF 12 D x 30 W P-S1236- SHELF 12 D x 36 W P-S1242- SHELF 12 D x 42 W P-S1248- SHELF 12 D x 48 W P-S1260- SHELF 12 D x 60 W P-S1272- SHELF 12 D x 72 W P-S1824- SHELF 18 D x 24 W P-S1830- SHELF 18 D x 30 W P-S1836- SHELF 18 D x 36 W P-S1842- SHELF 18 D x 42 W P-S1848- SHELF 18 D x 48 W P-S1860- SHELF 18 D x 60 W P-S1872- SHELF 18 D x 72 W P-S1284- SHELF 12 D x 84 W P-S1296- SHELF 12 D x 96 W P-S1884- SHELF 18 D x 84 W P-S1896- SHELF 18 D x 96 W P-S1290- SHELF 12 D x 90 W P-S1890- SHELF 18 D x 90 W PENINSULA SHELVES: Peninsula shelves shall be rectangular or half-round constructed the same as standard shelves except rounded edges shall be externally banded with 5/16 steam bent oak, maple, or cherry. One edge grommet, 2-1/8 deep x 2-3/8 deep shall be provided on the back edge. The shelves shall be pre-drilled and furnished with a pair of brackets (9 for 12 deep shelves and 18 for 18 deep shelves) and two joiner plates. P-SP2412- RECTANGULAR PENINSULA 13-3/4"D x 25-3/4"W P-SP3618- RECTANGULAR PENINSULA 19-3/4"D x 37-3/4"W P-SP24HR- 24 1/2 ROUND PENINSULA 13-3/4"D x 25-3/4"W P-SP36HR- 36 1/2 ROUND PENINSULA 19-3/4"D x 37-3/4"W TRANSACTION SHELVES: Transaction shelves shall be rectangular or L shaped constructed as standard shelves except without notch. Rectangular shelves up to 48 wide shall be furnished with two pair of brackets. Rectangular shelves over 48 wide and L shaped shelves shall be furnished with four pairs of brackets. P-TC1212- CORNER TRANSACTION 12 D x 12 W P-TC1818- CORNER TRANSACTION 18 D x 18 W P-TS1224- STRAIGHT TRANSACTION 12 D x 24 W P-TS1230- STRAIGHT TRANSACTION 12 D x 30 W P-TS1236- STRAIGHT TRANSACTION 12 D x 36 W P-TS1242- STRAIGHT TRANSACTION 12 D x 42 W P-TS1248- STRAIGHT TRANSACTION 12 D x 48 W P-TS1260- STRAIGHT TRANSACTION 12 D x 60 W P-TS1272- STRAIGHT TRANSACTION 12 D x 72 W P-TS1284- STRAIGHT TRANSACTION 12 D x 84 W P-TS1290- STRAIGHT TRANSACTION 12 D x 90 W P-TS1296- STRAIGHT TRANSACTION 12 D x 96 W 126 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

127 Pavilion Casegoods PAVILION STORAGE MEDIA STORAGE UNITS: The unit shall be 13-7/8 deep x 15-3/4 high consisting of a box with a self-storing flipper door (s). All parts shall be 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak, maple, or cherry veneers on the exposed faces and select grade A veneers on the interior faces. Storage units with two doors shall have both doors grain matched. The bottom edge of the door shall have a 5/16 thick solid oak, maple, or cherry band shaped with a recessed finger pull. The bottom shelf shall be 3/4 thick notched at both ends for cord egress. Doors shall be furnished with locks with 1-key pull or 2-key pull. All locks must be master keyed. The unit shall be pre-drilled on the underside for various length task lights and furnished with black brackets for attachment. P-MSU30- MEDIA STORAGE UNIT 30 WIDE P-MSU36- MEDIA STORAGE UNIT 36 WIDE P-MSU42- MEDIA STORAGE UNIT 42 WIDE P-MSU48- MEDIA STORAGE UNIT 48 WIDE PAVILION FREE-STANDING WORKSURFACE FREE-STANDING WORK SURFACES: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 thick high pressure laminate face and.028 thick backer on the underside. All four edges shall be externally banded with 5/16 solid oak, maple, or cherry applied to the core after lamination of the HPL face. On round tables, the perimeter shall be externally banded with 5/16 steam bent solid oak, maple, or cherry. The band shall be set flush to the HPL without the use of reveals or vein lines. The entire perimeter shall be shaped to a 1/2 x 3/16 chamfered bead profile. On work surfaces 60 long or longer a V-shaped 14 gauge steel keel shall be screwed to the underside. On tables 42 wide or wider, and 60 long or longer, two parallel steel keels shall be provided. Each work surface shall be provided with four legs (ordered separately) secured to the work surface with 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwed into metal inserts embedded in the underside of the work surface. P-TB24R- P-TB30R- P-TB36R- P-TB42R- P-TB48R- P-TB60R- WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE 24 DIAMETER 30 DIAMETER 36 DIAMETER 42 DIAMETER 48 DIAMETER 60 DIAMETER P-TB2424- P-TB2436- P-TB2448- WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE 24 SQUARE 24 D x 36 W 24 D x 48 W P-TB3030- P-TB3048- P-TB3060- P-TB3072- P-TB3090- WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE 30 SQUARE 30 D x 48 W 30 D x 60 W 30 D x 72 W 30 D x 90 W P-TB3636- P-TB3648- P-TB3660- P-TB3672- P-TB3690- WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE 36 SQUARE 36 D x 48 W 36 D x 60 W 36 D x 72 W 36 D x 90 W P-TB4242- P-TB4260- P-TB4272- P-TB4290- WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE 42 SQUARE 42 D x 60 W 42 D x 72 W 42 D x 90 W P-TB4848- P-TB4860- P-TB4872- P-TB4890- WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE WORKSURFACE 48 SQUARE 48 D x 60 W 48 D x 72 W 48 D x 90 W The Worden Company Source Book October

128 Pavilion Casegoods PAVILION FREE-STANDING WORKSURFACE CONT'D P-TG42R- W/ GROMMET HOLE 42 DIAMETER P-TG48R- Model # Description W/ GROMMET HOLE Dimensions 48 DIAMETER P-TG60R- W/ GROMMET HOLE 60 DIAMETER PAVILION FREE-STANDING SINGLE FACED WORKSURFACE Model # P-TG2436- P-TG2448- P-TG3048- P-TG3636- P-TG3648- P-TG4242- P-TG4848- P-TG4260- P-TG4860- Description W/ GROMMET HOLE W/ GROMMET HOLE W/ GROMMET HOLE W/ GROMMET HOLE W/ GROMMET HOLE W/ GROMMET HOLE W/ GROMMET HOLE W/ GROMMET HOLE W/ GROMMET HOLE Dimensions 24 D x 36 W 24 D x 48 W 30 D x 48 W 36 SQUARE 36 D x 48 W 42 SQUARE 48 SQUARE 42 D x 60 W 48 D x 60 W P-TG3060- P-TG3072- P-TG3660- P-TG3672- P-TG4272- P-TG4872- P-TG4290- P-TG4890- W/ 2 GROMMET HOLES W/ 2 GROMMET HOLES W/ 2 GROMMET HOLES W/ 2 GROMMET HOLES W/ 2 GROMMET HOLES W/ 2 GROMMET HOLES W/ 2 GROMMET HOLES W/ 2 GROMMET HOLES 30 D x 60 W 30 D x 60 W 36 D x 60 W 36 D x 72 W 42 D x 72 W 48 D x 72 W 42 D x 90 W 48 D x 90 W P-TG3090- P-TG3690- W/ 3 GROMMET HOLES W/ 3 GROMMET HOLES 30 D x 90 W 36 D x 90 W 128 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

129 Pavilion Electrical PAVILION J-CHANNEL J-CHANNEL: The assembly shall be 6 deep x 7-1/4 high mounted 15 above the floor. The assembly will have provisions for mounting without screws or other defacement of wood panels. The assembly shall consist of 4-1/2 deep, black mounting shelf, a 4 deep x 4 high channel for power cords management and distribution, and 4 deep x 1-1/4 high independent data cableway for data cable management and distribution. The J-channels shall be an extruded black plastic material UL rated 94 HB or better. The data cableway shall be designed to meet the bending radius requirements of the current TIA/EIA standards and to prevent pinching, crimping, or crushing of cables. The J-channels shall be suspended from the mounting shelf with brackets and locking pins. Model # Description Additional Description P-JC-24 P-JC-24L P-JC-24R P-JC-30 P-JC-30L P-JC-30R P-JC-36 P-JC-36L P-JC-36R P-JC-42 P-JC-42L P-JC-42R P-JC-48 P-JC-48L P-JC-48R 24 L 24 L W/ MITER ON LEFT 24 L W/ MITER ON RIGHT 30 L 30 L W/ MITER ON LEFT 30 L W/ MITER ON RIGHT 36 L 36 L W/ MITER ON LEFT 36 L W/ MITER ON RIGHT 42 L 42 L W/ MITER ON LEFT 42 L W/ MITER ON RIGHT 48 L 48 L W/ MITER ON LEFT 48 L W/ MITER ON RIGHT P-JC-24-P P-JC-24L-P P-JC-24R-P P-JC-30-P P-JC-30L-P P-JC-30R-P P-JC-36-P P-JC-36L-P P-JC-36R-P P-JC-42-P P-JC-42L-P P-JC-42R-P P-JC-48-P P-JC-48L-P 24 L W/ DATA PORT 24 L W/ DATA PORT MITER ON LEFT 24 L W/ DATA PORT 30 L W/ DATA PORT 30 L W/ DATA PORT 30 L W/ DATA PORT 36 L W/ DATA PORT 36 L W/ DATA PORT 36 L W/ DATA PORT 42 L W/ DATA PORT 42 L W/ DATA PORT 42 L W/ DATA PORT 48 L W/ DATA PORT 48 L W/ DATA PORT MITER ON RIGHT MITER ON LEFT MITER ON RIGHT MITER ON LEFT MITER ON RIGHT MITER ON LEFT MITER ON RIGHT MITER ON LEFT P-JC-48R-P 48 L W/ DATA PORT MITER ON RIGHT J-CHANNEL W/ DUPLEX OUTLET PORT(S): The assembly shall be 6 deep x 7-1/4 high, mounted 15 above the floor. The assembly shall have provisions for mounting without screws or other defacement of the wood panels. The assembly shall consist of a 4-1/2 deep black mounting shelf, a 4 deep x 4 high channel with power distribution and cord management, and a 4 deep x 1-1/4 high independent data cableway for data management and distribution. The J-channels shall be an extruded black plastic material UL rated 94HB or better. The power distribution shall consist of a cable assembly with one or two double face duplex outlet ports (as specified in the equipment schedule) and a quick connect connector attached by means of flexible conduit. The cable assembly shall be an 8-wire 4-circuit system with provisions for 3 utility circuits and 1 isolated dedicated computer circuit having a separate neutral and an isolated ground. The duplex ports shall be molded directly onto a 9/16 diameter trade size oval metallic conduit and shall contain quick connect connectors. The opposite end of the cable shall have a housing to create a safety loop wire coil to allow the cable to expand or bend without placing strain on the wire or terminals. The wire shall be continuous from duplex port to the quick connect. Terminals shall be of 3 point contact design to ensure positive contact of mating terminals. All wires shall be 12 gauge except for the shared neutral which shall be 10 gauge to prevent overload. The system has the capability to change circuit designations or add surge suppression without having to change the wiring. Duplex or surge supression outlets and circuit designations shall be as described in the equipment schedule. The J-channel and duplex ports shall be suspended from mounting shelf with brackets and locking pins. The design of the system shall be such that the duplex ports and conduit will be hidden from view and protected by the J-channel with only the duplex outlet face being exposed. The assembly shall be UL Listed under Office Furnishing Standard (QAWZ). Model # Description Additional Description P-JCO W/ 1 DUPLEX OPENING P-JCO1-24L 24 W/ 1 DUPLEX OPENING MITER ON LEFT P-JCO1-24L-P 24 W/ 1 DUPLEX OPENING DATA PORT. MITER ON LEFT P-JCO1-24-P 24 W/ 1 DUPLEX OPENING DATA PORT. P-JCO1-24R 24 W/ 1 DUPLEX OPENING MITER ON RIGHT P-JCO1-24R-P 24 W/ 1 DUPLEX OPENING DATA PORT. MITER ON RIGHT P-JCO W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS P-JCO2-30L 30 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS MITER ON LEFT P-JCO2-30L-P 30 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. MITER ON LEFT P-JCO2-30-P 30 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. P-JCO2-30R 30 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS MITER ON RIGHT P-JCO2-30R-P 30 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. MITER ON RIGHT P-JCO W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS P-JCO2-36L 36 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS WITH MITER ON LEFT P-JCO2-36L-P 36 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. MITER ON LEFT The Worden Company Source Book October

130 Pavilion Electrical PAVILION J-CHANNEL cont d Model # P-JCO2-36-P Description 36 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS Additional Description DATA PORT. P-JCO2-36R 36 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS WITH MITER ON RIGHT P-JCO2-36R-P 36 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. MITER ON RIGHT P-JCO W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS P-JCO2-42L 42 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS MITER ON LEFT P-JCO2-42L-P 42 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. MITER ON LEFT P-JCO2-42-P 42 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. P-JCO2-42R 42 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS MITER ON RIGHT P-JCO2-42R-P 42 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. MITER ON RIGHT P-JCO W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS P-JCO2-48L 48 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS MITER ON LEFT P-JCO2-48L-P 48 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. MITER ON LEFT P-JCO2-48-P 48 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. P-JCO2-48R 48 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS MITER ON RIGHT P-JCO2-48R-P 48 W/ 2 DUPLEX OPENINGS DATA PORT. MITER ON RIGHT PAVILION POWER COLUMN PASS THRU PASS-THRU CHANNELS: The assembly shall be 6 deep x 7-1/4 high, mounted 15 above the floor. The assembly must have provisions for mounting without screws or other defacement of the wood panels. The assembly shall consist of a 4-1/2 deep black mounting shelf, a 4 deep x 4 high channel with power distribution and a 4 deep x 1-1/4 high independent data cableway for data management and distribution. The J-channels shall be an extruded black plastic material UL rated 94HB or better. The data cableway shall be designed to meet the bending radius requirements of the current TIA/EIA standards and to prevent pinching crimping or crushing of cables. The channel shall include a jumper cable with quick connect connectors on both ends and of sufficient length to connect to each other or to power assemblies at adjoining channels. The assembly shall be UL Listed under Office Furnishing Standard (QAWZ). Model # Description Additional Description P-JC PASS-THRU CHANNEL P-JC44-24L 24 PASS-THRU CHANNEL LEFT MITER P-JC44-24R 24 PASS-THRU CHANNEL RIGHT MITER P-JC PASS-THRU CHANNEL P-JC44-30L 30 PASS-THRU CHANNEL LEFT MITER P-JC44-30R 30 PASS-THRU CHANNEL RIGHT MITER P-JC PASS-THRU CHANNEL P-JC44-36L 36 PASS-THRU CHANNEL LEFT MITER P-JC44-36R 36 PASS-THRU CHANNEL RIGHT MITER P-JC PASS-THRU CHANNEL P-JC44-42L 42 PASS-THRU CHANNEL LEFT MITER P-JC44-42R 42 PASS-THRU CHANNEL RIGHT MITER P-JC PASS-THRU CHANNEL P-JC44-48L 48 PASS-THRU CHANNEL LEFT MITER P-JC44-48R 48 PASS-THRU CHANNEL RIGHT MITER PAVILION J-CHANNEL PASS THRU Model # P-JC88-24 Description 24 PASS-THRU CHANNEL Additional Description P-JC88-24L 24 PASS-THRU CHANNEL WITH LEFT MITER P-JC88-24R 24 PASS-THRU CHANNEL WITH RIGHT MITER P-JC PASS-THRU CHANNEL P-JC88-30L 30 PASS-THRU CHANNEL WITH LEFT MITER P-JC88-30R 30 PASS-THRU CHANNEL WITH RIGHT MITER P-JC PASS-THRU CHANNEL P-JC88-36L 36 PASS-THRU CHANNEL WITH LEFT MITER P-JC88-36R 36 PASS-THRU CHANNEL WITH RIGHT MITER P-JC PASS-THRU CHANNEL P-JC88-42L 42 PASS-THRU CHANNEL WITH LEFT MITER P-JC88-42R 42 PASS-THRU CHANNEL WITH RIGHT MITER P-JC PASS-THRU CHANNEL P-JC88-48L 48 PASS-THRU CHANNEL WITH LEFT MITER P-JC88-48R 48 PASS-THRU CHANNEL WITH RIGHT MITE 130 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

131 Pavilion Electrical PAVILION HORIZONTAL CHASE HORIZONTAL CHASE: The horizontal chase shall be rectangular unit 1-3/4 thick x 4-3/4 wide provided with brackets allowing them to be mounted in the left or right handed positions of Pavilion work stations. The assembly will have provisions for mounting without defacement of wood panels. The unit shall be constructed of a minimum of 20 gauge steel formed to create a 2-compartment base channel with one closed end and a snap-on cover. The exposed parts shall be finished with a black textured powder coat. Model # P-HC-18 Description 18 L Additional Description COLOR: BLACK P-HC L COLOR: BLACK P-HC L COLOR: BLACK P-HC L COLOR: BLACK P-HC L COLOR: BLACK P-HC L COLOR: BLACK PAVILION J-CHANNEL HORIZONTAL CHASE Model # Description Dimensions P-HC88-18 FOR USE W/ 4 WIRE ONLY 18 L P-HC88-24 FOR USE W/ 4 WIRE ONLY 24 L P-HC88-30 FOR USE W/ 4 WIRE ONLY 30 L P-HC88-36 FOR USE W/ 4 WIRE ONLY 36 L P-HC88-42 FOR USE W/ 4 WIRE ONLY 42 L P-HC88-48 FOR USE W/ 4 WIRE ONLY 48 L PAVILION 20" POWER COLUMN POWER COLUMN: The power column assembly shall include an outlet assembly above the worksurface and a power/data J-channel assembly with interconnect cables below the work surface. The outlet assembly shall be a rectangular unit, 1-13/16 thick x 2-3/8 wide provided with brackets allowing them to be mounted in the left or right corners of Pavilion Work Stations. The unit shall be constructed of 18 gauge cold rolled steel and painted black. The unit shall have five 15 amp grounded receptacles and a cutout above the work surface, and two interconnect sockets below the work surface. The data port shall be separated from the power connections by a septum and shall comply with current TIA/EIA standards for Cat 6 and fiber optic installations. The J-channel assembly shall be 6 deep x 7-1/4 high mounted 15 above the floor consisting of a 4-1/2 deep black mounting shelf, a 4 deep x 4 high channel for power, and a 4 deep x 1-1/4 high independent data cableway for data cable management and distribution. The J-channels shall be an extruded black plastic material UL rated 94HB or better. The data cableway shall be designed to meet the bending radius requirements of the current TIA/EIA standards and to prevent pinching, crimping or crushing of cables. The J-channels shall be suspended from mounting shelf with brackets and locking pins. All components must have provisions for mounting to furniture without the use of screws or other defacement of wood panels.. The assembly shall be rated as a 20 amp, 125 volt, 60 HZ system and shall be UL Listed under the Office Furnishing Standard (QAWZ). When specified in the equipment schedule the power column assembly may be specified with a switch controlling the top two receptacles. Model # Description Additional Description P-PC1-R2030 P-PC1-R2030L P-PC1-R2030R P-PC1-R2036 P-PC1-R2036L P-PC1-R2036R P-PC1-R2042 P-PC1-R2042L P-PC1-R2042R P-PC1-R2048 P-PC1-R2048L P-PC1-R2048R P-SPC1-R2030 P-SPC1-R2030L P-SPC1-R2030R P-SPC1-R2036 P-SPC1-R2036L P-SPC1-R2036R P-SPC1-R2042 P-SPC1-R2042L P-SPC1-R2042R P-SPC1-R2048 P-SPC1-R2048L P-SPC1-R2048R P-SPC1-R2530 P-SPC1-R2530L P-SPC1-R2530R P-SPC1-R2536 P-SPC1-R2536L P-SPC1-R2536R P-SPC1-R2542 P-SPC1-R2542L P-SPC1-R2542R W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/LEFT MITER W/RIGHT MITER W/LEFT MITER W/RIGHT MITER W/LEFT MITER W/RIGHT MITER W/LEFT MITER W/RIGHT MITER SWITCH SWITCH, LEFT MITER SWITCH, RIGHT MITER SWITCH SWITCH, LEFT MITER SWITCH, RIGHT MITER SWITCH SWITCH, LEFT MITER SWITCH, RIGHT MITER SWITCH SWITCH, LEFT MITER SWITCH, RIGHT MITER SWITCH SWITCH, LEFT MITER SWITCH, RIGHT MITER SWITCH SWITCH, LEFT MITER SWITCH, RIGHT MITER SWITCH SWITCH, LEFT MITER SWITCH, RIGHT MITER The Worden Company Source Book October

132 Pavilion Electrical PAVILION 25 POWER COLUMN Model # Description Additional Description P-PC1-R2530 P-PC1-R2530L P-PC1-R2530R P-PC1-R2536 P-PC1-R2536L P-PC1-R2536R P-PC1-R2542 P-PC1-R2542L P-PC1-R2542R P-PC1-R2548 P-PC1-R2548L P-PC1-R2548R W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/LEFT MITER W/RIGHT MITER W/LEFT MITER W/RIGHT MITER W/LEFT MITER W/RIGHT MITER W/LEFT MITER W/RIGHT MITER P-SPC1-R2530 P-SPC1-R2530L P-SPC1-R2530R P-SPC1-R2536 P-SPC1-R2536L P-SPC1-R2536R P-SPC1-R2542 W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 30 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 36 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL SWITCH SWITCH, LEFT MITER SWITCH, RIGHT MITER SWITCH SWITCH, LEFT MITER SWITCH, RIGHT MITER SWITCH P-SPC1-R2542L W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL SWITCH, LEFT MITER P-SPC1-R2542R P-SPC1-R2548 P-SPC1-R2548L P-SPC1-R2548R W/DATA PORT, 42 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL W/DATA PORT, 48 J-CHANNEL SWITCH, RIGHT MITER SWITCH SWITCH, LEFT MITER SWITCH, RT MITER PAVILION POWER TAP POWER TAPS: The electrical outlet assembly shall be a rectangular unit 1-3/16 thick x 2-3/8 wide provided with brackets allowing them to be mounted in the left or right corners of Pavilion work stations. The assembly shall have provisions for mounting without screws or other defacement of wood panels. The unit shall be constructed of 18 gauge cold rolled steel and painted black. The unit shall have five grounded receptacles and a dataport with a blank data/voice cover above the work surface, a 15 amp circuit breaker, and a 6 0 long, 14 gauge black SJ series cord with a molded NEMA 5-15P 15 amp plug. The data port shall be separate from the power connections by a septum and comply with current TIA/EIA standard for Cat. 6 and fiber optic installation. The voice/data jack shall be specified elsewhere. The assembly shall be rated as a 15 amp 125 VAC, 60 HZ system and shall be UL Listed under the Utility table standard. Model # Description Additional Description P-PT-R20 P-PT-R25 P-SPT-R20 P-SPT-R25 20 POWER TAP 25 POWER TAP 20 POWER TAP W/SWITCH 25 POWER TAP W/SWITCH DATA PORT, 6 CORD DATA PORT, 6 CORD DATA PORT, 6 CORD DATA PORT, 6 CORD 132 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

133 Pavilion Electrical PAVILION FLOOR POWER POWER ENTRIES - CORD CONNECTED: The power entries shall consist of a metal chase with blank data cover and a power raceway. The chase shall be a rectangular unit 2-1/2 deep x 4-3/4 wide, constructed of 14 gauge steel with cutouts for the power raceway and data faceplates and shall include brackets allowing the chase to be mounted on left or right hand sides of Pavilion work stations. The assembly shall have provisions for mounting without the use of screws or other defacement of wood panels. The power raceway shall be interchangeable with the data faceplate allowing placement above or below the data faceplate. The raceway shall terminate at one end with a faceplate and a 2-0 long S series black cord with a NEMA 5-20P configured 20 amp straight molded plug and terminate at the opposite end with flexible conduit with a quick connect connector. The conduit shall be of sufficient length and the connector of proper polarity and gender to permit interconnection with adjacent power assemblies. The assembly shall be 20 amp rated and UL Listed under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) POWER ENTRIES - HARDWIRED: The power entries shall consist of a metal chase with blank data cover and a power raceway. The chase shall be a rectangular unit 2-1/2 deep x 4-3/4 wide, constructed of 14 gauge steel with cutouts for the power raceway and data faceplates and shall include brackets allowing the chase to be mounted on left or right hand sides of Pavilion work stations. The assembly shall have provisions for mounting without the use of screws or other defacement of wood panels. The power raceway shall be interchangeable with the data faceplate allowing placement above or below the data faceplate. The raceway shall terminate at one end with a faceplate, 3' long black liquid tight conduit, and fitting. The assembly shall be 20 amp rated and UL Listed under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ) Model # Description Additional Description P-CPE CHASE, FOR COLUMN 24 CORD W/NEMA 5-20P P-CPE1-9 9 CHASE, FOR COLUMN 24 CORD W/NEMA 5-20P Cord Connect Hard Wire P-CPE CHASE, HARD WIRED/COLUMN 36 L LIQUID TIGHT P-CPE2-9 9 CHASE, HARD WIRED/COLUMN 36 L LIQUID TIGHT P-JPE1-9 9 CHASE CONNECT FOR J-C 24 L. CORD W/NEMA 5-20P P-JPE CHASE CONNECT FOR J-C 24 L. CORD W/NEMA 5-20P Cord Connect Hard Wire P-JPE4G-9 9 CHASE, HARD WIRED/J-CHANNEL 36 LIQUID TIGHT P-JPE4G CHASE HARD WIRED/J-CHANNEL 36 LIQUID TIGHT PAVILION WALL ENTRY WALL ENTRIES - CORD CONNECTED: The power entry assembly shall consist of a power raceway and a mounting plate. The assembly shall have provisions for mounting into any of the panel grommet locations without having to deface any of the panels. The raceway shall consist of a 2-0 long S series black cord with a NEMA 5-20P configured 20 amp right angled molded plug and terminate at the opposite end with flexible conduit with a quick connect connector. The conduit shall be of sufficient length and the connector of proper polarity and gender to permit interconnection with adjacent power assemblies. The assembly shall be of spacesaving design requiring no more than 1-1/2 clearance for connection to power supply outlet. The assembly shall be 20 amp rated and UL Listed under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). WALL ENTRIES - HARDWIRED: The power entry assembly shall consist of a power raceway and a mounting plate. The assembly shall have provisions for mounting into any of the panel grommet locations without having to deface any of the panels. The raceway shall terminate at one end with a faceplate, 5' long black liquid tight conduit, and right angle fitting. Termination on the opposite end with flexible conduit and quick connect connector. The conduit shall be of sufficient length and the connector of proper polarity and gender to permit interconnection with adjacent power assemblies. The assembly shall be of spacesaving design requiring no more than 1-1/2 clearance for connection to power supply outlet. The assembly shall be 20 amp rated and UL Listed under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Model # Description Additional Description P-CWE1 CORD CONNECT 24 CORD. W/NEMA 5-20P Cord Connect Hard Wire P-CWE2 HARD WIRED 60 L LIQUID TIGHT Cord Connect Hard Wire P-JWE1 CORD CONNECT FOR J-C 24 CORD W/NEMA 5-20P P-JWE4G HARD WIRED FOR J-C 60 L. LIQUID TIGHT PAVILION J-CHANNEL MISC Model # Description P-JCEC END CAP. NON HANDED End Cap Filler P-JCF FILLER. BLACK The Worden Company Source Book October

134 Stance Casegoods STANCE ROUND TABLE TABLE TOPS: Tops shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-3/16. Wood Edge band: The edges of tops shall be externally banded with a 7/16 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band. PVC Edge band: The edges of all shaped tops shall be externally banded with a 3/8 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled PVC t-edge band. TABLE LEGS: Leg weldments shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 1.75 Diameter Bent Steel Tubing with a 7 gauge, 6 square mounting plate and have a powder coat finish. The leg weldment is attached to the table top with seven truss head sheet metal screws. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with one of the following foot options. The feet are attached to the legs using a headless hanger bolt and tube connector. Tall Wood Foot: Tall wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter plastic, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Wood Foot: Short wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. Tall Nylon Foot: Tall nylon feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter plastic, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Nylon Foot: Short nylon feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. Model # Description Dimensions STA-036-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 36 DIAMETER X HGT STA-036-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 36 DIAMETER X HGT STA-036-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 36 DIAMETER X HGT STA-036-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 36 DIAMETER X HGT STA-036-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 36 DIAMETER X HGT STA-036-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 36 DIAMETER X HGT STA-036-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 36 DIAMETER X HGT STA-036-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 36 DIAMETER X HGT STA-036-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 36 DIAMETER X HGT STA-048-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 48 DIAMETER X HGT STA-048-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 48 DIAMETER X HGT STA-048-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 48 DIAMETER X HGT STA-048-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 48 DIAMETER X HGT STA-048-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 48 DIAMETER X HGT STA-048-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 48 DIAMETER X HGT STA-048-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 48 DIAMETER X HGT STA-048-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 48 DIAMETER X HGT STA-048-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 48 DIAMETER X HGT STA-060-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 60 DIAMETER X HGT STA-060-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 60 DIAMETER X HGT STA-060-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 60 DIAMETER X HGT STA-060-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 60 DIAMETER X HGT STA-060-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 60 DIAMETER X HGT STA-060-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 60 DIAMETER X HGT STA-060-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 60 DIAMETER X HGT STA-060-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 60 DIAMETER X HGT STA-060-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 60 DIAMETER X HGT STANCE VERTICAL WIRE MANAGER The Stance vertical wire manager is offered in heights to match the line offering. The leg is fabricated from extruded aluminum and includes a pair of angular, adjustable top brackets along with a black PVC foot pad. The extrusion features a vertical opening that allows access to a pair of inner cavities. The innermost cavity is suitable for management of smaller data and electrical cord, while the outer cavity allows for management of one ½ liquid tight multiple circuit hardwire connection, a black velcro strap is included to prevent cables from being dislodged. The leg is offered in arctic silver and graphite finishes. Model # Description Dimensions VRM-25-AS ARCTIC SILVER 25"H VRM-25 GP GRAPHITE 25"H VRM-27-AS ARCTIC SILVER 27"H VRM-27-GP GRAPHITE 27"H VRM-29-AS ARCTIC SILVER 29"H VRM-29-GP GRAPHITE 29"H 134 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

135 Stance Casegoods STANCE SQUARE TABLE TABLE TOPS: Tops shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-3/16. Wood Edge band: The edges of tops shall be externally banded with a 7/16 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band. The long edge bands shall extend over the short edge bands to form a butt joint at the corners PVC Edge band: The edges of all tops shall be externally banded with a 3/8 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled PVC t-edge band. The corners of all tops shall have a minimum core radius of 3 inches to allow for a continuous band. The bottom side of the table tops are fitted with a formed metal anti-sag device(s). TABLE LEGS: Leg weldments shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 1.75 Diameter Bent Steel Tubing with a 7 gauge, 6 square mounting plate and have a powder coat finish. The leg weldment is attached to the table top with seven truss head sheet metal screws. TABLE LEGS: Leg weldments shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 1.75 Diameter Bent Steel Tubing with a 7 gauge, 6 square mounting plate and have a powder coat finish. The leg weldment is attached to the table top with seven truss head sheet metal screws. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with one of the following foot options. The feet are attached to the legs using a headless hanger bolt and tube connector. Tall Wood Foot: Tall wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter plastic, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Wood Foot: Short wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. Tall Nylon Foot: Tall plastic feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter plastic, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Nylon Foot: Short plastic feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. Model # Description Dimensions STA-3636-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 36 W x 36 L x HGT STA-3636-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 36 W x 36 L x HGT STA-3636-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 36 W x 36 L x HGT STA-3636-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 36 W x 36 L x HGT STA-3636-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 36 W x 36 L x HGT STA-3636-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 36 W x 36 L x HGT STA-3636-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 36 W x 36 L x HGT STA-3636-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 36 W x 36 L x HGT STA-3636-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 36 W x 36 L x HGT STA-4242-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 42 W x 42 L x HGT STA-4242-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 42 W x 42 L x HGT STA-4242-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 42 W x 42 L x HGT STA-4242-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 42 W x 42 L x HGT STA-4242-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 42 W x 42 L x HGT STA-4242-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 42 W x 42 L x HGT STA-4242-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 42 W x 42 L x HGT STA-4242-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 42 W x 42 L x HGT STA-4242-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 42 W x 42 L x HGT STA-4848-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 48 W x 48 L x HGT STA-4848-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 48 W x 48 L x HGT STA-4848-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 48 W x 48 L x HGT STA-4848-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 48 W x 48 L x HGT STA-4848-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 48 W x 48 L x HGT STA-4848-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 48 W x 48 L x HGT STA-4848-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 48 W x 48 L x HGT STA-4848-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 48 W x 48 L x HGT STA-4848-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 48 W x 48 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

136 Stance Casegoods STANCE RECTANGULAR TABLE TABLE TOPS: Tops shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-3/16. Wood Edge band: The edges of tops shall be externally banded with a 7/16 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band. The long edge bands shall extend over the short edge bands to form a butt joint at the corners PVC Edge band: The edges of all shaped tops shall be externally banded with a 3/8 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled PVC t-edge band. The corners of all tops shall have a minimum core radius of 3 inches to allow for a continuous band. The bottom side of the table tops are fitted with a formed metal anti-sag device(s). TABLE LEGS: Leg weldments shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 1.75 Diameter Bent Steel Tubing with a 7 gauge, 6 square mounting plate and have a powder coat finish. The leg weldment is attached to the table top with seven truss head sheet metal screws. TABLE LEGS: Leg weldments shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 1.75 Diameter Bent Steel Tubing with a 7 gauge, 6 square mounting plate and have a powder coat finish. The leg weldment is attached to the table top with seven truss head sheet metal screws. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with one of the following foot options. The feet are attached to the legs using a headless hanger bolt and tube connector. Tall Wood Foot: Tall wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter NYLON, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Wood Foot: Short wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. Tall Nylon Foot: Tall nylon feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter NYLON, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Nylon Foot: Short nylon feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. Model # Description Dimensions STA-2436-C-W4 STA-2436-C-W5 STA-2436-C-W6 STA-2436-M-W1 STA-2436-M-W2 STA-2436-M-W3 STA-2436-P-P1 STA-2436-P-P2 STA-2436-P-P3 STA-2448-C-W4 STA-2448-C-W5 STA-2448-C-W6 STA-2448-M-W1 STA-2448-M-W2 STA-2448-M-W3 STA-2448-P-P1 STA-2448-P-P2 STA-2448-P-P3 STA-2460-C-W4 STA-2460-C-W5 STA-2460-C-W6 STA-2460-M-W1 STA-2460-M-W2 STA-2460-M-W3 STA-2460-P-P1 STA-2460-P-P2 STA-2460-P-P3 STA-3036-C-W4 STA-3036-C-W5 STA-3036-C-W6 STA-3036-M-W1 STA-3036-M-W2 STA-3036-M-W3 STA-3036-P-P1 STA-3036-P-P2 STA-3036-P-P3 STA-3048-C-W4 STA-3048-C-W5 STA-3048-C-W6 STA-3048-M-W1 STA-3048-M-W2 STA-3048-M-W3 STA-3048-P-P1 STA-3048-P-P2 STA-3048-P-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS 24 X 36 X HGT 24 X 36 X HGT 24 X 36 X HGT 24 X 36 X HGT 24 X 36 X HGT 24 X 36 X HGT 24 X 36 X HGT 24 X 36 X HGT 24 X 36 X HGT 24 X 48 X HGT 24 X 48 X HGT 24 X 48 X HGT 24 X 48 X HGT 24 X 48 X HGT 24 X 48 X HGT 24 X 48 X HGT 24 X 48 X HGT 24 X 48 X HGT 24 X 60 X HGT 24 X 60 X HGT 24 X 60 X HGT 24 X 60 X HGT 24 X 60 X HGT 24 X 60 X HGT 24 X 60 X HGT 24 X 60 X HGT 24 X 60 X HGT 30 X 36 X HGT 30 X 36 X HGT 30 X 36 X HGT 30 X 36 X HGT 30 X 36 X HGT 30 X 36 X HGT 30 X 36 X HGT 30 X 36 X HGT 30 X 36 X HGT 30 X 48 X HGT 30 X 48 X HGT 30 X 48 X HGT 30 X 48 X HGT 30 X 48 X HGT 30 X 48 X HGT 30 X 48 X HGT 30 X 48 X HGT 30 X 48 X HGT 136 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

137 Stance Casegoods STANCE RECTANGULAR TABLE cont'd Model # Description Dimensions STA-3060-C-W4 STA-3060-C-W5 STA-3060-C-W6 STA-3060-M-W1 STA-3060-M-W2 STA-3060-M-W3 STA-3060-P-P1 STA-3060-P-P2 STA-3060-P-P3 STA-3072-C-W4 STA-3072-C-W5 STA-3072-C-W6 STA-3072-M-W1 STA-3072-M-W2 STA-3072-M-W3 STA-3072-P-P1 STA-3072-P-P2 STA-3072-P-P3 STA-3648-C-W4 STA-3648-C-W5 STA-3648-C-W6 STA-3648-M-W1 STA-3648-M-W2 STA-3648-M-W3 STA-3648-P-P1 STA-3648-P-P2 STA-3648-P-P3 STA-3660-C-W4 STA-3660-C-W5 STA-3660-C-W6 STA-3660-M-W1 STA-3660-M-W2 STA-3660-M-W3 STA-3660-P-P1 STA-3660-P-P2 STA-3660-P-P3 STA-3672-C-W4 STA-3672-C-W5 STA-3672-C-W6 STA-3672-M-W1 STA-3672-M-W2 STA-3672-M-W3 STA-3672-P-P1 STA-3672-P-P2 STA-3672-P-P3 STA-3684-C-W4 STA-3684-C-W5 STA-3684-C-W6 STA-3684-M-W1 STA-3684-M-W2 STA-3684-M-W3 STA-3684-P-P1 STA-3684-P-P2 STA-3684-P-P3 STA-3690-C-W4 STA-3690-C-W5 STA-3690-C-W6 STA-3690-M-W1 STA-3690-M-W2 STA-3690-M-W3 STA-3690-P-P1 STA-3690-P-P2 STA-3690-P-P3 STA-4248-C-W4 STA-4248-C-W5 STA-4248-C-W6 STA-4248-M-W1 STA-4248-M-W2 STA-4248-M-W3 STA-4248-P-P1 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT 30 X 60 X HGT 30 X 60 X HGT 30 X 60 X HGT 30 X 60 X HGT 30 X 60 X HGT 30 X 60 X HGT 30 X 60 X HGT 30 X 60 X HGT 30 X 60 X HGT 30 X 72 X HGT 30 X 72 X HGT 30 X 72 X HGT 30 X 72 X HGT 30 X 72 X HGT 30 X 72 X HGT 30 X 72 X HGT 30 X 72 X HGT 30 X 72 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

138 Stance Casegoods STANCE RECTANGULAR TABLE cont'd Model # Description Dimensions STA-4248-P-P2 STA-4248-P-P3 STA-4260-C-W4 STA-4260-C-W5 STA-4260-C-W6 STA-4260-M-W1 STA-4260-M-W2 STA-4260-M-W3 STA-4260-P-P1 STA-4260-P-P2 STA-4260-P-P3 STA-4272-C-W4 STA-4272-C-W5 STA-4272-C-W6 STA-4272-M-W1 STA-4272-M-W2 STA-4272-M-W3 STA-4272-P-P1 STA-4272-P-P2 STA-4272-P-P3 STA-4284-C-W4 STA-4284-C-W5 STA-4284-C-W6 STA-4284-M-W1 STA-4284-M-W2 STA-4284-M-W3 STA-4284-P-P1 STA-4284-P-P2 STA-4284-P-P3 STA-4290-C-W4 STA-4290-C-W5 STA-4290-C-W6 STA-4290-M-W1 STA-4290-M-W2 STA-4290-M-W3 STA-4290-P-P1 STA-4290-P-P2 STA-4290-P-P3 STA-4860-C-W4 STA-4860-C-W5 STA-4860-C-W6 STA-4860-M-W1 STA-4860-M-W2 STA-4860-M-W3 STA-4860-P-P1 STA-4860-P-P2 STA-4860-P-P3 STA-4872-C-W4 STA-4872-C-W5 STA-4872-C-W6 STA-4872-M-W1 STA-4872-M-W2 STA-4872-M-W3 STA-4872-P-P1 STA-4872-P-P2 STA-4872-P-P3 STA-4884-C-W4 STA-4884-C-W5 STA-4884-C-W6 STA-4884-M-W1 STA-4884-M-W2 STA-4884-M-W3 STA-4884-P-P1 STA-4884-P-P2 STA-4884-P-P3 STA-4890-C-W4 STA-4890-C-W5 STA-4890-C-W6 STA-4890-M-W1 STA-4890-M-W2 PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 138 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

139 Stance Casegoods STANCE RECTANGULAR TABLE cont'd STA-4890-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS 48 X 90 X HGT STA-4890-P-P1 STA-4890-P-P2 STA-4890-P-P3 PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT STA-6072-C-W4 STA-6072-C-W5 STA-6072-C-W6 STA-6072-M-W1 STA-6072-M-W2 STA-6072-M-W3 STA-6072-P-P1 STA-6072-P-P2 STA-6072-P-P3 STA-6084-C-W4 STA-6084-C-W5 STA-6084-C-W6 STA-6084-M-W1 STA-6084-M-W2 STA-6084-M-W3 STA-6084-P-P1 STA-6084-P-P2 STA-6084-P-P3 STA-6090-C-W4 STA-6090-C-W5 STA-6090-C-W6 STA-6090-M-W1 STA-6090-M-W2 STA-6090-M-W3 STA-6090-P-P1 STA-6090-P-P2 STA-6090-P-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT W/CASTERS PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE & NYLON FOOT W/CASTERS 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

140 Stance Casegoods STANCE TRIANGULAR TABLE TABLE TOPS: Tops shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-3/16. Wood Edge band: The edges of tops shall be externally banded with a 7/16 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band. PVC Edge band: The edges of all shaped tops shall be externally banded with a 3/8 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled PVC t-edge band. TABLE LEGS: Leg weldments shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 1.75 Diameter Bent Steel Tubing with a 7 gauge, 6 square mounting plate and have a powder coat finish. The leg weldment is attached to the table top with seven truss head sheet metal screws. TABLE LEGS: Leg weldments shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 1.75 Diameter Bent Steel Tubing with a 7 gauge, 6 square mounting plate and have a powder coat finish. The leg weldment is attached to the table top with seven truss head sheet metal screws. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with one of the following foot options. The feet are attached to the legs using a headless hanger bolt and tube connector. Tall Wood Foot: Tall wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter NYLON, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Wood Foot: Short wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. Tall Nylon Foot: Tall nylon feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter NYLON, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Nylon Foot: Short nylon feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. Length Width STA-060-T-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x HGT STA-060-T-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x HGT STA-060-T-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x HGT STA-060-T-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x HGT STA-060-T-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x HGT STA-060-T-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x HGT STA-060-T-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x HGT STA-060-T-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x HGT STA-060-T-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x HGT STA-072-T-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x HGT STA-072-T-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x HGT STA-072-T-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x HGT STA-072-T-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x HGT STA-072-T-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x HGT STA-072-T-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x HGT STA-072-T-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x HGT STA-072-T-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x HGT STA-072-T-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x HGT STA-060-T-M-W1-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x 39 H STA-060-T-M-W2-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x 39 H STA-060-T-M-W3-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x 39 H STA-060-T-C-W4-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x 39 H STA-060-T-C-W5-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x 39 H STA-060-T-C-W6-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x 39 H STA-060-T-P-P1-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x 39 H STA-060-T-P-P2-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x 39 H STA-060-T-P-P3-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 29-15/32"W x 48-3/64"L x 39 H STA-072-T-M-W1-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x 39 H STA-072-T-M-W2-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x 39 H STA-072-T-M-W3-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x 39 H STA-072-T-C-W4-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x 39 H STA-072-T-C-W5-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x 39 H STA-072-T-C-W6-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x 39 H STA-072-T-P-P1-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x 39 H STA-072-T-P-P2-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x 39 H STA-072-T-P-P3-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 35-15/32"W x 58-9/16"L x 39 H 140 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

141 Stance Casegoods STANCE BOOMERANG TABLE TABLE TOPS: Tops shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-3/16. Wood Edge band: The edges of tops shall be externally banded with a 7/16 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band. PVC Edge band: The edges of all shaped tops shall be externally banded with a 3/8 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled PVC t-edge band. TABLE LEGS: Leg weldments shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 1.75 Diameter Bent Steel Tubing with a 7 gauge, 6 square mounting plate and have a powder coat finish. The leg weldment is attached to the table top with seven truss head sheet metal screws. TABLE LEGS: Leg weldments shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 1.75 Diameter Bent Steel Tubing with a 7 gauge, 6 square mounting plate and have a powder coat finish. The leg weldment is attached to the table top with seven truss head sheet metal screws. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with one of the following foot options. The feet are attached to the legs using a headless hanger bolt and tube connector. Tall Wood Foot: Tall wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter NYLON, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Wood Foot: Short wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. Tall Nylon Foot: Tall nylon feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter NYLON, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Nylon Foot: Short nylon feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. STA-060-B-P-P1 Length Width The Worden Company Source Book October 2011 STA-060-B-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 36-57/67"W x 60"L x HGT STA-060-B-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 36-57/67"W x 60"L x HGT STA-060-B-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 36-57/67"W x 60"L x HGT STA-060-B-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 36-57/67"W x 60"L x HGT STA-060-B-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 36-57/67"W x 60"L x HGT STA-060-B-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 36-57/67"W x 60"L x HGT PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 36-57/67"W x 60"L x HGT STA-060-B-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 36-57/67"W x 60"L x HGT STA-060-B-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 36-57/67"W x 60"L x HGT STA-072-B-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 40-11/32"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-B-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 40-11/32"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-B-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 40-11/32"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-B-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 40-11/32"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-B-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 40-11/32"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-B-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 40-11/32"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-B-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 40-11/32"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-B-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 40-11/32"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-B-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 40-11/32"W x 72"L x HGT STA-084-B-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 43-13/16"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-B-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 43-13/16"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-B-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 43-13/16"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-B-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 43-13/16"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-B-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 43-13/16"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-B-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 43-13/16"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-B-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 43-13/16"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-B-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 43-13/16"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-B-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 43-13/16"W x 84"L x HGT STANCE ROUND BOOMERANG TABLE Length Width STA-072-BR-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 34-13/16"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-BR-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 34-13/16"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-BR-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 34-13/16"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-BR-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 34-13/16"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-BR-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 34-13/16"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-BR-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 34-13/16"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-BR-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 34-13/16"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-BR-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 34-13/16"W x 72"L x HGT STA-072-BR-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 34-13/16"W x 72"L x HGT STA-084-BR-M-W1 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 38-9/32"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-BR-M-W2 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 38-9/32"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-BR-M-W3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 38-9/32"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-BR-C-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 38-9/32"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-BR-C-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 38-9/32"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-BR-C-W6 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 38-9/32"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-BR-P-P1 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 38-9/32"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-BR-P-P2 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 38-9/32"W x 84"L x HGT STA-084-BR-P-P3 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 38-9/32"W x 84"L x HG 141

142 Stance Casegoods STANCE BOOMERANG 39 H TABLE Length Width Model # STA-060-B-M-W1-39 Description MAPLE EDGE & FOOT Dimensions 36-57/64"W x 60"L x 39 H STA-060-B-M-W2-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 36-57/64"W x 60"L x 39 H STA-060-B-M-W3-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 36-57/64"W x 60"L x 39 H STA-060-B-C-W4-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 36-57/64"W x 60"L x 39 H STA-060-B-C-W5-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 36-57/64"W x 60"L x 39 H STA-060-B-C-W6-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 36-57/64"W x 60"L x 39 H STA-060-B-P-P1-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 36-57/64"W x 60"L x 39 H STA-060-B-P-P2-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 36-57/64"W x 60"L x 39 H STA-060-B-P-P3-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 36-57/64"W x 60"L x 39 H STA-072-B-M-W1-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 40-11/32"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-B-M-W2-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 40-11/32"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-B-M-W3-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 40-11/32"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-B-C-W4-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 40-11/32"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-B-C-W5-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 40-11/32"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-B-C-W6-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 40-11/32"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-B-P-P1-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 40-11/32"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-B-P-P2-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 40-11/32"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-B-P-P3-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 40-11/32"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-084-B-M-W1-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 43-13/16"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-B-M-W2-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 43-13/16"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-B-M-W3-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 43-13/16"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-B-C-W4-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 43-13/16"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-B-C-W5-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 43-13/16"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-B-C-W6-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 43-13/16"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-B-P-P1-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 43-13/16"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-B-P-P2-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 43-13/16"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-B-P-P3-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 43-13/16"W x 84"L x 39 H STANCE ROUND BOOMERANG 39 TABLE Length Width STA-072-BR-M-W1-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 34-13/16"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-BR-M-W2-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 34-13/16"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-BR-M-W3-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 34-13/16"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-BR-C-W4-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 34-13/16"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-BR-C-W5-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 34-13/16"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-BR-C-W6-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 34-13/16"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-BR-P-P1-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 34-13/16"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-BR-P-P2-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 34-13/16"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-072-BR-P-P3-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 34-13/16"W x 72"L x 39 H STA-084-BR-M-W1-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT 38-9/32"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-BR-M-W2-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 38-9/32"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-BR-M-W3-39 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 38-9/32"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-BR-C-W4-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT 38-9/32"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-BR-C-W5-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT BELL GLIDE 38-9/32"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-BR-C-W6-39 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT CASTERS 38-9/32"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-BR-P-P1-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT 38-9/32"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-BR-P-P2-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT BELL GLIDE 38-9/32"W x 84"L x 39 H STA-084-BR-P-P3-39 PVC EDGE NYLON FOOT CASTERS 38-9/32"W x 84"L x 39 H 142 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

143 Stance Casegoods STANCE RECTANGULAR TABLE WITH DIVIDER TABLE TOPS: Tops shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particleboard core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-3/16. Wood Edge band: The edges of tops shall be externally banded with a 7/16 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band. The long edge bands shall extend over the short edge bands to form a butt joint at the corners PVC Edge band: The edges of all shaped tops shall be externally banded with a 3/8 wide by 1-3/16 high, profiled PVC t-edge band. The corners of all tops shall have a minimum core radius of 3 inches to allow for a continuous band. The bottom side of the table tops are fitted with a formed metal anti-sag device(s). TABLE LEGS: Leg weldments shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 1.75 Diameter Bent Steel Tubing with a 7 gauge, 6 square mounting plate and have a powder coat finish. The leg weldment is attached to the table top with seven truss head sheet metal screws. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with one of the following foot options. The feet are attached to the legs using a headless hanger bolt and tube connector. Tall Wood Foot: Tall wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter NYLON, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short Wood Foot: Short wood feet shall be turned from solid hardwood. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. Tall nylon Foot: Tall NYLON feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with a 1-1/16 diameter NYLON, adjustable glide with a 1-1/2 stem. Short nylon Foot: Short nylon feet shall be injection molded in black nylon. The bottom of each foot shall be fitted with either a 50mm black caster or black bell glide. CENTER DIVIDER RACKS: Center Divider Frame: The frame weldment shall be constructed of 14 gauge, 32mm diameter steel tube and a 14 gauge steel c-channel. The top of the panel shall be secured by 16 gauge steel u-clips and fastened with screws. The ends of the frame rest on 16 gauge steel plate that are recessed into the work surface and shall be bolted to the table through the work surface. The frame weldment and plates are powder coated to match the leg weldments Center Divider Panels: Standard divider panels are offered in wood and metal variations. The wood variation is 3/8 t, 3-ply construction with medium density fiberboard core with veneer faces. The metal variation is 14 gauge steel, laser cut to the desired overall shape with various images cut through the main field of the panel; the metal receives a powder coat finish. Optional Panel Materials: The panel may be constructed of any material with a thickness ranging from ¼ to 3/8. Model # Description Dimensions Center Divider Rear Divider STA-3648-C-CDCP-W4 STA-3648-C-CDCP-W5 STA-3648-C-CDCP-W6 STA-3648-C-CDHP-W4 STA-3648-C-CDHP-W5 STA-3648-C-CDHP-W6 STA-3648-C-CDC-W4 STA-3648-C-CDC-W5 STA-3648-C-CDC-W6 STA-3648-M-CDCP-W1 STA-3648-M-CDCP-W2 STA-3648-M-CDCP-W3 STA-3648-M-CDHP-W1 STA-3648-M-CDHP-W2 STA-3648-M-CDHP-W3 STA-3648-M-CDM-W1 STA-3648-M-CDM-W2 STA-3648-M-CDM-W3 STA-3648-P-CDM-P1 STA-3648-P-CDM-P2 STA-3648-P-CDM-P3 STA-3648-P-CDC-P1 STA-3648-P-CDC-P2 STA-3648-P-CDC-P3 STA-3648-P-CDCP-P1 STA-3648-P-CDCP-P2 STA-3648-P-CDCP-P3 STA-3648-P-CDHP-P1 STA-3648-P-CDHP-P2 STA-3648-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT 36 X 48 X HGT STA-3660-C-CDCP-W4 STA-3660-C-CDCP-W5 STA-3660-C-CDCP-W6 STA-3660-C-CDHP-W4 STA-3660-C-CDHP-W5 STA-3660-C-CDHP-W6 STA-3660-C-CDC-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

144 Stance Casegoods STANCE, RECTANGULAR TABLE WITH DIVIDER cont d Model # Description Dimensions Center Divider Rear Divider STA-3660-C-CDC-W5 STA-3660-C-CDC-W6 STA-3660-M-CDCP-W1 STA-3660-M-CDCP-W2 STA-3660-M-CDCP-W3 STA-3660-M-CDHP-W1 STA-3660-M-CDHP-W2 STA-3660-M-CDHP-W3 STA-3660-M-CDM-W1 STA-3660-M-CDM-W2 STA-3660-M-CDM-W3 STA-3660-P-CDM-P1 STA-3660-P-CDM-P2 STA-3660-P-CDM-P3 STA-3660-P-CDC-P1 STA-3660-P-CDC-P2 STA-3660-P-CDC-P3 STA-3660-P-CDCP-P1 STA-3660-P-CDCP-P2 STA-3660-P-CDCP-P3 STA-3660-P-CDHP-P1 STA-3660-P-CDHP-P2 STA-3660-P-CDHP-P3 STA-3672-C-CDCP-W4 STA-3672-C-CDCP-W5 STA-3672-C-CDCP-W6 STA-3672-C-CDHP-W4 STA-3672-C-CDHP-W5 STA-3672-C-CDHP-W6 STA-3672-C-CDC-W4 STA-3672-C-CDC-W5 STA-3672-C-CDC-W6 STA-3672-M-CDCP-W1 STA-3672-M-CDCP-W2 STA-3672-M-CDCP-W3 STA-3672-M-CDHP-W1 STA-3672-M-CDHP-W2 STA-3672-M-CDHP-W3 STA-3672-M-CDM-W1 STA-3672-M-CDM-W2 STA-3672-M-CDM-W3 STA-3672-P-CDM-P1 STA-3672-P-CDM-P2 STA-3672-P-CDM-P3 STA-3672-P-CDC-P1 STA-3672-P-CDC-P2 STA-3672-P-CDC-P3 STA-3672-P-CDCP-P1 STA-3672-P-CDCP-P2 STA-3672-P-CDCP-P3 STA-3672-P-CDHP-P1 STA-3672-P-CDHP-P2 STA-3672-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 60 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT 36 X 72 X HGT STA-3684-C-CDCP-W4 STA-3684-C-CDCP-W5 STA-3684-C-CDCP-W6 STA-3684-C-CDHP-W4 STA-3684-C-CDHP-W5 STA-3684-C-CDHP-W6 STA-3684-C-CDC-W4 STA-3684-C-CDC-W5 STA-3684-C-CDC-W6 STA-3684-M-CDCP-W1 STA-3684-M-CDCP-W2 STA-3684-M-CDCP-W3 STA-3684-M-CDHP-W1 STA-3684-M-CDHP-W2 STA-3684-M-CDHP-W3 STA-3684-M-CDM-W1 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 144 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

145 Stance Casegoods STANCE, RECTANGULAR TABLE WITH DIVIDER cont d Model # Description Dimensions Center Divider STA-3684-M-CDM-W2 STA-3684-M-CDM-W3 STA-3684-P-CDM-P1 STA-3684-P-CDM-P2 STA-3684-P-CDM-P3 STA-3684-P-CDC-P1 STA-3684-P-CDC-P2 STA-3684-P-CDC-P3 STA-3684-P-CDCP-P1 STA-3684-P-CDCP-P2 STA-3684-P-CDCP-P3 STA-3684-P-CDHP-P1 STA-3684-P-CDHP-P2 STA-3684-P-CDHP-P3 MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT 36 X 84 X HGT Rear Divider STA-3690-C-CDCP-W4 STA-3690-C-CDCP-W5 STA-3690-C-CDCP-W6 STA-3690-C-CDHP-W4 STA-3690-C-CDHP-W5 STA-3690-C-CDHP-W6 STA-3690-C-CDC-W4 STA-3690-C-CDC-W5 STA-3690-C-CDC-W6 STA-3690-M-CDCP-W1 STA-3690-M-CDCP-W2 STA-3690-M-CDCP-W3 STA-3690-M-CDHP-W1 STA-3690-M-CDHP-W2 STA-3690-M-CDHP-W3 STA-3690-M-CDM-W1 STA-3690-M-CDM-W2 STA-3690-M-CDM-W3 STA-3690-P-CDM-P1 STA-3690-P-CDM-P2 STA-3690-P-CDM-P3 STA-3690-P-CDC-P1 STA-3690-P-CDC-P2 STA-3690-P-CDC-P3 STA-3690-P-CDCP-P1 STA-3690-P-CDCP-P2 STA-3690-P-CDCP-P3 STA-3690-P-CDHP-P1 STA-3690-P-CDHP-P2 STA-3690-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT 36 X 90 X HGT STA-4248-C-CDCP-W4 STA-4248-C-CDCP-W5 STA-4248-C-CDCP-W6 STA-4248-C-CDHP-W4 STA-4248-C-CDHP-W5 STA-4248-C-CDHP-W6 STA-4248-C-CDC-W4 STA-4248-C-CDC-W5 STA-4248-C-CDC-W6 STA-4248-M-CDCP-W1 STA-4248-M-CDCP-W2 STA-4248-M-CDCP-W3 STA-4248-M-CDHP-W1 STA-4248-M-CDHP-W2 STA-4248-M-CDHP-W3 STA-4248-M-CDM-W1 STA-4248-M-CDM-W2 STA-4248-M-CDM-W3 STA-4248-P-CDM-P1 STA-4248-P-CDM-P2 STA-4248-P-CDM-P3 STA-4248-P-CDC-P1 STA-4248-P-CDC-P2 STA-4248-P-CDC-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

146 Stance Casegoods STANCE, RECTANGULAR TABLE WITH DIVIDER cont d STA-4248-P-CDCP-P1 STA-4248-P-CDCP-P2 STA-4248-P-CDCP-P3 STA-4248-P-CDHP-P1 STA-4248-P-CDHP-P2 STA-4248-P-CDHP-P3 PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT 42 X 48 X HGT Center Divider Rear Divider STA-4260-C-CDCP-W4 STA-4260-C-CDCP-W5 STA-4260-C-CDCP-W6 STA-4260-C-CDHP-W4 STA-4260-C-CDHP-W5 STA-4260-C-CDHP-W6 STA-4260-C-CDC-W4 STA-4260-C-CDC-W5 STA-4260-C-CDC-W6 STA-4260-M-CDCP-W1 STA-4260-M-CDCP-W2 STA-4260-M-CDCP-W3 STA-4260-M-CDHP-W1 STA-4260-M-CDHP-W2 STA-4260-M-CDHP-W3 STA-4260-M-CDM-W1 STA-4260-M-CDM-W2 STA-4260-M-CDM-W3 STA-4260-P-CDM-P1 STA-4260-P-CDM-P2 STA-4260-P-CDM-P3 STA-4260-P-CDC-P1 STA-4260-P-CDC-P2 STA-4260-P-CDC-P3 STA-4260-P-CDCP-P1 STA-4260-P-CDCP-P2 STA-4260-P-CDCP-P3 STA-4260-P-CDHP-P1 STA-4260-P-CDHP-P2 STA-4260-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT 42 X 60 X HGT STA-4272-C-CDCP-W4 STA-4272-C-CDCP-W5 STA-4272-C-CDCP-W6 STA-4272-C-CDHP-W4 STA-4272-C-CDHP-W5 STA-4272-C-CDHP-W6 STA-4272-C-CDC-W4 STA-4272-C-CDC-W5 STA-4272-C-CDC-W6 STA-4272-M-CDCP-W1 STA-4272-M-CDCP-W2 STA-4272-M-CDCP-W3 STA-4272-M-CDHP-W1 STA-4272-M-CDHP-W2 STA-4272-M-CDHP-W3 STA-4272-M-CDM-W1 STA-4272-M-CDM-W2 STA-4272-M-CDM-W3 STA-4272-P-CDM-P1 STA-4272-P-CDM-P2 STA-4272-P-CDM-P3 STA-4272-P-CDC-P1 STA-4272-P-CDC-P2 STA-4272-P-CDC-P3 STA-4272-P-CDCP-P1 STA-4272-P-CDCP-P2 STA-4272-P-CDCP-P3 STA-4272-P-CDHP-P1 STA-4272-P-CDHP-P2 STA-4272-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT 42 X 72 X HGT STA-4284-C-CDCP-W4 STA-4284-C-CDCP-W5 STA-4284-C-CDCP-W6 STA-4284-C-CDHP-W4 STA-4284-C-CDHP-W5 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 146 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

147 Stance Casegoods STANCE, RECTANGULAR TABLE WITH DIVIDER cont d Model # Description Dimensions Center Divider Rear Divider STA-4284-C-CDHP-W6 STA-4284-C-CDC-W4 STA-4284-C-CDC-W5 STA-4284-C-CDC-W6 STA-4284-M-CDCP-W1 STA-4284-M-CDCP-W2 STA-4284-M-CDCP-W3 STA-4284-M-CDHP-W1 STA-4284-M-CDHP-W2 STA-4284-M-CDHP-W3 STA-4284-M-CDM-W1 STA-4284-M-CDM-W2 STA-4284-M-CDM-W3 STA-4284-P-CDM-P1 STA-4284-P-CDM-P2 STA-4284-P-CDM-P3 STA-4284-P-CDC-P1 STA-4284-P-CDC-P2 STA-4284-P-CDC-P3 STA-4284-P-CDCP-P1 STA-4284-P-CDCP-P2 STA-4284-P-CDCP-P3 STA-4284-P-CDHP-P1 STA-4284-P-CDHP-P2 STA-4284-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT 42 X 84 X HGT STA-4290-C-CDCP-W4 STA-4290-C-CDCP-W5 STA-4290-C-CDCP-W6 STA-4290-C-CDHP-W4 STA-4290-C-CDHP-W5 STA-4290-C-CDHP-W6 STA-4290-C-CDC-W4 STA-4290-C-CDC-W5 STA-4290-C-CDC-W6 STA-4290-M-CDCP-W1 STA-4290-M-CDCP-W2 STA-4290-M-CDCP-W3 STA-4290-M-CDHP-W1 STA-4290-M-CDHP-W2 STA-4290-M-CDHP-W3 STA-4290-M-CDM-W1 STA-4290-M-CDM-W2 STA-4290-M-CDM-W3 STA-4290-P-CDM-P1 STA-4290-P-CDM-P2 STA-4290-P-CDM-P3 STA-4290-P-CDC-P1 STA-4290-P-CDC-P2 STA-4290-P-CDC-P3 STA-4290-P-CDCP-P1 STA-4290-P-CDCP-P2 STA-4290-P-CDCP-P3 STA-4290-P-CDHP-P1 STA-4290-P-CDHP-P2 STA-4290-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT 42 X 90 X HGT STA-4860-C-CDCP-W4 STA-4860-C-CDCP-W5 STA-4860-C-CDCP-W6 STA-4860-C-CDHP-W4 STA-4860-C-CDHP-W5 STA-4860-C-CDHP-W6 STA-4860-C-CDC-W4 STA-4860-C-CDC-W5 STA-4860-C-CDC-W6 STA-4860-M-CDCP-W1 STA-4860-M-CDCP-W2 STA-4860-M-CDCP-W3 STA-4860-M-CDHP-W1 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

148 Stance Casegoods STANCE, RECTANGULAR TABLE WITH DIVIDER cont d Model # Description Dimensions Center Divider STA-4860-M-CDHP-W2 STA-4860-M-CDHP-W3 STA-4860-M-CDM-W1 STA-4860-M-CDM-W2 STA-4860-M-CDM-W3 STA-4860-P-CDM-P1 STA-4860-P-CDM-P2 STA-4860-P-CDM-P3 STA-4860-P-CDC-P1 STA-4860-P-CDC-P2 STA-4860-P-CDC-P3 STA-4860-P-CDCP-P1 STA-4860-P-CDCP-P2 STA-4860-P-CDCP-P3 STA-4860-P-CDHP-P1 STA-4860-P-CDHP-P2 STA-4860-P-CDHP-P3 MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT 48 X 60 X HGT Rear Divider STA-4872-C-CDCP-W4 STA-4872-C-CDCP-W5 STA-4872-C-CDCP-W6 STA-4872-C-CDHP-W4 STA-4872-C-CDHP-W5 STA-4872-C-CDHP-W6 STA-4872-C-CDC-W4 STA-4872-C-CDC-W5 STA-4872-C-CDC-W6 STA-4872-M-CDCP-W1 STA-4872-M-CDCP-W2 STA-4872-M-CDCP-W3 STA-4872-M-CDHP-W1 STA-4872-M-CDHP-W2 STA-4872-M-CDHP-W3 STA-4872-M-CDM-W1 STA-4872-M-CDM-W2 STA-4872-M-CDM-W3 STA-4872-P-CDM-P1 STA-4872-P-CDM-P2 STA-4872-P-CDM-P3 STA-4872-P-CDC-P1 STA-4872-P-CDC-P2 STA-4872-P-CDC-P3 STA-4872-P-CDCP-P1 STA-4872-P-CDCP-P2 STA-4872-P-CDCP-P3 STA-4872-P-CDHP-P1 STA-4872-P-CDHP-P2 STA-4872-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT 48 X 72 X HGT STA-4884-C-CDCP-W4 STA-4884-C-CDCP-W5 STA-4884-C-CDCP-W6 STA-4884-C-CDHP-W4 STA-4884-C-CDHP-W5 STA-4884-C-CDHP-W6 STA-4884-C-CDC-W4 STA-4884-C-CDC-W5 STA-4884-C-CDC-W6 STA-4884-M-CDCP-W1 STA-4884-M-CDCP-W2 STA-4884-M-CDCP-W3 STA-4884-M-CDHP-W1 STA-4884-M-CDHP-W2 STA-4884-M-CDHP-W3 STA-4884-M-CDM-W1 STA-4884-M-CDM-W2 STA-4884-M-CDM-W3 STA-4884-P-CDM-P1 STA-4884-P-CDM-P2 STA-4884-P-CDM-P3 STA-4884-P-CDC-P1 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 148 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

149 Stance Casegoods STANCE, RECTANGULAR TABLE WITH DIVIDER cont d Model # Description Dimensions STA-4884-P-CDC-P2 STA-4884-P-CDC-P3 STA-4884-P-CDCP-P1 STA-4884-P-CDCP-P2 STA-4884-P-CDCP-P3 STA-4884-P-CDHP-P1 STA-4884-P-CDHP-P2 STA-4884-P-CDHP-P3 PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT 48 X 84 X HGT Center Divider Rear Divider STA-4890-C-CDCP-W4 STA-4890-C-CDCP-W5 STA-4890-C-CDCP-W6 STA-4890-C-CDHP-W4 STA-4890-C-CDHP-W5 STA-4890-C-CDHP-W6 STA-4890-C-CDC-W4 STA-4890-C-CDC-W5 STA-4890-C-CDC-W6 STA-4890-M-CDCP-W1 STA-4890-M-CDCP-W2 STA-4890-M-CDCP-W3 STA-4890-M-CDHP-W1 STA-4890-M-CDHP-W2 STA-4890-M-CDHP-W3 STA-4890-M-CDM-W1 STA-4890-M-CDM-W2 STA-4890-M-CDM-W3 STA-4890-P-CDM-P1 STA-4890-P-CDM-P2 STA-4890-P-CDM-P3 STA-4890-P-CDC-P1 STA-4890-P-CDC-P2 STA-4890-P-CDC-P3 STA-4890-P-CDCP-P1 STA-4890-P-CDCP-P2 STA-4890-P-CDCP-P3 STA-4890-P-CDHP-P1 STA-4890-P-CDHP-P2 STA-4890-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT 48 X 90 X HGT STA-6072-C-CDCP-W4 STA-6072-C-CDCP-W5 STA-6072-C-CDCP-W6 STA-6072-C-CDHP-W4 STA-6072-C-CDHP-W5 STA-6072-C-CDHP-W6 STA-6072-C-CDC-W4 STA-6072-C-CDC-W5 STA-6072-C-CDC-W6 STA-6072-M-CDCP-W1 STA-6072-M-CDCP-W2 STA-6072-M-CDCP-W3 STA-6072-M-CDHP-W1 STA-6072-M-CDHP-W2 STA-6072-M-CDHP-W3 STA-6072-M-CDM-W1 STA-6072-M-CDM-W2 STA-6072-M-CDM-W3 STA-6072-P-CDM-P1 STA-6072-P-CDM-P2 STA-6072-P-CDM-P3 STA-6072-P-CDC-P1 STA-6072-P-CDC-P2 STA-6072-P-CDC-P3 STA-6072-P-CDCP-P1 STA-6072-P-CDCP-P2 STA-6072-P-CDCP-P3 STA-6072-P-CDHP-P1 STA-6072-P-CDHP-P2 STA-6072-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT 60 X 72 X HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

150 Stance Casegoods STANCE, RECTANGULAR TABLE WITH DIVIDER cont d Center Divider Rear Divider STA-6084-C-CDCP-W4 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER 60 X 84 X HGT STA-6084-C-CDCP-W5 STA-6084-C-CDCP-W6 STA-6084-C-CDHP-W4 STA-6084-C-CDHP-W5 STA-6084-C-CDHP-W6 STA-6084-C-CDC-W4 STA-6084-C-CDC-W5 STA-6084-C-CDC-W6 STA-6084-M-CDCP-W1 STA-6084-M-CDCP-W2 STA-6084-M-CDCP-W3 STA-6084-M-CDHP-W1 STA-6084-M-CDHP-W2 STA-6084-M-CDHP-W3 STA-6084-M-CDM-W1 STA-6084-M-CDM-W2 STA-6084-M-CDM-W3 STA-6084-P-CDM-P1 STA-6084-P-CDM-P2 STA-6084-P-CDM-P3 STA-6084-P-CDC-P1 STA-6084-P-CDC-P2 STA-6084-P-CDC-P3 STA-6084-P-CDCP-P1 STA-6084-P-CDCP-P2 STA-6084-P-CDCP-P3 STA-6084-P-CDHP-P1 STA-6084-P-CDHP-P2 STA-6084-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT 60 X 84 X HGT STA-6090-C-CDCP-W4 STA-6090-C-CDCP-W5 STA-6090-C-CDCP-W6 STA-6090-C-CDHP-W4 STA-6090-C-CDHP-W5 STA-6090-C-CDHP-W6 STA-6090-C-CDC-W4 STA-6090-C-CDC-W5 STA-6090-C-CDC-W6 STA-6090-M-CDCP-W1 STA-6090-M-CDCP-W2 STA-6090-M-CDCP-W3 STA-6090-M-CDHP-W1 STA-6090-M-CDHP-W2 STA-6090-M-CDHP-W3 STA-6090-M-CDM-W1 STA-6090-M-CDM-W2 STA-6090-M-CDM-W3 STA-6090-P-CDM-P1 STA-6090-P-CDM-P2 STA-6090-P-CDM-P3 STA-6090-P-CDC-P1 STA-6090-P-CDC-P2 STA-6090-P-CDC-P3 STA-6090-P-CDCP-P1 STA-6090-P-CDCP-P2 STA-6090-P-CDCP-P3 STA-6090-P-CDHP-P1 STA-6090-P-CDHP-P2 STA-6090-P-CDHP-P3 CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE CHERRY EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL CP DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE & FOOT, METAL HB DIVIDER, CASTERS MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ BELL GLIDE MAPLE EDGE, DIVIDER & FOOT W/ CASTERS PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, CHERRY DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL CP DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, BELL GLIDE PVC EDGE, METAL HB DIVIDER, NYLON FOOT, CASTERS 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 60 X 90 X HGT 150 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

151 Stance Casegoods STANCE END/MODESTY PANELS MODESTY PANEL OPTIONS: Floating Panel Ends: Floating panels shall be vacuum formed using suitable internal wood components, and shall match the formed angle of the leg. Both faces shall be veneer. The overall thickness is a nominal ½. METAL: Metal variations of the panel are available in 14 gauge steel, laser cut to the desired overall shape with various images cut through the main field of the panel; the metal receives a powder coat finish. The panels shall be suspended between the legs and attached to the underside of the top by means of four cast aluminum clamp assemblies with powder coat finish. The panels are capable of being retrofitted to Stance tables that are already in the field. OPTIONAL PANEL MATERIALS: The end panels may be constructed of any material that is capable of holding the bend. The end panel thickness can range anywhere from 3/8 to ¾ thick. The bendable 3-form options are as follows: Varia Woven Colors, Bear Grass, Sonoma, Fossil Leaf, and Loop STA-36-EP-M MAPLE 36 W STA-42-EP-M MAPLE 42 W STA-48-EP-M MAPLE 48 W STA-60-EP-M MAPLE 60 W STA-72-EP-M MAPLE 72 W STA-84-EP-M MAPLE 84 W STA-90-EP-M MAPLE 90 W STA-36-EP-C CHERRY 36 W STA-42-EP-C CHERRY 42 W STA-48-EP-C CHERRY 48 W STA-60-EP-C CHERRY 60 W STA-72-EP-C CHERRY 72 W STA-84-EP-C CHERRY 84 W STA-90-EP-C CHERRY 90 W STA-36-EP-CP METAL - CIRCLE PATTERN 36 W STA-42-EP-CP METAL - CIRCLE PATTERN 42 W STA-48-EP-CP METAL - CIRCLE PATTERN 48 W STA-60-EP-CP METAL - CIRCLE PATTERN 60 W STA-72-EP-CP METAL - CIRCLE PATTERN 72 W STA-84-EP-CP METAL - CIRCLE PATTERN 84 W STA-90-EP-CP METAL - CIRCLE PATTERN 90 W Wood Modesty Panel Metal Modesty Panel Circle Pattern STA-36-EP-HP METAL - HERRINGBONE 36 W STA-42-EP-HP METAL - HERRINGBONE 42 W STA-48-EP-HP METAL - HERRINGBONE 48 W STA-60-EP-HP METAL - HERRINGBONE 60 W STA-72-EP-HP METAL - HERRINGBONE 72 W STA-84-EP-HP METAL - HERRINGBONE 84 W STA-90-EP-HP METAL - HERRINGBONE 90 W Metal Modesty Panel Herringbone Pattern The Worden Company Source Book October

152 Tempus Casegoods TEMPUS ATLAS STAND The sloped reference top assembly shall be fabricated of 3/4 particleboard with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate facing of Wilsonart #D (Slate Grey). There shall be a 5/8 x 5/8 solid oak or maple retaining strip located 5/8 up from lower edge of top surface. The slide-out storage shelves shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on face and any sound veneer on back. Front stop rail shall be 1/2 thick x 1-1/2 wide x 25-7/8 long solid oak or maple, tongue and grooved to shelf panel. The five pull-out shelves operate on full extension ball bearing drawer slides. Each end panel is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. 5000/AS 6000/AS 5000/AS-J 6000/AS-J HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE JUV HGT, HPL TOP, OAK JUV HGT, HPL TOP, MAPLE 44-3/4 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D 44-3/4 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D 34-1/2 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D 34-1/2 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D TEMPUS DICTIONARY STAND The sloped reference top assembly shall be fabricated of 3/4 particleboard with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate facing of Wilsonart D91-60 (Slate Grey). There shall be a 5/8 x 5/8 solid oak or maple retaining strip located 5/8 up from lower edge of top surface. The adjustable storage shelf is 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on the face. A 1-1/2 high book stop is attached to the back edge of shelf. Each panel shall be equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. 5000/DS 6000/DS 5000/DS-J 6000/DS-J HPL TOP, OAK HPL TOP, MAPLE JUV HGT, HPL TOP, OAK JUV HGT, HPL TOP, MAPLE 44-3/4 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D 44-3/4 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D 34-1/2 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D 34-1/2 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D TEMPUS NEWSPAPER RACK Top frame is solid oak or maple construction. Centered in the top frame is an opening and at each end of the opening is a notched newspaper holder rail with ten newspaper holders (included). End assembly is same as on tables. The holder is a 15/16 diameter hardwood turning slotted longitudinally into six segments and with turned handle at one end 5 long. Overall length of holder is 35 and it is furnished complete with rubber O ring binder at open slotted end. Equipped with 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. 5000/NR 6000/NR W/ 10 STICKS, OAK W/ 10 STICKS, MAPLE 29 H x42-3/8 W x 27-1/2 D 29 H x42-3/8 W x 27-1/2 D TEMPUS DISPLAY TABLE This display case has extruded aluminum frame with dark bronze finish. The case has 3/16 annealed float glass at sides and top. The top of the case is hinged with continuous piano type hinge and equipped with two (2) point lock and lid supports. The bottom is offered with optional tackable surface covered with neutral beige colored fabric. Glass case size: 59 wide x 29 deep x 9-1/16 high. This display case is screwed to top surface of table. Table top has plastic laminate face. The two long edges of top are banded with a 1-9/16" x 2-1/4" solid oak or maple external knife edge band laminated to core after lamination of the face plastic. End assembly is same as on tables. Equipped with 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. 5000/3060-EXC 6000/3060-EXC 9-1/2 H DISPLAY CASE, OAK 9-1/2 H DISPLAY CASE, MAPLE 30-1/4 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 30-1/4 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 152 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

153 Tempus Casegoods TEMPUS PANEL TABLE TOP: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction. with a.050 high pressure plastic laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The two long edges of top are banded with 1-9/16 x 2-1/4 solid oak or maple external knife edge band laminated to core after lamination of the face plastic. The edge shall be beveled to a 5/16 radius bullnose at the leading edge and to a 1/8 raised reveal at the lower edge. The top is secured to the end panels by means of black oxided metal Z-bars brackets. END PANELS: Panel ends are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. The top edge of the panel shall have a 3 high arc. Both the top and vertical edges shall be banded with a 1/8 thick solid oak or maple external band with a 1/32 radius on all edges. The bottom edge shall be banded with a 1-3/16 thick x 3 high solid oak or maple sabot. The sabot shall be attached with a blind mortise and tenon. The top of the sabot shall have a 1/4 high x 1/16 deep reveal on all sides and the bottom shall be profiled to form a 1-3/16 high arch. A 7/8 wide matching grey PVC reveal shall be inlaid vertically into the panel on the outside face, extending from the top band to the sabot. KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keel is of 1 thick x 8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused melamine on both faces. Tables 48" wide shall have two keels. GLIDES: Each panel end is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 30 H. Optional 27 height may be specified. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table (WWJT). Model # Description Dimensions 5000/3660 PANEL STYLE, OAK 36-1/4 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 6000/3660 PANEL STYLE, MAPLE 36-1/4 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 5000/3672 PANEL STYLE, OAK 36-1/4 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 6000/3672 PANEL STYLE, MAPLE 36-1/4 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 5000/3690 PANEL STYLE, OAK 36-1/4 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 6000/3690 PANEL STYLE, MAPLE 36-1/4 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 5000/4260 PANEL STYLE, OAK 42-1/4 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 6000/4260 PANEL STYLE, MAPLE 42-1/4 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 5000/4272 PANEL STYLE, OAK 42-1/4 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 6000/4272 PANEL STYLE, MAPLE 42-1/4 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 5000/4290 PANEL STYLE, OAK 42-1/4 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 6000/4290 PANEL STYLE, MAPLE 42-1/4 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 5000/4860 PANEL STYLE, OAK 48-1/4 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 6000/4860 PANEL STYLE, MAPLE 48-1/4 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 5000/4872 PANEL STYLE, OAK 48-1/4 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 6000/4872 PANEL STYLE, MAPLE 48-1/4 W x 74-3/8 L x HGT 5000/4890 PANEL STYLE, OAK 48-1/4 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 6000/4890 PANEL STYLE, MAPLE 48-1/4 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

154 Tempus Casegoods TEMPUS TABLE (LEG STYLE) TABLE TOP: Tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. All four edges shall be banded with a 1-9/16 thick x 2-1/4 wide solid oak or maple external knife edge band laminated to core after lamination of the face plastic. The edge shall be beveled to a 5/16 radius bullnose at the leading edge and to a 1/8 raised reveal at the lower edge. The edge band shall be mitered at all four corners. The underside of the top shall be fitted with V-shaped 14 gauge steel keels screwed to the top. Tables 48 wide receive two keels. LEGS: The legs shall be attached to the aprons and top by means of heavy duty formed sheet metal corner brackets and reinforced with 1/2 x 1 steel backing plate and bolting to the leg. The legs shall be 2-3/8 square glued-up, face to face, from two or three solid oak or maple blanks. All of the edges on the leg shall be broken with a 1/32 radius. A 1/8 high x 1/16 deep reveal shall be machined into the leg 2-3/8 up from the base. APRONS: A 3/4 thick solid oak or maple apron rail shall fit between the legs on all four sides of the table. The apron shall be machined to have a full length arch and shall be 3-1/2 at each end and 2 at the center. The apron rails shall be screwed to the underside of the top. GLIDES: Each leg shall have a 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glide with a 15/16 threaded stem. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 30 H. Optional 27 height may be specified. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Model # Description Dimensions 5200/3660 LEG STYLE, OAK 36 W x 60 L x HGT 6200/3660 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT 5200/3672 LEG STYLE, OAK 36 W x 72 L x HGT 6200/3672 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT 5200/3690 LEG STYLE, OAK 36 W x 90 L x HGT 6200/3690 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT 5200/4260 LEG STYLE, OAK 42 W x 60 L x HGT 6200/4260 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT 5200/4272 LEG STYLE, OAK 42 W x 72 L x HGT 6200/4272 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT 5200/4290 LEG STYLE, OAK 42 W x 90 L x HGT 6200/4290 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT 5200/4860 LEG STYLE, OAK 48 W x 60 L x HGT 6200/4860 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT 5200/4872 LEG STYLE, OAK 48 W x 72 L x HGT 6200/4872 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT 5200/4890 LEG STYLE, OAK 48 W x 90 L x HGT 6200/4890 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT 5200/048 LEG STYLE, OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT 6200/048 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT 5200/4848 LEG STYLE, OAK 48 SQUARE x HGT 6200/4848 LEG STYLE, MAPLE 48 SQUARE x HGT 154 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

155 Tempus Casegoods TEMPUS REFERENCE/COMPUTER TABLE TOP: The table top shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The two long edges shall be banded with a 1-9/16 thick x 2-1/4 wide solid oak or maple external knife edge band laminated to core after lamination of the face plastic. The edge shall be beveled to a 5/16 radius bullnose at the leading edge and to a 1/8 raised reveal at the lower edge. The top is secured to the end panels by means of black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. END PANELS: Panel ends are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. The top edge of the panel shall have a 3 high arc. Both top and vertical edges shall be banded with a 1/8 thick solid oak or maple external band with a 1/32 radius on all edges. The bottom edge shall be banded with a 1-3/16 thick x 3 high solid oak or maple sabot. The sabot shall be attached with a blind mortise and tenon. The top of the sabot shall have a 1/4 high x 1/16 deep reveal on all sides and the bottom shall be profiled to form a 1-3/16 high arch. A 7/8 wide matching grey PVC reveal shall be inlaid vertically into the panel on the outside face, extending from the top band to the sabot. CALL SLIP BOX: Tables are equipped with a three compartment call slip unit. Assembled unit has all edges well rounded then finished to match with reference table. The finished unit is positioned at the center of the Reference table and at each end of the Computer table, and screwed to underside of table top. Interior dimensions of each compartment are 3-1/2 high x 3-1/2 wide x 5 deep. TABLE RACK: The rack is constructed of 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A veneers and all exposed edges banded with solid oak or maple bands. Racks are 10" high and screwed to table tops. KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keel shall be 1" thick x 18" wide, plywood construction with select grade "A" oak or maple veneer faces. The keel is attached to the underside of the top and to the end panels. GLIDES: Each panel is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 5000/3072-RT OAK 30-1/4 W x 74-3/8 L x39 H 6000/3072-RT MAPLE 30-1/4 W x 74-3/8 L x39 H Computer Reference 5000/3072-CT OAK 30-1/4 W x 74-3/8 L x39 H 6000/3072-CT MAPLE 30-1/4 W x 74-3/8 L x39 H TEMPUS DOUBLE FACED DOUBLE TIER INDEX TABLE TOP: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure laminate face, and a.028 backer sheet on the underside. The two (2) long edges of top are banded with 1-9/16 thick x 2-1/4 wide solid oak or maple external knife edge band laminated to core after lamination of the face plastic. The edge shall be beveled to a 5/16 radius bullnose at the leading edge and to a 1/8 raised reveal at the lower edge. The top is secured to the end panels by means of black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. END PANELS: Panel ends are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. The top edge of the panel shall have a 3 high arc. Both the top and vertical edges shall be banded with a 1/8 thick solid oak or maple external band with a 1/32 radius on all edges. The bottom edge shall be banded with a 1-3/16 thick x 3 high solid oak or maple sabot. The sabot shall be attached with a blind mortise and tenon. The top of the sabot shall have a 1/4 high x 1/16 deep reveal on all sides and the bottom shall be profiled to form a 1-3/16 high arch. A 7/8 wide matching grey PVC reveal shall be inlaid vertically into the panel on the outside face, extending from the top band to the sabot. KEEL: The longitudinal stabilizing keel is 1 thick x 8 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused melamine on both faces. Tables 48" wide shall have two keels. INDEX RACK: The dividers, back and shelves, are constructed of 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard with exposed edges banded with 5/16 solid oak or maple. The end and divider panels have 1/16 radius on the upper corners. The rack assembly is secured to top by screws passing through the underside of the top and into the dividers. The shelves are adjustable and removable to accommodate computer equipment. GLIDES: Each end panel is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 30 height. Optional 27 height may be specified. UL LISTING: Index tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). 5000/6060-ID 6000/6060-ID OAK MAPLE 60-1/4 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT 60-1/4 W x 62-3/8 L x HGT Double tier index rack has eight (8) separate compartments (2 wide by 2 high on each side) each being 27-3/4 wide. The dividers will be 26 high and include an 8-1/2 deep adjustable, removable shelf. 5000/6090-ID 26 H RACK, OAK 60-1/4 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT 6000/6090-ID 26 H RACK, MAPLE 60-1/4 W x 92-3/8 L x HGT Double tier index rack has twelve (12) separate compartments (3 wide by 2 high on each side) each being 27-3/4 wide. The dividers will be 26 high and include an 8-1/2 deep adjustable, removable shelf. The Worden Company Source Book October

156 Tempus Casegoods TEMPUS OPAC TOP: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick x 28 (30 O.A.) deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The exposed edge shall be banded with a 1-9/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple external knife edge band laminated to the core after to the lamination of the face plastic. The edge shall be beveled to a 5/16 radius bullnose at the leading edge and to a 1/8 raised reveal at the lower edge. Back edge shall have a black aluminum retaining lip extending 5/8 above the work surface. The top shall be held 2 from the back panel to provide a cord drop. The top shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end for black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. The underside of the top shall be fitted with a V-shaped 14 gauge steel keel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The top edge of the panel shall have a 3 high arc. Both the top and vertical edges shall be banded with a 1/8 thick solid oak or maple external band with a 1/32 radius on all edges. The bottom edge shall be banded with a 1-3/16 thick x 3 high solid oak or maple sabot. The sabot shall be attached with a blind mortise and tenon. The top of the sabot will have a 1/4 high x 1/16 deep reveal on all sides and the bottom shall be profiled to form a 1-3/16 high arch. A grey 3 square ABS grommet which is self-rimmed on both sides shall be bonded to the panel. A 7/8 wide matching grey PVC reveal shall be inlaid vertically into the panel on the outside face, extending from the top band to the sabot. End panels shall be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. The end panels shall be pre-drilled for the location of two shoulder screws for shelf attachment. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be the same as the end panels and through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet. BACK PANELS: The back panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick solid oak or maple edge bands. Back panels shall be fitted on the back side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights. The back side of the panels shall have 5 mm boring for the location of shelf pins for display shelves and for black oxided metal Z-bar brackets for supporting the hex lids. ENCLOSURE PANELS: The enclosure panels shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The top and bottom shall be banded with 5/16 solid oak or maple edge bands. The edges on both sides shall be beveled, pre-drilled and attached to the back panels by means of cleats. ACCESS PANELS: The access panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick solid oak or maple. The panels shall be split in two parts 12 from the bottom. The top section shall be pre-drilled on the back side at top for oxided metal Z-bar brackets and attached to the panel to support the hex lids. The top section shall be bored through and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC grommet. TRIANGULAR POSTS: The triangular posts shall be 1-1/2 per side extruded aluminum, powder coated black, machined on all sides for shoulder screws. The post shall be fitted at the top with an injection molded cap, and the bottom fitted with a threaded insert for a glide. MINI-WORK SURFACE: The mini-work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick x 19-1/2 deep x 48-1/4 wide at the front and 26 wide at the back. PAPER SHELF: The paper shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 12 deep x 40-7/16 wide at the front and 26-9/16 wide at the back, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak. The back edge shall be banded with 1/32 veneer. The underside of the paper shelf is pre-drilled to receive J channel. DISPLAY SHELF: The display shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 12 deep x 38-1/8 wide at the front and 23-3/32 wide at the back, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with 5/16 solid oak or maple. Both ends shall be machined on the underside to have two pockets for placement of shelf pins. FULL AND HALF HEX LID: The full and half hex lid shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. Each lid shall be supported by three black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the bottom shelf, there shall be a 1-1/8 deep x 2-1/2 wide extruded black PVC J -channel with a 1-11/16 lip on the face side, and be screwed to the back panel. GLIDES: Each end panel, intermediate panel and post shall be fitted with one 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. OPTIONAL MINI J CHANNEL SHELF: The mini J channel shelf is used to electrify the mini-work surface and shall be 3/4 thick x 12 deep x 40-7/16 wide at the front and 26-9/16 wide at the back, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with a 1/8 solid oak or maple edge band. The back edge shall be banded with 1/32 veneer. UL LISTING: OPAC stations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). 5000/HCT HEX, OAK 124 DIAMETER x 54-1/2 H 6000/HCT HEX, MAPLE 124 DIAMETER x 54-1/2 H 5000/HCT-1 CLOSED BACK, OAK 124 W x 52 D x 54-1/2 H 6000/HCT-1 CLOSED BACK, MAPLE 124 W x 52 D x 54-1/2 H 5000/HCT-2 OPEN BACK W/MINI W/S, OAK 124 W x 52 D x 54-1/2 H 6000/HCT-2 OPEN BACK W/MINI W/S, MAPLE 124 W x 52 D x 54-1/2 H 5000/HCT-3 OPEN BACK 3 SHELVES, OAK 124 W x 52 D x 54-1/2 H 6000/HCT-3 OPEN BACK 3 SHELVES, MAPLE 124 W x 52 D x 54-1/2 H 156 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

157 Tempus Casegoods TEMPUS STUDY CARREL TOP: The work surface is 1-1/4 thick x 34-1/2 or 48 wide x 28 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The exposed edge shall be banded with a 1-9/16 thick x 2-1/4 wide solid oak or maple external knife edge band laminated to core after lamination of the face plastic. The edge shall be beveled to a 5/16 radius bullnose at the leading edge and to a 1/8 raised reveal at the lower edge. The top shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end and back for 21-3/16 long black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. END PANELS: The end panels consist of a 1-3/16 thick panel of 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. The top edge of the panel shall have a 3 high arc. Both the top and vertical edges shall be banded with a 1/8 thick solid oak or maple external band with a 1/32 radius on all edges. The bottom edge shall be banded with a 1-3/16 thick x 3 high solid oak or maple sabot. The sabot shall be attached with a blind mortise and tenon. The top of the sabot shall have a 1/4 high x 1/16 deep reveal on all sides and the bottom shall be profiled to form a 1-3/16 high arch. A grey 3 square ABS grommet which is self rimmed on both sides shall be bonded to the panel. A 7/8 wide matching grey PVC reveal shall be inlaid vertically into the panel on the outside face, extending from the top band to the sabot. The ends shall be pre-drilled for location of two shoulder screws for shelf attachment and three screws for attachment of the top. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be the same as the end panels and through drilled for shelf shoulder screws and top bolts. A grey 3 square ABS grommet which is self rimmed on both sides shall be bonded to the panel and there shall be no PVC reveal. QUAD POST: The center post shall be 1-3/16 square x 44 high, constructed of solid oak or maple. All four sides of the post shall be pre-drilled for shoulder screws. All edges shall be broken with a 1/32 radius. BACK PANEL: Back panels are 1-3/16 thick x 34-1/2 or 48 wide x 43-7/8 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. Top and bottom edges are banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple. Back panel shall be located 7 from the top of end panels and 3-5/8 above the floor. SHELF: Storage shelf is 1 thick x 34-1/2 or 48 wide x 10 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction. Both faces shall be covered with select grade A oak or maple veneers and banded on the exposed edge with 1/8 solid oak or maple. The shelf shall be located 15 above the work surface. GLIDES: Each end and intermediate panel shall be equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable glides with 15/16 stem. UL LISTING Carrels shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder 5000/SC SF, STARTER, OAK 30 D x 36-7/8 W x 54 H 5000/SC-A SF, ADDER, OAK 30 D x 35-11/16 W x 54 H 6000/SC SF, STARTER, MAPLE 30 D x 36-7/8 W x 54 H 6000/SC-A SF, ADDER, MAPLE 30 D x 35-11/16 W x 54 H 5048/SC SF, STARTER, OAK 30 D x 50-3/8 W x 54 H 5048/SC-A SF, ADDER, OAK 30 D x 49-3/16 W x 54 H 6048/SC SF, STARTER, MAPLE 30 D x 50-3/8 W x 54 H 6048/SC-A SF, ADDER, MAPLE 30 D x 49-3/16 W x 54 H Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder 5000/DSC DF, STARTER, OAK 60 D x 36-7/8 W x 54 H 5000/DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 60 D x 35-11/16 W x 54 H 6000/DSC DF, STARTER, MAPLE 60 D x 36-7/8 W x 54 H 6000/DSC-A DF, ADDER, MAPLE 60 D x 35-11/16 W x 54 H 5048/DSC DF, STARTER, OAK 60 D x 50-3/8 W x 54 H 5048/DSC-A DF, ADDER, OAK 60 D x 49-3/16 W x 54 H 6048/DSC DF, STARTER, MAPLE 60 D x 50-3/8 W x 54 H 6048/DSC-A DF, ADDER, MAPLE 60 D x 49-3/16 W x 54 H 5000/QSC QUAD CARREL, OAK 73-3/4 Dx72-9/16Wx54-1/2H 6000/QSC QUAD CARREL, MAPLE 73-3/4 Dx72-9/16Wx54-1/2H Quad Carrel The Worden Company Source Book October

158 Tempus Casegoods TEMPUS WORKSTATION TOP: The top shall be 1-1/4 thick x 34-1/2 or 48 wide x 28 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The exposed edge shall be banded with a 1-9/16 thick x 2-1/4 wide solid oak or maple external knife edge band laminated to core after lamination of the face plastic. The edge shall be beveled to a 5/16 radius bullnose at the leading edge and to a 1/8 raised reveal at the lower edge. The top edge shall be grooved and predrilled on the underside at each end for black oxided metal Z bar brackets. The back edge shall have a black aluminum retaining lip extending 5/8 above the work surface. The top shall be held 2 from the back panel to provide a cord drop. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The top edge of the panel shall have a 3 high arc. Both the top and vertical edges shall be banded with a 1/8 thick solid oak or maple external band with a 1/32 radius on all edges. The bottom edge shall be banded with a 1-3/16 thick x 3 high solid oak or maple sabot. The sabot shall be attached wit a blind mortise and tenon. The top of the sabot will have a 1/4 high x 1/16 deep reveal on all sides and the bottom shall be profiled to form a 1-3/16 high arch. A grey 3 square ABS grommet which is self rimmed on both sides shall be bonded to the panel. A 7/8 wide matching grey PVC reveal shall be inlaid vertically into the panel on the outside face, extending from the top band to the sabot. End panels shall be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. The end panels shall be pre-drilled for the location of two shoulder screws for shelf attachment. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be the same as the end panels and through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet. BACK PANEL: The back panels shall be 1-3/16 thick x 34-1/2 or 48 wide x 43-7/8 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple. Back panel shall be located 7 from the top of end panels and 3-5/8 above the floor. SHELF: The shelf shall be 1 thick x 10 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select "A" grade oak or maple veneer faces. The front edge shall be banded with 1/8" thick hardwood band of matching specie. The bottom side of the shelf shall be fitted with four cam type fasteners, allowing locations above or below the worksurface, 44" or 21-3/4" off the floor. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the bottom shelf, there shall be a 1-1/8 deep x 2-1/2 wide extruded black PVC J -channel with a 1-11/16 lip on the face side, and be screwed to the back panel. J-CHANNEL SHELF: The J-channel shelf shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with thermally fused laminate face and back.. The exposed edge shall be banded with 1mm black PVC. The shelf shall be attached with cams. GLIDES: Each panel end is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. UL LISTING: Work stations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder 5000/WS SF, STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 Dx36-7/8 Wx54-1/2H 5000/WS-A SF, ADDER, OAK 31-1/2Dx35-11/16Wx54-1/2H 6000/WS SF, STARTER, MAPLE 31-1/2 Dx36-7/8 Wx54-1/2H 6000/WS-A SF, ADDER, MAPLE 31-1/2Dx35-11/16Wx54-1/2H 5048/WS SF, STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 Dx50-3/8 Wx54-1/2H 5048/WS-A SF, ADDER, OAK 31-1/2Dx49-3/16 Wx54-1/2H 6048/WS SF, STARTER, MAPLE 31-1/2 Dx50-3/8 Wx54-1/2H 6048/WS-A SF, ADDER, MAPLE 31-1/2Dx49-3/16 Wx54-1/2H 5072/WS SF, STARTER, OAK 31-1/2 Wx72-9/16Dx54-1/2H 5072/WS-A SF, ADDER, OAK 31-1/2 Dx71-3/8 Dx54-1/2H 6072/WS SF, STARTER, MAPLE 31-1/2 Wx72-9/16Dx54-1/2H 6072/WS-A SF, ADDER, MAPLE 31-1/2 Dx71-3/8 Dx54-1/2H Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder 5000/DWS DF, STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 Dx36-7/8 Wx54-1/2H 5000/DWS-A DF, ADDER, OAK 60-1/4Dx35-11/16Wx54-1/2H 6000/DWS DF, STARTER, MAPLE 60-1/4 Dx36-7/8 Wx54-1/2H 6000/DWS-A DF, ADDER, MAPLE 60-1/4Dx35-11/16Wx54-1/2H 5048/DWS DF, STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 Dx50-3/8 Wx54-1/2H 5048/DWS-A DF, ADDER, OAK 60-1/4Dx49-11/16Wx54-1/2H 6048/DWS DF, STARTER, MAPLE 60-1/4 Dx50-3/8 Wx54-1/2H 6048/DWS-A DF, ADDER, MAPLE 60-1/4Dx49-11/16Wx54-1/2H 5072/DWS DF, STARTER, OAK 60-1/4 Dx72-9/16Wx54-1/2H 5072/DWS-A DF, ADDER, OAK 60-1/4 Dx71-3/8 Wx54-1/2H 6072/DWS DF, STARTER, MAPLE 60-1/4 Dx72-9/16Wx54-1/2H 6072/DWS-A DF, ADDER, MAPLE 60-1/4 Dx71-3/8 Wx54-1/2H 158 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

159 Teres Casegoods TERES ATLAS STAND END PANEL: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer face and back. The panel shall be angled at the top to provide a 5-1/8 incline. All four edges shall be externally banded with a 1/8 solid oak or maple radiused on all edges 1/8. The ends shall be fitted with eleven (four at the top and base shelf and three at the back panel location) M6 spreading dowel threaded brass inserts set flush with the surface. TOP: The top shall be 1-1/4 thick x 28-1/8 deep x 26 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The back edge shall be externally banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple radiused 1/8. The front edge shall be rabbeted to receive a 1-7/8 wide black anodized aluminum extrusion forming a 5/8 high retainer lip. The top shall be secured to the end panel by means of 21-3/16 long black oxided steel Z -bar brackets secured to the top with three #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the ends by means of four M6 screws. BASE SHELF: The base shelf shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer face and any sound back and banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple radiused 1/8. The top shall be joined to the ends and back panel with Z -bars. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 3/4 thick x 26 wide x 28-1/2 high 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces and the bottom edge banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple. The back shall be joined to the ends by means of six Minifix cam lock fasteners and to the base shelf with M6 inserts and screws. STORAGE SHELVES: The slide-out storage shelves shall be 3/4 thick x 25 wide x 24 deep 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade B oak or maple veneer face and any sound back. The front edge shall be machined and fitted with the same extruded retainer lip as the top. The shelves shall be suspended with powder coated slides providing 17-3/4 extension. Slides shall have nylon wheel bearings and shall have stops to prevent accidental removal and detents to prevent creep while in the closed position. Shelves shall be spaced 4-1/4 O.C. providing 3 functional clearance between shelves. GLIDES: The bottom of each end shall have two 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned chrome glides with a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. T-3220-AS T-3220-AS-M T-3220-AS-J T-3220-AS-J-M OAK MAPLE JUV HGT, HPL TOP, OAK JUV HGT, HPL TOP, MPL 44-7/8 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D 44-7/8 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D 34-1/2 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D 34-1/2 Hx28-3/8 Wx28-7/8D The Worden Company Source Book October

160 Teres Casegoods TERES DICTIONARY STAND END PANEL: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer face and back. The panel shall be angled at the top to provide a 5-1/8 incline. All four edges shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple radiused on all edges 1/8. The ends shall be fitted with eleven (four at the top and base shelf and three at the back panel location) M6 spreading dowel threaded brass inserts set flush with the surface. TOP: The top shall be 1-1/4 thick x 20-1/8 deep x 24 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The back edge shall be externally banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple radiused 1/8. The front edge shall be rabbeted to receive a 1-7/8 wide black anodized aluminum extrusion forming a 5/8 high retainer lip. The top shall be secured to the end panel by means of 16 long, 14 gauge black oxided steel Z -bar brackets secured to the top with three #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws and to the ends by means of four M6 screws. BASE SHELF: The base shelf shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer face and any sound back and banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple radiused 1/8. The top shall be joined to the ends and back panel with Z -bars. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 3/4 thick x 24 wide x 28-1/2 high 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces and the bottom edge banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple. The back shall be joined to the ends by means of six Minifix cam lock fasteners and to the base shelf with M6 inserts and screws. ADJUSTABLE SHELF: The adjustable shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 17-15/16 deep x 23-15/16 wide, 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer face and any sound veneer back. The exposed edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple radiused 1/8. The underside of the shelf shall be routed to receive shelf pins. Shelf adjustment shall be provided by a hole and peg system on 32-mm centers. The shelf pins shall have a shoulder or retainer to prevent accidental removal. GLIDES: The bottom of each end shall have two 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned chrome glides with a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. T-3225-DS T-3225-DS-M T-3225-DS-J OAK MAPLE JUV HGT, HPL TOP, OAK 44-7/8 Hx26-3/8 Wx20-7/8D 44-7/8 Hx26-3/8 Wx20-7/8D 34-1/2 Hx26-3/8 Wx20-7/8D T-3225-DS-J-M JUV HGT, HPL TOP, MAPLE 34-1/2 Hx26-3/8 Wx20-7/8D TERES REVOLVING DICTIONARY STAND T-2022 T-2022-M REVOLVING, OAK REVOLVING, MAPLE 5 H x 21 W x 15 D 5 H x 21 W x 15 D The top is constructed of 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with grade A oak or maple face veneer, banded on all four edges with 1/8 solid oak. The top of this unit is sloped at a 7* angle to 1-3/4 height at front (lower edge) and has a retaining strip along front edge. The base is 8 square and is constructed of 3/4 thick solid oak or maple. A ball bearing swivel mechanism is attached to base and top to provide the stand rotation. TERES MAGAZINE RACK This unit has six sloped display shelves of varied heights. The rack has a capacity for approximately 40 magazines. End panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on the face and back. All four edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple radiussed 1/16 on all edges and corners. The closed back panel is 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select oak or maple veneer. T-2042-MR T-2042-MR-M OAK MAPLE 49 H x 36 W x 18 D 49 H x 36 W x 18 D 160 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

161 Teres Casegoods TERES NEWSPAPER RACK This unit has a solid oak or maple top frame 1-1/4 thick. This solid oak or maple open top frame has notched racks at each end to hold ten newspaper display rods. These display rods are arranged to permit newspapers to hang in the opening of the table top. Display rods are of solid hardwood material split into six segments and furnished with rubber ring retainer at end. Ten display rods are furnished with the rack. Panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on the face and back. All four edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple radiused 1/16 on all edges and corners. T-2018-NR 10 STICKS, OAK 29 H x 39-1/4 W x 25-1/4 T-2018-NR-M 10 STICKS, MAPLE 29 H x 39-1/4 W x 25-1/4 TERES SINGLE FACED DOUBLE TIER BROWSER DISPLAY TROUGH: The display trough shall be 45 wide x 19 deep and 8-1/4 high at the front edge and divided into up to six equal width compartments. The trough shall be constructed from select grade A oak or maple veneer with 1/8 thick oak or maple bands along exposed edges. The bottom of the trough shall be lined with a ribbed mat. The dividers shall be ¼ diameter zinc plated, removable steel rods, screwed into inserts imbedded in the front panel. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. All four edges shall receive a 1/8 thick solid oak external band. KEEL: The longitudinal keel shall be 1 thick x 6 wide plywood construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer faces and 1/8 thick oak bands along the exposed edges. The keel shall fasten to the inside face of the end panels with concealed fasteners. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be provided with two resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a ¼ -20 x 15/16 threaded stem. CAPACITY: 220 CDs / 160 DVDs per trough. T-2048-RB SF SINGLE TIER, OAK 47-3/8 W x 40-1/4 H x21 D T-2048-RB-M SF SINGLE TIER, MAPLE 47-3/8 W x 40-1/4 H x21 D T-2048-DRB SF DOUBLE TIER, OAK 47-3/8 W x 40-1/4 H x21 D T-2048-DRB-M SF DOUBLE TIER, MAPLE 47-3/8 W x 40-1/4 H x21 D Single Tier Double Tier TERES DISPLAY CASE The Teres display case is an upright glass display that features a dark bronze extruded aluminum fame and finished wood base. The case includes 3/16 clear annealed glass sides, top and doors. The back and bottom panels are white laminate. The case is supplied with four half width, ¼ t tempered glass shelves that are fully adjustable on cantilever brackets that engage slotted standards located at the rear of the case. The doors are sliding halves and include a ratchet type lock. The base is a box style with horizontal finished veneer at all faces. The base is fully reinforced and includes adjustable floor glides. T-4278-EXC BRONZE FINISH, OAK 72-1/8 Hx47-5/8 Wx16-1/8D T-4278-EXC-M BRONZE FINISH, MAPLE 72-1/8 Hx47-5/8 Wx16-1/8D TERES DISPLAY TABLE This display case features an extruded aluminum frame with a dark bronze finish. The case has 3/16 t annealed float glass at he sides and top. The top includes a continuous piano hinge, two point lock and lid support. A tackable bottom panel with neutral beige fabric is available as an option. Glass case size: 59 w x 29 d x 9-11/16 h. The case is attached to the table top with screws. Tops are 1-1/8 t particle board core with a.050 t laminate face and.028 t balancing backer. Top bands are 5/8 t x 1-5/8 h and profiled to match the specified series; TB for beveled edge and TR for radius edge. Legs are 2-1/4 square and are profiled to match the series; TB receives a ¼ radius along the vertical corners, TR receives a ¾ radius along the vertical corners. An optional trim rail is available. The rail is 1 w x 1-7/16 h and profiled with a 3/8 radius along the bottom outside and end corners. The rail spans the distance between legs and is positioned behind the top drop band. Rails are attached with screws. TB-3060-EXC TB-3060-EXC-M TB-3060-EXC-R 9-1/2 H BRONZE FRAME, OAK 9-1/2 H BRONZE FRAME, MAPLE RAIL 9-1/2 H BRONZE FRAME 38-1/2 H x 31 W x 61 L 38-1/2 H x 31 W x 61 L 38-1/2 H x 31 W x 61 L The Worden Company Source Book October

162 Teres Casegoods TERES STUDY CARREL TERES B TOP: The work surfaces shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard, including a top surface of.050 thick high-pressure laminate and a backing sheet not less than.028 thick. Front edges of work surfaces have a 5/8 x 1-5/8 solid oak or maple external drop edge band shaped to a 13 bevel. TERES R TOP: The work surfaces 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard, including a top surface of.050 thick high-pressure laminate and a.028 thick backing sheet. Front edges of work surfaces have a 5/8 x 1-5/8 solid oak or maple external drop edge band radiused 1/2 top and bottom. END PANELS: End panels shall be 3/4 thick x 23-3/4 wide x 31-3/4 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. Panels will be banded top and bottom with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple. Panels will have concealed Mod-eez clips which fit over and lock onto pins in the leg posts. The end panels shall be pre-drilled for the location of shoulder screws for shelf and work surface attachment. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panel shall be the same construction as end panels and through drilled for shelf and work surface attachment. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 3/4 thick x 33-3/4 or 47-1/4 wide x 31-3/4 high. Back panel construction is the same as end and intermediate panels. LEGS: Legs will be 1-1/2 square solid oak or maple. Edges of legs will have 1/4" radius. SHELF: Shelf will be 3/4 thick x 7-3/4 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on each face. The front edge will be banded with 1/8 thick external oak or maple band. CARREL TOP HEIGHT: Work surface will be 29 high except when 27 or 25 heights are specified. GLIDES: Each end panel is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. UL LISTING Carrels shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Single-Faced Starter Double-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder Double-Faced Adder TB-2436-SC SF STARTER, OAK 27 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 H TB-2436-SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 27 D x 35-1/4 Wx 48 H TB-2436-SC-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 27 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 H TB-2436-SC-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 27 D x 35-1/4 Wx 48 H TB-2448-SC SF STARTER, OAK 27 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H TB-2448-SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 27 D x 48-3/4 W x 48 H TB-2448-SC-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 27 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H TB-2448-SC-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 27 D x 48-3/4 W x 48 H TB-2436-DSC DF STARTER, OAK 48 H x 52-3/8 D x36-7/8 W TB-2436-DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 48 H x 52-3/8 D x35-1/4 W TB-2436-DSC-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 48 H x 52-3/8 D x36-7/8 W TB-2436-DSC-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 48 H x 52-3/8 D x35-1/4 W TB-2448-DSC DF STARTER, OAK 52-3/8 D x 50-3/4 W x48 H TB-2448-DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 52-3/8 D x 48-3/4 W x48 H TB-2448-DSC-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 52-3/8 D x 50-3/4 W x48 H TB-2448-DSC-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 52-3/8 D x 48-3/4 W x48 H Single-Faced Starter Double-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder Double-Faced Adder TR-2436-SC SF STARTER, OAK 27 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 H TR-2436-SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 27 D x 35-1/4 W x 48 H TR-2436-SC-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 27 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 H TR-2436-SC-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 27 D x 35-1/4 W x 48 H TR-2448-SC SF STARTER, OAK 27 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H TR-2448-SC-A SF ADDER, OAK 27 D x 48-3/4 W x 48 H TR-2448-SC-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 27 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H TR-2448-SC-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 27 D x 48-3/4 W x 48 H TR-2436-DSC DF STARTER, OAK 52-3/8 D x 36-7/8 W x48 H TR-2436-DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 52-3/8 D x 35-1/4 W x48 H TR-2436-DSC-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 52-3/8 D x 36-7/8 W x48 H TR-2436-DSC-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 52-3/8 D x 35-1/4 W x48 H TR-2448-DSC DF STARTER, OAK 52-3/8 D x 50-3/8 W x48 H TR-2448-DSC-A DF ADDER, OAK 52-3/8 D x 48-3/4 W x48 H TR-2448-DSC-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 52-3/8 D x 50-3/8 W x48 H TR-2448-DSC-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 52-3/8 D x 48-3/4 W x48 H TB-2436-QSC TB-2436-QSC-M TR-2436-QSC TR-2436-QSC-M QUAD CARREL, OAK QUAD CARREL, MAPLE QUAD CARREL, OAK QUAD CARREL, MAPLE 48 H x 61-3/16 SQUARE 48 H x 61-3/16 SQUARE 48 H x 73-7/8 SQUARE 48 H x 73-7/8 SQUARE Quad Carrel 162 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

163 Teres Casegoods TERES CARREL TABLE TERES B TABLE TOP: Tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, including a.050 thick high-pressure laminate top surface and a backing sheet not less than.028 thick. Edges are banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external drop edge band shaped to a 13 bevel with corners radiused 1/2. TERES R TABLE TOP: Tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, including a.050 thick high-pressure laminate top surface and a backing sheet.028 thick. Edges are banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external drop edge band and radiused top, bottom, and corners 1/2 LEGS: Legs will be 2-1/4 square, glued-up solid oak or maple. All vertical edges of legs will receive a 3/4 radius (Teres R) and 1/4" (Teres B). Bottom edges of legs will be radiused 1/8. Each leg will have a 1-3/16 diameter adjustable glide. Legs will attach to table tops by means of a 5 square x 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is attached to the leg by two 5/16 x 3 machine bolt engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut inserted into the leg. The steel plate is attached to the table top by 5/16 x 1 machine bolts engaging threaded inserts in the underside of the table top. Leg plates will be positioned behind, and hidden by the extended table top edge band. RACK (STUDY TABLE): Rack will be constructed of 3/4 thick solid oak or maple. The rack is mounted along one edge of table top to form a single-faced study table. CENTER PANEL CARREL TABLE AND FULL-PANEL CARREL TABLE RACK: The rack is constructed of 3/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces and all exposed edges banded with solid oak or maple bands. Racks are screwed to table tops. TRIM RAIL (OPTIONAL): A 1 x 1-7/16 thick solid oak apron trim rail will be fitted between the legs and behind the extended table top edge band. Bottom and ends will each have 3/8 radius. WORK SURFACE HEIGHT: Standard height is 29 high. Optional 25 or 27 heights may be specified at no additional cost. GLIDES: Each leg will have a 1-3/16 diameter adjustable rubber cushioned leveling glide with a 15/16 stem. UL LISTING:Tables will be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). TB-2436-IP OAK 24 Wx36 LxH, RACK 3-5/8 H TB-2436-IP-M MAPLE 24 Wx36 LxH, RACK 3-5/8 H TB-2436-IP-R W/ RAILS, OAK 24 Wx36 LxH, RACK 3-5/8 H TB-2436-IP-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 24 Wx36 LxH, RACK 3-5/8 H Carrel Table TR-2436-IP OAK 24 Wx36 LxH, RACK 3-5/8 H TR-2436-IP-M MAPLE 24 Wx36 LxH, RACK 3-5/8 H TR-2436-IP-R W/ RAILS, OAK 24 Wx36 LxH, RACK 3-5/8 H TR-2436-IP-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 24 Wx36 LxH, RACK 3-5/8 H The study table rack is constructed of 3/4 x 3-5/8 solid oak or maple material. Returning curb 6-3/8 deep x 34-1/2 wide x 3-5/8 high. TB-2436-CP TB-2436-CP-M TB-2436-CP-R TB-2436-CP-R-M SF CENTER PANEL, OAK SF CENTER PANEL, MAPLE SF CENTER PANEL, RAILS, OAK SF CENTER PANEL, RAILS, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK Single-Faced Center Panel TR-2436-CP TR-2436-CP-M TR-2436-CP-R TR-2436-CP-R-M SF CENTER PANEL, OAK SF CENTER PANEL, MAPLE SF CENTER PANEL, RAILS, OAK SF CENTER PANEL, RAILS, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK The single-faced rack as used on 24 deep tables is 9-5/8 deep x 34-1/2 wide x 19 high with one (1) 3/4 thick x 8-1/2 deep shelf,located 12-1/2 above the table top. TB-2436-FP TB-2436-FP-M SF FULL PANEL, OAK SF FULL PANEL, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT TB-2436-FP-R TB-2436-FP-R-M SF FULL PANEL, RAILS, OAK SF FULL PANEL, RAILS, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK Single-Faced Full Panel TR-2436-FP TR-2436-FP-M TR-2436-FP-R TR-2436-FP-R-M SF FULL PANEL, OAK SF FULL PANEL, MAPLE SF FULL PANEL, RAILS, OAK SF FULL PANEL, RAILS, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 24 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK The single faced rack is 21-1/2 deep x 34-1/2 wide x 19 high with one (1) 3/4 thick x 8-1/2 deep shelf located 12-1/2 above the table top. The Worden Company Source Book October

164 Teres Casegoods TERES CARREL TABLE cont d Model # Description Dimensions TB-4836-CP TB-4836-CP-M TB-4836-CP-R TB-4836-CP-R-M DF CENTER PANEL, OAK DF CENTER PANEL, MAPLE DF CENTER PANEL, RAILS, OAK DF CENTER PANEL, RAILS, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 48 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK Double-Faced Center Panel TR-4836-CP TR-4836-CP-M TR-4836-CP-R TR-4836-CP-R-M DF CENTER PANEL, OAK DF CENTER PANEL, MAPLE DF CENTER PANEL, RAILS, OAK DF CENTER PANEL, RAILS, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 48 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK The double faced rack as used on 48 deep tables is 18-1/4 deep x 34-1/2 wide x 19 high with two (2) 3/4 thick 8-1/2 deep shelves located 12-1/2 above table top. TB-4836-FP TB-4836-FP-M TB-4836-FP-R TB-4836-FP-R-M DF FULL PANEL, OAK DF FULL PANEL, MAPLE DF FULL PANEL, RAILS, OAK DF FULL PANEL, RAILS, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 48 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 48 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 48 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK Double-Faced Full Panel TR-4836-FP TR-4836-FP-M TR-4836-FP-R TR-4836-FP-R-M DF FULL PANEL, OAK DF FULL PANEL, MAPLE DF FULL PANEL, RAILS, OAK DF FULL PANEL, RAILS, MAPLE 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x HGT 48 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK 48 W x 36 L x H 19 H RACK The double faced rack is 45-1/2 deep x 34-1/2 wide x 19 high with two (2) 3/4 thick x 8-1/2 deep shelves located 12-1/2 above the table top. 164 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

165 Teres Casegoods TERES COMPUTER WORKSTATION TERES B TOP: The top shall be 1-1/4 thick 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure laminate face and a.028 backer on the underside. The exposed edges shall be externally radiused top and bottom 1/16. Front edges of work surfaces have a 5/8 x 1-5/8 solid oak or maple external drop edge band shaped to a 13 bevel. Back edge shall have a black aluminum retaining lip extending 5/8 above the work surface. The work surface shall be held away from the back panel 2 to provide a cord drop. TERES R TOP: The top shall be 1-1/4 thick, 26 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 high pressure laminate face and a.028 backer on the underside. Front edges of work surfaces have a 5/8 x 1-5/8 solid oak or maple external drop edge band radiused top and bottom 1/2. Back edge shall have a black aluminum retaining lip extending 5/8 above the work surface. The work surface shall be held away from the back panel 2 to provide a cord drop. END PANELS: End panels shall be 3/4 thick x 27-3/4 wide x 31-3/4 high, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. Panels will be banded top and bottom with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple. Panels will have concealed Mod-eez clips which engage shoulder screws in the leg posts. End panels will be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. The end panels shall be pre-drilled for the location of two shoulder screws for shelf attachment. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panel shall be the same construction as end panels and through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 3/4 thick x 33-3/4 or 47-1/4 wide x 31-3/4 high. Back panel construction is the same as end and intermediate panels. LEGS: Legs will be 1-1/2 square solid oak or maple, radiused on all edges, top and bottom, 1/4 (Teres B) and 3/4" (Teres R). Each leg will have a 1-3/16 diameter adjustable glide. SHELF: Shelf will be 1 thick x 10 deep 3-ply particleboard construction with select "A" grade oak or maple veneer faces. The front edge shall be banded with a 1/8" thick hardwood band of matching specie. The bottom side of the shelf shall be fitted with four cam type fasteners, allowing locations above or below the work surface, 44" or 21-3/4" off the floor. J-CHANNEL SHELF: J-channel shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 6 deep 3-ply particleboard construction with black thermally fused laminate face and back.the exposed edge shall be banded with 1 mm black PVC. Shelf shall be attached with cams. WORK STATION TOP HEIGHT: Work surface will be adjustable to 39 high, 32 high, 29 high or 26-1/2 high. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the J -channel shelf, there shall be a 1-1/8 deep x 2-1/2 wide extruded black PVC J -channel with a 1-11/16 lip on the face side, screwed to the back panel. UL LISTING: Work stations shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder TB-2836-WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 H TB-2836-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x 35-1/4 W x 48 H TB-2836-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 H TB-2836-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 D x 35-1/4 W x 48 H TB-2842-WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 46-3/8 W x 48 H TB-2842-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x 42-3/4 W x 48 H TB-2842-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 D x 46-3/8 W x 48 H TB-2842-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 D x 42-3/4 W x 48 H TB-2848-WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H TB-2848-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x 48-3/4 W x 48 H TB-2848-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H TB-2848-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 D x 48-3/4 W x 48 H TB-2872-WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 72-1/8 W x 48 H TB-2872-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x 72-1/8 W x 48 H TB-2872-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 D x 72-1/8 W x 48 H TB-2872-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 D x 72-1/8 W x 48 H The Worden Company Source Book October

166 Teres Casegoods TERES COMPUTER WORKSTATION cont d Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder TB-2836-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 36-7/8 W x48 H TB-2836-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 35-1/4 W x48 H TB-2836-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-3/8 D x 36-7/8 W x48 H TB-2836-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-3/8 D x 35-1/4 W x48 H TB-2842-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 46-3/8 W x48 H TB-2842-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 42-3/4 W x48 H TB-2842-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-3/8 D x 46-3/8 W x48 H TB-2842-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-3/8 D x 42-3/4 W x48 H TB-2848-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 50-3/8 W x48 H TB-2848-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 48-3/4 W x48 H TB-2848-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-3/8 D x 50-3/8 W x48 H TB-2848-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-3/8 D x 48-3/4 W x48 H TB-2872-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 72-1/8 W x48 H TB-2872-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 72-1/8 W x48 H TB-2872-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-3/8 D x 72-1/8 W x48 H TB-2872-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-3/8 D x 72-1/8 W x48 H Single-Faced Starter Single-Faced Adder TR-2836-WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 H TR-2836-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x 35-1/4 W x 48 H TR-2836-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 Dx36-7/8 W x 48 H TR-2836-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 Dx35-1/4 W x 48 H TR-2842-WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 46-3/8 W x 48 H TR-2842-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x 42-3/4 W x 48 H TR-2842-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 Dx46-3/8 W x 48 H TR-2842-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 Dx42-3/4 W x 48 H TR-2848-WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 50-3/8 W x 48 H TR-2848-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x 48-3/4 W x 48 H TR-2848-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 Dx50-3/8 W x 48 H TR-2848-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 Dx48-3/4 W x 48 H TR-2872-WS SF STARTER, OAK 31 D x 72-1/8 W x 48 H TR-2872-WS-A SF ADDER, OAK 31 D x 72-1/8 W x 48 H TR-2872-WS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 31 D x 72-1/8 W x 48 H TR-2872-WS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 31 D x 72-1/8 W x 48 H Double-Faced Starter Double-Faced Adder TR-2836-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 36-7/8 W x 48 TR-2836-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-3/8 Dx35-1/4 W x 48 TR-2836-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-3/8 Dx36-7/8 W x48 H TR-2836-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-3/8 Dx35-1/4 W x48 H TR-2842-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 44-3/8 W x48 H TR-2842-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 42-3/4 W x48 H TR-2842-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-3/8 Dx44-3/8 W x48 H TR-2842-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-3/8 Dx42-3/4 W x48 H TR-2848-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 50-3/8 W x TR-2848-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 48-3/4 W x TR-2848-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-3/8 D x 50-3/8 W x TR-2848-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-3/8 D x 48-3/4 W x TR-2872-DWS DF STARTER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 72-1/8 W x 48 H TR-2872-DWS-A DF ADDER, OAK 60-3/8 D x 72-1/8 W x 48 H TR-2872-DWS-M DF STARTER, MAPLE 60-3/8 Dx72-1/8 W x 48 H TR-2872-DWS-A-M DF ADDER, MAPLE 60-3/8 Dx72-1/8 W x 48 H 166 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

167 Teres Casegoods TERES OPAC TERES B TOP: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick x 28 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The front edge shall be banded with a 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple, external, drop edge band, shaped to a 13 bevel. Back edge shall have a black aluminum retaining lip extending 5/8 above the work surface. The top shall be held 2 from the back panel to provide a cord drop. The top shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end for black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. TERES R TOP: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick x 28 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The front edge shall be banded with a 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external drop edge band, radiused top and bottom 1/2. Back edge shall have a black aluminum retaining lip extending 5/8 above the work surface. The top shall be held 2 from the back panel to provide a cord drop. The top shall be grooved and pre-drilled on the underside at each end for black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The top, bottom and front edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple edge bands. End panels shall be fitted on one side with threaded brass inserts for adjustable work surface heights of 26-1/2, 29, 32 and 39. The end panels shall be pre-drilled for the location of two shoulder screws for shelf attachment. INTERMEDIATE PANELS: The intermediate panels shall be the same as the end panels and through drilled with threaded brass inserts on both sides and shall be bored and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC pass through grommet. BACK PANELS: The back panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple edge bands. The back side of the panels shall have 5mm boring for the location of shelf pins for display shelves and for black oxided metal Z-bar brackets for supporting the hex lids. ENCLOSURE PANELS: The enclosure panels shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The top and bottom shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple edge bands. The edges on both sides shall be radiused, pre-drilled and attached to the back panels by means of cleats. ACCESS PANELS: The access panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select veneers on both faces. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple. The panels shall be split in two parts 12 from the bottom. The top section shall be pre-drilled on the back side at top for black oxided metal Z-bar brackets and attached to the panel to support the hex lids. The top sections shall be bored through and fitted with a 3-1/2 PVC grommet. TRIANGULAR POSTS: The triangular posts shall be 1-1/2 per side extruded aluminum, powder coated black, machined on all sides for shoulder screws. The post shall be fitted at the top with an injection molded cap, and the bottom fitted with a threaded insert for a glide. PAPER SHELF: The paper shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 7-1/2 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple. The back edge shall be banded with 1/32 veneer. The shelf shall be secured with cam fasteners. The underside of the paper shelf is pre-drilled to receive J channel. DISPLAY SHELF: The display shelf shall be 3/4 thick x 7-1/2 deep, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers on both faces. The front edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak. The shelf shall be secured with rafix fasteners. FULL AND HALF HEX LID: The full and half hex lid shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. Each lid shall be supported by black oxided metal Z-bar brackets. GLIDES: Each end panel, intermediate panel and post shall be fitted with one 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT: Between the work surface and the paper shelf, there shall be a 1-1/8 deep x 2-1/2 wide extruded black PVC J -channel with a 1-11/16 lip on the face side, and screwed to the back panel. UL LISTING: OPAC units shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Office Furnishings Standard (QAWZ). Model # Description Dimensions TB-096-HCT HEX STATION, OAK 95-3/4 DIAM. x 48 H TB-096-HCT-M HEX STATION, MAPLE 95-3/4 DIAM. x 48 H TR-096-HCT TR-096-HCT-M HEX STATION, OAK HEX STATION, MAPLE 95-3/4 DIAM. x 48 H 95-3/4 DIAM x 48 H TB-096-HCT-1 TB-096-HCT-1-M TR-096-HCT-1 TR-096-HCT-1-M 1/2 HEX CLOSED BACK, OAK 1/2 HEX CLOSED BACK, MAPLE 1/2 HEX CLOSED BACK, OAK 1/2 HEX CLOSED BACK, MAPLE 24-1/4 D x 95-3/4 x 48 H 24-1/4 D x 95-3/4 x 48 H 24-1/4 D x 95-3/4 x 48 H 24-1/4 D x 95-3/4 x 48 H TB-096-HCT-3 TB-096-HCT-3-M TR-096-HCT-3 TR-096-HCT-3-M 1/2 HEX OPEN BACK, OAK 1/2 HEX OPEN BACK, MAPLE 1/2 HEX OPEN BACK, OAK 1/2 HEX OPEN BACK, MAPLE 24-1/4 D x 95-3/4 x 48 H 24-1/4 D x 95-3/4 x 48 H 24-1/4 D x 95-3/4 x 48 H 24-1/4 D x 95-3/4 x 48 H The Worden Company Source Book October

168 Teres Casegoods TERES TABLE TERES B TABLE TOP: Tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, including a.050 thick high-pressure laminate top surface and a backing sheet not less than.028 thick. Edges are banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external drop edge band shaped to a 13 bevel with corners radiused 1/2. TERES R TABLE TOP: Tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, including a.050 thick high-pressure laminate top surface and a backing sheet.028 thick. Edges are banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external drop edge band and radiused top, bottom, and corners 1/2. TRIM RAIL (OPTIONAL): A 1 x 1-7/16 thick solid oak or maple apron trim rail will be fitted between the legs and behind the extended table top edge band. Bottom and ends will each have 3/8 radius. LEGS: Legs will be 2-1/4 square, glued-up solid oak. All vertical edges of legs will receive a 1/4 radius (Teres B) and 3/4" radius (Teres R). Bottom edges of legs will be radiused 1/8. Legs will attach to table tops by means of a 5 square x 5/16 thick steel plate. The plate is attached to the leg by two 5/16 x 3 machine bolt engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut inserted into the leg. The steel plate is attached to the table top by 5/16 x 1 machine bolts engaging threaded inserts in the underside of the table top. Leg plates will be positioned behind, and hidden by the extended table top edge band. TABLE TOP SUPPORT: For maximum rigidity, rectangular tables, 60 or longer, will receive a V-shaped, 14 gauge steel keel securely fastened to the underside of the table top. Tables 48 wide and 60 or longer, will receive two steel keels parallel to the length of the table. TABLE TOP HEIGHT: All tables will be 29, except when 27,or 25 heights are specified. GLIDES: Each leg will have a 1-3/16 diameter adjustable rubber cushioned leveling glide with a 15/16 stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). TB-2436 OAK 24 W x 36 L x HGT TB-2436-M MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT TB-2436-R W/ RAILS, OAK 24 W x 36 L x HGT TB-2436-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT TB-3060 OAK 30 W x 60 L x HGT TB-3060-M MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT TB-3060-R W/ RAILS, OAK 30 W x 60 L x HGT TB-3060-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT TB-3660 OAK 36 W x 60 L x HGT TB-3660-M MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT TB-3660-R W/ RAILS, OAK 36 W x 60 L x HGT TB-3660-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT TB-3672 OAK 36 W x 72 L x HGT TB-3672-M MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT TB-3672-R W/ RAILS, OAK 36 W x 72 L x HGT TB-3672-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT TB-3690 OAK 36 W x 90 L x HGT TB-3690-M MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT TB-3690-R W/ RAILS, OAK 36 W x 90 L x HGT TB-3690-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT TB-4260 OAK 42 W x 60 L x HGT TB-4260-M MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT TB-4260-R W/ RAILS, OAK 42 W x 60 L x HGT TB-4260-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT TB-4272 OAK 42 W x 72 L x HGT TB-4272-M MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT TB-4272-R W/ RAILS, OAK 42 W x 72 L x HGT TB-4272-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT TB-4290 OAK 42 W x 90 L x HGT TB-4290-M MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT TB-4290-R W/ RAILS, OAK 42 W x 90 L x HGT TB-4290-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT TB-4860 OAK 48 W x 60 L x HGT TB-4860-M MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT TB-4860-R W/ RAILS, OAK 48 W x 60 L x HGT TB-4860-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT TB-4872 OAK 48 W x 72 L x HGT TB-4872-M MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT TB-4872-R W/ RAILS, OAK 48 W x 72 L x HGT TB-4872-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT TB-4890 OAK 48 W x 90 L x HGT TB-4890-M MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT TB-4890-R W/ RAILS, OAK 48 W x 90 L x HGT TB-4890-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT 168 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

169 Teres Casegoods TERES TABLE cont d TR-2436 TR-2436-M OAK MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT 24 W x 36 L x HGT TR-2436-R W/ RAILS, OAK 24 W x 36 L x HGT TR-2436-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 24 W x 36 L x HGT TR-3060 OAK 30 W x 60 L x HGT TR-3060-M MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT TR-3060-R W/ RAILS, OAK 30 W x 60 L x HGT TR-3060-RM W/ RAILS, MAPLE 30 W x 60 L x HGT TR-3660 OAK 36 W x 60 L x HGT TR-3660-M MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT TR-3660-R W/ RAILS, OAK 36 W x 60 L x HGT TR-3660-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 36 W x 60 L x HGT TR-3672 OAK 36 W x 72 L x HGT TR-3672-M MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT TR-3672-R W/ RAILS, OAK 36 W x 72 L x HGT TR-3672-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 36 W x 72 L x HGT TR-3690 OAK 36 W x 90 L x HGT TR-3690-M MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT TR-3690-R W/ RAILS, OAK 36 W x 90 L x HGT TR-3690-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 36 W x 90 L x HGT TR-4260 OAK 42 W x 60 L x HGT TR-4260-M MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT TR-4260-R W/ RAILS, OAK 42 W x 60 L x HGT TR-4260-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 42 W x 60 L x HGT TR-4272 OAK 42 W x 72 L x HGT TR-4272-M MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT TR-4272-R W/ RAILS, OAK 42 W x 72 L x HGT TR-4272-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 42 W x 72 L x HGT TR-4290 OAK 42 W x 90 L x HGT TR-4290-M MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT TR-4290-R W/ RAILS, OAK 42 W x 90 L x HGT TR-4290-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 42 W x 90 L x HGT TR-4860 OAK 48 W x 60 L x HGT TR-4860-M MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT TR-4860-R W/ RAILS, OAK 48 W x 60 L x HGT TR-4860-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 48 W x 60 L x HGT TR-4872 OAK 48 W x 72 L x HGT TR-4872-M MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT TR-4872-R W/ RAILS, OAK 48 W x 72 L x HGT TR-4872-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 48 W x 72 L x HGT TR-4890 OAK 48 W x 90 L x HGT TR-4890-M MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT TR-4890-R W/ RAILS, OAK 48 W x 90 L x HGT TR-4890-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 48 W x 90 L x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

170 Teres Casegoods TERES ROUND TABLE TERES B WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick high-pressure laminate face and a.028 thick backer on the underside. The entire perimeter shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8" wide solid oak or maple steam bent external edge band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL and beveled to a 13 angle. The top edge shall be radiused 1/4 and the bottom edge radiused 1/16. The edge bands shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with five metal inserts at each leg position. TERES R WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick high-pressure laminate face and a.028 thick backer on the underside. The entire perimeter shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple steam bent external edge band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL, shaped top and bottom to a 1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with five metal inserts at each leg position. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/4 square solid oak or maple stock, made from a single piece, or glued-up face to face from two or three solid oak or maple blanks. The four vertical edges shall be shaped to a 1/4 radius (Teres B) and 3/4" radius (Teres R) and the bottom shaped to a 3/8 radius. The legs shall be attached to a 5 square x 5/16 thick black steel plate by means of two (2) 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear corner of the leg. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of five(5) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. The face of the leg shall be recessed 1/8 behind the drop edge and the leg plate shall be concealed by the drop edge band of the work surface. TABLE TOP HEIGHT: All tables shall be 29 high (adult height), except when 27 (intermediate), or 25 (juvenile) heights are specified. GLIDES: Each leg shall be provided with a resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glide with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). TB-042 OAK 42 DIAMETER x HGT TB-042-M MAPLE 42 DIAMETER x HGT TB-042-R W/ RAILS, OAK 42 DIAMETER x HGT TB-042-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 42 DIAMETER x HGT TB-048 OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT TB-048-M MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT TB-048-R W/ RAILS, OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT TB-048-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT TB-060 OAK 60 DIAMETER x HGT TB-060-M MAPLE 60 DIAMETER x HGT TB-060-R W/ RAILS, OAK 60 DIAMETER x HGT TB-060-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 60 DIAMETER x HGT TR-042 OAK 42 DIAMETER x HGT TR-042-M MAPLE 42 DIAMETER x HGT TR-042-R W/ RAILS, OAK 42 DIAMETER x HGT TR-042-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 42 DIAMETER x HGT TR-048 OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT TR-048-M MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT TR-048-R W/ RAILS, OAK 48 DIAMETER x HGT TR-048-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 48 DIAMETER x HGT TR-060 OAK 60 DIAMETER x HGT TR-060-M MAPLE 60 DIAMETER x HGT TR-060-R W/ RAILS, OAK 60 DIAMETER x HGT TR-060-R-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 60 DIAMETER x HGT 170 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

171 Teres Casegoods TERES SQUARE TABLE TERES B WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick high-pressure laminate face and a.028 thick backer on the underside. All four edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external edge band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL and beveled to a 13* angle. The top edge and corner shall be radiused 1/4 and the bottom edge radiused 1/16. The edge bands shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with five metal inserts at each leg position. TERES R WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick high-pressure laminate face and a.028 thick backer on the underside. All four edges shall be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external edge band applied to the core after lamination of the HPL, shaped top and bottom and at the corners to a 1/2 radiused bullnose profile. The edge bands shall be set flush to the laminate without the use of reveals or vein lines. The underside of the work surface shall be fitted with five metal inserts at each leg position. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/4 square solid oak or maple stock, made from a single piece, or glued-up face to face from two or three solid oak or maple blanks. The four vertical edges shall be shaped to a 1/4 radius (Teres B) and 1/3" radius (Teres R) and the bottom shaped to a 1/8 radius. The legs shall be attached to a 5 square x 5/16 thick black steel plate by means of two (2) 5/16-18 x 3 grade 8 FHM screws engaging a 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the rear corner of the leg. The steel plate shall be attached to the top by means of five(5) 5/16-18 x 1 THM screws screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the top. The face of the leg shall be recessed 1/8 behind the drop edge and the leg plate shall be concealed by the drop edge band of the work surface. GLIDES: Each leg shall be provided with a resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glide with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a 1/4-20 x 15/16 threaded stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Model # Description Dimensions TB-4242 TB-4242-M TB-4242-R TB-4242-R-M TB-4848 TB-4848-M TB-4848-R TB-4848-R-M TR-4242 TR-4242-M TR-4242-R TR-4242-R-M TR-4848 TR-4848-M TR-4848-R OAK MAPLE W/ RAILS, OAK W/ RAILS, MAPLE OAK MAPLE W/ RAILS, OAK W/ RAILS, MAPLE OAK MAPLE W/ RAILS, OAK W/ RAILS, MAPLE OAK MAPLE W/ RAILS, OAK 42 SQUARE x HGT 42 SQUARE x HGT 42 SQUARE x HGT 42 SQUARE x HGT 48 SQUARE x HGT 48 SQUARE x HGT 48 SQUARE x HGT 48 SQUARE x HGT 42 SQUARE x HGT 42 SQUARE x HGT 42 SQUARE x HGT 42 SQUARE x HGT 48 SQUARE x HGT 48 SQUARE x HGT 48 SQUARE x HGT TERES SLOPE TABLE The slope top table shall consist of two sloped table halves, two end panels, one keel and an under top frame support. The sloped tops shall be 26 h at the low edge, sloping upward to 29 h at the center. The tops are placed to the inside of the end panels. TOP HALVES: the top halves shall be 3-ply particle board construction with a.050 thick decorative laminate face and.028 thick balancing backer. The rear edge shall be internally banded with solid oak or maple, the front edge shall be fitted with an extruded black aluminum retainer lip. END PANELS: The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer on both faces. All four edges shall receive a 1/8 thick solid oak or maple external band. KEEL: The longitudinal keel shall be 1 thick x 8 wide plywood construction with select grade A oak or maple veneer faces. The keel shall fasten to the inside face of the end panels with metal brackets. UNDER TOP FRAME SUPPORT: The frame support shall be 1 thick plywood construction with wood cleats provided for assembly to the sloped top sections. GLIDES: Each end panel shall be provided with two resilient cushioned adjustable chrome glides with a 1-3/16 base diameter and a ¼ -20 x 15/16 threaded stem. TB-3072-DST W/ RAILS, OAK 30 W x 72 L x 31"H TB-3072-DST-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x 31"H TR-3072-DST W/ RAILS, OAK 30 W x 72 L x 31"H TR-3072-DST-M W/ RAILS, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x 31"H The Worden Company Source Book October

172 Teres Casegoods TERES INDEX TABLE TERES B TOPS: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, including.050 thick high pressure laminate face and not less than.028 thick backing material. Edges of tops will be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external drop edge bands shaped to a 13 bevel with corners radiused 1/2. The underside of the index table will be fitted with V-shaped, 14 gauge steel reinforcing keels. Keels are securely attached to the underside of top by means of screws. TERES R TOPS: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, including.050 thick high pressure laminate face and not less than.028 thick backing material. Edges of tops will be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external drop edge bands radiused top, bottom, and corners 1/2. The underside of the index table will be fitted with V-shaped, 14 gauge steel reinforcing keels. Keels are securely attached to the underside of top by means of screws. APRON RAILS: A 7/8 thick x 3-1/2 wide solid oak or maple apron rail shall bridge the distance between the legs on all four sides and is screwed to the underside of the work surface. The apron rail is radiused 3/8 on the bottom and at the ends. LEGS: Legs are 2-1/4 square glued-up solid oak or maple and shaped on four (4) corners to a 1/4 radius (Teres B) and 3/4" radius (Teres R) and a 1/8 radius on the bottom. The legs are attached to the apron with steel corner brackets and hanger bolts. Corner bracket shall be screwed to the work surface and apron rails further reinforced by means of 1/2 x 1 steel backing plate. INDEX RACK: The dividers, back and shelves are constructed of 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard with select grade A oak or maple veneer faces and the exposed edges banded with 5/16 solid oak or maple. The end divider panels have 1/16 radius on the upper corners. All bands are continuous bullnose shaped. The rack assembly is secured to the top by screws passing through the underside of the top and into the dividers. The shelves are adjustable and removable to accommodate computer equipment. GLIDES: Each leg is equipped with a 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glide with a 15/16 stem. TABLE TOP HEIGHT: All tables will be 29 high, except when 27 or heights are specified. TB-3090-ID SF/DT, 26 H RACK, OAK 30 W X 90 L X 55 H TB-3090-ID-M SF/DT, 26 H RACK, MAPLE 30 W X 90 L X 55 H TB-6060-ID DF/DT, 26 H RACK, OAK 60 W X 60 L X 55 H TB-6060-ID-M DF/DT, 26 H RACK, MAPLE 60 W X 60 L X 55 H TB-6090-ID DF/DT, 26 H RACK, OAK 60 W X 90 L X 55 H TB-6090-ID-M DF/DT, 26 H RACK, MAPLE 60 W X 90 L X 55 H Single-Faced Double-Faced TR-3090-ID SF/DT, 26 H RACK, OAK 30 W X 90 L X 55 H TR-3090-ID-M SF/DT, 26 H RACK, MAPLE 30 W X 90 L X 55 H TR-6060-ID DF/DT, 26 H RACK, OAK 60 W X 60 L X 55 H TR-6060-ID-M DF/DT, 26 H RACK, MAPLE 60 W X 60 L X 55 H TR-6090-ID DF/DT, 26 H RACK, OAK 60 W X 90 L X 55 H TR-6090-ID-M DF/DT, 26 H RACK, MAPLE 60 W X 90 L X 55 H 172 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

173 Teres Casegoods TERES COMPUTER & REFERENCE TABLE TERES B TOPS: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, including.050 thick high pressure laminate face and not less than.028 thick backing material. Edges of tops will be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple external drop edge bands shaped to a 13 bevel with corners radiused 1/2. TERES R TOPS: Table tops are 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction, including.050 thick high pressure laminate face and not less than.028 thick backing material. Edges of tops will be banded with 5/8 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak or maple bands radiused top, bottom, and corners 1/2. TRIM RAIL (Optional): A 1 thick x 1-7/16 wide solid oak or maple accent strip will be positioned behind the drop edge band. Bottom edges and edges will have 3/8 radius. LEGS: Legs are 2-1/4 square glued-up solid oak or maple and shaped on vertical edges with 1/4 radius (Teres B) and 3/4" radius (Teres R). Bottom edges will receive 1/8 radius. Legs are attached to the top by means of a 5 square x 5/16 thick steel plate. The leg is attached to the plate by two (2) 5/16 x 3 machine bolts screwing into a 2 x 5/8 diameter barrel nut embedded in the leg. The steel plate is attached to the top by means of five (5) 5/16 x 1 machine bolts screwing into threaded metal inserts embedded in the underside of the top. STRETCHER ASSEMBLY: The intermediate height cross stretchers and longitudinal stabilizer are of 3/4 x 3 solid oak or maple and located 15 above floor. TABLE RACK: The rack is constructed of 1 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select grade A oak or maple veneers and all exposed edges banded with solid oak or maple bands. Racks are 10-1/2 high and screwed to table tops. CALL SLIP BOX: Each side of the table is equipped with a three compartment call slip unit, constructed of Baltic birch veneer core finished to match table. The finished unit is positioned at the center of the table on the Reference unit and on each end on the Computer table, and screwed to the underside of the top. Interior dimensions of the compartment are 3-1/2 wide x 5 deep. GLIDES: Each end panel is equipped with a pair of 1-3/16 diameter rubber cushioned adjustable leveling glides with a 15/16 stem. UL LISTING: Tables shall be listed (UL or equivalent) under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). TERES COMPUTER TABLE TB-3072-CT CALL SLIP BOXES, OAK 30 W x 72 L x 39 H TB-3072-CT-M CALL SLIP BOXES, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x 39 H TB-3072-CT-R CALL SLIP BOXES, W/ RAILS, OAK 30 W x 72 L x 39 H TB-3072-CT-R-M CALL SLIP BOXES, W/ RAILS, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x 39 H TR-3072-CT CALL SLIP BOXES, OAK 30 W x 72 L x 39 H TR-3072-CT-M CALL SLIP BOXES, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x 39 H TR-3072-CT-R CALL SLIP BOXES, W/ RAILS, OAK 30 W x 72 L x 39 H TR-3072-CT-R-M CALL SLIP BOXES, W/ RAILS, MAPLE 30 W x 72 L x 39 H TERES REFERENCE TABLE TB-3072-RT CALL SLIP BOXES, OAK 30 W X 72 L X 39 H TB-3072-RT-M CALL SLIP BOXES, MAPLE 30 W X 72 L X 39 H TB-3072-RT-R CALL SLIP BOXES, W/ RAILS, OAK 30 W X 72 L X 39 H TB-3072-RT-R-M CALL SLIP BOXES, W/ RAILS, MAPLE 30 W X 72 L X 39 H TR-3072-RT CALL SLIP BOXES, OAK 30 W X 72 L X 39 H TR-3072-RT-M CALL SLIP BOXES, MAPLE 30 W X 72 L X 39 H TR-3072-RT-R CALL SLIP BOXES, W/ RAILS, OAK 30 W X 72 L X 39 H TR-3072-RT-R-M CALL SLIP BOXES, W/ RAILS, MAPLE 30 W X 72 L X 39 H The Worden Company Source Book October

174 Book Trucks (Teres) BOOK TRUCKS The book truck is contstructed of 3/4 solid oak or maple, edge glued from strips no wider than 3. Shelves are blind mortise and tenoned to end panels and secured with 1/4-20 joint connector bolts screwed into barrell nuts embedded on the underside of the shelves. Two 3/4 thick x 3 wide solid oak or maple rails are mounted flat underneath the bottom panel edges and serve to reinforce bottom panel as well as for mounting for caster hangers. The truck is equipped with two 4 swivel and two stationary casters. Rubber bumpers are available when specifed (designate - R). SMALL BOOK TRUCK There is a clear space of 10-3/4 between shelves. T-3014 T-3014-M OAK MAPLE 34-1/2 H x 30 W x 14-1/2 D 34-1/2 H x 30 W x 14-1/2 D T-3014-R W/ RUBBER BUMPERS, OAK 34-1/2 H x 30 W x 14-1/2 D T-3014-R-M W/ RUBBER BUMPERS, MAPLE 34-1/2 H x 30 W x 14-1/2 D w/ bumpers LARGE BOOK TRUCK There is a clear space of 13-1/2 between shelves. T-3015 OAK 41-1/4 H x 40 W x 14-1/2 D T-3015-M MAPLE 41-1/4 H x 40 W x 14-1/2 D T-3015-R W/ RUBBER BUMPERS, OAK 41-1/4 H x 40 W x 14-1/2 D T-3015-R-M W/ RUBBER BUMPERS, MAPLE 41-1/4 H x 40 W x14-1/2 D w/ bumpers DISPLAY BOOK TRUCK There is a clear space of 11-1/16 between shelves. T-3016 OAK 38-1/2 H x 30 W x 16 D T-3016-M MAPLE 38-1/2 H x 30 W x 16 D T-3016-R W/ RUBBER BUMPERS, OAK 38-1/2 H x 30 W x 16 D T-3016-R-M W/ RUBBER BUMPERS, MAPLE 38-1/2 H x 30 W x 16 D w/ bumpers 174 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

175 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST WOOD SHELVING The shelving shall be modular and of demountable design to permit assembly, disassembly, and rearrangement of component parts into different configurations and ranges. Each straight line configuration shall consist of one initial unit and any number of additional units. Each initial unit shall consist of two end panels, a cornice, a base(s), a base shelf(shelves), a back panel (if required), and adjustable shelves. Each additional unit shall consist of an intermediate upright, a cornice, a base(s), a base shelf(shelves), and adjustable shelves and a back panel (if required). END PANELS - The end panels shall be 1 thick, 9-ply formaldehyde free hardwood veneer core construction, with select grade B oak or maple faces. The exposed vertical and top edges shall be externally banded with a minimum of 1/8 thick solid oak or maple and radiused 3/32. The end panels shall be fitted with eight M6 spreading brass threaded inserts set flush with the surface for cornice and base attachment and drilled the full useable height of the upright with 8-mm holes on 32-mm centers for Pin-Fast shelf pin system. INTERMEDIATE PANELS - The intermediate panels shall be the same as the end panels except both faces shall receive holes for both the cornice and base attachment and for shelf adjustment. CORNICE - On 63, 82 and 96 high units, the cornice shall consist of a panel, a valance on each functional side, and brackets for attachment to the upright panels. The panel shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade B oak or maple veneer on the exposed faces. On 42 high units, the cornice shall consist of a panel, a valance on each functional side, and brackets for attachment to the upright panels. The panel shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. Exposed edges of 63, 82 and 96 cornice tops shall be externally banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple and radiused 3/ cornice tops will be internally banded with the same 1/8 band. The valance shall be 3/4 thick x 2 wide solid oak or maple recessed 1/8 and screwed to the panel by means of three #10 x 2-1/2 FHW screws. The panel shall be recessed 1/8 from the edge of the upright and shall be secured by means of three (two on single-face) fabricated 12 gauge steel L brackets with legs of 2-1/4 and 1 x 2 wide at each end secured to the cornice panel with two 8-mm x 5/16 long steel shear pins formed into the bracket and two #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws. Each bracket shall be secured to the ends by means of two M6 screws screwed into threaded inserts and one #12 x 5/8 PHSM screw. The brackets shall be secured to the intermediate panels by means of 1/4-20 x 2 hex head bolts, flat washers and 1/4-20 hex nuts. CONTINUOUS COUNTER TOP - Continuous counter tops are offered optionally and are intended to cover a shelving unit or grouping of units with a single top; passing over all uprights. The top shall be provided in the longest possible length and joined with alignment splines and mechanical joint fasteners wherever joints are required. Tops shall be ¾ thick particleboard construction with a.050 thick laminate face and.028 thick balancing backer. All exposed edges of the top shall receive a matching.050 laminate band, applied prior to the laminate surface. BASE - The base shall consist of two panels on single-face units and three panels on double-face units. The panel shall be 3/4 thick x 4 wide particleboard construction with select Grade B oak or maple veneer on the exposed face and any sound veneer on the back face. Internal or back toe kicks will be of particleboard construction. The base shall be recessed 5/8 from the front and secured to the upright panels by means of a fabricated L bracket at each end as described under cornice above. ADJUSTABLE AND BASE SHELVES The shelves shall be 3/4 thick solid glued-up Northern grown hardwood with no strips over 3 wide, and with a 2 wide nosing strip of select oak or maple, matching case construction. The exposed edge shall be radiused top and bottom 3/32. The shelf shall receive routes along the bottom side to fit over shelf pins and to prevent accidental removal. The shelf pins shall be metal with a flange to prevent accidental removal of pin when shelf is in place. On 82 and 96 high shelving, in order to prevent deflection of the uprights, the middle shelf shall be secured by means of a metal pin which is threaded into the end and intermediate panels. The pin shall have a roll formed cross pin that shall engage a 1/8 diameter hole drilled into the bottom side of the shelf. One adjustable shelf on each face shall serve as a base shelf. PIVOT TYPE MAGAZINE SHELF - The magazine shelf shall be 3/4 thick, 7-ply, hardwood veneer core plywood with select Grade B oak or maple veneer faces. The front edge shall have a black aluminum extrusion retaining rail and shall be attached to the shelf using five(5) #6 x 1/2 PHSM screws. Shelves shall be adjustable and pivot on pins, providing access to stored back issues below. In closed position, shelf is supported by two(2) shelf pins at front edge. Shelves shall be 13-3/4 deep and shall be designed for use in 12 deep shelving sections. For 16 shelving depths the shelf shall be fitted with a double armed, pivoting shelf mechanism that allows the shelf to pivot upward and remain in the upward position. REFERENCE SHELF Pull-out reference shelves are offered as an option on 12 d shelving. Each shelf assembly includes a lower/fixed shelf and upper/sliding shelf. The upper/ sliding shelf is mounted on full ball bearing slides, allowing the shelf to extend outward from the interior of the shelving unit. In the extended position, the shelf allows patrons to place reading materials and review materials. Components are fabricated from select veneer with matching solids. Shelves are kept in position with adjustable shelf pins that interface with the adjustable shelf holes, along the vertical faces of the shelving case interiors. ADJUSTABLE PICTURE BOOK SHELF - The picture book shelf (divider shelf) is 3/4 thick, 7-ply veneer core with a 1/2 thick, 7-ply veneer core plywood back. The front nosing on the plywood shelf bottom is banded with solid oak or maple banding. The shelf bottom is notched along the front and rear edges and the back along the top edge at seven (7) positions where dividers may be inserted. The back piece is screwed and glued to rear edge of bottom. The adjustable divider is of 1/4 thick beige polystyrene. The bottom is routed the length of the shelf to fit over shelf pins. Each shelf assembly is provided with three (3) adjustable dividers. NEWSPAPER DISPLAY Newspaper display is accomplished by providing a pair of hardwood holders that are fastened diagonally up the inside face of the shelving uprights and fitted with rods that are split to allow the newspaper to be bound by the stick. The sticks are fabricated from select maple and receive a turned maple handle on one end and a rubber keeper ring on the opposite end. The sticks rest securely in the hardwood holder cleats and drape downward when for display. 63 high shelving is supplied with a 5 stick display. 82 h shelving is supplied with an 8 stick display. 63 high shelving shall receive one(1) flat shelf per face and 82 high shelving shall receive two(2) flat shelves per face. SLIDING GLASS DOOR Glass door units are fabricated the same as conventional open shelving with the interior depth adjusted 2 less in depth to allow for the doors. Each unit is supplied with a pair of ¼ t tempered glass doors with a recessed finger pull. The doors are fitted along the top and bottom edges with an extruded aluminum shoe. The shoes feature full ball bearing glides along the bottom and nylon tracking along the top. The door assemblies fit securely into tracking that is installed both vertically and horizontally into the wood shelving case. All tracking receives a dark bronze anodized finish. Each door pair shall receive a keyed, ratchet type lock mechanism for security. The Worden Company Source Book October 2011 cont'd on next page 175

176 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST WOOD SHELVING cont'd Mobile Shelving Mobile shelving caster kits are available for 42 h x 24 d double sided shelving units. The kit includes four 14 gauge formed metal brackets, four 2-3/8 di- ameter, full swivel, polyolefin casters. The casters shall be fastened to the bracket with four ¼ -20 hex bolts with washers and nuts. The bracket/caster assembly shall mount into the base of the shelving unit with eight 5/8 #12 screws. Painted Back Panels - The back panel shall be of 1/4 thick tempered hardboard or particle board finished on the exposed face(s) with a solid color lacquer. The back panels shall be set in grooves in the uprights, cornice and base rail. Plywood Back Panels - The back panel shall be 1/4 thick, 3 or 5-ply construction having Grade B veneer on one face and sound back for single face units, and Grade B veneer on both faces for backs requiring finish on two sides. The back panels shall be set in grooves in the uprights, cornice and base rail. Sway Braces - The sway braces shall be made of 5/16 thick square cold rolled steel with a black oxide finish. Sway braces shall be automatically provided on 63, 82, and 96 high double-face shelving when back panels are not ordered. A minimum of two(2) braces shall be provided for each range of shelving. The sway braces shall be installed diagonally between two intermediate uprights in the holes provided. The sway braces are bolted through the uprights with four(4) 8-32 x 1-3/4 truss head bolts, flat washers, and 8-32 hex nuts. Wall Anchor Brackets - Wall anchor brackets shall be provided on 6 0 centers on all single-face shelving. Anchoring device (toggle bolt, lead shield, etc.) shall be determined by field conditions and are the responsibility of the installer. Shelf Listing - Shelving units shall be provided with the following shelves: 42 high book shelving: 2 adjustable shelves and 1 base shelf per face 63 high book shelving: 4 adjustable shelves and 1 base shelf per face 82 high book shelving: 5 adjustable shelves and 1 base shelf per face 96 high book shelving 6 adjustable shelves and 1 base shelf per face 42 high magazine shelving 2 pivot type magazine shelves, 1 adjustable shelf, and 1 base shelf per face 63 high magazine shelving 3 pivot type magazine shelves, 2 adjustable shelves, and 1 base shelf per face 82 high magazine shelving 5 pivot type magazine shelves, 4 adjustable shelves, and 1 base shelf per face PIN-FAST SINGLE FACED SHELVING Model # Description Dimensions W-4210 W-4210-M W-4210-A W-4210-A-M W-4210-FM W-4210-FM-M W-4210-A-FM W-4210-A-FM-M W-4212 W-4212-M W-4212-A W-4212-A-M W-4212-FM W-4212-FM-M W-4212-A-FM W-4212-A-FM-M W-4216-SF W-4216-SF-M W-4216-SF-A W-4216-SF-A-M W-4216-SF-FM W-4216-SF-FM-M W-4216-SF-A-FM W-4216-SF-A-FM-M STARTER, HPL TOP, OAK STARTER, HPL TOP, MAPLE ADDER, HPL TOP, OAK ADDER, HPL TOP, MAPLE STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE ADDER FIELD MODIFY, OAK ADDER FIELD MODIFY, MAPLE STARTER, HPL TOP, OAK STARTER, HPL TOP, MAPLE ADDER, HPL TOP, OAK ADDER, HPL TOP, MAPLE STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 10 D 42 H x 37 W x 10 D 42 H x 36 W x 10 D 42 H x 36 W x 10 D 42 H x 44 W x 10 D 42 H x 44 W x 10 D 42 H x 43 W x 10 D 42 H x 43 W x 10 D 42 H x 37 W x 12 D 42 H x 37 W x 12 D 42 H x 36 W x 12 D 42 H x 36 W x 12 D 42 H x 44 W x 12 D 42 H x 44 W x 12 D 42 H x 43 W x 12 D 42 H x 43 W x 12 D 42 H x 37 W x 16 D 42 H x 37 W x 16 D 42 H x 36 W x 16 D 42 H x 36 W x 16 D 43 H x 43 W x 16 D 43 H x 43 W x 16 D 43 H x 42 W x 16 D 43 H x 42 W x 16 D W-6310 W-6310-M W-6310-A W-6310-A-M W-6310-FM W-6310-FM-M W-6310-A-FM W-6310-A-FM-M W-6312 W-6312-M W-6312-A W-6312-A-M W-6312-FM W-6312-FM-M W-6312-A-FM STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 10 D 63 H x 37 W x 10 D 63 H x 36 W x 10 D 63 H x 36 W x 10 D 63 H x 43 W x 10 D 63 H x 43 W x 10 D 63 H x 42 W x 10 D 63 H x 42 W x 10 D 63 H x 37 W x 12 D 63 H x 37 W x 12 D 63 H x 36 W x 12 D 63 H x 36 W x 12 D 63 H x 43 W x 12 D 63 H x 43 W x 12 D ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 42 W x 12 D W-6312-A-FM-M ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H x 42 W x 12 D 176 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

177 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST SINGLE FACED SHELVING cont d W-6316-SF STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 16 D W-6316-SF-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 16 D W-6316-SF-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 16 D W-6316-SF-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 16 D W-6316-SF-FM STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 43 W x 16 D W-6316-SF-FM-M STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H x 43 W x 16 D W-6316-SF-A-FM ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 42 W x 16 D W-6316-SF-A-FM-M ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H x 42 W x 16 D 63 high single faced shelving has a veneered cornice top, four (4) adjustable shelves and a flat, flush base shelf. Shelves are 3/4 thick solid hardwood. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-8210 W-8210-M W-8210-A W-8210-A-M W-8210-FM W-8210-FM-M W-8210-A-FM W-8210-A-FM-M STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H X 37 W X 10 D 82 H X 37 W X 10 D 82 H X 36 W X 10 D 82 H X 36 W X 10 D 82 H X 43 W X 10 D 82 H X 43 W X 10 D 82 H X 42 W X 10 D 82 H X 42 W X 10 D W-8212 W-8212-M W-8212-A W-8212-A-M W-8212-FM W-8212-FM-M W-8212-A-FM W-8212-A-FM-M STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H X 37 W X 12 D 82 H X 37 W X 12 D 82 H X 36 W X 12 D 82 H X 36 W X 12 D 82 H X 43 W X 12 D 82 H X 43 W X 12 D 82 H X 42 W X 12 D 82 H X 42 W X 12 D W-8216-SF W-8216-SF-M W-8216-SF-A W-8216-SF-A-M W-8216-SF-FM W-8216-SF-FM-M W-8216-SF-A-FM W-8216-SF-A-FM-M STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 16 D 82 H x 37 W x 16 D 82 H x 36 W x 16 D 82 H x 36 W x 16 D 82 H x 43 W x 16 D 82 H x 43 W x 16 D 82 H x 42 W x 16 D 82 H x 42 W x 16 D 82 high single faced shelving has a veneered cornice top, five (5) adjustable shelves and a flat, flush base shelf. Shelves are 3/4 thick solid hardwood. Backs must be specified with a separate product number W-9612 STARTER, OAK 96 H x 37 W x 12 D W-9612-M STARTER, MAPLE 96 H x 37 W x 12 D W-9612-A ADDER, OAK 96 H x 36 W x 12 D W-9612-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 96 H x 36 W x 12 D W-9612-FM STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK 96 H x 43 W x 12 D W-9612-FM-M STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 96 H x 43 W x 12 D W-9612-A-FM ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK 96 H x 42 W x 12 D W-9612-A-FM-M ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 96 H x 42 W x 12 D 96 high single faced shelving has a veneered cornice top, six (6) adjustable shelves and a flat, flush base shelf. Shelves are 3/4 thick solid hardwood. Backs must be specified with a separate product number PIN-FAST SINGLE FACED FREESTANDING ISLAND W-42-SF-F/2/S ISLAND, OAK 42 H W-42-SF-F/2/S-M ISLAND, MAPLE 42 H W-63-SF-F/2/S ISLAND, OAK 63 H W-63-SF-F/2/S-M ISLAND, MAPLE 63 H W-82-SF-F/2/S ISLAND, OAK 82 H W-82-SF-F/2/S-M ISLAND, MAPLE 82 H This option for single face shelving includes oak or maple banding on rear edge of uprights and cornice and a 4 high kick plate at the base and on 82 and 96 high, a 2 valance at the cornice. All components are grooved to receive F/2/S back panel option. Note: F/2/S back panel options in either oak or maple plywood or painted hardboard must be ordered as a separate item. The Worden Company Source Book October

178 PIN-FAST DOUBLE FACED SHELVING Model # W-4220 Description STARTER, HPL TOP, OAK Dimensions 42 H x 37 W x 20 D W-4220-M STARTER, HPL TOP, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 20 D W-4220-A ADDER, HPL TOP, OAK 42 H x 36 W x 20 D W-4220-A-M ADDER, HPL TOP, MAPLE 42 H x 36 W x 20 D W-4220-FM STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK 43 H x 43 W x 20 D W-4220-FM-M STARTER FIELD MOD, MAPLE 43 H x 43 W x 20 D W-4220-A-FM ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK 43 H x 42 W x 20 D W-4220-A-FM-M ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 43 H x 42 W x 20 D W-4224 STARTER, HPL TOP, OAK 42 H x 37 W x 24 D W-4224-M STARTER, HPL TOP, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 24 D W-4224-A ADDER, HPL TOP, OAK 42 H x 36 W x 24 D W-4224-A-M ADDER, HPL TOP, MAPLE 42 H x 36 W x 24 D W-4224-FM STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK 43 H x 43 W x 24 D W-4224-FM-M STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 43 H x 43 W x 24 D W-4224-A-FM ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H x 42 W x 24 D W-4224-A-FM-M ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H x 42 W x 24 D 42 high double faced shelving has one (1) piece plastic laminate cornice top, four (4) adjustable shelves (2 each face), and flat flush base shelves. Shelves are of 3/4 thick solid hardwood. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-6320 W-6320-M W-6320-A W-6320-A-M W-6320-FM W-6320-FM-M W-6320-A-FM W-6320-A-FM-M W-6324 W-6324-M W-6324-A W-6324-A-M W-6324-FM W-6324-FM-M W-6324-A-FM W-6324-A-FM-M STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 20 D 63 H x 37 W x 20 D 63 H x 36 W x 20 D 63 H x 36 W x 20 D 63 H x 43 W x 20 D 63 H x 43 W x 20 D 63 H x 42 W x 20 D 63 H x 42 W x 20 D 63 H x 37 W x 24 D 63 H x 37 W x 24 D 63 H x 36 W x 24 D 63 H x 36 W x 24 D 63 H x 43 W x 24 D 63 H x 43 W x 24 D 63 H x 42 W x 24 D 63 H x 42 W x 24 D 63 high double faced shelving has one (1) piece veneered cornice top, eight (8) adjustable shelves (4 each face), and flat flush base shelves. Shelves are of 3/4 thick solid hardwood. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-8220 STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 20 D W-8220-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 20 D W-8220-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 20 D W-8220-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 20 D W-8220-FM STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 43 W x 20 D W-8220-FM-M STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H x 43 W x 20 D W-8220-A-FM ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 42 W x 20 D W-8220-A-FM-M ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H x 42 W x 20 D W-8224 STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 24 D W-8224-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 24 D W-8224-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 24 D W-8224-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 24 D W-8224-FM STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 43 W x 24 D W-8224-FM-M STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H x 43 W x 24 D W-8224-A-FM ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 42 W x 24 D W-8224-A-FM-M ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H x 42 W x 24 D 82 high double faced shelving has one (1) piece veenered cornice top, ten (10) adjustable shelves (5 each face), and flat flush base shelves. Shelves are of 3/4 thick solid hardwood. Backs must be specified W-9624 STARTER, OAK 96 H x 37 W x 24 D W-9624-M STARTER, MAPLE 96 H x 37 W x 24 D W-9624-A ADDER, OAK 96 H x 36 W x 24 D W-9624-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 96 H x 36 W x 24 D W-9624-FM STARTER, FIELD MOD, OAK 96 H x 43 W x 24 D W-9624-FM-M STARTER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE 96 H x 43 W x 24 D W-9624-A-FM ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK 96 H x 42 W x 24 D W-9624-A-FM-M ADDER, FIELD MOD, MAPLE with a separate product number. 96 H x 42 W x 24 D 178 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

179 Pin-Fast Shelving 96 high double faced shelving has one (1) piece veneered cornice top, twelve (12) adjustable shelves (6 each face), and flat flush base shelves. Shelves are of 3/4 thick solid hardwood. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. The Worden Company Source Book October

180 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST SINGLE FACED MAGAZINE SHELVING Model # Description Dimensions W-4212-MS W-4212-MS-M W-4212-MS-A W-4212-MS-A-M W-4216-MS W-4216-MS-M W-4216-MS-A STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK 42 H x 37 W x 12 D 42 H x 37 W x 12 D 42 H x 36 W x 12 D 42 H x 36 W x 12 D 42 H x 37 W x 16 D 42 H x 37 W x 16 D 42 H x 36 W x 16 D W-4216-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 42 H x 36 W x 16 D 42 high single faced magazine shelving has a plastic laminate cornice top, one (1) adjustable flat shelf, two (2) non-adjustable hinged magazine display shelves and a base shelf. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-6312-MS STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 12 D W-6312-MS-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 12 D W-6312-MS-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 12 D W-6312-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 12 D W-6316-MS STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 16 D W-6316-MS-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 16 D W-6316-MS-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 16 D W-6316-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 16 D 63 high single faced magazine shelving has a veneered cornice top, two (2) adjustable flat shelves, three (3) adjustable hinged magazine display shelves and a base shelf. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-8212-MS STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 12 D W-8212-MS-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 12 D W-8212-MS-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 12 D W-8212-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 12 D W-8216-MS STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 16 D W-8216-MS-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 16 D W-8216-MS-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 16 D W-8216-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 16 D 82 high single faced magazine shelving has a veneered cornice top, four (4) adjustable flat shelves, five (5) adjustable hinged magazine display shelves and a base shelf. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. PIN-FAST DOUBLE FACED MAGAZINE SHELVING W-4224-MS STARTER, HPL TOP, OAK 42 H x 37 W x 24 D W-4224-MS-M STARTER, HPL TOP, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 24 D W-4224-MS-A ADDER, HPL TOP, OAK 42 H x 36 W x 24 D W-4224-MS-A-M ADDER, HPL TOP, MAPLE 42 H x 36 W x 24 D 42 high double faced magazine shelving has a plastic laminate cornice top, two (2) adjustable flat shelves, four (4) adjustable pivoted magazine display shelves and a base shelf. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-6324-MS STATER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 24 D W-6324-MS-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 24 D W-6324-MS-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 24 D W-6324-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 24 D 63 high double faced magazine shelving has a veneered cornice top, four (4) adjustable flat shelves, six (6) adjustable pivoted magazine display shelves and a base shelf. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-8224-MS STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 24 D W-8224-MS-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 24 D W-8224-MS-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 24 D W-8224-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 24 D 82 high double faced magazine shelving has a veneered cornice top, eight (8) adjustable flat shelves, ten (10) adjustable pivoted magazine display shelves and a base shelf. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. 180 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

181 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST NEWSPAPER SHELVING W-6312-NS W-6312-NS-M W-6312-NS-A W-6312-NS-A-M STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 12 D 63 H x 37 W x 12 D 63 H x 36 W x 12 D 63 H x 36 W x 12 D 63 high single faced newspaper storage and display has a finished wood cornice top, newspaper storage rack with five (5) sticks, one adjustable shelf and base shelf. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-6312 W-8212 W-8212-NS SF STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 12 D W-8212-NS-M SF STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 12 D W-8212-NS-A SF ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 12 D W-8212-NS-A-M SF ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 12 D 82 high single faced newspaper storage and display has an inverted finished wood cornice top, newspaper storage rack with eight (8) sticks, two adjustable shelves and base shelf. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. PIN-FAST SINGLE FACED PICTURE BOOK SHELVING W-4212-P W-4212-P-M W-4212-P-A W-4212-P-A-M STARTER, HPL TOP, OAK STARTER, HPL TOP, MAPLE ADDER, HPL TOP, OAK ADDER. HPL TOP, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 12 D 42 H x 37 W x 12 D 42 H x 36 W x 12 D 42 H x 36 W x 12 D 42 high single faced picture book shelving has a plastic laminate cornice top, one (1) adjustable shelf and one (1) base shelf. Each shelf has three (3) adjustable dividers and 7 positions. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-6312-P STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 12 D W-6312-P-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 12 D W-6312-P-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 12 D W-6312-P-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 12 D 63 high single faced picture book shelving has a finished wood cornice top, two (2) adjustable shelves, and one base shelf. Each shelf has three (3) adjustable dividers and 7 adjustment positions. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-8212-P STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 12 D W-8212-P-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 12 D W-8212-P-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 12 D W-8212-P-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 12 D 82 high single faced picture book shelving has a finished wood cornice top, four (4) adjustable shelves, and one base shelf. Each shelf has three (3) adjustable dividers and 7 adjustment positions. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. PIN-FAST DOUBLE FACED PICTURE BOOK SHELVING W-4224-P W-4224-P-M W-4224-P-A W-4224-P-A-M STARTER, HPL TOP, OAK STARTER, HPL TOP, MAPLE ADDER, HPL TOP, OAK ADDER, HPL TOP, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 24 D 42 H x 37 W x 24 D 42 H x 36 W x 24 D 42 H x 36 W x 24 D 42 high double faced picture book shelving has a one (1) piece plastic laminate cornice top, two (2) adjustable shelves and two (2) base shelves. Each shelf has three (3) adjustable dividers and 7 adjustment positions. backs must be specified with a separate product number. W-6324-P STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 24 D W-6324-P-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 24 D W-6324-P-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 24 D W-6324-P-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 24 D 63 high double faced picture book shelving has a one (1) piece finished wood cornice top, four (4) adjustable shelves and two (2) base shelves. Each shelf has three (3) adjustable dividers and 7 adjustment positions. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. The Worden Company Source Book October

182

183 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST PAINTED HARDBOARD BACK PANEL Model # Description Dimensions W-3420-B F/1/S 42 H W-3420-B-F/2/S F/2/S 42 H W-3420-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD 42 H W-3420-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD 42 H W-3630-B F/1/S 63 H W-3630-B-F/2/S F/2/S 63 H W-3630-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD 63 H W-3630-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD 63 H W-3820-B F/1/S 82 H W-3820-B-F/2/S F/2/S 82 H W-3820-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD 82 H W-3820-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD 82 H W-3960-B F/1/S 96 H W-3960-B-F/2/S F/2/S 96 H W-3960-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD 96 H W-3960-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD 96 H Plywood back panels have oak or maple face veneer and are finished to match shelving components. These backs are optional in either single or double faced shelving. PIN-FAST WOOD VENEER BACK PANEL Model # W-N-420-B Description F/1/S, OAK Dimensions 42 H W-N-420-B-M F/1/S, MAPLE 42 H W-N-420-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H W-N-420-B-FM-M F/1/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H W-N-420-B-F/2/S F/2/S, OAK 42 H W-N-420-B-F/2/S-M F/2/S, MAPLE 42 H W-N-420-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H W-N-420-B-F/2/SFMM F/2/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H W-N-630-B F/1/S, OAK 63 H W-N-630-B-M F/1/S, MAPLE 63 H W-N-630-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H W-N-630-B-FM-M F/1/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H W-N-630-B-F/2/S F/2/S, OAK 63 H W-N-630-B-F/2/S-M F/2/S, MAPLE 63 H W-N-630-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H W-N-630-B-F/2/SFMM F/2/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H W-N-820-B F/1/S, OAK 82 H W-N-820-B-M F/1/S, MAPLE 82 H W-N-820-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H W-N-820-B-FM-M F/1/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H W-N-820-B-F/2/S F/2/S, OAK 82 H W-N-820-B-F/2/S-M F/2/S, MAPLE 82 H W-N-820-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H W-N-820-B-F/2/SFMM F/2/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H W-N-960-B F/1/S, OAK 96 H W-N-960-B-M F/1/S, MAPLE 96 H W-N-960-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD, OAK 96 H W-N-960-B-FM-M F/1/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 96 H W-N-960-B-F/2/S F/2/S, OAK 96 H W-N-960-B-F/2/S-M F/2/S, MAPLE 96 H W-N-960-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD, OAK 96 H W-N-960-B-F/2/SFMM F/2/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 96 H Plywood back panels have oak or maple face veneer and are finished to match shelving components. These backs are optional in either single or double faced shelving. The Worden Company Source Book October

184 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST CONTINUOUS COUNTERTOP Model # Description Additional Description W-CCT-SF SINGLE FACED 3/4" THICK SELF EDGE, MATCHING SHELVING HEIGHT & LENGTH W-CCT-DF DOUBLE FACED 3/4" THICK SELF EDGE, MATCHING SHELVING HEIGHT & LENGTH MISC PIN-FAST W-42-MSB 2-1/2 SHEPPARD CASTERS 42 H Model # Description Casters W-JIG-SET FIELD MODIFY KIT Set includes the necessary jigs, drill bits to complete field modification shelving. W-SB SWAY BRACES Sway braces for 63 and 82" high shelving PIN-FAST ADJUSTABLE SHELF W-10-SHELF OAK 3/4 T x 9 D x 34-15/16 W W-10-SHELF-M MAPLE 3/4 T x 9 D x 34-15/16 W W-12-SHELF OAK 3/4 T x 11 D x 34-15/16 W W-12-SHELF-M MAPLE 3/4 T x 11 D x 34-15/16 W W-16-SHELF OAK 3/4 T x 15 D x 34-15/16 W W-16-SHELF-M MAPLE 3/4 T x 15 D x 34-15/16 W PIN-FAST MAGAZINE SHELF W-12-SHELF-MS OAK 3/4 T x 11 D x 34-15/16 W W-12-SHELF-MS-M MAPLE 3/4 T x 11 D x 34-15/16 W Pivot shelf for use in 12" deep single face for 24" deep double faced shelving W-16-SHELF-MS OAK 3/4 T x 18 D x 34-15/16 W W-16-SHELF-MS-M MAPLE 3/4 T x 18 D x 34-15/16 W Hinged shelf for use in 16" deep shelving PIN-FAST REFERENCE SHELF W-12-SHELF-REF SLIDING, OAK 12 D W-12-SHELF-REF-M SLIDING, MAPLE 12 D 12" sliding reference shelf PIN-FAST PICTURE BOOK SHELF W-12-SHELF-PB W/ 3 DIVIDERS, OAK 3/4 Tx11-1/8 Dx34-15/16 W W-12-SHELF-PB-M W/ 3 DIVIDERS, MAPLE 3/4 Tx11-1/8 Dx34-15/16 W PIN-FAST PICTURE BOOK SHELF DIVIDER W-12-DIVIDER SHELF DIVIDER, BEIGE STYRENE 1/4 TK 182 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

185 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST GLASS DOOR W-42-GLD SLIDING W/ LOCK 42 H W-63-GLD SLIDING W/ LOCK 63 H W-82-GLD SLIDING W/ LOCK 82 H W-42 W-63 W-82 Note: These are glass doors and track only - shelving must be ordered separately. Two sliding glass doors consist of 1/4 tempered glass with ground pulls and a locking mechanisim. The Worden Company Source Book October

186 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST SINGLE FACED CORNER FILLER W-4210-CF OAK 42 H x 10 D W-4210-CF-M MAPLE 42 H x 10 D W-4212-CF OAK 42 H x 12 D W-4212-CF-M MAPLE 42 H x 12 D W-6310-CF OAK 63 H x 10 D W-6310-CF-M MAPLE 63 H x 10 D W-6312-CF OAK 63 H x 12 D W-6312-CF-M MAPLE 63 H x 12 D W-8210-CF OAK 82 H x 10 D W-8210-CF-M MAPLE 82 H x 10 D W-8212-CF OAK 82 H x 12 D W-8212-CF-M MAPLE 82 H x 12 D W-9612-CF OAK 96 H x 12 D W-9612-CF-M MAPLE 96 H x 12 D The standard corner cap assembly is used in wall shelving ranges of any height or depth offered. The corner assembly consists of a pair of corner caps which are the depth of shelving upright in one direction and 1/4 lap of one upright over edge of adjacent upright at the corner. Note: Caps only are supplied. Two (2) initial sections of shelving will be required to turn a corner. Indicate filler assembly location. Indicate exact width required. Corner filler assemblies where unlike shelving depths or heights meet must be treated as a modified corner face. An initial unit must be ordered for each side of the corner filler. PIN-FAST DOUBLE FACED CORNER FILLER W-42-DCF OAK 42 H W-42-DCF-M MAPLE 42 H W-63-DCF OAK 63 H W-63-DCF-M MAPLE 63 H W-82-DCF OAK 82 H W-82-DCF-M MAPLE 82 H W-96-DCF OAK 96 H W-96-DCF-M MAPLE 96 H The standard cap assembly is used where double faced shelving sections join to and form peninsular ranges out from wall ranges. The double corner assembly consists of a pair of corner caps which are the width of the double faced upright and 1/4 less than the depth of a wall shelving upright, thus providing a 1/4 lap of single faced uprights over the edges of the double faced uprights. Note: Caps only are supplied. Two (2) initial sections of shelving will be required to turn a corner. Corner filler assemblies where unlike shelving depths or heights meet must be treated as a modified face filler. An initial unit must be ordered for each side of the corner filler. Note: Indicate filler assembly location. Indicate exact width required. PIN-FAST OUTSIDE CORNER FILLER Model # Description Dimensions W-4210-OCF W-4210-OCF-M W-4212-OCF W-4212-OCF-M W-6310-OCF W-6310-OCF-M W-6312-OCF W-6312-OCF-M W-8210-OCF W-8210-OCF-M W-8212-OCF W-8212-OCF-M W-9610-OCF W-9610-OCF-M W-9612-OCF W-9612-OCF-M OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE 42 H x 10 D 42 H x 10 D 42 H x 12 D 42 H x 12 D 63 H x 10 D 63 H x 10 D 63 H x 12 D 63 H x 12 D 82 H x 10 D 82 H x 10 D 82 H x 12 D 82 H x 12 D 96 H x 10 D 96 H x 10 D 96 H x 12 D 96 H x 12 D Outside corner fillers are intended for use where single faced shelving wraps outside building corners. Upright and top surfaces are finished to match adjacent shelving. 184 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

187 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST WOOD & STEEL SHELVING The shelving shall be modular and of demountable design to permit assembly, disassembly, and rearrangement of component parts into different configurations and ranges. Each straight line configuration shall consist of one initial unit and any number of additional units. Each initial unit shall consist of two end panels, a cornice, a base(s), a base shelf(shelves), a back panel (if required), and adjustable shelves. Each additional unit shall consist of an intermediate upright, a cornice, a base(s), a base shelf(shelves), and adjustable shelves and a back panel (if required). END PANELS - The end panels shall be 1 thick, 9-ply formaldehyde free hardwood veneer core construction, with select grade B oak or maple faces. The exposed vertical and top edges shall be externally banded with a minimum of 1/8 thick solid oak or maple and radiused 3/32. The end panels shall be fitted with eight M6 spreading brass threaded inserts set flush with the surface for cornice and base attachment and drilled the full useable height of the upright with 8-mm holes on 32-mm centers for Pin-Fast shelf pin system. INTERMEDIATE PANELS - The intermediate panels shall be the same as the end panels except both faces shall receive holes for both the cornice and base attachment and for shelf adjustment. CORNICE - On 63 and 82 high units, the cornice shall consist of a panel, a valance on each functional side, and brackets for attachment to the upright panels. The panel shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade B oak or maple veneer on the exposed faces. On 42 high units, the cornice shall consist of a panel, a valance on each functional side, and brackets for attachment to the upright panels. The panel shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. Exposed edges of 63, 82 and 96 cornice tops shall be externally banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple and radiused 3/ cornice tops will be internally banded with the same 1/8 band. The valance shall be 3/4 thick x 2 wide solid oak or maple recessed 1/8 and screwed to the panel by means of three #10 x 2-1/2 FHW screws. The panel shall be recessed 1/8 from the edge of the upright and shall be secured by means of three (two on single-face) fabricated 12 gauge steel L brackets with legs of 2-1/4 and 1 x 2 wide at each end secured to the cornice panel with two 8-mm x 5/16 long steel shear pins formed into the bracket and two #12 x 5/8 PHSM screws. Each bracket shall be secured to the ends by means of two M6 screws screwed into threaded inserts and one #12 x 5/8 PHSM screw. The brackets shall be secured to the intermediate panels by means of 1/4-20 x 2 hex head bolts, flat washers and 1/4-20 hex nuts. BASE - The base shall consist of two panels on single-face units and three panels on double-face units. The panels shall be 3/4 thick x 4 wide particleboard construction with select Grade B oak or maple veneer on the exposed face and any sound veneer on the back face. Internal or back toe kicks will be of particleboard construction. The base shall be recessed 5/8 from the front and secured to the upright panels by means of a fabricated L bracket at each end as described under cornice above. ADJUSTABLE AND BASE SHELVES - The shelves shall be 18 gauge steel designed to support 50 lbs. per square foot without deflection in excess of 3/16. The front and rear edges shall be box formed 3/4 high and returned on the underside to allow placement of wire book supports or snap-on label holders. The ends of the shelves shall be flanged and notched to receive 8-mm shelf pins. The shelves shall be electrostatically painted and baked. The shelf pins shall be metal with a flange to prevent accidental removal of pin when shelf is in place and a notch to engage the shelf. On 82 and 96 high shelving, in order to prevent deflection of the uprights, the middle shelf shall be secured by means of a metal pin which is threaded into the end and intermediate panels and notched to receive the shelf. One adjustable shelf on each face shall serve as a base shelf. PIVOT TYPE MAGAZINE SHELF - The magazine shelf shall be 18 gauge steel with the back edge and ends box formed 3/4 high and the front edge formed to create a retaining ledge. The shelves are slotted to engage standard shelf pins allowing shelves to be lifted for access to stored back issues. In closed position, shelf is supported at two(2) shelf pins at the front edge. ADJUSTABLE PICTURE BOOK SHELF - The picture book shelf consists of an 18 gauge fabricated steel shelf base with intregal rear riser and three 18 gauge fabricated steel, removable dividers. The front edge shall be box formed 3/4 high. The ends of the shelves shall be flanged and notched to receive 8-mm shelf pins. The shelves shall be electrostatically painted and baked. The shelf pins shall be metal with a flange to prevent accidental removal of pin when shelf is in place and a notch to engage the shelf. On 82 and 96 high shelving, in order to prevent deflection of the uprights, the middle shelf shall be secured by means of a metal pin which is threaded into the end and intermediate panels and notched to receive the shelf. One adjustable shelf on each face shall serve as a base shelf. Sliding Glass Doors Glass door units are fabricated the same as conventional open shelving with the interior depth adjusted 2 less in depth to allow for the doors. Each unit is supplied with a pair of ¼ t tempered glass doors with a recessed finger pull. The doors are fitted along the top and bottom edges with an extruded aluminum shoe. The shoes feature full ball bearing glides along the bottom and nylon tracking along the top. The door assemblies fit securely into tracking that is installed both vertically and horizontally into the wood shelving case. All tracking receives a dark bronze anodized finish. Each door pair shall receive a keyed, ratchet type lock mechanism for security. MOBILE SHELVING Mobile shelving caster kits are available for 42 h x 24 d double sided shelving units. The kit includes four 14 gauge formed metal brackets, four 2-3/8 diameter, full swivel, polyolefin casters. The casters shall be fastened to the bracket with four ¼ -20 hex bolts with washers and nuts. The bracket/caster assembly shall mount into the base of the shelving unit with eight 5/8 #12 screws. PAINTED BACK PANELS - The back panel shall be of 1/4 thick tempered hardboard or particle board finished on the exposed face(s) with a solid color lacquer. The back panels shall be set in grooves in the uprights, cornice and base rail. PLYWOOD BACK PANELS - The back panel shall be 1/4 thick, 3 or 5-ply construction having Grade B veneer on one face and sound back for single face units, and Grade B veneer on both faces for backs requiring finish on two sides. The back panels shall be set in grooves in the uprights, cornice and base rail. SWAY BRACES - The sway braces shall be made of 5/16 thick square cold rolled steel with a black oxide finish. Sway braces shall be automatically provided on 63, 82, and 96 high double-face shelving when back panels are not ordered. A minimum of two(2) braces shall be provided for each range of shelving. The sway braces shall be installed diagonally between two intermediate uprights in the holes provided. The sway braces are bolted through the uprights with four(4) 8-32 x 1-3/4 truss head bolts, flat washers, and 8-32 hex nuts, in accordance with Uniform Building Code, to exceed the requirements of seismic zone 4 (California). WALL ANCHOR BRACKETS - Wall anchor brackets shall be provided on 6 0 centers on all single-face shelving. Anchoring device (toggle bolt, lead shield, etc.) shall be determined by field conditions and are the responsibility of the installer The Worden Company Source Book October

188 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST WOOD & STEEL SHELVING cont d Shelf Listing - Shelving units shall be provided with the following shelves: 42 high book shelving: 2 adjustable shelves and 1 base shelf per face 63 high book shelving: 4 adjustable shelves and 1 base shelf per face 82 high book shelving: 5 adjustable shelves and 1 base shelf per face 96 high book shelving 6 adjustable shelves and 1 base shelf per face 42 high magazine shelving 2 pivot type magazine shelves, 1 adjustable shelf, and 1 base shelf per face 63 high magazine shelving 3 pivot type magazine shelves, 2 adjustable shelves, and 1 base shelf per face 82 high magazine shelving 5 pivot type magazine shelves, 4 adjustable shelves, and 1 base shelf per face PIN-FAST WOOD/STEEL SINGLE FACED SHELVING Model # Description Dimensions WS-4210 STARTER, OAK 42 H x 37 W x 10 D WS-4210-M STARTER, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 10 D WS-4210-A ADDER, OAK 42 H x 36 W x 10 D WS-4210-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 42 H x 36 W x 10 D WS-4210-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H x 43 W x 10 D WS-4210-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H x 43 W x 10 D WS-4210-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H x 42 W x 10 D WS-4210-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 42 H x 42 W x 10 D WS-4212 STARTER, OAK 42 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-4212-M STARTER, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-4212-A ADDER, OAK 42 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-4212-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 42 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-4212-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H x 43 W x 12 D WS-4212-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H x 43 W x 12 D WS-4212-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H x 42 W x 12 D WS-4212-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 42 H x 42 W x 12 D 42 high single faced shelving has a plastic laminate cornice top, two (2) adjustable shelves and a flat, flush base shelf. Shelves are of 3/4 thick 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. WS-6310 STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 10 D WS-6310-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 10 D WS-6310-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 10 D WS-6310-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 10 D WS-6310-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 44 W x 10 D WS-6310-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H x 44 W x 10 D WS-6310-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 43 W x 10 D WS-6310-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 63 H x 43 W x 10 D WS-6312 STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-6312-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-6312-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-6312-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-6312-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 44 W x 12 D WS-6312-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H x 44 W x 12 D WS-6312-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 43 W x 12 D WS-6312-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 63 H x 43 W x 12 D 63 high single faced shelving has a finished wood cornice top, four (4) adjustable shelves and a flat, flush base shelf. Shelves are of 3/4 thick 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. WS-8210 STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 10 D WS-8210-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 10 D WS-8210-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 10 D WS-8210-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 10 D WS-8210-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 44 W x 10 D WS-8210-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H x 44 W x 10 D WS-8210-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 43 W x 10 D WS-8210-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 82 H x 43 W x 10 D WS-8212 STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-8212-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-8212-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-8212-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-8212-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 44 W x 12 D WS-8212-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H x 44 W x 12 D WS-8212-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 43 W x 12 D WS-8212-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 82 H x 43 W x 12 D 82 high single faced shelving has an inverted finished wood cornice top, five (5) adjustable shelves and a flat, flush base shelf. Shelves are of 3/4 thick 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. 186 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

189 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST WOOD/STEEL SINGLE FACED SHELVING Model # Description Dimensions WS-9612 STARTER, OAK 96 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-9612-M STARTER, MAPLE 96 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-9612-A ADDER, OAK 96 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-9612-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 96 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-9612-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 96 H x 44 W x 12 D WS-9612-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 96 H x 44 W x 12 D WS-9612-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 96 H x 43 W x 12 D WS-9612-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 96 H x 43 W x 12 D 96 high single faced shelving has an inverted finished wood cornice top, six (6) adjustable shelves and a flat, flush base shelf. Shelves are of 3/4 thick 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number.- PIN-FAST WOOD/STEEL SINGLE FACED FREESTANDING ISLAND SHELVING Model # Description Dimensions WS-42-SF-F/2/S ISLAND ADDER, OAK 42 H WS-42-SF-F/2/S-M ISLAND ADDER, MAPLE 42 H WS-63-SF-F/2/S ISLAND ADDER, OAK 63 H WS-63-SF-F/2/S-M ISLAND ADDER, MAPLE 63 H WS-82-SF-F/2/S ISLAND ADDER, OAK 82 H WS-82-SF-F/2/S-M ISLAND ADDER, MAPLE 82 H This option for single face shelving includes oak or maple banding on rear edge of uprights and cornice on 82 and 96 high units, a 2 valance at the cornice. All components are grooved to receive F/2/S back panel option. Note: F/2/S back panel options in either oak plywood, painted hardboard or composition back panels must be ordered as a separate item. PIN-FAST WOOD/STEEL DOUBLE FACED SHELVING Model # Description Dimensions WS-4220 WS-4220-M WS-4220-A WS-4220-A-M STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 20 D 42 H x 37 W x 20 D 42 H x 36 W x 20 D 42 H x 36 W x 20 D WS-4220-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H x 43 W x 20 D WS-4220-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H x 43 W x 20 D WS-4220-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H x 42 W x 20 D WS-4220-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H x 42 W x 20 D WS-4224 STARTER, OAK 42 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-4224-M STARTER, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-4224-A ADDER, OAK 42 H x 36 W x 24 D WS-4224-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 42 H x 36 W x 24 D WS-4224-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H x 44 W x 24 D WS-4224-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H x 44 W x 24 D WS-4224-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H x 43 W x 24 D WS-4224-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 42 H x 43 W x 24 D 42 high double faced shelving a has one (1) piece plastic laminate cornice top, four (4) adjustable shelves (2 each face), and flat flush base shelves. Shelves are of 3/4 thick 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. WS-6320 STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 20 D WS-6320-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 20 D WS-6320-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 20 D WS-6320-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 20 D WS-6320-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 44 W x 20 D WS-6320-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H x 44 W x 20 D WS-6320-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 43 W x 20 D WS-6320-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 63 H x 43 W x 20 D WS-6324 STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-6324-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-6324-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 24 D WS-6324-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 24 D WS-6324-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 44 W x 24 D WS-6324-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H x 44 W x 24 D WS-6324-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H x 43 W x 24 D WS-6324-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 63 H x 43 W x 24 D The Worden Company Source Book October high double faced shelving a has a finished wood cornice top, eight (8) adjustable shelves (4 each face), and flat flush base shelves. Shelves are of 3/4 thick 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. 187

190 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST WOOD/STEEL DOUBLE FACED SHELVING cont d Model # Description Dimensions WS-8220 STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 20 D WS-8220-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 20 D WS-8220-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 20 D WS-8220-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 20 D WS-8220-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 44 W x 20 D WS-8220-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H x 44 W x 20 D WS-8220-A-FM ADDER FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 43 W x 20 D WS-8220-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 82 H x 43 W x 20 D WS-8224 STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-8224-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-8224-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 24 D WS-8224-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 24 D WS-8224-FM FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 44 W x 24 D WS-8224-FM-M FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H x 44 W x 24 D WS-8224-A-FM ADDER, FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H x 43 W x 24 D WS-8224-A-FM-M ADDER FIELD MOD MAPLE 82 H x 43 W x 24 D 82 high double faced shelving a has an inverted one piece finished wood cornice top, ten (10) adjustable shelves (5 each face), and flat flush base shelves. Shelves are of 3/4 thick 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. PIN-FAST WOOD/STEEL SINGLE FACED MAGAZINE SHELVING WS-4212-MS WS MS-M WS MS-A WS MS-A-M STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 12 D 42 H x 37 W x 12 D 42 H x 36 W x 12 D 42 H x 36 W x 12 D 42 high single faced magazine shelving has a plastic laminate surface cornice, one (1)adjustable flat shelf, two (2) adjustable pivoted magazine display shelves and a base shelf. Shelves are 3/4 thick 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. WS-6312-MS STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-6312-MS-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-6312-MS-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-4212 WS-6312 WS-8212 WS-6312-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 12 D 63 high single faced magazine shelving has a finished wood cornice top, two (2) adjustable flat shelf, three (3) adjustable pivoted magazine display shelves and a base shelf. Shelves are 3/4 thick, 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. WS-8212-MS STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-8212-MS-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-8212-MS-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-8212-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 12 D 82 high single faced magazine shelving has a an inverted finished wood cornice top, four (4) adjustable flat shelves, five (5) adjustable pivoted magazine display shelves and a base shelf. Shelves are 3/4 thick, 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. PIN-FAST WOOD/STEEL DOUBLE FACED MAGAZINE SHELVING WS-4224-MS WS MS-M WS MS-A WS MS-A-M STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 24 D 42 H x 37 W x 24 D 42 H x 36 W x 24 D 42 H x 36 W x 24 D 42 high double faced magazine shelving has a one piece plastic laminate surface cornice, two (2) adjustable flat shelves, four (4) adjustable pivoted magazine display shelves and base shelves. Shelves are 3/4 thick, 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. 188 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

191 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST WOOD/STEEL DOUBLE FACED MAGAZINE SHELVING cont d WS-6324-MS STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-6324-MS-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-6324-MS-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 24 D WS-6324-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 24 D 63 high double faced magazine shelving has a one piece finished wood cornice top, four (4) adjustable flat shelves, six (6) adjustable pivoted magazine display shelves and base shelves. Shelves are 3/4 thick, 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. WS-6324 WS-8224 WS-8224-MS STARTER, OAK 82 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-8224-MS-M STARTER, MAPLE 82 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-8224-MS-A ADDER, OAK 82 H x 36 W x 24 D WS-8224-MS-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 82 H x 36 W x 24 D 82 high double faced magazine shelving has an inverted one piece finished wood cornice top, eight (8) adjustable flat shelves, ten (10) adjustable pivoted magazine display shelves and base shelves. Shelves are 3/4 thick, 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number.- PIN-FAST WOOD/STEEL SINGLE FACED PICTURE BOOK SHELVING WS-4212-P WS-4212-P-M WS-4212-P-A WS-4212-P-A-M STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 12 D 42 H x 37 W x 12 D 42 H x 36 W x 12 D 42 H x 36 W x 12 D 42 high single faced picture book shelving has a plastic laminate surfaced cornice, one (1) adjustable shelf and one (1) base shelf. Each shelf has three (3) adjustable dividers and 33 adjustment positions. Shelves are 3/4 thick, 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. WS-6312-P STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-6312-P-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 12 D WS-6312-P-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 12 D WS-6312-P-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 12 D 63 high single faced picture book shelving has a finished wood cornice top, two adjustable shelves and one (1) base shelf. Each shelf has three (3) adjustable dividers and 33 adjustment positions. Shelves are 3/4 thick, 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. PIN-FAST WOOD/STEEL DOUBLE FACED PICTURE BOOK SHELVING WS-4224-P WS-4224-P-M WS-4224-P-A WS-4224-P-A-M STARTER, OAK STARTER, MAPLE ADDER, OAK ADDER, MAPLE 42 H x 37 W x 24 D 42 H x 37 W x 24 D 42 H x 36 W x 24 D 42 H x 36 W x 24 D 42 high double faced picture book shelving has a one (1) piece plastic laminate surfaced cornice, two (2) adjustable shelves and two (2) base shelves. Each shelf has three (3) adjustable dividers and 33 adjustment positions. Shelves are 3/4 thick, 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. WS-6324-P STARTER, OAK 63 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-6324-P-M STARTER, MAPLE 63 H x 37 W x 24 D WS-6324-P-A ADDER, OAK 63 H x 36 W x 24 D WS-6324-P-A-M ADDER, MAPLE 63 H x 36 W x 24 D 63 high double faced picture book shelving has a one (1) piece finished wood cornice top, four (4) adjustable shelves and two (2) base shelves. Each shelf has three (3) adjustable dividers and 33 adjustment positions. Shelves are 3/4 thick 18 gauge steel. Backs must be specified with a separate product number. The Worden Company Source Book October

192 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST PAINTED HARDBOARD BACK PANEL Model # Description Dimensions W-3420-B F/1/S 42 H W-3420-B-F/2/S F/2/S 42 H W-3420-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD 42 H W-3420-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD 42 H W-3630-B F/1/S 63 H W-3630-B-F/2/S F/2/S 63 H W-3630-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD 63 H W-3630-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD 63 H W-3820-B F/1/S 82 H W-3820-B-F/2/S F/2/S 82 H W-3820-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD 82 H W-3820-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD 82 H W-3960-B F/1/S 96 H W-3960-B-F/2/S F/2/S 96 H W-3960-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD 96 H W-3960-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD 96 H Hardboard back panels are finished in a standard color. Available for single or double faced shelving. PIN-FAST WOOD VENEER BACK PANEL Model # W-N-420-B Description F/1/S, OAK Dimensions 42 H W-N-420-B-M F/1/S, MAPLE 42 H W-N-420-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H W-N-420-B-FM-M F/1/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H W-N-420-B-F/2/S F/2/S, OAK 42 H W-N-420-B-F/2/S-M F/2/S, MAPLE 42 H W-N-420-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD, OAK 42 H W-N-420-B-F/2/SFMM F/2/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 42 H W-N-630-B F/1/S, OAK 63 H W-N-630-B-M F/1/S, MAPLE 63 H W-N-630-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H W-N-630-B-FM-M F/1/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H W-N-630-B-F/2/S F/2/S, OAK 63 H W-N-630-B-F/2/S-M F/2/S, MAPLE 63 H W-N-630-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD, OAK 63 H W-N-630-B-F/2/SFMM F/2/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 63 H W-N-820-B F/1/S, OAK 82 H W-N-820-B-M F/1/S, MAPLE 82 H W-N-820-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H W-N-820-B-FM-M F/1/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H W-N-820-B-F/2/S F/2/S, OAK 82 H W-N-820-B-F/2/S-M F/2/S, MAPLE 82 H W-N-820-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD, OAK 82 H W-N-820-B-F/2/SFMM F/2/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 82 H W-N-960-B F/1/S, OAK 96 H W-N-960-B-M F/1/S, MAPLE 96 H W-N-960-B-FM F/1/S FIELD MOD, OAK 96 H W-N-960-B-FM-M F/1/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 96 H W-N-960-B-F/2/S F/2/S, OAK 96 H W-N-960-B-F/2/S-M F/2/S, MAPLE 96 H W-N-960-B-F/2/S-FM F/2/S FIELD MOD, OAK 96 H W-N-960-B-F/2/SFMM F/2/S FIELD MOD, MAPLE 96 H Plywood back panels have oak or maple face veneer and are finished to match shelving components. These backs are optional in either single or double faced shelving. 190 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

193 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST SINGLE FACED CORNER FILLER Model # W-4210-CF Description OAK Dimensions 42 H x 10 D W-4210-CF-M MAPLE 42 H x 10 D W-4212-CF OAK 42 H x 12 D W-4212-CF-M MAPLE 42 H x 12 D W-6310-CF OAK 63 H x 10 D W-6310-CF-M MAPLE 63 H x 10 D W-6312-CF OAK 63 H x 12 D W-6312-CF-M MAPLE 63 H x 12 D W-8210-CF OAK 82 H x 10 D W-8210-CF-M MAPLE 82 H x 10 D W-8212-CF OAK 82 H x 12 D W-8212-CF-M MAPLE 82 H x 12 D W-9612-CF OAK 96 H x 12 D W-9612-CF-M MAPLE 96 H x 12 D The standard corner cap assembly is used in wall shelving ranges of any height or depth offered. The corner assembly consists of a pair of corner caps which are the depth of shelving upright in one direction and 1/4 lap of one upright over edge of adjacent upright at the corner. Note: Caps only are supplied. Two (2) initial sections of shelving will be required to turn a corner. Indicate filler assembly location. Indicate exact width required. Corner filler assemblies where unlike shelving depths or heights meet must be treated as a modified corner face. An initial unit must be ordered for each side of the corner filler. PIN-FAST DOUBLE FACED CORNER FILLER Model # W-42-DCF Description OAK Dimensions 42 H W-42-DCF-M MAPLE 42 H W-63-DCF OAK 63 H W-63-DCF-M MAPLE 63 H W-82-DCF OAK 82 H W-82-DCF-M MAPLE 82 H W-96-DCF OAK 96 H W-96-DCF-M MAPLE 96 H The standard cap assembly is used where double faced shelving sections join to and form peninsular ranges out from wall ranges. The double corner assembly consists of a pair of corner caps which are the width of the double faced upright and 1/4 less than the depth of a wall shelving upright, thus providing a 1/4 lap of single faced uprights over the edges of the double faced uprights. Note: Caps only are supplied. Two (2) initial sections of shelving will be required to turn a corner. Corner filler assemblies where unlike shelving depths or heights meet must be treated as a modified face filler. An initial unit must be ordered for each side of the corner filler. Note: Indicate filler assembly location. Indicate exact width required. PIN-FAST OUTSIDE CORNER FILLER Model # Description Dimensions W-4210-OCF W-4210-OCF-M W-4212-OCF W-4212-OCF-M W-6310-OCF W-6310-OCF-M W-6312-OCF W-6312-OCF-M W-8210-OCF W-8210-OCF-M W-8212-OCF W-8212-OCF-M W-9610-OCF W-9610-OCF-M W-9612-OCF W-9612-OCF-M OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, OAK OUTSIDE SF SHELVING, MAPLE 42 H x 10 D 42 H x 10 D 42 H x 12 D 42 H x 12 D 63 H x 10 D 63 H x 10 D 63 H x 12 D 63 H x 12 D 82 H x 10 D 82 H x 10 D 82 H x 12 D 82 H x 12 D 96 H x 10 D 96 H x 10 D 96 H x 12 D 96 H x 12 D Outside corner fillers are intended for use where single faced shelving wraps outside building corners. Upright and top surfaces are finished to match the adjacent shelving. The Worden Company Source Book October

194 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST CONTINUOUS COUNTERTOP Model # Description W-CCT-SF SINGLE FACED W-CCT-DF DOUBLE FACED MISC PIN-FAST W-42-MSB 2-1/2 SHEPPARD CASTERS 42 H Model # Description Casters W-JIG-SET FIELD MODIFY KIT Set includes the necessary jigs, drill bits to complete field modification shelving. W-SB SWAY BRACES Sway braces for 63 and 82" high shelving PIN-FAST ADJUSTABLE STEEL SHELF WS-10-SHELF STEEL 3/4 T x 9 D x 34-15/16 W WS-12-SHELF STEEL 3/4 T x 11 D x 34-15/16 W WS-16-SHELF STEEL 3/4 T x 15 D x 34-15/16 W PIN-FAST MAGAZINE STEEL SHELF WS-12-SHELF-MS STEEL 3/4 T x 11 D x 34-15/16 W Pivot shelf for use in 12" deep sinlge face for 24" deep double faced shelving 192 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

195 Pin-Fast Shelving PIN-FAST PICTURE BOOK STEEL SHELF WS-12-SHELF-PB W/ 3 DIVIDERS, STEEL 3/4 Tx11-1/8 Dx34-15/16 W PIN-FAST STEEL SHELF DIVIDER WS-12-DIVIDER SHELF DIVIDER, STEEL 1/4 TK PIN-FAST GLASS DOOR W-42-GLD SLIDING W/ LOCK 42 H W-63-GLD SLIDING W/ LOCK 63 H W-82-GLD SLIDING W/ LOCK 82 H W-42 W-63 W-82 Note: These are glass doors and track only - shelving must be ordered separately. Two sliding glass doors consist of 1/4 tempered glass with ground pulls and a locking mechanisim. The Worden Company Source Book October

196 Display DOUBLE SIDED STATWALL GONDOLA DISPLAY Shelf depth: 5-1/8. GDS-5922-DF OAK 22-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H GDS-5922-DF-M MAPLE 22-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H GDS-5922-DF-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 22-3/4 D x 48 Wx 59 H GDS-5922-DF-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 22-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H Shelf depth: 5-1/8. GDS-5924-DF OAK 24-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H GDS-5924-DF-M MAPLE 24-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H GDS-5924-DF-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 24-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H GDS-5924-DF-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 24-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H Shelf depth: 5-1/8. GDS-5928-DF OAK 28-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H GDS-5928-DF-M MAPLE 28-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H GDS-5928-DF-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 28-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H GDS-5928-DF-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 28-3/4 D x 48 W x 59 H Unit features a double sided configuration with six sloped shelves per face. Each end receives aluminum lined slots placed on 3 centers for additional display area. Shelves, are 3/4 solid hardwood and are adjustable on 8mm shouldered pins, with 32mm spacing. End and top panels are 1 T veneer, back panels are 3/4 T veneer. Top and base rails are solid hardwood. The unit is provided knock down and incorporates four adjustable floor guides. SINGLE SIDED GONDOLA DISPLAY GD-8415-SF GD SF-M GD SF-FF GD SF-MFF OAK MAPLE FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 15 D x 48 W x 84 H 15 D x 48 W x 84 H 15 D x 48 W x 84 H 15 D x 48 W x 84 H GD-8415 Eight Shelves GD-8415-SF-A GD-8415-SF-A-M GD-8415-SF-A-FF GD-8415-SF-A-MFF ADDER - OAK ADDER - MAPLE ADDER - FDH FREE - OAK ADDER - FDH FREE - MAPLE 15 D x 47 W x 84 H 15 D x 47 W x 84 H 15 D x 47 W x 84 H 15 D x 47 W x 84 H GD-6615 Six Shelves GD-6615-SF GD SF-M GD SF-FF GD SF-MFF GD-6615-SF-A GD-6615-SF-A-M GD-6615-SF-A-FF GD-6615-SF-A-MFF OAK MAPLE FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE ADDER - OAK ADDER - MAPLE ADDER - FDH FREE - OAK ADDER - FDH FREE - MAPLE 15 D x 48 W x 66 H 15 D x 48 W x 66 H 15 D x 48 W x 66 H 15 D x 48 W x 66 H 15 D x 47 W x 66 H 15 D x 47 W x 66 H 15 D x 47 W x 66 H 15 D x 47 W x 66 H The unit features a single sided configuration with sloped shelves. Units are sold in starter or adder configurations, allowing for range expansions. Shelves, are 3/4 solid hardwood and are adjustable on 8mm shouldered pins, with 32mm spacing. The shelf depth for this unit is 8 End and top panels are 1 T veneer, back panels are 3/4 T veneer. Top and base rails are solid hardwood. The unit is provided knock down and incorporates four adjustable floor guides. TIERED MOBILE BOOK DISPLAY TMD-3172 OAK 72 D x 31 W x 43-3/4 H TMD-3172-M MAPLE 72 D x 31 W x 43-3/4 H TMD-3172-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 72 D x 31 W x 43-3/4 H TMD-3172-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 72 D x 31 W x 43-3/4 H This display unit features a center, double sided shelf unit with one adjustable shelf per side. Facing outward from either end of this unit are stepped, open flat display shelves. The very top of the unit incorporates a movable sloped book display. The unit rides on six full swivel casters for easy movement. DOUBLE FACE TIERED CD BROWSER TABLE TCDB-4864-DF OAK 64 D x 48 W x 44-1/2 H TCDB-4864-DF-M MAPLE 64 D x 48 W x 44-1/2 H TCDB-4864-DF-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 64 D x 48 W x 44-1/2 H TCDB-4864-DF-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 64 D x 48 W x 44-1/2 H This display unit features eight tiers of sectioned compact disc display area, the total capacity for this unit is 784. Each section is sloped back to allow easy patron viewing of media. The end panels are arched to create a unique appearance. The end and back panels are veneer. Legs, aprons, bands and dividers are solid hardwood. The unit is fitted with adjustable floor glides. 194 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

197 Display SLATWALL DISPLAY PYRAMID PDS-3660 OAK 60 D x 36 W x 59-1/2 H PDS-3660-M MAPLE 60 D x 36 W x 59-1/2 H PDS-3660-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 60 D x 36 W x 59-1/2 H PDS-3660-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 60 D x 36 W x 59-1/2 H Slatwall display pyramid features four sloped sides, each incorporating a fully slotted, 3 on center veneer face, all slots lined with aluminum. All vertical corners are hardwood, as is the base and perimeter of the laminate top. The unit is fitted with adjustable floor glides. SLATWALL DISPLAY END PANEL EPDS-5014 OAK 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 50 H EPDS-5014-M MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 50 H EPDS-5014-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 50 H EPDS-5014-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 50 H EPDS-7014 OAK 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 70 H EPDS-7014-M MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 70 H EPDS-7014-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 70 H EPDS-7014-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 70 H EPDS-9014 OAK 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 90 H EPDS-9014-M MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 90 H EPDS-9014-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 90 H EPDS-9014-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 14 W x 90 H EPDS-5026D OAK 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 50 H EPDS-5026D-M MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 50 H EPDS-5026D-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 50 H EPDS-5026D-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 50 H EPDS-7026D OAK 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 70 H EPDS7026D-M MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 70 H EPDS-7026D-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 70 H EPDS-7026D-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 70 H EPDS-9026D OAK 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 90 H EPDS-9026D-M MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 90 H EPDS-9026D-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 90 H EPDS-9026D-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 1-3/16 D x 26 W x 90 H Display end panel features a 1-3/16 T veneer panel with a solid hardwood perimeter band. The panel is slotted the full height on 3 centers, each slot is lined with aluminum. DOUBLE FACE MOBILE PICTURE BOOK BROWSER WITH LASER ARTWORK MPBL-3426-DF MPBL-3426-DF-M MPBL-3426-DF-FF MPBL-3426-DF-MFF OAK MAPLE FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 26-3/4 D x 34-5/8 W x 32 H 26-3/4 D x 34-5/8 W x 32 H 26-3/4 D x 34-5/8 W x 32 H 26-3/4 D x 34-5/8 W x 32 H Display unit is offered in a double sided configuration. Each side features a three section, divided area. Each section is 10-/8 W x 10-1/4 D and sloped back to allow easy patron viewing of media. The front panels of each section receives an artistic laser cut through. Three divided cubbies are located below the upper sloped area, allowing for additional book storage. All unit components are veneer with solid hardwood at panel edges. The unit incorporates four full swivel, locking casters. DOUBLE FACE MOBILE PICTURE BOOK BROWSER MPB-3426-DF OAK 26-3/4 D x 34-5/8 W x 32 H MPB-3426-DF-M MAPLE 26-3/4 D x 34-5/8 W x 32 H MPB-3426-DF-FF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - OAK 26-3/4 D x 34-5/8 W x 32 H MPB-3426-DF-MFF FORMALDEHYDE FREE - MAPLE 26-3/4 D x 34-5/8 W x 32 H Display unit is offered in a double sided configuration. Each side features a three section, divided area. Each section is 10-/8 W x 10-1/4 D and sloped back to allow easy patron viewing of media. Three divided cubbies are located below the upper sloped area, allowing for additional book storage. All unit components are veneer with solid hardwood at panel edges. The unit incorporates four full swivel, locking casters. The Worden Company Source Book October

198

199 W O R D E N E N D PA N E L S Furniture for Learning Spaces. Folio End Panels 197

200 Academy, Addenda End Panels Model # Description ACADEMY END PANEL 70/ _ Height Height Width Wood Specie SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). The back edge is not banded on single face end panels. If the shelving is to be island style use double face end panels. Single Face Double Face SF Width DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1/4 overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Wood Specie Blank - Oak M - Maple APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: The end panels are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak or maple veneer face and select grade B oak veneer on the back. The vertical edges are banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple. The top and bottom edges are banded with 1-3/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak or maple, blind tenoned, splined or doweled to the panel. Top and bottom bands shall lap vertical bands. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. ADDENDA END PANEL 20/ _ Height Width Wood Specie Height SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 7/16 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 7/16 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). The back edge is not banded on single face end panels. If the shelving is to be island style use double face end panels. DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. Single Face Double Face SF Width DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 7/16 (7/8 overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 7/16 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Wood Specie Blank - Oak M - Maple APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: The end panels are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak veneer face and select grade B oak veneer on the back. All four exterior edges on double faced end panels and three exterior edges on single face end panels receive an exterior frame 1-3/16 thick x 3 wide solid oak shaped to create a raised panel effect. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. 198 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

201 American Classics End Panels - Alcott & Throreau Model # Description AMERICAN CLASSICS ALCOTT END PANEL AL - _ SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. Height Height Width Wood Specie Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. Single Face Double Face SF Width DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1/4 overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Wood Specie Blank - Oak C - Cherry M - Maple APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: : The end panels shall be 1-5/16 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer face and select grade A back. The top and vertical edge(s) shall be banded with 1-5/16 thick x 2-1/2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry with the vertical bands lapping the horizontal bands. The base shall be 1-1/16 thick x 2-1/4 solid hardwood with aluminum clad face and ends. ¼ thick aluminum matching bead on three sides of the bottom edge. All bands shall be flush on the inside face. All members shall be tenoned or doweled. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. AMERICAN CLASSICS THOREAU END PANEL TH - _ Height Width Wood Specie Height SF Width DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 3/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 3/8 (3/4 overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Single Face Double Face Wood Specie Blank - Oak C - Cherry M - Maple APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: : The end panels shall be 1-5/8 thick, consisting of a 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer face and select grade A back. The exposed vertical edge(s) shall be banded with 1-5/16 thick x 2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry. The top edge shall be banded with 1-5/16 thick x 3-1/2 wide solid oak, maple or cherry band shaped on the inside to a 22-3/4 radius. The top cap shall be 3/4 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak, maple or cherry with a 1/4 60 degree chamfer on four edges. The bottom shall have a sabot consisting of a 1-1/2 thick x 3-3/4 wide solid oak, maple or cherry member and a bead 3/4 thick x 1-5/8 wide solid oak, maple or cherry with a 1/4 60 degree chamfer on four edges. All bands shall be flush on the inside face. All members shall be tenoned or doweled. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. (revision made April 2013) The Worden Company Source Book October

202 American Classics End Panels - Twain Model # Description TWAIN END PANEL Single Face Double Face TW - _ Height SF Width Wood Specie Blank - Oak C - Cherry M - Maple Height Width Wood Specie DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1/4 overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 3-1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Note: The overall dimension of the end panel is to the apex of the 3 arch. On shelving with canopy tops the 3 arch must extend above the canopy. On shelving without canopy tops the ends may be sized to 1/8 above the shelving upright. This reduced height may expose shelf support brackets and books from elevation viewing. APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: : The end panels shall be 1-3/16 thick, consisting of a panel, an architrave and a sabot. The panel shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak, maple or cherry veneer face and select grade B back. The vertical edges shall be banded with 1/8 thick solid oak, maple or cherry. The top of the panel shall have a stylized architrave 1-3/16 thick x 3 high at the midpoint arching to 1-1/4 at the ends. The element shall be solid oak, maple or cherry and shall have 1/8 x 1/8 vertical reveal at the midpoint. The base shall consist of a 1-3/16 thick x 3 high solid oak, maple or cherry sabot. Between the top element and base there shall be a ¼ black bead detail on four sides of the panel. All members shall be tenoned or doweled. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. (revision made April 2013) 200 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

203 degilde, Diametron End Panels Model # Description DEGILDE END PANEL Single Face Double Face DG - _ Height SF Width Height Width DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D Wood Specie SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 3/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 3/8 (3/4 overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Wood Specie Blank - Oak C - Cherry M - Maple APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: The end panels are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak, maple, or cherry veneer face and select grade B oak, maple, or cherry veneer on the back. The vertical edges are banded with 1-3/16 thick x 1/8 wide solid oak, maple, or cherry. The top edge shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak, maple, or cherry and the vertical edges shall be fitted with a 12 gauge x 1-1/2 wide HRPO steel trim rail finished with a black textured powder coat and heat cured. The trim rail shall be secured by means of M6-12 black oxides button head cap screws passing through 1/16 x 7/8 black stand-off spacers and screwing into threaded inserts embedded along the edge. The bottom outside face of the panel shall be fitted with a face plate arched 3 at the top to 3/4 at the ends. The plate shall be laser cut from 12 gauge HRPO steel and epoxy powder coated black crackle and heat cured. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. DIAMETRON END PANEL Single Face Double Face D - _ Height Height SF Width Width Wood Specie DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. The overall dimensions of the end panel are to the top of the leg dome cap for height and the outside of the leg for depth. To allow for these offsets it is necessary that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1-3/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base) and 1 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). The back edge is not banded on single face end panels. If the shelving is to be island style use double face end panels. DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. The overall dimensions of the end panel are to the top of the leg dome cap for height and the outside of the leg for depth. To allow for these offsets it is necessary that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 2-3/4 overhang beyond the deepest (base) and 1 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Wood Specie Blank - Oak C - Cherry M - Maple APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. END PANEL: The end panel shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with premium Grade A oak or maple veneer face and select Grade B oak or maple veneer on the back. The top and bottom edges shall be banded with 5/16 thick solid oak or maple radiused 1/16. The exposed vertical edge(s) shall be banded with 5/16 thick solid oak or maple coped to receive the leg post and fitted with concealed Mod-eez* spring tension clips along the edge. POST: The post legs shall be 1-1/2 diameter, 13 gauge CREW steel tube, finished with an epoxy powder coat. The top of the leg shall be fitted with a tamper resistant alloy dome cap finished to match the leg. The bottom of the leg shall be fitted with a 1-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 high adjustable black nylon glide. INSTALLATION: The end panels shall be installed by the end panel manufacturer and shall include all necessary hardware. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. The Worden Company Source Book October

204 Folio End Panels Model # Description FOLIO SINGLE FACED END PANEL F - - WF - _ -1 Height Height Width Wood Specie SF Width Wood Specie C - Cherry M - Maple Panels shall be 3-ply, 1" thick, particleboard construction with premium grade "A" cherry or maple veneer faces. The perimeter is banded with 1-5/8" wide by 1-5/8" thick solid, matching hardwood bands. The perimeter band is applied to the panel flush on the rear face, creating a 5/8" raised band on the face of the panel. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). FOLIO DOUBLE FACED WOOD FRAME END PANEL F - - WFD - _ -1 Height Height Width Wood Specie DF Width Wood Specie C - Cherry M - Maple Panels shall be 3-ply, 1" thick, particleboard construction with premium grade "A" cherry or maple veneer faces. The perimeter is banded with 1-5/8" wide by 1-5/8" thick solid, matching hardwood bands. The perimeter band is applied to the panel flush on the rear face, creating a 5/8" raised band on the face of the panel. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1-4" overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). FOLIO DOUBLE FACED FLOATING FRAME END PANEL F - D - FP - _ -1 Height Height Width Wood Specie DF Width Wood Specie C - Cherry M - Maple Panels shall include a frame, insert panel and a number of steel standoff brackets. Panel frames shall be fabricated from 1-5/8 square, solid hardwood with full lap and dowel joints or roll formed steel tubing with a powder coat finish. Insert panels shall be 3-ply, 1-3/16 thick, particleboard construction with premium grade A cherry or maple veneer faces. The insert panel shall be centered in all directions and suspended within the frame by means of steel standoffs with a powder coat finish and decorative head bolts. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1-4" overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). FOLIO DOUBLE FACED 3-BAR END PANEL F - D _ Height Height Width Wood Specie DF Width Wood Specie C - Cherry M - Maple Panels shall be 3-ply, 1 thick, particleboard construction with premium grade A cherry or maple veneer faces. The perimeter is banded with 1-5/8 wide by 1-5/8 thick solid, matching hardwood band. Three extruded aluminum overlays with powder coat finish shall be attached to the face of the panel and shall be centered horizontally on the panel. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1-4" overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). (revision made April 2013) 202 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

205 Folio End Panels Model # Description FOLIO DOUBLE FACED 3-BAR END PANEL W/ SIGN SPACE F - D - 3S - _ Height Height DF Width Width Wood Specie C - Cherry M - Maple Panels shall be 3-ply, 1 thick, particleboard construction with premium grade A cherry or maple veneer faces. The perimeter is banded with 1-5/8 wide by 1-5/8 thick solid, matching hardwood band. Three extruded aluminum overlays with powder coat finish shall be attached to the face of the panel and shall be centered horizontally on the panel with a clear space for signage bordered by two horizontal overlays spaced as required for signage clearance. The perimeter band is applied to the panel flush on the rear face, creating a 5/8" raised band on the face of the panel. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1-4" overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). FOLIO OPAC CABINET Wood Specie F-1824-OC-3-C 3-BAR DOOR FRONT, CHERRY 18D x 24W F-1824-OC-3-M 3-BAR DOOR FRONT, MAPLE 18D x 24W F-1826-OC-3-C 3-BAR DOOR FRONT, CHERRY 18D x 26W F-1826-OC-3-M 3-BAR DOOR FRONT, MAPLE 18D x 26W F-1832-OC-3-C 3-BAR DOOR FRONT, CHERRY 18D x 32W F-1832-OC-3-M 3-BAR DOOR FRONT, MAPLE 18D x 32W End Panels not included F-1824-OC-B-C DOOR FRONT, CHERRY 18D x 24W F-1824-OC-B-M DOOR FRONT, MAPLE 18D x 24W F-1826-OC-B-C DOOR FRONT, CHERRY 18D x 26W F-1826-OC-B-M DOOR FRONT, MAPLE 18D x 26W F-1832-OC-B-C DOOR FRONT, CHERRY 18D x 32W F-1832-OC-B-M DOOR FRONT, MAPLE 18D x 32W OPAC cabinets are fabricated from premium grade A veneer panels with solid hardwood bands, the top is laminate with a profiled front band and flat side bands. Cabinets feature European style assembly techniques and incorporate a locking door. A cord drop is placed along the back edge of the top and bottom of the unit. The cabinet is ventilated to allow adequate equipment cooling. Cabinet doors may be detailed to match adjacent panel designs as required. FOLIO OPAC WORKSURFACE Model # Description Dimensions End Panel not included F-1824-OW-C CANTILEVERED W/S, CHERRY 18D x 24W F-1824-OW-M CANTILEVERED W/S, MAPLE 18D x 24W F-1826-OW-C CANTILEVERED W/S, CHERRY 18D x 26W F-1826-OW-M CANTILEVERED W/S, MAPLE 18D x 26W F-1832-OW-C CANTILEVERED W/S, CHERRY 18D x 32W F-1832-OW-M CANTILEVERED W/S, MAPLE 18D x 32W The OPAC worksurface consists of a worksurface, and two support panel brackets with a hinged door located between the two panels. The worksurface shall be a 3-ply particleboard construction with a laminate face and balancing backer. The front edge of the top shall be externally banded with a 1-1/4 wide by 1-9/16 high, profiled solid hardwood band, and the side edges shall be externally banded with a 1/4 wide by 1-9/16 high, flat solid hardwood band. The support panels and door shall be fabricated from 3/4 thick medium density particleboard core with premium grade A cherry or maple veneer faces and matching solid hardwood edge bands. The door shall be hinged at the worksurface and shall lock at the panel to form an enclosure for excess wire or cable. The Worden Company Source Book October

206 Marlborough, MWS End Panel Model # Description MARLBOROUGH END PANEL 11/ _ Height Height Width Wood Specie SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 5/16 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 5/16 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). The back edge is not banded on single face end panels. If the shelving is to be island style use double face end panels. SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. tallest Single Face Double Face SF Width DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 5/16 (5/8 overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 5/16 above the projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Wood Specie Blank - Oak M - Maple APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: The end panels are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with select grade A oak veneer face and select grade B oak veneer on the back. All four edges are banded with 5/8 solid oak. All exposed corners of panel profile are shapes to a 5/8 radius and continuous bullnose shaped.. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. MWS END PANEL MWS/ _ Height Height Width Wood Specie SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). The back edge is not banded on single face end panels. If the shelving is to be island style use double face end panels. Single Face Double Face SF Width DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1/4" overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Wood Specie Blank - Oak C - Cherry M - Maple APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: The end panels are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with select grade A oak veneer face and select grade B oak veneer on the back. All exposed edges are banded with 5/8 thick solid oak. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head, Phillips drive screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. (revision made April 2013) 204 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

207 Pavilion, Self-Edge End Panels Model # Description PAVILION END PANEL P - _ Height Height Width Wood Specie SF Width 8 DF Width 16D Wood Specie Blank - Oak 9 18D C - Cherry 10 20D M - Maple 12 24D Single Face Double Face 13 26D 16 32D SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. APPLICATION: Pavilion end panels are available for single faced and double faced applications. CONSTRUCTION: Panels are 3-ply construction with premium grade "A" veneer face and select grade "B" veneer on the back with exposed edges banded with 1/8 hardwood. The exposed vertical edges also receive a 1/8 t x 1-3/8 w powder coated steel strap, the strap is held to the panel with black machine cap screws that pass through the strap then through a 1/16 t self stick washer applied to the rear side of the strap and into inserts imbedded in the edge of the panel. Double faced panels receive bands and straps on both vertical edges, single faced panels receive the application on one vertical edge only. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. SELF-EDGED.75 & 1.25" THICK END PANELS.75 Thickness SE75 - Height Width SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided) Thickness The back edge is not banded on single face end panels. If the shelving is to be island style use double face end panels. SE - Height Width DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. Single Face Double Face Height It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1/4" overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). SF Width DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D APPLICATION: End panels are available for single faced and double faced applications. CONSTRUCTION: Panels shall be 3-ply particleboard construction with.050" thick decorative laminate applied to both faces and all exposed edges. The bands are applied prior to face lamination. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. The Worden Company Source Book October

208 Tempus, Teres End Panels Model # Description TEMPUS END PANEL Single Face Double Face - Wood Specie Height Wood Specie 50 - Oak 60 - Maple SF Width Width Height DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 3-1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Note: The overall dimension of the end is to the apex of the 3 arch. On shelving with canopy tops the 3 arch must extend above the canopy. On shelving without canopy tops the ends may be sized to 1/8 above the shelving upright. This reduced height may expose shelf support brackets and books from elevation viewing. The back edge is not banded on single face end panels. If the shelving is to be island style use double face end panels. DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1/4" overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 3-1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). Note: The overall dimension of the end is to the apex of the 3 arch. On shelving with canopy tops the 3 arch must extend above the canopy. On shelving without canopy tops the ends may be sized to 1/8 above the shelving upright. This reduced height may expose shelf support brackets and books from elevation viewing. APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: The end panels are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with premium grade A oak or maple veneer face and select grade B oak or maple veneer on the back. The top edge of the panel shall have a 3 high full arc on double faced and a 3 high half arc on single face end panels. Both the top and two vertical edges on end panels shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple with a 1/32 radius on all edges. The bottom edge shall be banded with a 1-3/16 thick x 3 high solid oak or maple sabot. The sabot shall be attached with a blind mortise and tenon. The top of the sabot shall have a 1/4 high x 1-1/16 deep reveal on all sides. On double faced end panels a 7/8 wide matching grey PVC reveal shall be inlaid vertically into the panel on the outside face, extending from the top band to the sabot. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. TERES END PANEL (.75" & 1-3/16" THICK).75 Thickness T _ Height Width 1-3/16 Thickness T - - _ Height Width Wood Specie Wood Specie SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). The back edge is not banded on single face end panels. If the shelving is to be island style use double face end panels. Single Face Double Face Height Wood Specie Blank - Oak M - Maple DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1/4" overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy tops if provided). SF Width DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: The end panels are 3/4 or 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with select grade A oak or maple veneer face and select grade B oak or maple veneer on the back. All exposed edges are banded with 1/8 thick solid oak or maple. All edges and corners are radiused 1/16. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head, Phillips drive screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. (revision made April 2013) 206 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

209 Tombstone End Panels Model # Description TOMBSTONE END PANEL Single Face Double Face - Wood Specie Height Wood Specie 52 - Oak 62 - Maple SF Width Width Height DF Width 16D 18D 20D 24D 26D 32D SINGLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 3-1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy top if provided). Note: The overall dimension of the end is to the apex of the 3 arch. On shelving with canopy tops the 3 arch must extend above the canopy. On shelving without canopy tops the ends may be sized to 1/8 above the shelving upright. This reduced height may expose shelf support brackets and books from elevation viewing. The back edge is not banded on single face end panels. If the shelving is to be island style use double face end panels. DOUBLE FACE: Use the nominal dimension that is the closest to the desired dimension. It is recommended that the panels be sized to allow a minimum 1/8 (1/4" overall) overhang beyond the deepest (base or sloped magazine shelf) and 3-1/8 above the tallest projection of the steel shelving (allow for canopy top if provided). Note: The overall dimension of the end is to the apex of the 3 arch. On shelving with canopy tops the 3 arch must extend above the canopy. On shelving without canopy tops the ends may be sized to 1/8 above the shelving upright. This reduced height may expose shelf support brackets and books from elevation viewing. APPLICATION: These end panels may be specified for use as an accessory item for steel bracket type shelving. CONSTRUCTION: The end panels are 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard panel with select grade A, non-balanced oak or maple veneer face and select grade B oak or maple veneer on the back. The top edge of the panel shall have a 3 high full arc on double faced and a 3 high half arc on single face end panels. Both the top and two vertical edges on end panels shall be banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple with a 1/32 radius on all edges. NOTE: These end panels are not machined, nor do they include any hardware other than pan-head screws, and are not equipped to accept standard WORDEN wood shelving. The Worden Company Source Book October

210

211 W O R D E N S E AT I N G Furniture for Learning Spaces. Turner Chairs 209

212 Academy Seating ACADEMY CHAIR FRONT LEGS: The front legs shall be solid oak or maple, 1 1/4 x 1 5/8, set 90 degree in both directions to the floor and double doweled and glued flush to side rail and front apron rail, and reinforced with corner blocks screwed into rails and legs. BACK LEGS: The back legs shall be solid oak or maple, 1 1/4 x 1 5/8, profiled to the desired curved shape. Back legs shall be double doweled and glued to side rail and back apron and reinforced with corner blocks screwed into rails and legs. FRONT APRON: The apron shall be solid oak or maple, 1 x 1 3/4, double doweled and glued flush to the outside face of the front legs and reinforced with corner blocks. Apron to be drilled and counter bored for three (3) #10 x 1 3/4 screws for seat attachment. BACK APRON: The apron shall be solid oak or maple, 7/8 x 3 1/4, profiled and doweled and glued to the back legs. SIDE RAIL: The side rail shall be solid oak or maple, 1 x 1 5/8, double doweled and glued flush to the front and back legs. Side rail to be drilled and counter bored for two (2) #10 x 1 3/4 screws for seat attachment. CORNER REINFORCEMENT: A mitered corner block shall be glued and screwed at the corner intersection of seat apron rails, legs and back posts. The corner blocks shall be attached to the adjacent apron rails with #10 flat head wood screws. A 3" long hex lag screw with flat washer shall pass through the corner block and into the inside corner of each leg and back post. STRETCHER ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall be solid oak or maple, consisting of two side stretchers, 1 1/4 x 1 doweled or tenoned into front and back legs and three (3) cross stretchers, 1 1/8 x 1, spaced 3-7/8 apart and doweled or tenoned into side stretchers. The header shall be located 9 above and floor and shall be canted 4 degrees toward the rear. The header and stretchers shall be set flush with adjoining members. BACK ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall consist of top rail and eight slats of solid oak or maple. The top rail shall be 7/8 x 4 1/4, profiled to the desired shape and triple doweled and glued to the back legs. The top edge of the back shall have 1/2 wide rail conforming to back profile and set flush with the back side of back legs. Top rail shall have a 1/16 x 1/16 vein line machined on the inside face and the top at the leg post joint. The slats shall each be 1 1/8 x 5/8 profiled and tenoned flush to the inside face of the top rail and back apron. The cord line of the back pitch shall be 106 degrees and the included angle with the seat 102 degrees. WOOD SEAT: The seat shall be solid oak or maple, 1 3/16 thick, machined to the profile and sight line extensions of adjoining parts and saddled 13/16 deep. The bottom perimeter and back edge of the seat shall have a 1/8 x 1/8 vein line. Seat shall be attached by means of #10 x 1 3/4 wood screws, counter bored in the apron and side rails. ARMS: (Arm Chair Only) The arms shall consist of a solid oak or maple arm rail and a support stump. The arm rail shall be 1 1/4 x 2, profiled to the desired shape and screwed and plugged flush to the face of the back post. The stump shall be 1 1/4 x 1 3/8, doweled flush into the arm and half lapped, glued and screwed to the inside face of the side rail. Half lapped joint to be reinforced with screws, screwed from inside face of stump. UPHOLSTERED SEAT: The upholstered seat shall be ¾ t hardwood veneer core plywood covered with 1" thick, fire retardant, polyurethane foam with 2.8 lbs. density and 70 lbs. ILD. Seat is then upholstered with selected cover and the bottom side of seat shall be covered with black Accord fabric, attached by means of #10 oval head wood screws, through the corner blocks. GLIDES: All chairs shall have plastic nail glides. ACADEMY ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height: 33 Depth: 22-3/4 Width: 21-3/16 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 17-7/8 Arm Height: 25-1/2 COM Yardage: 1 yard L SOLID MAPLE SEAT O SOLID OAK SEAT US-L COM MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM US-L GR0 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR1 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR2 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR3 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR4 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR5 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR6 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O COM OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM US-O GR0 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR1 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR2 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR3 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR4 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR5 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR6 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

213 Academy & Anchor Seating ACADEMY SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height: 33 Depth: 22-3/8 Width: 18-5/8 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 17 COM Yardage: 1 yard L O SOLID MAPLE SEAT SOLID OAK SEAT US-L COM MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM US-L GR0 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR1 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR2 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR3 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR4 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR5 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR6 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O COM OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM US-O GR0 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR1 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR2 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR3 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR4 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR5 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR6 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 6 ANCHOR CHAIR FRONT LEGS: Shall be solid oak, 1 x 2, with all edges and bottom shaped to a 1/8 radius, double doweled into the side rail and sled rails. SLED BASE RUNNERS: Runners are constructed of 1 x 2 solid oak members. Runners are set flush to side of front and back leg and are double doweled and glued in place. All bottom corners of leg and runners are radiused to a 1 1/8 radius corner. ARMS: Shall be solid oak 1 13/16 x 2 double doweled into back post and double doweled joint at connection with the front leg. Arm shall be shaped to provide a flush rail to the inside and arm pad protruding to the outside. SIDE SEAT RAIL: Shall be solid oak 1 x 1 3/4, double doweled and blind screwed into front seat rail and double doweled and blind screwed into back seat rail. The bottom corners to be radiused to a 1/8 radius. SEAT RAIL: Shall be 1 x 2 1/2 solid oak, profiled to seat contour and double doweled and blind screwed into the front and back legs. CROSS STRETCHERS: Shall be 1 x 1 3/4 solid oak, double doweled and blind screwed into the sled base runners. UPHOLSTERED SEAT: The seat shall be 7/16 thick molded plywood with compound curves creating a waterfall front edge. The seat shall be covered with with fire retardant polyurethane foam 2 thick 2.8 lb. density foam with a 60 lb. IFD at 25% deflection. The cover shall be wrapped and stapled on the underside. The underside shall be covered with a black Accord fabric. UPHOLSTERED BACK: Upholstered back shall be constructed of 7/8 thick curved plywood fully wrapped with 1 thick 1.2 lb. density fire retardant foam with 32 lb. IFD at 25% deflection. The back is demountable to facilitate reupholstery without the use of exposed screws on the back post. ANCHOR ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height: 32 Depth: 23-7/8 Width: 23-1/2 Seat Depth: 17-3/4 Seat Height: 18 COM Yardage: 1 yard ANCHOR 2 POSITION ARM CHAIR Height: 32 Depth: 23-7/8 Width: 23-1/2 Seat Depth: 17-3/4 Seat Height: 18 Arm Height: 25-1/4 COM Yardage: 1 yard The Worden Company Source Book October O COM OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM O GR0 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR1 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR2 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR3 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR4 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR5 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR6 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 6 Model # Description Grade 220-R1-O COM OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM 220-R1-O GR0 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE R1-O GR1 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE R1-O GR2 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE R1-O GR3 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE R1-O GR4 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE R1-O GR5 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE R1-O GR6 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 6 211

214 Anchor Seating ANCHOR SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height: 32 Depth: 23-7/8 Width: 23-1/2 Seat Depth: 17-3/4 Seat Height: 18 COM Yardage: 1 yard O COM OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM O GR0 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR1 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR2 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR3 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR4 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR5 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE O GR6 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 6 ANCHOR STOOL FRONT LEGS: Shall be solid oak, 1 x 2, with all edges and bottom shaped to a 1/8 radius, double doweled into the side rail and sled rails. SLED BASE RUNNERS: Runners are constructed of 1 x 2 solid oak members. Runners are set flush to side of front and back leg and are double doweled and glued in place. All bottom corners of leg and runners are radiused to a 1 1/8 radius corner. SIDE SEAT RAIL: Shall be solid oak 1 x 1 3/4, double doweled and blind screwed into front seat rail and double doweled and blind screwed into back seat rail. The bottom corners to be radiused to a 1/8 radius. SEAT RAIL: Shall be 1 x 2 1/2 solid oak, profiled to seat contour and double doweled and blind screwed into the front and back legs. CROSS STRETCHERS: Shall be 1 x 1 3/4 solid oak, double doweled and blind screwed into the sled base runners. SEAT CONSTRUCTION: The seat is constructed of a 1/2 thick curved plywood seat panel, covered with fire retardant polyurethane foam 2 thick 2.8 lb. density foam with a 60 lb. IFD at 25% deflection. The bottom of all seat panels shall be covered with a black Accord fabric. Model # Description Grade Height: 18-1/2 Depth: 19-5/8 Width: 17 Seat Height: 18 COM Yardage: 5/8 yard O COM OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM O GR0 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR1 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR2 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR3 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR4 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR5 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR6 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 6 ANCHOR HIGH STOOL Height: 27-3/4 Depth: 20 Width: 17 Seat Height: 18 COM Yardage: 5/8 yard O COM OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM O GR0 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR1 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR2 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR3 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR4 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR5 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE O GR6 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

215 Anchor Seating ANCHOR JUVENILE SIDE CHAIR FRONT LEGS: Shall be solid oak, 1 x 2, with all edges and bottom shaped to a 1/8 radius, double doweled into the side rail and sled rails. SLED BASE RUNNERS: Runners are constructed of 1 x 2 solid oak members. Runners are set flush to side of front and back leg and are double doweled and glued in place. All bottom corners of leg and runners are radiused to a 1 1/8 radius corner. SIDE SEAT RAIL: Shall be solid oak 1 x 1 3/4, double doweled and blind screwed into front seat rail and double doweled and blind screwed into back seat rail. The bottom corners to be radiused to a 1/8 radius. SEAT RAIL: Shall be 1 x 2 1/2 solid oak, profiled to seat contour and double doweled and blind screwed into the front and back legs. CROSS STRETCHERS: Shall be 1 x 1 3/4 solid oak, double doweled and blind screwed into the sled base runners. SEAT CONSTRUCTION: The seat is constructed of a 1/2 thick curved plywood seat panel, covered with fire retardant polyurethane foam 1-1/2 thick 2.8 lb. density foam with a 60 lb. IFD at 25% deflection. The bottom of all seat panels shall be covered with a black Accord fabric. UPHOLSTERED BACK: Upholstered back shall be constructed of 7/8 thick curved plywood fully wrapped with 1 thick 1.2 lb. density fire retardant foam with 32 lb. IFD at 25% deflection. The back is demountable to facilitate reupholstery without the use of exposed screws on the back post. Model # Description Grade Height: 25-3/4 Depth: 19-5/8 Width: 17 Seat Depth: 12-3/4 Seat Height: 15-3/4 COM Yardage: 5/8 yard 220-J6-O COM OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM 220-J6-O GR0 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-O GR1 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-O GR2 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-O GR3 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-O GR4 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-O GR5 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-O GR6 OAK, UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

216 Cumming Seating CUMMINGS CHAIR FRONT LEGS: The front legs shall be maple, 1-3/8 x 1-3/8 and set 90 degrees in both directions to the floor. A 3/32 high x 3/32 deep reveal shall be machined into the leg on all four sides 1-1/2 up from the bottom. The front legs shall be mortised, glued flush to the apron rails. The legs shall be reinforced with corner blocks screwed into the legs and rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16 radius. BACK POSTS: The back posts shall be edge glued maple, 1-3/8 x 1-3/8, profiled to the desired angles and a 3/32 high x 3/32 deep reveal shall be machined into the leg on all four sides 1-1/2 up from the bottom. The back posts shall be mortised, glued flush to the apron rails. The posts shall be reinforced with corner blocks screwed into the legs and rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16 radius. STRETCHER ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall be solid maple, consisting of two side stretchers, 1-3/8 square tenoned into the front and back legs and glued flush on the leg. Two cross stretchers, 1-3/8 square, shall be tenoned into the side stretchers, and spaced 3-7/8 apart. The header shall be located 8-1/2 off the floor, and shall be parallel to floor. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16 radius. CORNER REINFORCEMENT: A mitered corner block shall be glued and screwed at the corner intersection of seat apron rails, legs and back posts. The corner blocks shall be attached to the adjacent apron rails with #10 flat head wood screws. A 3 long hex lag screw with flat washer shall pass through the corner block and into the inside corner of each leg and back post. BACK ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall consist of a top rail of solid maple and three back options. The top rail shall be 1 thick x 5-1/8 high profiled to match the back posts, and tennoned and glued flush to the back legs. The back options: fully upholstered back shall be an insert, profiled to match back posts, upholstered on both sides, fitted between the top rail and back posts. Full-slat back shall be an 1-3/8 horizontal member, 1-3/8 from top rail, glued flush to the back posts with three solid maple slats, 1-3/8 wide with 1 between slats, spanning from the top rail to the back apron. Partial-slat back shall be an 1-3/8 horizontal member, 1-3/8 from top rail, glued flush to the back posts with three brushed aluminum slats, 1-3/8 wide with 1 between slats, spanning from the top rail to the horizontal member with the lower portion of the back open. SEAT: The wood seat shall be edge glued solid maple, 1 thick, saddled 1/2 deep with a 1/4 radius along the front edge. The upholstered seat shall consist of 1/2 thick plywood, fit between the side aprons, covered with 1 thick, fire retardant, polyurethane foam with 2.8 lbs. density and 70 lbs. ILD. Seat is then upholstered with selected cover and the bottom side of seat shall be covered with black Accord fabric, attached by means of #10 oval head wood screws, through the corner blocks. ARMS: The arm shall be 1-3/8 thick x 1-3/8 wide, and glued flush to the back post. The vertical support shall be 1-3/8 x 1-3/8, mortised and tenoned and glued flush to the arm, glued and screwed flush to the side rail. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16 radius. GLIDES: All chairs shall have plastic nail glides. CUMMINGS ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade Wood Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yards Wood Slat Back with Wood Seat CM.A.3S.WS SLAT BACK WITH WOOD SEAT CM.A.3S.US COM WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM CM.A.3S.US GR0 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 CM.A.3S.US GR1 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 CM.A.3S.US GR2 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 CM.A.3S.US GR3 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 CM.A.3S.US GR4 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 CM.A.3S.US GR5 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 CM.A.3S.US GR6 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 Aluminium Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yards Upholstered Seat and Back COM: 1-1/3 yards Aluminium Back with Wood Seat Height: 32 Depth: 21-3/4 Width: 21-3/4 Seat Depth: 17 Seat Height: 18-1/2 Arm Height: 26 CM.A.MD.WS ALUM BACK W/WOOD SEAT CM.A.MD.US COM ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM CM.A.MD.US GR0 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 CM.A.MD.US GR1 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 CM.A.MD.US GR2 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 CM.A.MD.US GR3 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 CM.A.MD.US GR4 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 CM.A.MD.US GR5 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 CM.A.MD.US GR6 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 CM.A.UB.US COM UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM CM.A.UB.US GR0 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 CM.A.UB.US GR1 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 CM.A.UB.US GR2 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 CM.A.UB.US GR3 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 CM.A.UB.US GR4 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 CM.A.UB.US GR5 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 CM.A.UB.US GR6 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

217 Cummings Seating CUMMINGS SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade Wood Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yards Wood Slat Back with Wood Seat CM.S.3S.WS WOOD SLAT BACK W/ WOOD SEAT CM.S.3S.US COM WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM CM.S.3S.US GR0 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 CM.S.3S.US GR1 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 CM.S.3S.US GR2 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 CM.S.3S.US GR3 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 CM.S.3S.US GR4 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 CM.S.3S.US GR5 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 CM.S.3S.US GR6 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 Aluminium Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yards Upholstered Seat and Back COM: 1-1/3 yards Aluminium Back with Wood Seat CM.S.MD.WS ALUM BACK W/ WOOD SEAT CM.S.MD.US COM ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM CM.S.MD.US GR0 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 CM.S.MD.US GR1 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 CM.S.MD.US GR2 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 CM.S.MD.US GR3 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 CM.S.MD.US GR4 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 CM.S.MD.US GR5 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 CM.S.MD.US GR6 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 Height: 32 Depth: 21-3/4 Width: 21-3/4 CM.S.UB.US COM UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM Seat Depth: 17 CM.S.UB.US GR0 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 Seat Height: 18-1/2 CM.S.UB.US GR1 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 CM.S.UB.US GR2 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 CM.S.UB.US GR3 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 CM.S.UB.US GR4 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 CM.S.UB.US GR5 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 CM.S.UB.US GR6 UPH BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

218 Cummings Lite Seating CUMMINGS LITE CHAIR FRONT LEGS: The front legs shall be maple, 1-3/8 x 1-3/8 and set 90 degrees in both directions to the floor. A 3/32 high x 3/32 deep reveal shall be machined into the leg on all four sides 1-1/2 up from the bottom. The front legs shall be mortised, glued flush to the apron rails. The legs shall be reinforced with corner blocks screwed into the legs and rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16 radius. BACK POSTS: The back posts shall be edge glued maple, 1-3/8 x 1-3/8, profiled to the desired angles and a 3/32 high x 3/32 deep reveal shall be machined into the leg on all four sides 1-1/2 up from the bottom. The back posts shall be mortised, glued flush to the apron rails. The posts shall be reinforced with corner blocks screwed into the legs and rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16 radius. STRETCHER ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall be solid maple, consisting of two side stretchers, 1-3/8 square tenoned into the front and back legs and glued flush on the leg. Two cross stretchers, 1-3/8 square, shall be tenoned into the side stretchers, and spaced 3-7/8 apart. The header shall be located 8-1/2 off the floor, and shall be parallel to floor. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16 radius. CORNER REINFORCEMENT: A mitered corner block shall be glued and screwed at the corner intersection of seat apron rails, legs and back posts. The corner blocks shall be attached to the adjacent apron rails with #10 flat head wood screws. A 3 long hex lag screw with flat washer shall pass through the corner block and into the inside corner of each leg and back post. BACK ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall consist of a top rail of solid maple and three back options. The top rail shall be 1 thick x 5-1/8 high profiled to match the back posts, and tennoned and glued flush to the back legs. The back options: fully upholstered back shall be an insert, profiled to match back posts, upholstered on both sides, fitted between the top rail and back posts. Full-slat back shall be an 1-3/8 horizontal member, 1-3/8 from top rail, glued flush to the back posts with three solid maple slats, 1-3/8 wide with 1 between slats, spanning from the top rail to the back apron. Partial-slat back shall be an 1-3/8 horizontal member, 1-3/8 from top rail, glued flush to the back posts with three brushed aluminum slats, 1-3/8 wide with 1 between slats, spanning from the top rail to the horizontal member with the lower portion of the back open. SEAT: The wood seat shall be edge glued solid maple, 1 thick, saddled 1/2 deep with a 1/4 radius along the front edge. The upholstered seat shall consist of 1/2 thick plywood, fit between the side aprons, covered with 1 thick, fire retardant, polyurethane foam with 2.8 lbs. density and 70 lbs. ILD. Seat is then upholstered with selected cover and the bottom side of seat shall be covered with black Accord fabric, attached by means of #10 oval head wood screws, through the corner blocks. GLIDES: All chairs shall have plastic nail glides. Model # Description Grade Wood Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yards Wood Slat Back with Wood Seat CML.S.3S.WS SLAT BACK W/ WOOD SEAT CML.S.3S.US COM WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM CML.S.3S.US GR0 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 CML.S.3S.US GR1 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 CML.S.3S.US GR2 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 CML.S.3S.US GR3 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 CML.S.3S.US GR4 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 CML.S.3S.US GR5 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 CML.S.3S.US GR6 WOOD SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 Aluminium Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yards Upholstered Seat and Back COM: 1-1/3 yards Aluminium Back with Wood Seat Height: 32 Depth: 21-3/4 Width: 19-1/2 Seat Depth: 17 Seat Height: 18-1/2 CML.S.MD.WS ALUM BACK W/ WOOD SEAT CML.S.MD.US COM ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM CML.S.MD.US GR0 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 CML.S.MD.US GR1 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 CML.S.MD.US GR2 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 CML.S.MD.US GR3 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 CML.S.MD.US GR4 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 CML.S.MD.US GR5 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 CML.S.MD.US GR6 CML.S.UB.US COM CML.S.UB.US GR0 CML.S.UB.US GR1 CML.S.UB.US GR2 CML.S.UB.US GR3 CML.S.UB.US GR4 CML.S.UB.US GR5 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 CML.S.MD.US GR6 ALUM BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 216 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

219 Diametron Seating DIAMETRON CHAIR FRAME: The legs shall be 1-1/2 diameter x 13 gauge CREW tubular steel. The back legs and side chair front legs shall be fitted with a tamper resistant dome shaped alloy cap, screwed and glued or welded to the legs. The back legs shall have back tabs MIG welded and ground from inside face only. All four sides of the chair shall have 3/16 x 1-1/4 solid steel rails MIG welded on both sides and ground on the outside. The rails shall have four 3/16 thick seat brackets welded to rails to form a gusset. The back rail shall be formed to follow seat radius. All metal parts shall be epoxy powder coated and heat cured. UPHOLSTERED SEAT: The seat shall be 7/16 thick molded plywood with compound curves. The seat shall be profiled to fit around each leg. The seat shall be fitted with four 1/4-20 T nuts for attachment to the frame. The seat shall be covered with 1 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam with a 2.8 lb. density and 45 lb. ILD. Cover shall be wrapped and stapled on the underside. The underside shall be covered with a black Accord fabric. UPHOLSTERED BACK: The back shall be 7/16 thick high molded plywood with compound curves. The back shall be profiled to fit around the cap of the back legs. The back shall be fitted with four 1/4-20 T nuts for attachment to frame. The back shall be covered on the front face with 3/4 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam with a 2.8 lb. density and 45 lb. ILD. The back face shall be covered with 1/2 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam with a 1.8 lb. density and 22 lb. ILD. Cover shall be sewn across the top and stapled on the sides and bottom. The back shall be secured to the frame with 1/4-20 x 3/8 black oxided button head cap screws. WOOD SEAT: The seat shall be 3/8 thick molded plywood with compound curves. The face shall be select Grade A oak or maple veneer with the grain running front to back. The seat shall be profiled to fit around each leg. The seat shall be fitted with four 1/4-20 closed end black oxided inserts machined flush into face of seat for attachment to frame. WOOD BACK: The back shall be 3/8 thick molded plywood with compound curves. Both faces shll be covered with select Grade A oak or maple veneer with the grain running vertically. The back shall be profiled to fit around the cap of the back legs. The back shall be fitted with four 1/4-20 closed end black oxided inserts machined flush into face of the back for attahment to frame. The back shall be secured to the frame with 1/4-20 x 3/8 black oxided button head cap screws. ARM: The arm chair shall have a steel T bar MIG welded and ground to the front and back rail to receive the arm pad. The arm pad shall be 3/4 thick x 2-1/2 wide x 15-1/2 long, constructed of a steel insert covered with a textured black self-skinning urethane foam. GLIDES: The glides shall be 1-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 high, constructed of black Supertuf nylon. The glide shall be molded around a 1/4-20 bolt which engages into a spring steel insert in the leg. DIAMETRON ARM CHAIR Height: 32-1/2 Depth: 22 Width: 22-3/4 Seat Depth: 18-3/8 Seat Height: 18 Arm Height: 24-3/4 COM Yardage: 1-1/2 yards Model # Description Grade USB COM UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM USB GR0 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR1 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR2 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR3 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR4 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR5 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR6 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 6 DIAMETRON SIDE CHAIR Height: 32-1/2 Depth: 22 Width: 19-1/2 Seat Depth: 18-3/8 Seat Height: 18 COM Yardage: 1 yard LV MAPLE VENEER SEAT & BACK OV OAK VENEER SEAT & BACK USB COM UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM USB GR0 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR1 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR2 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR3 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR4 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR5 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE USB GR6 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 6 DIAMETRON JUVENILE CHAIR Height: 26 Depth: 17-1/2 Width: 16-1/2 Seat Depth: 15-5/8 Uph. Seat Height: 14-1/2 Wood Seat Height: 13-3/4 COM Yardage: 3/4 yard 210-J6-OV OAK VENEER SEAT & BACK 210-J6-USB COM UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM 210-J6-USB GR0 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-USB GR1 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-USB GR2 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-USB GR3 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-USB GR4 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-USB GR5 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE J6-USB GR6 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

220 Linden Seating LINDEN SIDE CHAIR This chair series is offered as a side chair only and features a fully upholstered seat and three back configurations, including fully upholstered, partial slat and wood panel back. The frames are milled from premium grade, northern grown, American hardwood. FRONT LEGS: The front legs shall be 1-3/8 square at the top and shall be profiled to 1 square at the bottom. Each leg is arched outward from its connection to the side and front frame rails. Each leg shall receive a mortise at the inner top faces to accept tenons, milled at the ends of the seat front and side rails. The seat rail to leg joints shall be glued and cross pinned and reinforced with hardwood corner blocks, screwed into the legs and rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16" radius. BACK POSTS: The back posts shall be edge glued and milled to form a 1-5/8 t x 2 w hardwood blank. The post shall be contoured to arch away from the seat in all directions. The top end of the post shall receive a tenon for connection to the bottom side of the top rail. The inner faces of the post shall be mortised to accept tenons, milled at the ends of the seat back and side rails. The seat rail to post joints shall be glued and cross pinned and reinforced with hardwood corner blocks, screwed into the legs and rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16" radius. SEAT RAILS: The front and side rails are 1-1/4 t x 2 h and the back rail is 1-1/4 t x 2-3/4 h. All rails connect to the front legs and back posts with mortise and tennon joinery as described under back post and front leg. The back rail shall be mortised to accept the four vertical back slats, back wood panel or upholstered infill. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16" radius. TOP RAIL: The top rail shall be 1 square and contoured to blend to the back posts of the chair. The bottom side of the rail is mortised to accept tenons milled at the top of both back posts. These joints are glued and cross pinned to form a superior connection. The bottom edge of the rail shall also be mortised to accept the four vertical back slats, back wood panel or upholstered infill. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16" radius. BACK SLATS: The back slats shall be 7/16 t x 1 w and shall be profiled over the length of the component to form a comfortable back rest for the chair. The slats shall be mortised and tenoned into the bottom edge of the top rail and top edge of the rear seat rail. These joints are glued and cross pinned to form a superior connection. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16" radius. BACK PANEL: The back panel shall be 7/16 t x 6 w and shall be profiled over the length of the component to form a comfortable back rest for the chair. The back panel shall be mortised and tenoned into the bottom edge of the top rail and top edge of the rear seat rail. These joints are glued and cross pinned to form a superior connection. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16" radius. UPHOLSTERED BACK: The upholstered back shall be fabricated from a ¾ t hardwood frame. The frame shall be doweled at the corners, contoured to match the back leg curvature and shall fit uniformly between the back posts, top rail and seat back rail. The upholstery begins by placing propex webbing over the frame then applying a ½ t, 1.2 lb density foam on the back side and 1 t, 1.2lb density foam on the face side. A fabric cover is then pulled over the front and back surfaces and fixed in place. The upholstered frame shall be held in place with two dowels interfacing with the top rail and two wood screws interfacing with the bottom rail. UPHOLSTERED SEAT: The upholstered seat shall be fabricated from a ¾ t plywood panel, milled to follow the hardwood frame. The face side of the plywood shall receive a 1" thick, fire retardant polyurethane foam of 2.8 lb. density and 45 lb. IFD. The bottom shall be covered with black Accord fabric. Seats are fastened in place with four #10 flat head wood screws, passing through the corner blocks and into the bottom face of the seat assembly. CORNER REINFORCEMENT: A mitered corner block shall be glued and screwed at the corner intersection of seat apron rails, legs and back posts. The corner blocks shall be attached to the adjacent apron rails with #10 flat head wood screws. A 3 long hex lag screw with flat washer shall pass through the corner block and into the inside corner of each leg and back post. Each corner block shall be bore to allow attachment of the upholstered seat. GLIDES: All chairs shall have plastic nail glides. Height: 32 Depth: 23 Width: 23-1/4 Seat Depth: 17 Seat Height: 19 COM Yardage: 1-1/3 yards Model # Description Grade LIN.S.4S.WS PARTIAL SLAT BACK W/WOOD SEAT LIN.S.4S.US COM PARTIAL SLAT BACK W/UPH SEAT COM LIN.S.4S.US GR0 PARTIAL SLAT BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 0 LIN.S.4S.US GR1 PARTIAL SLAT BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 1 LIN.S.4S.US GR2 PARTIAL SLAT BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 2 LIN.S.4S.US GR3 PARTIAL SLAT BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 3 LIN.S.4S.US GR4 PARTIAL SLAT BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 4 LIN.S.4S.US GR5 PARTIAL SLAT BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 5 LIN.S.4S.US GR6 PARTIAL SLAT BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 6 LIN.S.P.WS PANEL BACK W/WOOD SEAT LIN.S.P.US COM PANEL BACK W/UPH SEAT COM LIN.S.P.US GR0 PANEL BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 0 LIN.S.P.US GR1 PANEL BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 1 LIN.S.P.US GR2 PANEL BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 2 LIN.S.P.US GR3 PANEL BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 3 LIN.S.P.US GR4 PANEL BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 4 LIN.S.P.US GR5 PANEL BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 5 LIN.S.P.US GR6 PANEL BACK W/UPH SEAT GRADE 6 LIN.S.UB.US COM UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT COM LIN.S.UB.US GR0 UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT GRADE 0 LIN.S.UB.US GR1 UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT GRADE 1 LIN.S.UB.US GR2 UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT GRADE 2 LIN.S.UB.US GR3 UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT GRADE 3 LIN.S.UB.US GR4 UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT GRADE 4 LIN.S.UB.US GR5 UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT GRADE 5 LIN.S.UB.US GR6 UPHOLSTERED BACK & SEAT GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

221 Rhodes Seating RHODES ARM CHAIR FRONT LEGS: The front legs shall be solid oak or maple 1-1/4 x 1-3/16, set 90 degrees in both directions to the floor and doweled and glued to the side rail and back apron and reinforced with corner blocks screwed into the rails and legs. BACK LEGS: The back legs shall be solid oak or maple 1-1/4 x 1-7/8, steam bent and profiled to the desired curved shape. Back legs shall be doweled and glued to the side rail and back apron and reinforced with corner blocks screwed into rails and legs. FRONT APR0N: The apron shall be solid oak or maple 1 x 1-11/16, doweled and glued to the front legs and reinforced with corner blocks. The apron shall be recessed from the outside face of the legs. The apron rail shall be drilled and counter-bored for #10 screws for seat attachment. Bottom edges shall be eased to eliminate sharp corners. BACK APRON: The apron shall be solid oak or maple 1 x 3-7/16 steam bent and doweled and glued to the back legs and reinforced with corner blocks. CORNER REINFORCEMENT: A mitered corner block shall be glued and screwed at the corner intersection of seat apron rails, legs and back posts. The corner blocks shall be attached to the adjacent apron rails with #10 flat head wood screws. A 3 long hex lag screw with flat washer shall pass through the corner block and into the inside corner of each leg and back post. SIDE RAIL: The side rail shall be oak or maple 1 x 1-11/16, doweled and glued to the front and back legs. The rail shall be canted 4 degrees toward the rear. The side rail shall be counter-bored for #10 screws for seat attachment. Bottom edges shall be eased to eliminate sharp corners. STRETCHER ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall be oak or maple consisting of two (2) side headers, 1 x 1 tenoned into front and back legs with an integral chuck and two (2) cross stretchers, 3/4 x 1, tenoned to the side headers with integral chucks. The chucks shall be pinned from the underside. The side headers shall be 9 above the floor and shall be canted 4 degrees toward the rear. The cross stretchers shall be centered so that the stretcher does not interfere with legroom. The header and stretchers shall be recessed from adjoining members. BACK ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall consist of a top rail and eight (8) slats of solid oak or maple. The top rail shall be 1 x 5, profiled to the desired shape and doweled and glued flush to the inside face of the back legs. The slats shall each be 1-1/16 x 11/16 steam bent and tenoned to the top rail and back apron. The slats shall be recessed from the inside face of the top rail and back apron. The cord line of the back pitch shall be 106 degrees and the included angle with the seat 102 degrees. WOOD SEAT: The seat shall be solid oak or maple produced from 5/4 stock and saddled to desired contour. The saddle shall be ½ deep extending to no greater than 1 from the back edge. The seat shall overhang the front and side aprons and shall be gained into the back apron. The front edge of the seat shall have a ¼ radiused waterfall comfort edge. The seat shall be secured by means of #10 wood screws screwed from the underside of the front and side aprons. ARMS: The arm assembly shall consist of a solid oak or maple arm rail and a support stump. The arm shall be 26-1/4 above the floor at the front and 27 The arm rail shall be 1-1/4 x 2 x 13-1/2, profiled to the desired shape and doweled flush to a 1-1/4 x 1-3/4 stump. The arm assembly shall be joined flush to the back leg post and seat and reinforced with a screw and flush grain plug through the outside of the leg post. GLIDES: All chairs shall have plastic nail glides. Model # Description Grade L O SOLID MAPLE SEAT SOLID OAK SEAT Height: 32-1/2 Depth: 22-1/2 Width: 21-3/16 Seat Depth: 17-1/2 Seat Height: 18 COM Yardage: 1 yard US-L COM US-L GR US-L GR US-L GR US-L GR US-L GR US-L GR US-L GR US-O COM US-O GR US-O GR US-O GR US-O GR US-O GR US-O GR US-O GR6 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

222 Rhodes Seating RHODES SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade L O SOLID MAPLE SEAT SOLID OAK SEAT Height: 32-1/2 Depth: 21-1/2 Width: 18-5/8 Seat Depth: 17 Seat Height: 18 COM Yardage: 1 yard US-L COM MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM US-L GR0 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR1 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR2 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR3 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR4 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR5 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR6 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O COM OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM US-O GR0 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR1 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR2 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR3 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR4 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR5 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR6 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 6 RHODES JUVENILE SIDE CHAIR Model # Description 840-J6-O OAK Height: 27-3/4 Width: 14-5/8 Seat Height: 16-1/2 220 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

223 Reference Seating REFERENCE CHAIR The chair shall be an ergonomic task chair with gas cylinder height adjustment of the seat and manual height and pitch adjustment of the back. BASE: The base shall consist of a 5-prong spider with twin wheel hooded casters, a gas cylinder, an adjustment mechanism and a telescoping shroud to conceal the gas cylinder. All exposed base parts shall be of black structured plastic or metal. SEAT: The seat shall be molded plywood covered with 2-1/2 thick fire retardant foam with a density of 2.8 lbs. and a firmness 25% deflection) of 45 lbs. The seat shall be fitted to a self-rimmed vacuum formed seat pan designed to conceal the adjustment mechanism. BACK: The back shall be molded plywood covered with 2 thick fire retardant foam with a density of 1.8 lbs. and firmness 25% deflection) of 33 lbs. The back shall be fitted to a self-rimmed vacuum formed back panel designed to conceal the adjustment mechanism. The back post shall be covered with black bellows. ARMS: The arms shall be a steel tubular frame with a mounting plate welded to the bottom side. The entire arm shall be molded with a self-skinning black urethane. The arm assembly shall be bolted to the underside of the seat and shall not interfere with the back movement REFERENCE ARM CHAIR Height Overall: Depth: 17-1/2 Width: 22 Seat Height: COM Yardage: 7/8 yard Model # Description Grade USB COM LOW BASE COM USB GR0 LOW BASE GRADE USB GR1 LOW BASE GRADE USB GR2 LOW BASE GRADE USB GR3 LOW BASE GRADE USB GR4 LOW BASE GRADE USB GR5 LOW BASE GRADE USB GR6 LOW BASE GRADE 6 REFERENCE SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height Overall: Depth: 17-1/2 Width: 18 Seat Height: COM Yardage: 7/8 yard USB COM LOW BASE SWIVEL COM USB GR0 LOW BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR1 LOW BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR2 LOW BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR3 LOW BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR4 LOW BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR5 LOW BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR6 LOW BASE SWIVEL GRADE 6 REFERENCE ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height Overall: Depth: 17-1/2 Width: 22 Seat Height: COM Yardage: 7/8 yard USB COM HIGH BASE COM USB GR0 HIGH BASE GRADE USB GR1 HIGH BASE GRADE USB GR2 HIGH BASE GRADE USB GR3 HIGH BASE GRADE USB GR4 HIGH BASE GRADE USB GR5 HIGH BASE GRADE USB GR6 HIGH BASE GRADE 6 REFERENCE SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height Overall: Depth: 17-1/2 Width: 18 Seat Height: COM Yardage: 7/8 yard USB COM HIGH BASE SWIVEL COM USB GR0 HIGH BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR1 HIGH BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR2 HIGH BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR3 HIGH BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR4 HIGH BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR5 HIGH BASE SWIVEL GRADE USB GR6 HIGH BASE SWIVEL GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

224 Straiter Seating STRAITER CHAIR FRONT LEGS: The front legs shall be solid maple, 1-1/2 x 1-1/4, doweled and glued to side rail and front apron rail, and reinforced with hardwood corner blocks screwed and glued into rails and legs. BACK LEGS: The back legs shall be solid maple, 1-1/2 x 1-1/4, profiled to the desired curved shape. Back legs shall be doweled and glued to side rail and back apron and reinforced with corner blocks screwed and glued into rails and legs. FRONT APRON: The apron shall be solid maple, 1 x 2, doweled and glued to the front legs and reinforced with corner blocks. BACK APRON: The apron shall be solid maple, 1 x 2-7/8, doweled and glued to the back legs and reinforced with corner blocks. CORNER REINFORCEMENT: A mitered corner block shall be glued and screwed at the corner intersection of seat apron rails, legs and back posts. The corner blocks shall be attached to the adjacent apron rails with #10 flat head wood screws. A 3" long hex lag screw with flat washer shall pass through the corner block and into the inside corner of each leg and back post. Each corner shall be bore to allow attachement of the upholstered seat. SIDE RAIL: The side rail shall be solid maple, 1 x 2, doweled and glued to the front and back legs. STRETCHER ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall be solid maple, consisting of two side stretchers, 1 x 1 doweled into front and back legs and two cross stretchers, 7/8 x 1 doweled into side stretchers. BACK ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall consist of five slats of solid maple. The slats shall each be 1 x 1-3/4, profiled to the desired shape, and tenoned to the inside face of the back leg posts. UPHOLSTERED SEAT: The upholstered seat shall be constructed of 1 thick high density foam, lined and covered with the specified fabric. The upholstered foam is attached to a vented hardwood plywood panel base. The seat panel shall be attached to the chair frame with four recessed wood screws that penetrate the corner reinforcing blocks. All upholstery fittings shall conform to IBC flammability regulations. The dimensions of the upholstered seat shall be 18-1/2 wide at the front and 16-1/2 wide at the back. WOOD SEAT: The seat shall be edge glued solid oak or maple, 1" thick, machined to the profile and sight line extensions of adjoining parts, and saddled 5/8" deep with a 1/4" radius along the front top corner and a 1/16" radius along the remaining exposed corners. The seat shall be attached by means of #10 x 1-3/4" oval head wood screws, counter bored in apron rails. GLIDES: All chairs shall have plastic nail glides. STRAITER ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade STR.A.LB.WS.L STR.A.LB.WS.O MAPLE W/ WOOD SEAT OAK W/ WOOD SEAT Height: 34-1/2 Depth: 18-3/8 Width: 18-5/8 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 17-1/2 Arm Height: 25-3/4 COM Yardage: 7/8 yard STRAITER SIDE CHAIR STR.A.LB.US.L COM MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM STR.A.LB.US.L GR0 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 0 STR.A.LB.US.L GR1 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 1 STR.A.LB.US.L GR2 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 2 STR.A.LB.US.L GR3 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 3 STR.A.LB.US.L GR4 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 4 STR.A.LB.US.L GR5 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 5 STR.A.LB.US.L GR6 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 6 STR.A.LB.US.O COM OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM STR.A.LB.US.O GR0 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 0 STR.A.LB.US.O GR1 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 1 STR.A.LB.US.O GR2 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 2 STR.A.LB.US.O GR3 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 3 STR.A.LB.US.O GR4 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 4 STR.A.LB.US.O GR5 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 5 STR.A.LB.US.O GR6 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 6 STR.S.LB.WS.L STR.S.LB.WS.O MAPLE W/ WOOD SEAT OAK W/ WOOD SEAT Height: 34-1/2 Depth: 18-3/8 Width: 18-5/8 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 17-1/2 COM Yardage: 7/8 yard STR.S.LB.US.L COM MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM STR.S.LB.US.L GR0 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 0 STR.S.LB.US.L GR1 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 1 STR.S.LB.US.L GR2 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 2 STR.S.LB.US.L GR3 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 3 STR.S.LB.US.L GR4 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 4 STR.S.LB.US.L GR5 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 5 STR.S.LB.US.L GR6 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 6 STR.S.LB.US.O COM OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM STR.S.LB.US.O GR0 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 0 STR.S.LB.US.O GR1 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 1 STR.S.LB.US.O GR2 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 2 STR.S.LB.US.O GR3 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 3 STR.S.LB.US.O GR4 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 4 STR.S.LB.US.O GR5 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 5 STR.S.LB.US.O GR6 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

225 Tempus Seating TEMPUS CHAIR FRONT LEGS: The front legs shall be solid oak or maple, 1-1/2 x 1-1/4. The front leg will be tapered top to bottom to follow the taper of the seat, and set 90 degrees in both directions to the floor. A 1/16 high x 1/16 deep reveal shall be machined into the leg on all four sides 1-1/4 up from the bottom. The front legs shall be glued and doweled to the apron rails. The legs shall be reinforced with corner blocks screwed into the legs and rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/32 radius. BACK LEGS: The back legs shall be edge glued solid oak or maple, 1-1/4 x 1-1/2, profiled to the desired angles and a 1/16 high x 1/16 deep reveal shall be machined into the leg on all four sides 1-1/4 up from the bottom. The back legs shall be glued and doweled to the apron rails. The legs shall be reinforced with corner blocks screwed into the legs and rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/32 radius. FRONT AND SIDE APRON: The front apron shall be 3/4 thick x 17-1/2 long solid oak or maple. The side apron shall be 3/4 thick x 15-3/8 long solid oak or maple. The aprons shall be machined to have a full length arch 2-5/8 high at each end and 1-3/16 high at the center. The apron shall be doweled at each end and recessed 3/32 from each leg. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/32 radius. BACK APRON: The back apron shall be 1-3/8 thick x 15-1/2 long edge glued solid oak or maple. The apron shall be machined to have a full length arch 3-1/2 high at each end and 2-1/2 high at the center. The apron shall be doweled at each end and recessed 3/32 from each leg and from the top of the seat. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/32 radius. CORNER REINFORCEMENT: A mitered corner block shall be glued and screwed at the corner intersection of seat apron rails, legs and back posts. The corner blocks shall be attached to the adjacent apron rails with #10 flat head wood screws. A 3 long hex lag screw with flat washer shall pass through the corner block and into the inside corner of each leg and back post. STRETCHER ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall be solid oak or maple, consisting of two side stretchers, 1 square tenoned into the front and back legs and are centered on the leg. Three cross stretchers, 1 square, shall be tenoned into the side stretchers, and spaced 3-1/2 apart. The header shall be located 8-1/2 off the floor, and shall be parallel to floor. The headers shall be set flush with the cross stretchers and all exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/32 radius. BACK ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall consist of a top rail and banister of solid oak or maple. The top rail shall be 1 thick x 2-1/4 high continuously over a profiled arch. The top rail shall be glued and doweled to the back legs. The banister shall be 7 wide made of 1/2 thick edge glued solid oak or maple. A 2-1/4 square aperture shall be machined into the banister 2-1/4 from the top. The banister shall be mortised and tenoned, glued and pinned to the top rail and back rail. The included angle from the seat to banister shall be 108 degrees. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/32 radius. WOOD SEAT: The seat shall be edge glued solid oak or maple, 1-3/16 thick, machined to the profile and sight line extensions of adjoining parts, and saddled 13/16 deep with a 1/2 radius along the front edge. The bottom front and side edges of the seat shall have a 1/16 x 1/16 reveal. The seat shall be attached by means of #10 x 1-3/4 oval head wood screws, counter-bored in apron rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/32 radius. ARMS: The arms shall consist of a solid oak or maple arm rail and vertical support. The arm shall be 1-1/8 thick x 2 wide, profiled to the desired shape and screwed and plugged into the back post. The vertical support shall be 1-1/4 x 1-1/2, mortised and tenoned and glued to the arm, and glued and screwed from the inside face of the side rail. The support shall be gained to allow for seat expansion. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/32 radius. GLIDES: All chairs shall have plastic nail glides. TEMPUS ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade L O MAPLE W/ WOOD SEAT OAK W/ WOOD SEAT Height: 39 Depth: 21-1/4 Width: 24-5/8 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 17 Arm Height: 25-1/4 COM Yardage: 1 yard US-L COM MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM US-L GR0 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR1 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR2 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR3 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR4 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR5 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR6 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O COM OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM US-O GR0 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR1 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR2 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR3 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR4 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR5 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR6 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

226 Tempus, Thurber Seating TEMPUS SIDE CHAIR Specifications same as Tempus Arm Chair minus arms. Model # Description Grade L O MAPLE W/ WOOD SEAT OAK W/ WOOD SEAT Height: 39 Depth: 21-1/4 Width: 20-1/4 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 17 COM Yardage: 1 yard US-L COM MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM US-L GR0 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR1 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR2 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR3 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR4 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR5 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-L GR6 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O COM OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM US-O GR0 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR1 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR2 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR3 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR4 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR5 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE US-O GR6 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 6 THURBER CHAIR SEAT AND BACK SHELL: The seat and back shall be 7/16 thick, 7-ply molded plywood shell with compound curves forming an integral unit. All inner plys shall be free of voids or fill. The exposed faces shall be rotary cut oak or maple faces. The back shall have a through routed finger pull and all edges eased. The shell shall be secured to the base by means of four (4) 1/4-20 x 1 black oxided flat head socket cap screws which pass through the shell into the base and are secured with 1/4-20 nuts and lock washers. The screws are concealed by a black ABS cap flush mounted in the shell. BASE: The base shall be constructed of 1/4 x 7/8 eliptical 16 gauge tube. The rails shall be formed, 7 gauge hot-rolled steel. The frame shall be finished with a black epoxy powder coating and heat cured. GLIDES: The base shall be fitted with four (4) black ABS plastic, injection molded glides. Model # L Description MAPLE Height: 33 Depth: 22-1/2 Width: 18-1/4 Seat Depth: 18 Seat Height: The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

227 TJ Seating TJ CHAIR Chairs shall feature fully welded, tubular steel frames with molded plywood seat, back and arm components. Chairs are available in three sizes; Adult, Juvenile and Youth. Adult chairs may be specified with or without arms. Adult and Juvenile chairs are available in upholstered and caster models. Adult and juvenile versions may be stacked up to five(5) high, the youth version up to three(3) high. SEAT AND BACK: The seat and back shall be 3/8 thick, molded, hardwood veneer core plywood. Exposed faces shall be premium rotary white maple or red oak. Each formed component shall include an odd number of alternating, void free, inner plies. Components shall feature multiple, complex, compound curves forming an integral and ergonomically correct unit. Edges shall be sanded smooth, eased for comfort and finished to match the face finishes. The back shall be precision routed to interface with milled grooves at the inner quadrants of both rear leg/post components and shall lock securely and seamlessly to these components with injection molded, ABS domed caps and tamper resistant, stainless steel fasteners. The tamper resistant fasteners shall pass through a hole located at the upper rear of the leg/post and shall engage the back and cap. Backs also feature a routed handle hold near the top and centered in the back. A number of laser images may be cut into backs; these images are treated as custom and are subject to pricing based on the complexity of design. The seat shall be fitted with matching specie hardwood cleats. Each cleat shall be milled to fit securely into slots cut along the bottom of the seat blank. Each cleat shall be fitted with two(2) #8-32 T-nuts, imbedded in the rear side of the cleat, offering the advantage and strength of pull-through construction. The cleats shall be assembled to the seat bottom with glue and shall be held under pressure until the glue has set. Each seat shall fasten to the tubular frame with four(4) #8-32 x 1-1/4 long machine screws. The screws shall pass through the frame members and shall engage the inserts imbedded in the seat cleats. Upholstered Seats shall be the same as the wood seats above and shall include a fabric covered, foam lined, molded plywood appliqué. The molded plywood pan shall be formed to match the unique contour of the finished veneer seat. The core shall be 3/16 thick, multiple ply, hardwood, veneer core with alternating plies. The pan shall be perimeter cut to set back and follow the outer shape of the finished veneer seat, forming a finished perimeter reveal detail. Each pan shall be fitted with eight(8) #8-32 T-nuts, inserted into the top side and allowing eight(8) #8-32 machine screws to pass through the finished seat and seat pan and engaging the T-nuts on the opposite side. A layer of ½ thick, medium density foam shall be adhered to the face side of the plywood pan with the final upholstery being adhered over the foam and brought around the pan where it shall be securely fastened to the bottom side of the pan. ARMS: The arms shall be 1/2 thick, molded, hardwood veneer core plywood. Exposed faces shall be premium rotary white maple or red oak. Each formed component shall include and odd number of alternating, void free, inner plies. Arms shall be 2-1/4 wide and shall feature a radius on the front which shall follow the curve of the support frame. Arms shall attach to the support frame by passing four(4) ½ #8 truss head screws through a 12 gauge welded flange and into the back side of the arm. FRAMES: Frames shall be fabricated from 14 gauge, hot rolled and pickled in oil steel tubing. Components are precision cut and formed on computer numerically controlled tube processing equipment. Assembly fixtures shall be used to produce frame of repeated accuracy. Frames are TIG welded at all joints. The front legs and rear leg/posts are 1 diameter 14 gauge stock. The seat support frames are 7/8 diameter 14 gauge stock. The arm supports are ½ diameter, 1018 solid bar stock with a 12 gauge arm flange welded along the outside, upper quadrant. Each rear leg/post is slotted to accept the formed back. The interior of the leg/post shall receive a socket, welded into the inner front face and used in conjunction with a tamper resistant screw; to secure the back into the frame. Where casters are to be used; frames are fitted with a 7 gauge weld nut; set into the bottom of the leg, allowing for the caster and a mating lock nut. DOMED CAPS: Each rear leg/post of the chair shall be fitted with a domed closure cap. This cap shall be injection molded from recyclable, ABS material and shall be offered in black and arctic silver. The cap shall be designed to interface with the rear leg/post of the chair frame and molded plywood chair back. The cap shall feature an apron flange that drops into the rear leg/post, becoming trapped by the plywood back during assembly. The upper dome area of the cap shall be split to encompass the rear outer corners of the plywood back. UPHOLSTERED SEAT BUMPER TRAY: Upholstered seat versions of the chair are fitted with a bumper tray. The tray has a vacuum formed contour, matching the reverse contour of the fabric covered seat assembly. This allows for the chairs to be stacked without damaging the fabric or cushion or leaving impressions. The tray shall be fabricated from.125 gauge, black, haircell, textured, 100% regrind ABS. The forming of the tray shall allow assembly into the bottom side of the chair and shall wrap into the frame work, trapping the pan within the final assembly. SEAT BUMPER: Non-upholstered versions of the chair shall be fitted with four(4), 7/8 diameter, contoured, cushioning bumpers; coped to fit the corresponding frame. The bumpers shall be injection molded black polypropylene. Each bumper shall be located on and fastened to the 7/8 diameter frame tubing, facing down and preventing damage when chairs are stacked. Each bumper is held to the frame with one(1) ½ #8 pan head screw. CASTER: Each leg of a caster style chairs shall be fitted with one 1-3/8 diameter, dual wheel, full swivel, non-locking caster. The casters shall be fabricated from textured black nylon-6 and shall include a 5/16-18 x 5/8 threaded mounting stem, along with a ½ hex nut drive and locking nut. The caster stem shall engage a weld nut located in the bottom of the chair leg. The overall width of the caster shall be 1-7/8, with a mounting height of 1-1/2. The tire surface area shall be 1-1/8 with a turning radius of 1-1/4. Each caster shall have a load rating of 90 lbs. and shall be tested to both DIN/EN and international ANSI/BIFMA 5.1 standards. GLIDES: Each leg of a glide version chair shall be fitted with a domed, insert floor glide; allowing the chair to be moved about without damaging floor coverings. The glide shall be injection molded, black, low density polyethylene. The glides shall feature a pair of fins to center and hold the glide in the chair leg. The glide dome shall be 1 diameter and ½ H. The Worden Company Source Book October

228 TJ Seating TJ ADULT ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade TJ.A.WW.O TJ.A.WW.O.C TJ.A.WW.M TJ.A.WW.M.C WOOD BACK & SEAT, OAK TJ.A.WW.O WOOD BACK & SEAT, OAK WOOD BACK & SEAT, OAK - CASTERS WOOD BACK & SEAT, MAPLE WOOD BACK & SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS Standard With casters Height: 34-1/4 Depth: 21-1/4 Width: 24-1/4 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 16-1/2 Arm Height: 25-1/2 COM yardage: 1/2 yard TJ.A.WU.O COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK COM TJ.A.WU.O GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR0 TJ.A.WU.O GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR1 TJ.A.WU.O GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR2 TJ.A.WU.O GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR3 TJ.A.WU.O GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR4 TJ.A.WU.O GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR5 TJ.A.WU.O GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR6 TJ.A.WU.O.C COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS COM TJ.A.WU.O.C GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR0 TJ.A.WU.O.C GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR1 TJ.A.WU.O.C GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR2 TJ.A.WU.O.C GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR3 TJ.A.WU.O.C GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR4 TJ.A.WU.O.C GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR5 TJ.A.WU.O.C GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR6 TJ.A.WU.M COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE COM TJ.A.WU.M GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR0 TJ.A.WU.M GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR1 TJ.A.WU.M GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR2 TJ.A.WU.M GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR3 TJ.A.WU.M GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR4 TJ.A.WU.M GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR5 TJ.A.WU.M GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR6 TJ.A.WU.M.C COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS COM TJ.A.WU.M.C GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR0 TJ.A.WU.M.C GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR1 TJ.A.WU.M.C GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR2 TJ.A.WU.M.C GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR3 TJ.A.WU.M.C GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR4 TJ.A.WU.M.C GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR5 TJ.A.WU.M.C GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR6 TJ.A.L1W.O TJ.A.L1W.O.C TJ.A.L1W.M TJ.A.L1W.M.C LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, OAK LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS TJ.A.L1U.O COM LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK COM TJ.A.L1U.O GR0 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR0 TJ.A.L1U.O GR1 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR1 TJ.A.L1U.O GR2 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR2 TJ.A.L1U.O GR3 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR3 TJ.A.L1U.O GR4 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR4 TJ.A.L1U.O GR5 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR5 TJ.A.L1U.O GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR6 TJ.A.L1U.O.C COM LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS COM TJ.A.L1U.O.C GR0 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR0 TJ.A.L1U.O.C GR1 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR1 TJ.A.L1U.O.C GR2 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR2 TJ.A.L1U.O.C GR3 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR3 TJ.A.L1U.O.C GR4 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR4 TJ.A.L1U.O.C GR5 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR5 TJ.A.L1U.O.C GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR6 TJ.A.L1U.M COM LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE COM TJ.A.L1U.M GR0 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR0 TJ.A.L1U.M GR1 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR1 TJ.A.L1U.M GR2 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR2 TJ.A.L1U.M GR3 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR3 TJ.A.L1U.M GR4 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR4 TJ.A.L1U.M GR5 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR5 TJ.A.L1U.M GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR6 226 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

229 TJ Seating TJ ADULT ARM CHAIR cont'd Model # Description Grade Standard With casters TJ.A.L1U.M.C COM LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS COM TJ.A.L1U.M.C GR0 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR0 TJ.A.L1U.M.C GR1 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR1 TJ.A.L1U.M.C GR2 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR2 TJ.A.L1U.M.C GR3 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR3 TJ.A.L1U.M.C GR4 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR4 TJ.A.L1U.M.C GR5 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR5 TJ.A.L1U.M.C GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR6 TJ ADULT SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade TJ.S.WW.O TJ.S.WW.O.C TJ.S.WW.M TJ.S.WW.M.C WOOD BACK AND SEAT, OAK WOOD BACK AND SEAT, OAK - CASTERS WOOD BACK AND SEAT, MAPLE WOOD BACK AND SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS Height: 34-1/4 Depth: 21-1/4 Width: 19-7/8 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 16-1/2 COM yardage: 1/2 yard TJ.S.WU.O COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK COM TJ.S.WU.O GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR0 TJ.S.WU.O GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR1 TJ.S.WU.O GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR2 TJ.S.WU.O GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR3 TJ.S.WU.O GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR4 TJ.S.WU.O GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR5 TJ.S.WU.O GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR6 TJ.S.WU.O.C COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS COM TJ.S.WU.O.C GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR0 TJ.S.WU.O.C GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR1 TJ.S.WU.O.C GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR2 TJ.S.WU.O.C GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR3 TJ.S.WU.O.C GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR4 TJ.S.WU.O.C GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR5 TJ.S.WU.O.C GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR6 TJ.S.WU.M COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE COM TJ.S.WU.M GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR0 TJ.S.WU.M GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR1 TJ.S.WU.M GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR2 TJ.S.WU.M GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR3 TJ.S.WU.M GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR4 TJ.S.WU.M GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR5 TJ.S.WU.M GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR6 TJ.S.WU.M.C COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS COM TJ.S.WU.M.C GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR0 TJ.S.WU.M.C GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR1 TJ.S.WU.M.C GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR2 TJ.S.WU.M.C GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR3 TJ.S.WU.M.C GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR4 TJ.S.WU.M.C GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR5 TJ.S.WU.M.C GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR6 TJ.S.L1W.O TJ.S.L1W.O.C TJ.S.L1W.M TJ.S.L1W.M.C LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, OAK LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS TJ.S.L1U.O COM LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK COM TJ.S.L1U.O GR0 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR0 TJ.S.L1U.O GR1 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR1 TJ.S.L1U.O GR2 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR2 TJ.S.L1U.O GR3 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR3 TJ.S.L1U.O GR4 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR4 TJ.S.L1U.O GR5 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR5 TJ.S.L1U.O GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR6 The Worden Company Source Book October

230 TJ Seating TJ ADULT SIDE CHAIR cont'd Model # Description Grade Height: 34-1/4 Depth: 21-1/4 Width: 19-7/8 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 16-1/2 COM yardage: 1/2 yard TJ.S.L1U.O.C COM TJ.S.L1U.O.C GR0 TJ.S.L1U.O.C GR1 TJ.S.L1U.O.C GR2 TJ.S.L1U.O.C GR3 TJ.S.L1U.O.C GR4 TJ.S.L1U.O.C GR5 TJ.S.L1U.O.C GR6 TJ.S.L1U.M COM TJ.S.L1U.M GR0 TJ.S.L1U.M GR1 TJ.S.L1U.M GR2 TJ.S.L1U.M GR3 TJ.S.L1U.M GR4 TJ.S.L1U.M GR5 TJ.S.L1U.M GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE COM GR0 GR1 GR2 GR3 GR4 GR5 GR6 COM GR0 GR1 GR2 GR3 GR4 GR5 GR6 TJ.S.L1U.M.C COM TJ.S.L1U.M.C GR0 TJ.S.L1U.M.C GR1 TJ.S.L1U.M.C GR2 TJ.S.L1U.M.C GR3 TJ.S.L1U.M.C GR4 TJ.S.L1U.M.C GR5 TJ.S.L1U.M.C GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS COM GR0 GR1 GR2 GR3 GR4 GR5 GR6 TJ JUVENILE SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade TJ.S.WW.O.J TJ.S.WW.O.J.C TJ.S.WW.M.J TJ.S.WW.M.J.C WOOD BACK AND SEAT, OAK WOOD BACK AND SEAT, OAK - CASTERS WOOD BACK AND SEAT, MAPLE WOOD BACK AND SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS Height: 32-1/4 Depth: 21-1/4 Width: 19-7/8 Seat Height: 16 Seat Depth: 16-1/2 COM yardage: 1/2 yard TJ.S.WU.O.J COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK COM TJ.S.WU.O.J GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR0 TJ.S.WU.O.J GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR1 TJ.S.WU.O.J GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR2 TJ.S.WU.O.J GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR3 TJ.S.WU.O.J GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR4 TJ.S.WU.O.J GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR5 TJ.S.WU.O.J GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR6 TJ.S.WU.O.J.C COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS COM TJ.S.WU.O.J.C GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR0 TJ.S.WU.O.J.C GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR1 TJ.S.WU.O.J.C GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR2 TJ.S.WU.O.J.C GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR3 TJ.S.WU.O.J.C GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR4 TJ.S.WU.O.J.C GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR5 TJ.S.WU.O.J.C GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR6 TJ.S.WU.M.J COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE COM TJ.S.WU.M.J GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR0 TJ.S.WU.M.J GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR1 TJ.S.WU.M.J GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR2 TJ.S.WU.M.J GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR3 TJ.S.WU.M.J GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR4 TJ.S.WU.M.J GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR5 TJ.S.WU.M.J GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR6 TJ.S.WU.M.J.C COM WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS COM TJ.S.WU.M.J.C GR0 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR0 TJ.S.WU.M.J.C GR1 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR1 TJ.S.WU.M.J.C GR2 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR2 TJ.S.WU.M.J.C GR3 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR3 TJ.S.WU.M.J.C GR4 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR4 TJ.S.WU.M.J.C GR5 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR5 TJ.S.WU.M.J.C GR6 WOOD BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR6 228 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

231 TJ Seating TJ JUVENILE SIDE CHAIR cont d Model # Description Grade TJ.S.L1W.O.J TJ.S.L1W.O.J.C TJ.S.L1W.M.J TJ.S.L1W.M.J.C LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, OAK LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, OAK - CASTERS LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS Height: 32-1/4 Depth: 21-1/4 Width: 19-7/8 Seat Height: 16 Seat Depth: 16-1/2 COM yardage: 1/2 yard TJ.S.L1U.O.J COM LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK COM TJ.S.L1U.O.J GR0 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR0 TJ.S.L1U.O.J GR1 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR1 TJ.S.L1U.O.J GR2 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR2 TJ.S.L1U.O.J GR3 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR3 TJ.S.L1U.O.J GR4 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR4 TJ.S.L1U.O.J GR5 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR5 TJ.S.L1U.O.J GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK GR6 TJ.S.L1U.O.J.C COM LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS COM TJ.S.L1U.O.J.C GR0 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR0 TJ.S.L1U.O.J.C GR1 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR1 TJ.S.L1U.O.J.C GR2 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR2 TJ.S.L1U.O.J.C GR3 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR3 TJ.S.L1U.O.J.C GR4 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR4 TJ.S.L1U.O.J.C GR5 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR5 TJ.S.L1U.O.J.C GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, OAK - CASTERS GR6 TJ.S.L1U.M.J COM LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE COM TJ.S.L1U.M.J GR0 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR0 TJ.S.L1U.M.J GR1 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR1 TJ.S.L1U.M.J GR2 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR2 TJ.S.L1U.M.J GR3 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR3 TJ.S.L1U.M.J GR4 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR4 TJ.S.L1U.M.J GR5 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR5 TJ.S.L1U.M.J GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE GR6 TJ.S.L1U.M.J.C COM LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS COM TJ.S.L1U.M.J.C GR0 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR0 TJ.S.L1U.M.J.C GR1 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR1 TJ.S.L1U.M.J.C GR2 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR2 TJ.S.L1U.M.J.C GR3 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR3 TJ.S.L1U.M.J.C GR4 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR4 TJ.S.L1U.M.J.C GR5 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR5 TJ.S.L1U.M.J.C GR6 LASER HB BACK, UPH SEAT, MAPLE - CASTERS GR6 TJ YOUTH SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade TJ.S.WW.O.Y TJ.S.WW.M.Y TJ.S.L1W.O.Y TJ.S.L1W.M.Y WOOD BACK AND SEAT, OAK WOOD BACK AND SEAT, MAPLE LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, OAK LASER HB BACK, WOOD SEAT, MAPLE Height: 25-3/4 Depth: 16-1/4 Width: 15-3/4 Seat Height: 14 Seat Depth: 12-1/4 The Worden Company Source Book October

232 Turner Seating TURNER CHAIR FRONT LEGS: The front legs shall be solid maple, 1-1/2 x 1-1/4, doweled and glued to side rail and front apron rail, and reinforced with hardwood corner blocks screwed and glued into rails and legs. BACK LEGS: The back legs shall be solid maple, 1-1/2 x 1-1/4, profiled to the desired curved shape. Back legs shall be doweled and glued to side rail and back apron and reinforced with corner blocks screwed and glued into rails and legs. CORNER REINFORCEMENT: A mitered corner block shall be glued and screwed at the corner intersection of seat apron rails, legs and back posts. The corner blocks shall be attached to the adjacent apron rails with #10 flat head wood screws. A 3" long hex lag screw with flat washer shall pass through the corner block and into the inside corner of each leg and back post. Each corner shall be bore to allow attachement of the upholstered seat. FRONT APRON: The apron shall be solid maple, 1 x 2, doweled and glued to the front legs and reinforced with corner blocks. BACK APRON: The apron shall be solid maple, 1 x 2-7/8, doweled and glued to the back legs and reinforced with corner blocks. SIDE RAIL: The side rail shall be solid maple, 1 x 2, doweled and glued to the front and back legs. STRETCHER ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall be solid maple, consisting of two side stretchers, 1 x 1 doweled into front and back legs and two cross stretchers, 7/8 x 1 doweled into side stretchers. BACK ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall consist of five slats of solid maple. The slats shall each be 1 x 1-3/4, profiled to the desired shape, and tenoned to the inside face of the back leg posts. UPHOLSTERED SEAT: The upholstered seat shall be constructed of 1 thick high density foam, lined and covered with the specified fabric. The upholstered foam is attached to a vented hardwood plywood panel base. The seat panel shall be attached to the chair frame with four recessed wood screws that penetrate the corner reinforcing blocks. All upholstery fittings shall conform to IBC flammability regulations. WOOD SEAT: The seat shall be edge glued solid oak or maple, 1" thick, machined to the profile and sight line extensions of adjoining parts, and saddled 5/8" deep with a 1/4" radius along the front top corner and a 1/16" radius along the remaining exposed corners. The seat shall be attached by means of #10 x 1-3/4" oval head wood screws, counter bored in apron rails. GLIDES: All chairs shall have plastic nail glides. TURNER ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade TRN.A.6S.WS.L TRN.A.6S.WS.O MAPLE W/ WOOD SEAT OAK W/ WOOD SEAT Height: 38 Depth: 21-7/8 Width: 23-3/4 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 17-1/2 Arm Height: 25-3/4 COM Yardage: 1 yard TURNER SIDE CHAIR TRN.A.6S.US.L COM TRN.A.6S.US.L GR0 TRN.A.6S.US.L GR1 TRN.A.6S.US.L GR2 TRN.A.6S.US.L GR3 TRN.A.6S.US.L GR4 TRN.A.6S.US.L GR5 TRN.A.6S.US.L GR6 TRN.A.6S.US.O COM TRN.A.6S.US.O GR0 TRN.A.6S.US.O GR1 TRN.A.6S.US.O GR2 TRN.A.6S.US.O GR3 TRN.A.6S.US.O GR4 TRN.A.6S.US.O GR5 TRN.A.6S.US.O GR6 TRN.S.6S.WS.L TRN.S.6S.WS.O MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ WOOD SEAT OAK W/ WOOD SEAT COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 Height: 38 Depth: 21-7/8 Width: 18-5/8 Seat Height: 18 Seat Depth: 17-1/2 COM Yardage: 1 yard TRN.S.6S.US.L COM TRN.S.6S.US.L GR0 TRN.S.6S.US.L GR1 TRN.S.6S.US.L GR2 TRN.S.6S.US.L GR3 TRN.S.6S.US.L GR4 TRN.S.6S.US.L GR5 TRN.S.6S.US.L GR6 TRN.S.6S.US.O COM TRN.S.6S.US.O GR0 TRN.S.6S.US.O GR1 TRN.S.6S.US.O GR2 MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT MAPLE W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 TRN.S.6S.US.O GR3 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 3 TRN.S.6S.US.O GR4 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 4 TRN.S.6S.US.O GR5 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE 5 TRN.S.6S.US.O GR6 OAK W/ UPHOLSTERED SEAT GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

233 WHITMAN SPECIFICATIONS FRONT LEGS: Two options are available. The tapered front legs shall be maple, 1-9/16 x 1-9/16, tapered on the inside of the leg and set 90 degrees in both directions to the floor. The turned front legs shall be maple, 1-7/16 diameter, tapered to 1 diameter and set 90 degrees in both directions to the floor. The front legs shall be mortised, glued to the apron rails. The legs shall be reinforced with corner blocks screwed into the legs and rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 3/32 radius. BACK POSTS: The back posts shall be edge glued maple, 1-9/16 x 1-3/4, profiled to the desired angles. The back posts shall be mortised and glued to the apron rails. The posts shall be reinforced with corner blocks screwed into the legs and rails. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16 radius. FRONT AND SIDE APRON: The front apron shall be 1-3/4 thick x 19 long solid maple. The side apron shall be 1-3/4 thick x 16 long solid maple and sloped back at a 2 degree angle. The aprons shall be tenoned at each end and glued to each leg and recessed 1/16 from each leg. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 1/16 radius. BACK APRON: The apron shall be solid maple, 1-1/2 x 2 1/2, profiled, tenoned at each end, glued and recessed 1/16 from the back posts. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 3/32 radius. CORNER REINFORCEMENT: A mitered corner block shall be glued and screwed at the corner intersection of seat apron rails, legs and back posts. The corner blocks shall be attached to the adjacent apron rails with #10 flat head wood screws. A 3 long hex lag screw with flat washer shall pass through the corner block and into the inside corner of each leg and back post. STRETCHER ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall be solid maple, consisting of two side stretchers, 1-1/8 x 1, tenoned and glued to the leg. Two cross stretchers, 1-1/8 x 1, shall be tenoned into the side stretchers, and spaced 4-1/8 apart. The header shall be located 8-1/2 off the floor, and shall be parallel to floor. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 3/32 radius. BACK ASSEMBLY: The assembly shall consist of a top rail of solid maple and three back options. The top rail shall be 3/4 thick x 2-1/8 high, arched, and profiled to match the back posts. The top rail shall be tennoned and glued flush to the back legs. The back options: fully upholstered back shall be an insert, profiled to match back posts, upholstered on both sides, fitted between the top rail and back posts. Seven slat back shall be seven solid maple slats, 1-3/16 wide with 5/8 space between slats, profiled to the desired shape, spanning from the top rail to the back apron. Four slat back shall be four solid maple slats, 1-3/16 wide with 5/8 space between slats, profiled to the desired shape, spanning from the top rail to the back apron. SEAT: The wood seat shall be edge glued solid maple, 1 thick, saddled 1/2 deep with a 1/4 radius along the front and side edges. The front edge of the seat is flush with the front rail; the sides are recessed 1-1/2 from the side aprons. The upholstered seat shall consist of 1/2 thick plywood, fit between the side aprons, covered with 1 thick, fire retardant, polyurethane foam with 2.8 lbs. density and 70 lbs. ILD. The seat is then upholstered with selected cover and the bottom side of seat shall be covered with black Accord fabric. The seat shall be attached by means of #10 oval head wood screws, through the corner blocks. ARMS: Two options are available. The arms shall consist of a solid maple arm rail and vertical support, that is an extension of the front leg. The tapered arm shall be 7/8 thick x 1-9/16 wide, tennoned and glued to the back post with the other end transitioning into the vertical support. The turned arm shall be 7/8 thick x 1-9/16 wide, tennoned and glued flush to the back post. The vertical support is 1-7/16 diameter, tenoned and glued to the arm. All exposed edges shall be sanded to a 3/32 radius. GLIDES: All chairs shall have plastic nail glides. WHITMAN TAPERED LEG ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade Partial Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yard Partial Slat Back with Wood Seat WMP.A.4S.WS PARTIAL SLAT W/ WOOD SEAT WMP.A.4S.US COM PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT COM WMP.A.4S.US GR0 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 WMP.A.4S.US GR1 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 WMP.A.4S.US GR2 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 WMP.A.4S.US GR3 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 WMP.A.4S.US GR4 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 WMP.A.4S.US GR5 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 WMP.A.4S.US GR6 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 Full Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yard Upholstered Seat and Back COM: 1-1/3 yards Full Slat Back with Wood Seat Height: 33-1/4 Depth: 22-3/4 Width: 21-3/4 Seat Depth: 18 Seat Height: 18-1/2 Arm Height: 25-3/8 WMP.A.7S.WS FULL SLAT BACK W/ WOOD SEAT WMP.A.7S.US COM FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM WMP.A.7S.US GR0 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 WMP.A.7S.US GR1 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 WMP.A.7S.US GR2 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 WMP.A.7S.US GR3 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 WMP.A.7S.US GR4 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 WMP.A.7S.US GR5 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 WMP.A.7S.US GR6 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 WMP.A.UB.US COM UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM WMP.A.UB.US GR0 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 0 WMP.A.UB.US GR1 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 1 WMP.A.UB.US GR2 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 2 WMP.A.UB.US GR3 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 3 WMP.A.UB.US GR4 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 4 WMP.A.UB.US GR5 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 5 WMP.A.UB.US GR6 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

234 Whitman Seating WHITMAN TAPERED LEG SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade Partial Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yard Partial Slat Back with Wood Seat WMP.S.4S.WS PARTIAL SLAT W/ WOOD SEAT WMP.S.4S.US COM UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM WMP.S.4S.US GR0 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 WMP.S.4S.US GR1 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 WMP.S.4S.US GR2 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 WMP.S.4S.US GR3 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 WMP.S.4S.US GR4 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 WMP.S.4S.US GR5 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 WMP.S.4S.US GR6 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 Full Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yard Upholstered Seat and Back COM: 1-1/3 yards Full Slat Back with Wood Seat Height: 33-1/4 Depth: 22-3/4 Width: 21-3/4 Seat Depth: 18 Seat Height: 18-1/2 WMP.S.7S.WS FULL SLAT BACK W/ WOOD SEAT WMP.S.7S.US COM FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM WMP.S.7S.US GR0 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 WMP.S.7S.US GR1 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 WMP.S.7S.US GR2 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 WMP.S.7S.US GR3 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 WMP.S.7S.US GR4 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 WMP.S.7S.US GR5 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 WMP.S.7S.US GR6 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 WMP.S.UB.US COM UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM WMP.S.UB.US GR0 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 0 WMP.S.UB.US GR1 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 1 WMP.S.UB.US GR2 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 2 WMP.S.UB.US GR3 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 3 WMP.S.UB.US GR4 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 4 WMP.S.UB.US GR5 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 5 WMP.S.UB.US GR6 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 6 WHITMAN TURNED LEG ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade Partial Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yard Partial Slat Back with Wood Seat WMU.A.4S.WS PARTIAL SLAT W/ WOOD SEAT WMU.A.4S.US COM PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT COM WMU.A.4S.US GR0 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 WMU.A.4S.US GR1 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 WMU.A.4S.US GR2 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 WMU.A.4S.US GR3 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 WMU.A.4S.US GR4 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 WMU.A.4S.US GR5 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 WMU.A.4S.US GR6 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 Full Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yard Upholstered Seat and Back COM: 1-1/3 yards Full Slat Back with Wood Seat Height: 33-1/4 Depth: 22-3/4 Width: 21-3/4 Seat Depth: 18 Seat Height: 18-1/2 Arm Height: 25-3/8 WMU.A.7S.WS FULL SLAT BACK W/ WOOD SEAT WMU.A.7S.US COM FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM WMU.A.7S.US GR0 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 WMU.A.7S.US GR1 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 WMU.A.7S.US GR2 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 WMU.A.7S.US GR3 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 WMU.A.7S.US GR4 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 WMU.A.7S.US GR5 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 WMU.A.7S.US GR6 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 WMU.A.UB.US COM UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM WMU.A.UB.US GR0 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 0 WMU.A.UB.US GR1 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 1 WMU.A.UB.US GR2 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 2 WMU.A.UB.US GR3 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 3 WMU.A.UB.US GR4 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 4 WMU.A.UB.US GR5 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 5 WMU.A.UB.US GR6 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

235 Whitman Seating Whitman Seating WHITMAN TURNED LEG SIDE CHAIR Model # Description Grade Partial Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yard Partial Slat Back with Wood Seat WMU.S.4S.WS PARTIAL SLAT W/ WOOD SEAT WMU.S.4S.US COM PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT COM WMU.S.4S.US GR0 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 WMU.S.4S.US GR1 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 WMU.S.4S.US GR2 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 WMU.S.4S.US GR3 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 WMU.S.4S.US GR4 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 WMU.S.4S.US GR5 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 WMU.S.4S.US GR6 PARTIAL SLAT W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 Full Slat Back with Upholstered Seat COM: 7/8 yard Upholstered Seat and Back COM: 1-1/3 yards Full Slat Back with Wood Seat Height: 33-1/4 Depth: 22-3/4 Width: 21-3/4 Seat Depth: 18 Seat Height: 18-1/2 WMU.S.7S.WS FULL SLAT BACK W/ WOOD SEAT WMU.S.7S.US COM FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT COM WMU.S.7S.US GR0 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 0 WMU.S.7S.US GR1 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 1 WMU.S.7S.US GR2 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 2 WMU.S.7S.US GR3 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 3 WMU.S.7S.US GR4 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 4 WMU.S.7S.US GR5 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 5 WMU.S.7S.US GR6 FULL SLAT BACK W/ UPH SEAT GRADE 6 WMU.S.UB.US COM UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM WMU.S.UB.US GR0 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 0 WMU.S.UB.US GR1 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 1 WMU.S.UB.US GR2 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 2 WMU.S.UB.US GR3 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 3 WMU.S.UB.US GR4 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 4 WMU.S.UB.US GR5 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 5 WMU.S.UB.US GR6 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

236 AMERICAN CLASSICS CUBED LOUNGE CHAIR The lounge seating shall be available in lounge chairs, and settees. The lounge chairs shall be available with an optional swivel tablet arm. The lounge chair shall be 28 wide at the front x 24-1/8 wide at the back x 33 deep x 33 high. The seat width shall be 21-3/8 wide at the front x 19 wide at the back x 21 deep x 18 high. Arm height shall be 24. The chair shall consist of two arm frames, an upholstered frame, and a loose seat cushion. The settee shall be 57 wide at the front x 43-1/8 wide at the back x 33 deep x 33 high. The seat width shall be 51 wide at the front x 49-1/4 wide at the back x 21 deep x 18 high. Arm height shall be 24. The chair shall consist of two arm frames, an upholstered frame, and two loose seat cushions. Arm Frames: The arm frames shall be 3 thick x 29-1/4 deep x 24 high consisting of an upholstered frame, a hardwood top cap, and two hardwood feet. The back edge of the frame shall be canted 12 degrees from top to bottom. Both faces of the arms shall be webbed with Propex, covered with a high density, fire retardant foam. Foam thickness shall be 1/2 thick on both sides and edges and 1/4 thick on the top edge. The upholstery detail shall be of tight wrap around design with 7/32 welts on three edges of the front and back panel. The top cap shall be 5/8 thick x 2-3/4 wide x 29 long solid oak or maple with all edges eased. The top cap shall be screwed to the frame from the inside. Exposed screws or the use of mod-eze clips will not be allowed for attachment. The feet shall be 2-3/4 thick x 2-3/4 wide x 3 contructed of solid oak or maple. The top edges shall be chucked to form a 1 tenon. The bottom shall be fitted with a nylon glide. The arms shall be bolted to the upholstery frame. Upholstery Frame: All framework shall be constructed of 15/16 inch thick, hardwood veneer core, plywood and shall be assembled using mortise and tenon joints. All joints are to be glued and nailed as required. Seat deck shall have a sinusoidal spring unit installed and covered with an insulating decking. A fire retardant polyurethane, high density foam deck pad is applied over spring assembly and covered with self decking material as selected. Underside of all seat frames will be covered with black Accord fabric. The back shall be webbed with Propex, covered with a high density, fire retardant foam. Foam thickness shall be 1/2 thick on both sides and back, 3-1/2 thick on inside back and 3/4 thick on the top edge. The inside back face shall have ½ dacron top filler. The upholstery detail shall be of tight design with 7/32 welts. Seat Cushions: Seat cushions shall be loose cushion design of fire retardant polyurethane foam covered with Dacron. The seat cushion shall be 5 thick high density foam with a 1 thick Dacron top filler to create a crown. Top and bottom faces of the cushion shall have a 7/32 welt on four sides. The bottom of the cushion shall be zippered for easy removal of upholstery material. The seat cushion shall have a D ring sewn into the zipper pocket with snap clips to prevent slippage of the cushion. Tablet Arm (optional): The tablet arm shall be positioned on the left or right arm frames of the lounge chair and shall consist of a tablet arm platform and swivel mechanism. The platform shall be double D shape, ¾ thick x 12 deep x 15 wide. The platform shall be fabricated from medium density fiberboard, the perimeter edges shall be shaped with a 45 degree chamfer and all corners shall receive a ¼ radius. The platform shall receive a black powder coat finish. The swivel assembly shall consist of a plate with pintel and a socket assembly. The plate shall be set into the bottom side of the platform and shall be attached with screws. The socket assembly shall consist of a D.O.M. tube, welded to a plate and shall be fitted with nylon bushings. The socket assembly shall pass through the frame and arm and shall fasten in place with concealed screws. The motion of the assembly shall allow rotation that positions the platform out of the users way while moving in and out of the chair, while providing for maximum cantilevered overhang in front of the users while seated. The tablet arm shall be secured to prevent removal and shall meet BIFMA standards for loading. 234 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

237 American Classics Lounge AMERICAN CLASSICS CUBED LOUNGE CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height: 33 Depth: 33 Front Width: 29 Back Width: 26 Seat Height: 17-1/2 Seat Depth: 22-3/4 Arm Height: 24 COM Yardage: 6 yards Tablet Arm Height: 25-3/4 ACLC.M.1.COM CAPS & FEET, MAPLE COM ACLC.M.1.GR0 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLC.M.1.GR1 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLC.M.1.GR2 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLC.M.1.GR3 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLC.M.1.GR4 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLC.M.1.GR5 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLC.M.1.GR6 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLC.O.1.COM CAPS & FEET, OAK COM ACLC.O.1.GR0 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLC.O.1.GR1 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLC.O.1.GR2 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLC.O.1.GR3 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLC.O.1.GR4 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLC.O.1.GR5 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLC.O.1.GR6 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 6 ACLC.M.1.LT.COM LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE COM ACLC.M.1.LT.GR0 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLC.M.1.LT.GR1 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLC.M.1.LT.GR2 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLC.M.1.LT.GR3 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLC.M.1.LT.GR4 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLC.M.1.LT.GR5 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLC.M.1.LT.GR6 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLC.O.1.LT.COM LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK COM ACLC.O.1.LT.GR0 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLC.O.1.LT.GR1 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLC.O.1.LT.GR2 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLC.O.1.LT.GR3 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLC.O.1.LT.GR4 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLC.O.1.LT.GR5 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLC.O.1.LT.GR6 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 6 ACLC.M.1.RT.COM RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE COM ACLC.M.1.RT.GR0 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLC.M.1.RT.GR1 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLC.M.1.RT.GR2 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLC.M.1.RT.GR3 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLC.M.1.RT.GR4 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLC.M.1.RT.GR5 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLC.M.1.RT.GR6 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLC.O.1.RT.COM RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK COM ACLC.O.1.RT.GR0 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLC.O.1.RT.GR1 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLC.O.1.RT.GR2 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLC.O.1.RT.GR3 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLC.O.1.RT.GR4 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLC.O.1.RT.GR5 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLC.O.1.RT.GR6 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

238 American Classics Lounge AMERICAN CLASSICS CUBED SETTEE Model # Description Grade Height: 33 Depth: 33 Front Width: 58-1/2 Back Width: 54-1/2 Seat Height: 17-1/2 Seat Depth: 22-3/4 Arm Height: 24 COM Yardage: 8-1/4 yards Tablet Arm Height: 25-3/4 ACLC.M.2.COM CAPS & FEET, MAPLE COM ACLC.M.2.GR0 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLC.M.2.GR1 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLC.M.2.GR2 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLC.M.2.GR3 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLC.M.2.GR4 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLC.M.2.GR5 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLC.M.2.GR6 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLC.O.2.COM CAPS & FEET, OAK COM ACLC.O.2.GR0 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLC.O.2.GR1 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLC.O.2.GR2 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLC.O.2.GR3 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLC.O.2.GR4 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLC.O.2.GR5 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLC.O.2.GR6 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 6 ACLC.M.2.LRT.COM BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE COM ACLC.M.2.LRT.GR0 BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLC.M.2.LRT.GR1 BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLC.M.2.LRT.GR2 BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLC.M.2.LRT.GR3 BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLC.M.2.LRT.GR4 BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLC.M.2.LRT.GR5 BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLC.M.2.LRT.GR6 BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLC.O.2.LRT.COM BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK COM ACLC.O.2.LRT.GR0 BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLC.O.2.LRT.GR1 BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLC.O.2.LRT.GR2 BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLC.O.2.LRT.GR3 BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLC.O.2.LRT.GR4 BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLC.O.2.LRT.GR5 BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLC.O.2.LRT.GR6 BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 6 ACLC.M.2.LT.COM LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE COM ACLC.M.2.LT.GR0 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLC.M.2.LT.GR1 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLC.M.2.LT.GR2 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLC.M.2.LT.GR3 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLC.M.2.LT.GR4 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLC.M.2.LT.GR5 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLC.M.2.LT.GR6 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLC.O.2.LT.COM LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK COM ACLC.O.2.LT.GR0 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLC.O.2.LT.GR1 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLC.O.2.LT.GR2 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLC.O.2.LT.GR3 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLC.O.2.LT.GR4 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLC.O.2.LT.GR5 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLC.O.2.LT.GR6 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 6 ACLC.M.2.RT.COM RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE COM ACLC.M.2.RT.GR0 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLC.M.2.RT.GR1 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLC.M.2.RT.GR2 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLC.M.2.RT.GR3 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLC.M.2.RT.GR4 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLC.M.2.RT.GR5 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLC.M.2.RT.GR6 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLC.O.2.RT.COM RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK COM ACLC.O.2.RT.GR0 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLC.O.2.RT.GR1 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLC.O.2.RT.GR2 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLC.O.2.RT.GR3 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLC.O.2.RT.GR4 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLC.O.2.RT.GR5 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLC.O.2.RT.GR6 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

239 American Classics Lounge AMERICAN CLASSICS TAPERED LOUNGE CHAIR The lounge seating shall be available in lounge chairs, and settees. The lounge chairs shall be available with an optional swivel tablet arm. The lounge chair shall be 29-1/2 wide at the front x 25-5/8 wide at the back x 33 deep x 33 high. The seat width shall be 21-3/8 wide at the front x 19 wide at the back x 21 deep x 18 high. Arm height shall be 24. The chair shall consist of two arm frames, an upholstered frame, and a loose seat cushion. The settee shall be 58-1/2 wide at the front x 44-5/8 wide at the back x 33 deep x 33 high. The seat width shall be 51 wide at the front x 49-1/4 wide at the back x 21 deep x 18 high. Arm height shall be 24. The chair shall consist of two arm frames, an upholstered frame, and two loose seat cushions. Arm Frames: The arm frames shall be 3-3/4 thick x 29 deep x 24 high consisting of an upholstered frame, a hardwood top cap, and two tapered hardwood feet. The frame shall be tapered on the outside face 1-3/8 from top to bottom and the back edge shall be canted 12 degrees from top to bottom. The both faces of the arms shall be webbed with Propex, covered with a high density, fire retardant foam. Foam thickness shall be 1/2 thick on both sides and edges and 1/4 thick on the top edge. The upholstery detail shall be of tight wrap around design with 7/32 welts on three edges of the front and back panel. The top cap shall be ¾ thick x 3-1/2 wide x 29 long solid oak or maple profiled on the top face to a 5-1/2 radius. The top cap shall be screwed to the frame from the inside. Exposed screws or the use of mod-eze clips will not be allowed for attachment. The feet shall be 2-1/8 thick x 4-1/8 wide x 3 constructed of solid oak or maple. The outside face shall be tapered from 1-1/8 at the top to 1-7/8 at the bottom. The facing edges shall be tapered from 4-1/8 at the top to 2 at the bottom. The top edges shall be chucked to form a 1 tenon. The bottom shall be fitted with a nylon glide. The arms shall be bolted to the upholstery frame. Upholstery Frame: All framework shall be constructed of 15/16 inch thick, hardwood veneer core, plywood and shall be assembled using mortise and tenon joints. All joints are to be glued and nailed as required. Seat deck shall have a sinusoidal spring unit installed and covered with an insulating decking. A fire retardant polyurethane, high density foam deck pad is applied over spring assembly and covered with self decking material as selected. Underside of all seat frames will be covered with black Accord fabric. The back shall be webbed with Propex, covered with a high density, fire retardant foam. Foam thickness shall be 1/2 thick on both sides and back, 3-1/2 thick on inside back and 3/4 thick on the top edge. The inside back face shall have ½ Dacron top filler. The upholstery detail shall be of tight design with 7/32 welts. Seat Cushions: Seat cushions shall be loose cushion design of fire retardant polyurethane foam covered with Dacron. The seat cushion shall be 5 thick high density foam with a 1 thick Dacron top filler to create a crown. Top and bottom faces of the cushion shall have a 7/32 welt on four sides. The bottom of the cushion shall be zippered for easy removal of upholstery material. The seat cushion shall have a D ring sewn into the zipper pocket with snap clips to prevent slippage of the cushion. Tablet Arm (optional): The tablet arm shall be positioned on the left or right arm frames of the lounge chair and shall consist of a tablet arm platform and swivel mechanism. The platform shall be double D shape, ¾ thick x 12 deep x 15 wide. The platform shall be fabricated from medium density fiberboard, the perimeter edges shall be shaped with a 45 degree chamfer and all corners shall receive a ¼ radius. The platform shall receive a black powder coat finish. The swivel assembly shall consist of a plate with pintel and a socket assembly. The plate shall be set into the bottom side of the platform and shall be attached with screws. The socket assembly shall consist of a D.O.M. tube, welded to a plate and shall be fitted with nylon bushings. The socket assembly shall pass through the frame and arm and shall fasten in place with concealed screws. The mo- tion of the assembly shall allow rotation that positions the platform out of the users way while moving in and out of the chair, while providing for maximum cantilevered overhang in front of the users while seated. The tablet arm shall be secured to prevent removal and shall meet BIFMA standards for loading. Model # Description Grade Height: 33 Depth: 33 Front Width: 30 Back Width: 26-3/4 Seat Height: 17-1/2 Seat Depth: 22-3/4 Arm Height: 24 COM Yardage: 6 yards ACLT.M.1.COM CAPS & FEET, MAPLE COM ACLT.M.1.GR0 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLT.M.1.GR1 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLT.M.1.GR2 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLT.M.1.GR3 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLT.M.1.GR4 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLT.M.1.GR5 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLT.M.1.GR6 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLT.O.1.COM CAPS & FEET, OAK COM ACLT.O.1.GR0 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLT.O.1.GR1 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLT.O.1.GR2 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLT.O.1.GR3 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLT.O.1.GR4 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLT.O.1.GR5 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLT.O.1.GR6 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

240 American Classics Lounge AMERICAN CLASSICS TAPERED LOUNGE CHAIR cont'd Height: 33 Depth: 33 Front Width: 30 Back Width: 26-3/4 Seat Height: 17-1/2 Seat Depth: 22-3/4 Arm Height: 24 COM Yardage: 6 yards ACLT.M.1.LT.COM LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE COM ACLT.M.1.LT.GR0 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLT.M.1.LT.GR1 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLT.M.1.LT.GR2 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLT.M.1.LT.GR3 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLT.M.1.LT.GR4 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLT.M.1.LT.GR5 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLT.M.1.LT.GR6 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLT.O.1.LT.COM LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK COM ACLT.O.1.LT.GR0 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLT.O.1.LT.GR1 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLT.O.1.LT.GR2 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLT.O.1.LT.GR3 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLT.O.1.LT.GR4 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLT.O.1.LT.GR5 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLT.O.1.LT.GR6 LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 6 Tablet Arm Height: 25-3/4 ACLT.M.1.RT.COM RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE COM ACLT.M.1.RT.GR0 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLT.M.1.RT.GR1 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLT.M.1.RT.GR2 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLT.M.1.RT.GR3 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLT.M.1.RT.GR4 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLT.M.1.RT.GR5 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLT.M.1.RT.GR6 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLT.O.1.RT.COM RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK COM ACLT.O.1.RT.GR0 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLT.O.1.RT.GR1 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLT.O.1.RT.GR2 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLT.O.1.RT.GR3 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLT.O.1.RT.GR4 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLT.O.1.RT.GR5 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLT.O.1.RT.GR6 RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK GRADE 6 AMERICAN CLASSICS TAPERED SETTEE Model # Description Grade Height: 33 Depth: 33 Front Width: 58-1/4 Back Width: 54-1/2 Seat Height: 17-1/2 Seat Depth: 22-3/4 Arm Height: 24 COM Yardage: 8-1/4 yards Tablet Arm Height: 25-3/4 ACLT.M.2.COM CAPS & FEET, MAPLE COM ACLT.M.2.GR0 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 0 ACLT.M.2.GR1 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 1 ACLT.M.2.GR2 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 2 ACLT.M.2.GR3 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 3 ACLT.M.2.GR4 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 4 ACLT.M.2.GR5 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 5 ACLT.M.2.GR6 CAPS & FEET, MAPLE GRADE 6 ACLT.O.2.COM CAPS & FEET, OAK COM ACLT.O.2.GR0 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 0 ACLT.O.2.GR1 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 1 ACLT.O.2.GR2 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 2 ACLT.O.2.GR3 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 3 ACLT.O.2.GR4 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 4 ACLT.O.2.GR5 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE 5 ACLT.O.2.GR6 CAPS & FEET, OAK GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

241 American Classics Lounge AMERICAN CLASSICS TAPERED SETTEE cont d Model # Description Grade ACLT.M.2.LRT.COM ACLT.M.2.LRT.GR0 ACLT.M.2.LRT.GR1 ACLT.M.2.LRT.GR2 ACLT.M.2.LRT.GR3 ACLT.M.2.LRT.GR4 ACLT.M.2.LRT.GR5 ACLT.M.2.LRT.GR6 ACLT.O.2.LRT.COM ACLT.O.2.LRT.GR0 ACLT.O.2.LRT.GR1 ACLT.O.2.LRT.GR2 ACLT.O.2.LRT.GR3 ACLT.O.2.LRT.GR4 ACLT.O.2.LRT.GR5 ACLT.O.2.LRT.GR6 BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE BOTH HAND TABLET, MAPLE BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK BOTH HAND TABLET, OAK COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 ACLT.M.2.LT.COM ACLT.M.2.LT.GR0 ACLT.M.2.LT.GR1 ACLT.M.2.LT.GR2 ACLT.M.2.LT.GR3 ACLT.M.2.LT.GR4 ACLT.M.2.LT.GR5 ACLT.M.2.LT.GR6 ACLT.O.2.LT.COM ACLT.O.2.LT.GR0 ACLT.O.2.LT.GR1 ACLT.O.2.LT.GR2 ACLT.O.2.LT.GR3 ACLT.O.2.LT.GR4 ACLT.O.2.LT.GR5 ACLT.O.2.LT.GR6 LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE LEFT HAND TABLET, MAPLE LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK LEFT HAND TABLET, OAK COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 ACLT.M.2.RT.COM ACLT.M.2.RT.GR0 ACLT.M.2.RT.GR1 ACLT.M.2.RT.GR2 ACLT.M.2.RT.GR3 ACLT.M.2.RT.GR4 ACLT.M.2.RT.GR5 ACLT.M.2.RT.GR6 ACLT.O.2.RT.COM ACLT.O.2.RT.GR0 ACLT.O.2.RT.GR1 ACLT.O.2.RT.GR2 ACLT.O.2.RT.GR3 ACLT.O.2.RT.GR4 ACLT.O.2.RT.GR5 ACLT.O.2.RT.GR6 RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT HAND TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK RIGHT HAND TABLET, OAK COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

242 Express Seating EXPRESS CHAIR SEAT AND BACK FRAME: The frame shall be constructed of 1 inch thick suitable hardwood. All joints are to be double doweled and glued as required. The seat deck shall be sprung with five 9 gage sinuous springs and shall be covered with burlap and 2 inch thick, fire retardant polyurethane foam of 2.8 lb density and 45 lb IFD. The inside of the back shall be webbed with Propex and covered with 2-1/4 inch thick, fire retardant polyurethane foam of 2.8 lb density and 30 lb IFD at 25% deflection. The outside of the back shall be webbed with burlap and covered with ¼ inch thick Dacron. The underside of the seat frame will be covered with black Accord fabric. ARM FRAMES: The arm framework shall be constructed of 3/4 inch thick, formaldehyde free, veneer core, hardwood plywood. The framework consists of three sandwiched panels that are joined together using dowels and glue. The top and sides of the arm frames are covered with ¾ inch thick, fire retardant polyurethane foam of 2.8 lb density and 45 lb IFD. The arm frames are attached to the seat and lower back frame using bolts. LEGS: The two legs shall be constructed of maple solids. Each leg has a large tenon protruding from the top that fits into a mortise in the lower rear corner of the arm. The joint is secured with screws and glue. CASTERS: CASTERS: The two casters shall be 3 nominal diameter, full swivel, non-locking with a mounting height of 4. The main body of the caster shall be black ABS plastic, both tires shall be dark grey nylon. Mounting flanges and stems shall be zinc plated steel. Each caster shall have a load rating of 150 lbs. Each caster shall feature face turned, premium grade, hardwood hub caps, held in place with epoxy resin. The casters shall be fastened to caster mounting blocks with screws. The mounting blocks shall be constructed of select hardwood. Each block has a large tenon protruding from the top that fits into a mortise in the lower front corner of arm. The joint is secured with screws and glue. TABLET ARM (optional): The tablet arm shall be positioned on the left or right arm frame of the lounge chair and shall consist of a platform and a swivel mechanism. The platform shall be 7/8 inch thick x 18 inches deep x 8 inches wide, with 4 inch (full round) radiuses in all four corners, and shall be constructed of maple solids. The swivel mechanism attaches to a ¼ inch thick steel plate that is mounted to the underside of the platform with screws. The lower portion of the mechanism is press fit and glued into the tablet mounting block. The tablet mounting block shall be constructed of maple solids and has a large tenon protruding from the bottom that fits into a mortise in the upper front corner of arm. The joint is secured with screws and glue. The motion of the assembly shall allow rotation that places the platform in a position that will not interfere with getting in or out of the chair while providing a cantilever that maximizes the overhang while seated. The tablet arm shall be secured to prevent removal. HANDLE: The handle is constructed of maple solids. It is attached to the back frame of the chair with mechanical fasteners. UPHOLSTERY: All upholstery shall be a tight, weltless design. Model # Description Grade EXL.1.COM CASTERS COM EXL.1.GR0 CASTERS GRADE 0 EXL.1.GR1 CASTERS GRADE 1 EXL.1.GR2 CASTERS GRADE 2 EXL.1.GR3 CASTERS GRADE 3 EXL.1.GR4 CASTERS GRADE 4 EXL.1.GR5 CASTERS GRADE 5 EXL.1.GR6 CASTERS GRADE 6 Height: 29-3/4 Depth: 29 Width: 27-1/2 Seat Height: 17-3/4 Arm Height: 23-1/2 Com Yardage: 5.25 yards EXL.1.COM.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET COM EXL.1.GR0.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 0 EXL.1.GR1.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 1 EXL.1.GR2.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 2 EXL.1.GR3.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 3 EXL.1.GR4.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 4 EXL.1.GR5.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 5 EXL.1.GR6.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 6 EXL.1.COM.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET COM EXL.1.GR0.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 0 EXL.1.GR1.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 1 EXL.1.GR2.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 2 EXL.1.GR3.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 3 EXL.1.GR4.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 4 EXL.1.GR5.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 5 EXL.1.GR6.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

243 Forum Seating FORUM OPEN ARM STYLE SIDE LEG FRAME ASSEMBLIES: Shall consist of 1-1/2 x 3 solid oak or maple shaped with heavy radius on all edges, corners and bottom. Assembly shall be constructed of three pieces with a double doweled mitred joint where arm rest member and stretcher rail meets the leg section. Side frame assemblies shall be securely attached to the upholstered seat and back frame itself using three (3) 5/16-18 hanger bolts attached to side frame and secured from the inside of the upholstery frame. UPHOLSTERY FRAME: Shall be constructed of suitable hardwoods with all joints doweled and/or screwed as required for framing of institutional seating items. No weed framing members to be less than 1-1/16 thick in dimension. A tight seat and back upholstering design technique is standard on this unit. All seams shall be backed and double stitched. Seat deck shall have a Permamesh spring unit installed and covered with 2-1/4 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam, with dacron topper. The foam shall have a firmness of 55 lbs. 25% deflection). Underside of all seat frames will be covered with black Accord fabric. Back portion of the upholstered unit is webbed with Propex and padded with 2-1/4 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam, with dacron topper. The foam shall have a firmness of 45 lbs. 25% deflection). GLIDES: Each leg shall be furnished with a 3/4 chrome button glide. FORUM OPEN ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 25 Seat Height: 16 COM Yardage: 2 yards L COM L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR O COM O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR6 OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 FORUM SETTEE Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 47 Seat Height: 16 COM Yardage: 4 yards L COM L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR O COM O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR6 OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 FORUM SOFA Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 69 Seat Height: 16 COM Yardage: 6 yards L COM L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR O COM O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR6 OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, MAPLE BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE OPEN ARM STYLE, OAK BASE COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

244 Forum Seating FORUM HALF PANEL FRAMED STYLE SIDE LEG FRAME ASSEMBLIES: Shall consist of 1-1/2 x 3 solid oak or maple shaped with heavy radius on all edges, corners and bottom. Assembly shall be constructed of three pieces with a double doweled mitred joint where arm rest member and stretcher rail meets the leg section. Side frame assemblies shall be securely attached to the upholstered seat and back frame itself using three (3) 5/16-18 hanger bolts attached to side frame and secured from the inside of the upholstery frame. UPHOLSTERY FRAME: Shall be constructed of suitable hardwoods with all joints doweled and/or screwed as required for framing of institutional seating items. No weed framing members to be less than 1-1/16 thick in dimension. A tight seat and back upholstering design technique is standard on this unit. All seams shall be backed and double stitched. Seat deck shall have a Permamesh spring unit installed and covered with 2-1/4 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam, with dacron topper. The foam shall have a firmness of 55 lbs. 25% deflection). Underside of all seat frames will be covered with black Accord fabric. Back portion of the upholstered unit is webbed with Propex and padded with 2-1/4 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam, with dacron topper. The foam shall have a firmness of 45 lbs. 25% deflection). HALF PANEL ARM: Each side of the arm shall be webbed with Propex and padded with 3/4 thick 20 lbs. (ILD) fire retardant foam. The cover shall be trimmed with 1/4 welts set in grooves in the side frame. GLIDES: Each leg shall be furnished with a 3/4 chrome button glide. FORUM HALF PANEL ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 26 Seat Height: 16 COM Yardage: 3-3/4 yards FORUM HALF PANEL SETTEE Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 48 Seat Height: 16 COM Yardage: 5-3/4 yards L COM FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE COM L GR0 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR1 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR2 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR3 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR4 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR5 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR6 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE O COM FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK COM O GR0 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR1 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR2 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR3 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR4 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR5 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR6 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE L COM FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE COM L GR0 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR1 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR2 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR3 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR4 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR5 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR6 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE O COM FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK COM O GR0 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR1 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR2 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR3 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR4 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR5 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR6 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE 6 FORUM HALF PANEL SOFA L COM FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE COM Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 70 Seat Height: 16 COM Yardage: 7-3/4 yards L GR0 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR1 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR2 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR3 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR4 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR5 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR6 FRAMED HALF PANEL, MAPLE GRADE O COM FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK COM O GR0 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR1 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR2 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR3 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR4 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR5 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR6 FRAMED HALF PANEL, OAK GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

245 Forum Seating FORUM FULL PANEL STYLE SIDE LEG FRAME ASSEMBLIES: Shall consist of 1-1/2 x 3 solid oak or maple shaped with heavy radius on all edges, corners and bottom. Assembly shall be constructed of three pieces with a double doweled mitred joint where arm rest member and stretcher rail meets the leg section. Side frame assemblies shall be securely attached to the upholstered seat and back frame itself using three (3) 5/16-18 hanger bolts attached to side frame and secured from the inside of the upholstery frame. UPHOLSTERY FRAME: Shall be constructed of suitable hardwoods with all joints doweled and/or screwed as required for framing of institutional seating items. No weed framing members to be less than 1-1/16 thick in dimension. A tight seat and back upholstering design technique is standard on this unit. All seams shall be backed and double stitched. Seat deck shall have a Permamesh spring unit installed and covered with 2-1/4 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam, with dacron topper. The foam shall have a firmness of 55 lbs. 25% deflection). Underside of all seat frames will be covered with black Accord fabric. Back portion of the upholstered unit is webbed with Propex and padded with 2-1/4 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam, with dacron topper. The foam shall have a firmness of 45 lbs. 25% deflection). FULL PANEL ARM: Each side of the arm shall be webbed with Propex and padded with 3/4 thick 20 lbs. (ILD) fire retardant foam. The cover shall be trimmed with 1/4 welts set in grooves in the side frame. GLIDES: Each leg shall be furnished with a 3/4 chrome button glide. FORUM FULL PANEL ARM CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 26 Seat Height: 16 COM Yardage: 3-3/4 yards FORUM ARM SETTEE L COM FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE COM L GR0 FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR1 FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR2 FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR3 FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR4 FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR5 FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE GRADE L GR6 FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE GRADE O COM FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK COM O GR0 FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR1 FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR2 FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR3 FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR4 FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR5 FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK GRADE O GR6 FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK GRADE 6 Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 48 Seat Height: 16 COM Yardage: 5-3/4 yards L COM L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR O COM O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR6 FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

246 Forum Seating FORUM FULL PANEL STYLE cont'd FORUM FULL PANEL SOFA Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 70 Seat Height: 16 COM Yardage: 7-3/4 yards L COM L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR L GR O COM O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR O GR6 FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, MAPLE FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL,, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK FRAMED FULL PANEL, OAK COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

247 MySpot Seating MYSPOT CHAIR SPECIFICATIONS Chairs shall consist of four wood legs, two end panel assemblies, a back panel assembly, two wood arm caps, a bottom panel, a seat support beam, a back cushion assembly, a seat cushion, and rotating tablet assemblies. Each part shall be fastened to adjacent parts by means of rigid mechanical fasteners. Wood Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter chrome glide with a 1 stem. The two back legs shall join the back and side assemblies, and shall also attach directly to the wood arm caps. The two front legs shall join the side assemblies and the seat support beam. The front legs shall stop short of the arm caps leaving a space in which a 1-1/4 diameter metal standoff with a powder coat finish shall be placed. As an option, in lieu of the standoff, a rotating tablet assembly shall be placed to fill the space between the leg and the arm cap. End Panel Assemblies: End panel assemblies shall consist of an inner layer, and two outer layers. The inner layer shall be 3/4 raw particle board with veneer tape on the top edge, and shall attach to the wood legs by means of mechanical fasteners. The two outer layers shall be 7/16 MDF wrapped with fabric. The outer layer panels shall be attached to the inner layer panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Back Panel Assembly: The back panel assembly shall consist of an inner layer, and one outer layer. The inner layer shall be 3/4 raw particle board, and shall attach to the wood legs by means of mechanical fasteners. The outer layer shall be either 7/16 MDF wrapped with fabric. The outer layer panel shall be attached to the inner layer panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Wood Arm Caps: Wood arm caps shall be 1-1/8 thick by 6 wide solid hardwood, and shall be attached to the legs either directly, or by way of the standoff or tablet assembly, by means of 1/4 thick by 4 square steel plates. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and one flat head machine bolt. The plate is fastened to the underside of the arm with wood screws. Bottom Panel: The bottom panel shall be a resilient panel material such as veneer core plywood, and shall support the seat cushion. The panel shall attach to the seat support beam at the front, and to the back panel assembly at the back. Seat Support Beam: The seat support beam shall be fabricated from 1-1/2 by 2 structural steel tubing, and shall have a powder coat finish. At each end, the beam shall attach to the front legs by means of mechanical fasteners. Fixed Back Cushion Assembly: The fixed back cushion assembly shall consist of a particle board stiffener with high density, fire retardant foam cushion. The entire assembly is covered with fabric and attached to the back panel assembly with screws. Loose Seat Cushion: The loose seat cushion shall consist of a high density, fire retardant foam cushion with a sewn removable fabric cover. The component is tethered to the chair with elastic strapping, D-clips and hooks. Tablet Assembly: The tablet assembly shall consist of a rotating mechanism, a tablet base, and a flipper tray. The tablet base and flipper tray shall be fabricated ¾ thick MDF construction with black powdercoat finish. When the hinged flipper tray is in the open position, a flush surface of 11-3/4 deep by 15 wide is available to the user. The rotating mechanism allows the tablet to rotate 360, and allows for storage under the wood arm cap when not in use. MYSPOT 1-SPOT Model # Description Grade Height: 36-1/2 Depth: 29 Width: 36 Seat Height: 18-1/2" Arm Height: 27-5/8" Com Yardage: 8.75 yards MS.C.1.LT.COM MS.C.1.LT.GR0 MS.C.1.LT.GR1 MS.C.1.LT.GR2 MS.C.1.LT.GR3 MS.C.1.LT.GR4 MS.C.1.LT.GR5 MS.M.1.LT.COM MS.M.1.LT.GR0 MS.M.1.LT.GR1 MS.M.1.LT.GR2 MS.M.1.LT.GR3 MS.M.1.LT.GR4 MS.M.1.LT.GR5 LEFT TABLET, CHERRY LEFT TABLET, CHERRY LEFT TABLET, CHERRY LEFT TABLET, CHERRY LEFT TABLET, CHERRY LEFT TABLET, CHERRY LEFT TABLET, CHERRY LEFT TABLET, MAPLE LEFT TABLET, MAPLE LEFT TABLET, MAPLE LEFT TABLET, MAPLE LEFT TABLET, MAPLE LEFT TABLET, MAPLE LEFT TABLET, MAPLE COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 MS.C.1.RT.COM MS.C.1.RT.GR0 MS.C.1.RT.GR1 MS.C.1.RT.GR2 MS.C.1.RT.GR3 MS.C.1.RT.GR4 MS.C.1.RT.GR5 MS.M.1.RT.COM MS.M.1.RT.GR0 MS.M.1.RT.GR1 MS.M.1.RT.GR2 MS.M.1.RT.GR3 MS.M.1.RT.GR4 MS.M.1.RT.GR5 RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 The Worden Company Source Book October

248 MySpot Seating MYSPOT 1-1/2-SPOT Height: 36-1/2 Depth: 29 Width: 46 Seat Height: 18-1/2" Arm Height: 27-5/8" Com Yardage: 8.75 yards Model # Description Grade MS.C.15.COM DOUBLE TABLET ARM, CHERRY COM MS.C.15.GR0 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, CHERRY GRADE 0 MS.C.15.GR1 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, CHERRY GRADE 1 MS.C.15.GR2 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, CHERRY GRADE 2 MS.C.15.GR3 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, CHERRY GRADE 3 MS.C.15.GR4 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, CHERRY GRADE 4 MS.C.15.GR5 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, CHERRY GRADE 5 MS.M.15.COM DOUBLE TABLET ARM, MAPLE COM MS.M.15.GR0 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, MAPLE GRADE 0 MS.M.15.GR1 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, MAPLE GRADE 1 MS.M.15.GR2 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, MAPLE GRADE 2 MS.M.15.GR3 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, MAPLE GRADE 3 MS.M.15.GR4 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, MAPLE GRADE 4 MS.M.15.GR5 DOUBLE TABLET ARM, MAPLE GRADE 5 MYSPOT 2-SPOT The double seat station shall consist of two wood legs, two end panel assemblies, a back panel assembly, two wood arm caps, a center table, two bottom panels, a seat support beam, two back cushions, two seat cushions, and rotating tablet assemblies. Each part shall be fastened to adjacent parts by means of rigid mechanical fasteners. Wood Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter chrome glide with a 1 stem. The front legs shall stop short of the arm caps leaving a space in which a 1-1/4 diameter metal standoff with a powder coat finish shall be placed. As an option, in lieu of the standoff, a rotating tablet assembly shall be placed to fill the space between the leg and the arm cap. End Panel Assemblies: End panel assemblies shall consist of an inner layer, and two outer layers. The inner layer shall be 3/4 raw particle board with veneer tape on the top edge, and shall attach to the wood legs and back panel frame by means of mechanical fasteners. The two outer layers shall be 7/16 MDF wrapped with fabric. The outer layer panels shall be attached to the inner layer panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Back Panel Assembly: The back panel assembly shall consist of an inner layer, and two outer layers. The inner layer shall be 3/4 raw particle board with 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood bands on the top and sides. The bands on the sides shall extend beyond the bottom edge of the inner panel to mimic the front legs. The bottom of each side band shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter chrome glide with a 1 stem. The back panel shall attach to the end panel assemblies by means of mechanical fasteners. The outer layer shall be 7/16 MDF wrapped with fabric. The outer layer panels shall be attached to the inner layer panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Wood Arm Caps: Wood arm caps shall be 1-1/8 thick by 6 wide solid hardwood, and shall be attached to the legs, by way of the standoff or tablet assembly, by means of 1/4 thick by 4 square steel plates. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and one flat head machine bolt. The plate is fastened to the underside of the arm with wood screws. The wood arm caps shall attach to the back panel assembly by means of mechanical fasteners. Center Table: The center table shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particle board core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-1/4. The edges shall be internally banded on three edges with a 1/4 wide, flat, solid hardwood band. The center table shall attach to the back panel and seat support beam by means of mechanical fasteners. Bottom Panels: The bottom panels shall be a resilient panel material such as veneer core plywood, and shall support the seat cushions. The panels shall attach to the seat support beam at the front, and to the back panel assembly at the back. Seat Support Beam: The seat support beam shall be fabricated from 1-1/2 by 2 structural steel tubing, and shall have a powder coat finish. At each end, the beam shall attach to the front legs by means of mechanical fasteners. Loose Back Cushion: The loose back cushion shall consist of a high density, fire retardant foam cushion with a sewn, removable fabric cover. The component is tethered to the chair with elastic strapping, D-clips and hooks. Loose Seat Cushion: The loose seat cushion shall consist of a high density, fire retardant foam cushion with a sewn removable fabric cover. The component is tethered to the chair with elastic strapping, D-clips and hooks. Tablet Assembly: The tablet assembly shall consist of a rotating mechanism, a tablet base, and a flipper tray. The tablet base and flipper tray shall be fabricated from 3/4 thick, solid black powdercoat finish. When the hinged flipper tray is in the open position, a flush surface of 11-3/4 deep by 15 wide is available to the user. The rotating mechanism allows the tablet to rotate 360, and allows for storage under the wood arm cap when not in use. Model # Description Grade MS.C.2.39.COM 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY COM MS.C.2.39.GR0 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 0 MS.C.2.39.GR1 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 1 MS.C.2.39.GR2 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 2 MS.C.2.39.GR3 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 3 Height: 39-1/8 or 48 1/8 MS.C.2.39.GR4 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 4 Depth: 28-1/2 MS.C.2.39.GR5 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 5 Width: 75-1/4 Seat Height: 18-1/2" Arm Height: 27-5/8" Com Yardage: 39 Back 16 yards 48 Back 17 yards 246 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

249 MySpot Seating MYSPOT 2-SPOT cont d Model # Description Grade Height: 39-1/8 or 48 1/8 Depth: 28-1/2 Width: 75-1/4 Seat Height: 18-1/2" Arm Height: 27-5/8" Com Yardage: 39 Back 16 yards 48 Back 17 yards MS.M.2.39.COM MS.M.2.39.GR0 MS.M.2.39.GR1 MS.M.2.39.GR2 MS.M.2.39.GR3 MS.M.2.39.GR4 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 MS.M.2.39.GR5 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 5 MS.C.2.48.COM MS.C.2.48.GR0 MS.C.2.48.GR1 MS.C.2.48.GR2 MS.C.2.48.GR3 MS.C.2.48.GR4 MS.C.2.48.GR5 MS.M.2.48.COM MS.M.2.48.GR0 MS.M.2.48.GR1 MS.M.2.48.GR2 MS.M.2.48.GR3 MS.M.2.48.GR4 MS.M.2.48.GR5 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 MYSPOT SPOT The back to back double seat station shall consist of four wood legs, four end panel assemblies, a back panel assembly, two wood arm caps, two center tables, four bottom panels, two seat support beams, four back cushions, four seat cushions, and rotating tablet assemblies. Each part shall be fastened to adjacent parts by means of rigid mechanical fasteners. Wood Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter chrome glide with a 1 stem. The front legs shall stop short of the arm caps leaving a space in which a 1-1/4 diameter metal standoff with a powder coat finish shall be placed. As an option, in lieu of the standoff, a rotating tablet assembly shall be placed to fill the space between the leg and the arm cap. End Panel Assemblies: End panel assemblies shall consist of an inner layer, and two outer layers. The inner layer shall be 3/4 raw particle board with veneer tape on the top edge, and shall attach to the wood legs and back panel frame by means of mechanical fasteners. The two outer layers shall be 7/16 MDF wrapped with fabric. The outer layer panels shall be attached to the inner layer panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Back Panel Assembly: The back panel assembly shall consist of an inner layer, and two outer layers. The inner layer shall be 3/4 raw particle board with 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood bands on the top and sides. The bands on the sides shall extend beyond the bottom edge of the inner panel to mimic the front legs. The bottom of each side band shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter chrome glide with a 1 stem. The back panel shall attach to the end panel assemblies by means of mechanical fasteners. The outer layer shall be 7/16 MDF wrapped with fabric. The outer layer panels shall be attached to the inner layer panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Wood Arm Caps: Wood arm caps shall be 1-1/8 thick by 6 wide solid hardwood, and shall be attached to the legs, by way of the standoff or tablet assembly, by means of 1/4 thick by 4 square steel plates. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and one flat head machine bolt. The plate is fastened to the underside of the arm with wood screws. The wood arm caps shall attach to the back panel assembly by means of mechanical fasteners. Center Tables: The center tables shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particle board core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-1/4. The edges shall be internally banded on three edges with a 1/4 wide, flat, solid hardwood band. The center tables shall attach to the back panel and seat support beam by means of mechanical fasteners. Bottom Panels: The bottom panels shall be a resilient panel material such as veneer core plywood, and shall support the seat cushions. The panels shall attach to the seat support beam at the front, and to the back panel assembly at the back. Seat Support Beams: The seat support beams shall be fabricated from 1-1/2 by 2 structural steel tubing, and shall have a powder coat finish. At each end, the beam shall attach to the front legs by means of mechanical fasteners. Loose Back Cushion: The loose back cushion shall consist of a high density, fire retardant foam cushion with a sewn, removable fabric cover. The component is tethered to the chair with elastic strapping, D-clips and hooks. Loose Seat Cushion: The loose seat cushion shall consist of a high density, fire retardant foam cushion with a sewn removable fabric cover. The component is tethered to the chair with elastic strapping, D-clips and hooks. Tablet Assembly: The tablet assembly shall consist of a rotating mechanism, a tablet base, and a flipper tray. The tablet base and flipper tray shall be fabricated from 3/4 thick, solid black powdercoat finish. When the hinged flipper tray is in the open position, a flush surface of 11-3/4 deep by 15 wide is available to the user. The rotating mechanism allows the tablet to rotate 360, and allows for storage under the wood arm cap when not in use. The Worden Company Source Book October

250 MySpot Seating MYSPOT 2+2-SPOT cont d 2+2-Spot shown with Center Dual Table, table is ordered seperately Height: 39-1/8 or 48 1/8 Depth: 53-3/4 Width: 75-1/4 Seat Height: 18-1/2" Arm Height: 27-5/8" Com Yardage: 39 Back 27.5 yards 48 Back 28.5 yards Model # MS.C.2B.39.COM Description 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY Grade COM MS.C.2B.39.GR0 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 0 MS.C.2B.39.GR1 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 1 MS.C.2B.39.GR2 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 2 MS.C.2B.39.GR3 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 3 MS.C.2B.39.GR4 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 4 MS.C.2B.39.GR5 MS.M.2B.39.COM 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 5 COM MS.M.2B.39.GR0 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 0 MS.M.2B.39.GR1 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 1 MS.M.2B.39.GR2 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 2 MS.M.2B.39.GR3 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 3 MS.M.2B.39.GR4 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 4 MS.M.2B.39.GR5 39 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 5 MS.C.2B.48.COM 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY COM MS.C.2B.48.GR0 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 0 MS.C.2B.48.GR1 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 1 MS.C.2B.48.GR2 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 2 MS.C.2B.48.GR3 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 3 MS.C.2B.48.GR4 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 4 MS.C.2B.48.GR5 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, CHERRY GRADE 5 MS.M.2B.48.COM 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE COM MS.M.2B.48.GR0 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 0 MS.M.2B.48.GR1 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 1 MS.M.2B.48.GR2 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 2 MS.M.2B.48.GR3 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 3 MS.M.2B.48.GR4 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 4 MS.M.2B.48.GR5 48 BACK, 2 TABLETS, MAPLE GRADE 5 MYSPOT 4-SPOT The four seat quad station shall consist of four wood legs, four end panel assemblies, four back panel assemblies, a center post, four wood arm caps, four bottom panels, four seat support beams, four back cushions, four seat cushions, and rotating tablet assemblies. Each part shall be fastened to adjacent parts by means of rigid mechanical fasteners. Wood Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter chrome glide with a 1 stem. The legs shall stop short of the arm caps leaving a space in which a 1-1/4 diameter metal standoff with a powder coat finish shall be placed. As an option, in lieu of the standoff, a rotating tablet assembly shall be placed to fill the space between the leg and the arm cap. End Panel Assemblies: End panel assemblies shall consist of an inner layer, and two outer layers. The inner layer shall be 3/4 raw particle board with veneer tape on the top edge, and shall attach to the wood legs and back panel frame by means of mechanical fasteners. The two outer layers shall be 7/16 MDF wrapped with fabric. The outer layer panels shall be attached to the inner layer panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Back Panel Assembly: The back panel assembly shall consist of an inner layer, and two outer layers. The inner layer shall be 3/4 raw particle board with 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood bands on the top and one side. The band on the side shall extend beyond the bottom edge of the inner panel to mimic the leg. The bottom of the side band shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter chrome glide with a 1 stem. The back panel shall attach to the end panel assembly by means of mechanical fasteners. The outer layer shall be 7/16 MDF wrapped with fabric. The outer layer panels shall be attached to the inner layer panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Center Post: The center post shall be 2-1/4 square solid hardwood. The bottom of the post shall be fitted with a 1-1/4 diameter chrome glide with a 1 stem. The center post shall attach to the four back panel assemblies by means of mechanical fasteners. Wood Arm Caps: Wood arm caps shall be 1-1/8 thick by 6 wide solid hardwood, and shall be attached to the legs, by way of the standoff or tablet assembly, by means of 1/4 thick by 4 square steel plates. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and one flat head machine bolt. The plate is fastened to the underside of the arm with wood screws. The wood arm caps shall attach to the back panel assemblies by means of mechanical fasteners. Bottom Panels: The bottom panels shall be a resilient panel material such as veneer core plywood, and shall support the seat cushions. The panels shall attach to the seat support beam at the front, and to the back panel assembly at the back. Seat Support Beams: The seat support beams shall be fabricated from 1-1/2 by 2 structural steel tubing, and shall have a powder coat finish. At the ends, the beam shall attach to the leg and the adjacent back panel assembly by means of mechanical fasteners. Loose Back Cushion: The loose back cushion shall consist of a high density, fire retardant foam cushion with a sewn, removable fabric cover. The component is tethered to the chair with elastic strapping, D-clips and hooks. Loose Seat Cushion: The loose seat cushion shall consist of a high density, fire retardant foam cushion with a sewn removable fabric cover. The component is tethered to the chair with elastic strapping, D-clips and hooks. 248 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

251 MySpot Seating MYSPOT 4-SPOT cont d Tablet Assembly: The tablet assembly shall consist of a rotating mechanism, a tablet base, and a flipper tray. The tablet base and flipper tray shall be fabricated from 3/4 thick, solid black powdercoat finish. When the hinged flipper tray is in the open position, a flush surface of 11-3/4 deep by 15 wide is available to the user. The rotating mechanism allows the tablet to rotate 360, and allows for storage under the wood arm cap when not in use. 4-Spot shown with screen Height: 60-1/8" or 48 1/8 Depth: 68-7/8 Width: 68-7/8 Seat Height: 18-1/2" Arm Height: 27-5/8" Com Yardage: 34 yards Model # Description Grade MS.C.4.LT.COM LEFT TABLET, CHERRY COM MS.C.4.LT.GR0 LEFT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 0 MS.C.4.LT.GR1 LEFT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 1 MS.C.4.LT.GR2 LEFT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 2 MS.C.4.LT.GR3 LEFT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 3 MS.C.4.LT.GR4 LEFT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 4 MS.C.4.LT.GR5 LEFT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 5 MS.M.4.LT.COM LEFT TABLET, MAPLE COM MS.M.4.LT.GR0 LEFT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 0 MS.M.4.LT.GR1 LEFT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 1 MS.M.4.LT.GR2 LEFT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 2 MS.M.4.LT.GR3 LEFT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 3 MS.M.4.LT.GR4 LEFT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 4 MS.M.4.LT.GR5 LEFT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 5 MS.C.4.LT.S.COM LEFT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY COM MS.C.4.LT.S.GR0 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 0 MS.C.4.LT.S.GR1 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 1 MS.C.4.LT.S.GR2 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 2 MS.C.4.LT.S.GR3 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 3 MS.C.4.LT.S.GR4 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 4 MS.C.4.LT.S.GR5 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 5 MS.M.4.LT.S.COM LEFT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE COM MS.M.4.LT.S.GR0 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 0 MS.M.4.LT.S.GR1 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 1 MS.M.4.LT.S.GR2 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 2 MS.M.4.LT.S.GR3 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 3 MS.M.4.LT.S.GR4 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 4 MS.M.4.LT.S.GR5 LEFT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 5 MS.C.4.RT.COM RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY COM MS.C.4.RT.GR0 RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 0 MS.C.4.RT.GR1 RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 1 MS.C.4.RT.GR2 RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 2 MS.C.4.RT.GR3 RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 3 MS.C.4.RT.GR4 RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 4 MS.C.4.RT.GR5 RIGHT TABLET, CHERRY GRADE 5 MS.M.4.RT.COM RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE COM MS.M.4.RT.GR0 RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 0 MS.M.4.RT.GR1 RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 1 MS.M.4.RT.GR2 RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 2 MS.M.4.RT.GR3 RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 3 MS.M.4.RT.GR4 RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 4 MS.M.4.RT.GR5 RIGHT TABLET, MAPLE GRADE 5 MS.C.4.RT.S.COM RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY COM MS.C.4.RT.S.GR0 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 0 MS.C.4.RT.S.GR1 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 1 MS.C.4.RT.S.GR2 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 2 MS.C.4.RT.S.GR3 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 3 MS.C.4.RT.S.GR4 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 4 MS.C.4.RT.S.GR5 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, CHERRY GRADE 5 MS.M.4.RT.S.COM RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE COM MS.M.4.RT.S.GR0 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 0 MS.M.4.RT.S.GR1 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 1 MS.M.4.RT.S.GR2 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 2 MS.M.4.RT.S.GR3 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 3 MS.M.4.RT.S.GR4 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 4 MS.M.4.RT.S.GR5 RIGHT TABLET SCREEN, MAPLE GRADE 5 The Worden Company Source Book October

252 MySpot Seating MYSPOT BENCH The double seat bench shall consist of four wood legs, two end panel assemblies, a support keel, a bottom panel, two wood arm caps, two seat support beams, two seat cushions, and a center table. Each part shall be fastened to adjacent parts by means of rigid mechanical fasteners. Wood Legs: Legs shall be 2-1/4 square, solid hardwood. The bottom of each leg shall be fitted with an aluminum accent foot with a powder coat finish, and a 1-1/4 diameter chrome glide with a 1 stem. End Panel Assemblies: End panel assemblies shall consist of an inner layer, and two outer layers. The inner layer shall be 3/4 raw particle board and shall attach to the wood legs by means of mechanical fasteners. The two outer layers shall be 7/16 MDF wrapped with fabric. The outer layer panels shall be attached to the inner layer panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Support Keel: The support keel shall be 1 plywood with veneer on both faces and with a 1/8 solid hardwood band on the bottom edge. The keel shall attach to the end panel assemblies and the bottom panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Bottom Panel: The bottom panel shall be a resilient panel material such as veneer core plywood, and shall support the seat cushions. The panel shall attach to the seat support beams. Wood Arm Caps: Wood arm caps shall be 1-1/8 thick by 6 wide solid hardwood, and shall be attached to the legs by means of 1/4 thick by 4 square steel plates. The plate is secured to the leg with a dowel nut and one flat head machine bolt. The plate is fastened to the underside of the arm with wood screws. Seat Support Beams: The seat support beams shall be fabricated from 1-1/2 by 2 structural steel tubing, and shall have a powder coat finish. At the ends, the beam shall attach to the legs by means of mechanical fasteners. Fixed Seat Cushion Assembly: The fixed back cushion assembly shall consist of a particle board stiffener with high density, fire retardant foam cushion. The entire assembly is covered with fabric and attached to the back panel assembly with screws. Center Table: The center table shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particle board core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-1/4. All edges shall be internally banded with a 1/4 wide, flat, solid hardwood band. The center tables shall attach to the bottom panel by means of mechanical fasteners. Height: 23-5/8 Depth: 29 Width: 75-1/4 Seat Height: 18-1/8" Com Yardage: 6-1/2 yards Model # Description Grade MS.C.B.COM CHERRY COM MS.C.B.GR0 CHERRY GRADE 0 MS.C.B.GR1 CHERRY GRADE 1 MS.C.B.GR2 CHERRY GRADE 2 MS.C.B.GR3 CHERRY GRADE 3 MS.C.B.GR4 CHERRY GRADE 4 MS.C.B.GR5 CHERRY GRADE 5 MS.M.B.COM MAPLE COM MS.M.B.GR0 MAPLE GRADE 0 MS.M.B.GR1 MAPLE GRADE 1 MS.M.B.GR2 MAPLE GRADE 2 MS.M.B.GR3 MAPLE GRADE 3 MS.M.B.GR4 MAPLE GRADE 4 MS.M.B.GR5, GRADE 5 MYSPOT MISC. Center Privacy Divider: A Center Privacy Divider may be specified for use on the Double Seat Station and Back to Back Double Seat Station if they have the 48 high back panel. The center privacy divider shall be 1 particle board with veneer on both faces and with 1/4 solid hardwood external bands on the exposed edges. The divider shall attach to the corresponding unit s back panel assembly directly above the center table. Dual Level Table: In lieu of the Center Table on the Double Seat Station and Back to Back Double Seat Station, a Dual Level Table may be specified. The dual level table assembly consists of a lower table, an upper table, a back panel, and a rotating shelf. The lower and upper tables shall be a 3-ply construction consisting of high pressure laminate face, medium density particle board core, and balancing backer, for a nominal total thickness of 1-1/4. Three edges on each table shall be internally banded with solid hardwood bands. The back panel shall be 3/4 particle board with veneer on both faces, and with 1/8 solid hardwood bands on the exposed edges. The rotating shelf shall be fabricated from 3/4 thick, solid black powdercoat finish. In the dual level table assembly, the shelf shall be just below the upper table. When in the open position, a surface of 10-1/4 deep by 14-5/8 wide is available to the user. The shelf shall utilize a rotating mechanism which allows 360 rotation, and allows storage under the upper table when not in use. The rotating mechanism and back panel shall attach the upper and lower tables to form the dual level table assembly. The entire assembly shall attach to the corresponding unit s back panel assembly and seat support beam by means of mechanical fasteners. Model # MS.CPP MS.CT Description CENTER PRIVACY PANEL DUAL LEVEL CENTER TABLE Center Privacy Panel Dual Level Center Table Center Panel and Table Placement 250 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

253 MySpot Seating MYSPOT BOOK RACK A Book Rack may be specified for use on all units except for the double seat bench. The book rack shall be fabricated from 1/4 and 1/8 diameter steel wire and shall be hung from the underside of the corresponding unit s bottom panel(s). The book rack shall be finished with a black, textured powder coat finish. Model # Description MS.WBR WIRE BOOK RACK MYSPOT CANOPY A light diffusing canopy may be specified for use on the MySpot 2-Spot and MySpot 2+2-Spot (48" only). The canopy shall be arched over the user and shall be fabricated from steel tubing with a powder coat finish. The formed, powder coated frame shall be covered with a white, semi-transluscent, bi-directional elastic material. The fabric canopy shall be attached by means that will allow easy removal and installation for cleaning purposes. Fabric material meets requirements of N.F.P.A. 701 test 1. Model # Description Canopy Canopy Back to Back MS.CF MS.CFB CANOPY FRAME CANOPY FRAME B TO B MYSPOT POWER/DATA Power/Data Port: A Power/Data Port may be specified for use on units with Center Tables or Dual Level Tables. The power/data port shall be a spherical design with two 15 amp simplexes and two cat. 5e RJ45 universal wiring jacks. The unit shall have a 10 ft. cord with a straight 15 amp plug. The power/data port shall be installed in the center table, or lower table on the dual level table assembly. Panel Mount Power Data Center (MySpot 4-Spot): The assembly shall consist of a steel face plate, a steel enclosure for connection of the power cord to the power receptacle, a 6 0 patch cord with RJ45 cat 6 connector, and a 10 0 power cord. The face plate shall be 2 x 4-1/4 with holes for surface mounting, and shall be finished with a textured black powder coat. The power cord shall be a black SJ series with a NEMA 5-15P molded straight plug. Model # Description Additional Description 2-Spot Electrical 4-Spot Electrical MS.PDP POWER/DATA PORT FOR 2-SPOT MS.PDP.4 POWER/DATA PORT FOR 4-SPOT The Worden Company Source Book October

254 Parc Seating PARC LOUNGE CHAIR SEAT AND LOWER BACK FRAME: All framework shall be constructed of 1 inch thick, formaldehyde free, veneer core, hardwood plywood and shall be assembled using mortise and tenon joints. All joints are to be glued and nailed as required. The seat deck shall be sprung with six 9 gage sinuous springs and shall be covered with burlap and a cotton decking. The underside of all seat frames will be covered with black Accord fabric. The front, back and sides shall be webbed with Propex as needed and covered with ½ inch high density, fire retardant polyurethane foam. The top shall be covered with ¾ inch high density, fire retardant polyurethane foam. SEAT AND BACK CUSHIONS: The seat and lower back cushions shall be a loose cushion design of high density, fire retardant polyurethane foam. The lower back cushion is 5.5 inches thick and the seat cushion is 5 inches thick. The bottom of the lower back cushion and the back of the seat cushion shall be zippered for easy removal of upholstery material. The cushions shall have a D ring sewn into the zipper pocket and can be attached to the frame with snap clips to prevent slippage of the cushion. UPPER BACK FRAME: The framework of the upper back shall be constructed of 1 inch thick, formaldehyde free, veneer core, hardwood plywood. The upper back frame is fastened to the lower back frame using bolts. The top is capped with a high density, fire retardant polyurethane foam cushion, and the lower portion is wrapped with thin decorative steel covers. The mobile option includes a ½ diameter solid steel handle. ARM FRAMES: There are four arm options: standard, tablet arm, recoverable arm and wood arm. The arm framework for all options shall be constructed of 1 inch thick, formaldehyde free, veneer core, hardwood plywood and shall be assembled using mortise and tenon joints. All joints are to be glued and nailed as required. The arm frames are webbed with Propex as needed and covered with ½ inch high density, fire retardant polyurethane foam on all sides. The top shall be covered with 3/4 inch high density, fire retardant polyurethane foam. The arm frames are attached to the seat and lower back frame using bolts. The standard arm frames and tablet arm frames are fully upholstered, single unit arms. The recoverable arm frame includes a separate upholstered arm top, constructed of 1 inch thick, formaldehyde free, veneer core, hardwood plywood. The upholstered arm has 3/4 inch high density, fire retardant polyurethane foam on the top and ½ inch high density, fire retardant polyurethane foam sides. The wood arm frame includes a separate wood arm top, constructed of 1-5/16 inch select maple hardwood. The recoverable arm and wood arm tops are attached to the arm frame using mechanical fasteners and can be replaced separately without having to replace the arm frame. LEGS: The legs shall be constructed of 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/8 inch thick square steel tubing. The tube is welded to a ¼ inch thick steel top mounting plate and to a ¼ inch thick steel foot. The entire weldment is powder coated and attached to the underside of the arm frames using four screws each. A 1/16 inch thick UHMW-PE leg glide is attached to the underside of the foot. CASTERS (optional): The mobile lounge chair option includes two casters in place of the front two legs. The casters shall be constructed of 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/8 inch thick square steel tubing. The tube is welded to a ¼ inch thick steel top mounting plate. The weldment is powder coated and attached to the underside of the arm frames using four screws each. Two steel wheels are fastened to the weldment using self lock screws. TABLET ARM (optional): The tablet arm shall be positioned on the left or right arm frame of the lounge chair and shall consist of a platform and a swivel mechanism. The platform shall be a rectangular shape, 1 inch thick x 18 inches deep x 8 inches wide, and shall be constructed of MDF with a black vinyl overlay. All edges shall be radiused ¼ inch. The swivel mechanism shall consist of a plate with pintle, and a socket assembly. The plate shall be screwed into the routed portion of the platform so that the plate is flush with the underside of the platform. The socket assembly shall consist of DOM tube welded to a plate and nylon bushings. The plate shall be secured to the underside of the arm frame. The motion of the assembly shall allow rotation that places the platform in a position that will not interfere with getting in or out of the chair while providing a cantilever that maximizes the overhang while seated. The tablet arm shall be secured to prevent removal. When table arm is used in conjunction with the recoverable arm or wood arm options they are no longer recoverable or replaceable. UPHOLSTERY: All upholstery shall be a tight, weltless design. Model # Description Grade Height: 31-3/16 Depth: 32-1/2 Width: 32-5/8 Seat Height: 18-3/8 Arm Height: 25-1/8 Com Yardage: 6.5 yards PL.1.COM METAL LEGS COM PL.1.GR0 METAL LEGS GRADE 0 PL.1.GR1 METAL LEGS GRADE 1 PL.1.GR2 METAL LEGS GRADE 2 PL.1.GR3 METAL LEGS GRADE 3 PL.1.GR4 METAL LEGS GRADE 4 PL.1.GR5 METAL LEGS GRADE 5 PL.1.GR6 METAL LEGS GRADE 6 PL.1.COM.RT METAL LEGS, RIGHT TABLET COM PL.1.GR0.RT METAL LEGS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 0 PL.1.GR1.RT METAL LEGS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 1 PL.1.GR2.RT METAL LEGS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 2 PL.1.GR3.RT METAL LEGS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 3 PL.1.GR4.RT METAL LEGS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 4 PL.1.GR5.RT METAL LEGS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 5 PL.1.GR6.RT METAL LEGS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 6 PL.1.COM.LT METAL LEGS, LEFT TABLET COM PL.1.GR0.LT METAL LEGS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 0 PL.1.GR1.LT METAL LEGS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 1 PL.1.GR2.LT METAL LEGS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 2 PL.1.GR3.LT METAL LEGS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 3 PL.1.GR4.LT METAL LEGS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 4 PL.1.GR5.LT METAL LEGS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 5 PL.1.GR6.LT METAL LEGS, LEFT TABLET GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

255 Parc Seating PARC LOUNGE CHAIR con'td Model # Description Grade PLM.1.COM CASTERS COM PLM.1.GR0 CASTERS GRADE 0 PLM.1.GR1 CASTERS GRADE 1 PLM.1.GR2 CASTERS GRADE 2 PLM.1.GR3 CASTERS GRADE 3 PLM.1.GR4 CASTERS GRADE 4 PLM.1.GR5 CASTERS GRADE 5 PLM.1.GR6 CASTERS GRADE 6 PLM.1.COM.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET COM PLM.1.GR0.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 0 PLM.1.GR1.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 1 PLM.1.GR2.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 2 PLM.1.GR3.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 3 PLM.1.GR4.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 4 PLM.1.GR5.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 5 PLM.1.GR6.RT CASTERS, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 6 PLM.1.COM.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET COM PLM.1.GR0.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 0 PLM.1.GR1.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 1 PLM.1.GR2.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 2 PLM.1.GR3.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 3 PLM.1.GR4.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 4 PLM.1.GR5.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 5 PLM.1.GR6.LT CASTERS, LEFT TABLET GRADE 6 PL.1.COM.RA RECOVERABLE ARM COM PL.1.GR0.RA RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 0 PL.1.GR1.RA RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 1 PL.1.GR2.RA RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 2 PL.1.GR3.RA RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 3 PL.1.GR4.RA RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 4 PL.1.GR5.RA RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 5 PL.1.GR6.RA RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 6 PLM.1.COM.RA CASTERS, RECOVERABLE ARM COM PLM.1.GR0.RA CASTERS, RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 0 PLM.1.GR1.RA CASTERS, RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 1 PLM.1.GR2.RA CASTERS, RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 2 PLM.1.GR3.RA CASTERS, RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 3 PLM.1.GR4.RA CASTERS, RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 4 PLM.1.GR5.RA CASTERS, RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 5 PLM.1.GR6.RA CASTERS, RECOVERABLE ARM GRADE 6 PL.1.COM.C.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, LT TABLET COM PL.1.GR0.C.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 0 PL.1.GR1.C.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 1 PL.1.GR2.C.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 2 PL.1.GR3.C.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 3 PL.1.GR4.C.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 4 PL.1.GR5.C.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 5 PL.1.GR6.C.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 6 PL.1.COM.C.RAW.RT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET COM PL.1.GR0.C.RAW.RT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 0 PL.1.GR1.C.RAW.RT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 1 PL.1.GR2.C.RAW.RT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 2 PL.1.GR3.C.RAW.RT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 3 PL.1.GR4.C.RAW.RT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 4 PL.1.GR5.C.RAW.RT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 5 PL.1.GR6.C.RAW.RT METAL LEGS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 6 PL.1.COM.M.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET COM PL.1.GR0.M.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 0 PL.1.GR1.M.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 1 PL.1.GR2.M.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 2 PL.1.GR3.M.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 3 PL.1.GR4.M.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 4 PL.1.GR5.M.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 5 PL.1.GR6.M.RAW.LT METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

256 Parc Seating PARC LOUNGE CHAIR con'td Model # Description Grade PL.1.COM.M.RAW.RT PL.1.GR0.M.RAW.RT PL.1.GR1.M.RAW.RT PL.1.GR2.M.RAW.RT PL.1.GR3.M.RAW.RT PL.1.GR4.M.RAW.RT METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 PL.1.GR5.M.RAW.RT PL.1.GR6.M.RAW.RT PL.1.COM.O.RAW.LT PL.1.GR0.O.RAW.LT PL.1.GR1.O.RAW.LT PL.1.GR2.O.RAW.LT PL.1.GR3.O.RAW.LT PL.1.GR4.O.RAW.LT PL.1.GR5.O.RAW.LT PL.1.GR6.O.RAW.LT PL.1.COM.O.RAW.RT PL.1.GR0.O.RAW.RT PL.1.GR1.O.RAW.RT PL.1.GR2.O.RAW.RT PL.1.GR3.O.RAW.RT PL.1.GR4.O.RAW.RT PL.1.GR5.O.RAW.RT PL.1.GR6.O.RAW.RT METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET METAL LEGS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 PLM.1.GR0.C.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR1.C.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR2.C.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR3.C.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR4.C.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR5.C.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR6.C.RAW.LT PLM.1.COM.C.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR0.C.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR1.C.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR2.C.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR3.C.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR4.C.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR5.C.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR6.C.RAW.RT CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, CHERRY ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 PLM.1.COM.M.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR0.M.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR1.M.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR2.M.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR3.M.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR4.M.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR5.M.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR6.M.RAW.LT PLM.1.COM.M.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR0.M.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR1.M.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR2.M.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR3.M.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR4.M.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR5.M.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR6.M.RAW.RT CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, MAPLE ARM, RIGHT TABLET COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 PLM.1.COM.O.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR0.O.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR1.O.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR2.O.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR3.O.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR4.O.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR5.O.RAW.LT PLM.1.GR6.O.RAW.LT PLM.1.COM.O.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR0.O.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR1.O.RAW.RT PLM.1.GR2.O.RAW.RT CASTERS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, LEFT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET CASTERS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 GRADE 5 GRADE 6 COM GRADE 0 GRADE 1 GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

257 Parc, Regis Seating PARC LOUNGE CHAIR con'td Model # Description Grade PLM.1.GR3.O.RAW.RT CASTERS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 3 PLM.1.GR4.O.RAW.RT CASTERS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 4 PLM.1.GR5.O.RAW.RT CASTERS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 5 PLM.1.GR6.O.RAW.RT CASTERS, OAK ARM, RIGHT TABLET GRADE 6 REGIS LOUNGE SPECIFICATIONS FRAME: All interior frame members shall be WHND soft maple, a minimum of 1-1/16 thick. Exposed parts (arms and legs) shall be select hardwood. All joints shall be double doweled and double glued. UPHOLSTERY: The inside back shall be webbed with Propex and covered with 2-1/4 thick fire retardant, polyurethane foam with a 2.8 lb. desntiy and a 30 lb. IFD at 25% deflection. The outside of the back shall also be webbed with Propex and covered with 3/4 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam with a 1.2 lb. density and a 32 lb. IFD at 25% deflection. SEAT: The seat shall be plywood construction The seat shall be sprung with a No-Sag spring unit at each seating position, consisting of five (5) 9 gauge sinuous springs. The seat shall be covered with 2 thick, fire retardant polyurethane foam of 2.8 lb. density and 45 lb. IFD. The bottom shall be covered with black Accord fabric. ARM FRAME: The arm frame shall be 27 deep x 25-1/4 high consisting of two legs, an arm rail, a stretcher rail and an upholstered inlay. The legs shall be solid oak or maple cut from a 1-3/4 x 3 blank. The legs shall be 1-3/4 x 2 at the bottom profiled on a tapered radius to a 1 at the top. The dimension from the cord line from the top of the leg and the bottom of the leg to the outside face of the leg shall be 3. The top of the back leg shall have a half round bullnose profile. The back legs shall be turned 90 degrees from the front legs. Between the legs, 3-3/4 above the floor shall be a 1 diameter stretcher chucked into the leg posts. The arm rail shall be 1-1/2 thick x 1-3/16 wide solid oak or maple tapered from 1-3/16 at the back to 1 at the front. The top edge of the arm shall be profiled to a half round bullnose at the front blended to a ¼ radiuses at the back. The arm shall be machined to fit the angle and the cant of the design and doweled and glued into the front and back leg posts. The upholstered inlay shall be constructed of a hardwood frame extending to 7-1/4 above the floor. The frame shall be screwed to the arm rail and leg posts, covered with Propex sheet webbing, covered with 3/4 thick fire retardant polyurethane foam with 1.2 lb. density at 32 lbs. IFD. and upholstered with selected cover The seat, back and arms shall be of tight upholstering design with all seams backed and double stitched. GLIDES: Each leg shall be furnished with a 3/4 nylon button glide. REGIS LOUNGE CHAIR Model # Description Grade Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 29 Seat Height: 17 Arm Height: 25-1/2 Com Yardage: 3-3/4 yards L COM MAPLE FRAME COM L GR0 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR1 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR2 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR3 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR4 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR5 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR6 MAPLE FRAME GRADE O COM OAK FRAME COM O GR0 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR1 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR2 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR3 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR4 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR5 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR6 OAK FRAME GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

258 Regis Seating REGIS SETTEE Model # Description Grade Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 51 Seat Height: 17 Arm Height: 25-1/2 Com Yardage: 5-3/4 yards L COM MAPLE FRAME COM L GR0 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR1 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR2 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR3 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR4 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR5 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR6 MAPLE FRAME GRADE O COM OAK FRAME COM O GR0 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR1 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR2 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR3 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR5 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR6 OAK FRAME GRADE 6 REGIS SOFA Model # Description Grade Height: 29-1/2 Depth: 27-1/2 Width: 73 Seat Height: 17 Arm Height: 25-1/2 Com Yardage: 7-3/4 yards L COM MAPLE FRAME COM L GR0 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR1 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR2 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR3 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR4 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR5 MAPLE FRAME GRADE L GR6 MAPLE FRAME GRADE O COM OAK FRAME COM O GR0 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR1 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR2 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR3 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR4 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR5 OAK FRAME GRADE O GR6 OAK FRAME GRADE The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

259 Ottoman Seating OTTOMAN SPECIFICATIONS SQUARE UNIT FRAME STRUCTURE: The frame structure shall incorporate four identical vertical side panels, one top panel and one bottom panel. The bottom is located so that an area is created to conceal the swivel casters. The joinery features precision engineered mortise and tenon construction, designed to provide a positive, interlocking assembly. This design provides maximum weight support and rigidity for mobile application. Components are fabricated from upholstery grade, ¾ t, 7-ply fir plywood. All joints are glued and mechanically fastened, all joints are flushed prior to upholstery. ROUND UNIT FRAME STRUCTURE: The frame structure shall incorporate a top panel, bottom panel and five vertical ribs, fabricated from upholstery grade, ¾ t, 7-ply fir plywood. The vertical sides feature 3/8 t, three ply flexible plywood with a double layer of the same material applied horizontally along the inner base section. The bottom is located so that an area is created to conceal the swivel casters. The joinery features precision engineered mortise and tenon construction, designed to provide a positive, interlocking assembly. This design provides maximum weight support and rigidity for mobile application. All joints are glued and mechanically fastened, all joints are flushed prior to upholstery. CUSHIONING: Cushioning shall include a top panel of 2 inch thick, fire retardant polyurethane foam of 2.8 lb density and 45 lb IFD. The vertical outside surfaces shall receive a ½ inch thick, fire retardant polyurethane foam of 2.8 lb density and 30 lb IFD at 25% deflection. The underside of the assembly shall receive black Accord fabric. CASTERS: Ottomans are fitted with 2 diameter, full swivel, spherical casters. The caster tire shall be hard nylon. The swivel/mounting bracket shall be fully formed from zinc plated steel and shall include a reinforced tracking guide with a lubricated ball bearing contact surface. The casters shall be located to the perimeter of the assembly and shall be fastened in place with four 1-1/4 #8 pan head screws. Round ottomans shall receive five casters, evenly spaced at 72 degrees and concentric to the diameter of the unit. Square ottomans shall receive four casters, one located at each corner. UPHOLSTERY: All upholstery shall be a tight, weltless design. OTTOMAN SQUARE Model # Grade Height: 16 Depth: 20-3/4 Width: 20-3/4 Com Yardage: 2 yards OTS.2020 COM COM OTS.2020 GR0 GRADE 0 OTS.2020 GR1 GRADE 1 OTS.2020 GR2 GRADE 2 OTS.2020 GR3 GRADE 3 OTS.2020 GR4 GRADE 4 OTS.2020 GR5 GRADE 5 OTS.2020 GR6 GRADE 6 OTTOMAN ROUND Model # Grade Height: 16 Diameter: 20-3/4 Com Yardage: 2 yards OTR.20 COM COM OTR.20 GR0 GRADE 0 OTR.20 GR1 GRADE 1 OTR.20 GR2 GRADE 2 OTR.20 GR3 GRADE 3 OTR.20 GR4 GRADE 4 OTR.20 GR5 GRADE 5 OTR.20 GR6 GRADE 6 The Worden Company Source Book October

260 American Classics Occasional Tables AMERICAN CLASSICS COFFEE TABLE The coffee table shall consist of a top, a bottom, four book compartments and a recessed base. The top and bottom shall be 1-3/16 thick. The book compartment shall consist of 1-3/16 thick dividers, and ¾ thick backs. The dividers shall extend from the back to the perimeter of the top and bottom. The back shall have four sides recessed to form storage space and a cable chase. All components shall be 3-ply particle board construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer face and exposed back with exposed edges externally banded with 1/8 solid maple. Non-exposed faces may have any sound veneer. The recessed base shall be 3 high solid oak or maple recessed 4 on four sides and mitered at the corners. All parts shall be secured with concealed fasteners. ACCT.M.2442 MAPLE 24 W x 42 D x 15 H ACCT.O.2442 OAK 24 W x 42 D x 15 H ACCT.M.3030 MAPLE 30 W x 30 D x 15 H ACCT.O.3030 OAK 30 W x 30 D x 15 H ACCT.M.3636 MAPLE 36 W x 36 D x 15 H ACCT.O.3636 OAK 36 W x 36 D x 15 H AMERICAN CLASSICS END TABLE The end tables shall consist of a top, a recessed fascia, an open book compartment and a recessed base. The top shall be 1-3/16. The fascia shall maple recessed 1-1/2 on four sides and sized to accommodate power and data options listed below. The book compartment shall be the dimensions listed above consisting of a 1-3/16 thick top a bottom, and ¾ thick sides, back and sub-back cable chase. The sides and back shall be recessed 1-1/2 on all four sides. All components shall be 3-ply particle board construction with premium grade A oak or maple veneer face and exposed back with exposed edges externally banded with 1/8 solid oak or maple. Non-exposed faces may have any sound veneer. The recessed base shall be 3 high solid oak or maple or recessed 1-1/2 on four sides. The back side of the base shall be open for cord egress. All parts shall be secured with concealed fasteners. Power/Data Outlet (optional): The power/data outlet shall consist of a brushed chrome faceplate, a junction box, a simplex power receptacle, a single Cat 6 data jack and a power supply cord. The assembly shall be mounted on each side of the table within the recessed fascia. The assembly shall be UL Listed. Power/Data Outlet with Patch Cords (optional): The power/data outlet shall consist of a brushed chrome faceplate, a junction box, a simplex power receptacle, a power supply cord, a single Cat 5e data jack and a patch cord. The assembly shall be mounted on each side of the table within the recessed fascia. The assembly shall be UL Listed and the data jack with patch cord shall be tested as Link and certified Cat 5e compliant. ACET.M.1824 MAPLE 18 Wx 24 D x 23-1/2 H ACET.O.1824 ACET.M.1824.PD OAK MAPLE - WITH POWER 18 Wx 24 D x 23-1/2 H 18 Wx 24 D x 23-1/2 H ACET.O.1824.PD OAK - WITH POWER 18 Wx 24 D x 23-1/2 H ACET.M.2424 ACET.O.2424 ACET.M.2424.PD ACET.O.2424.PD MAPLE OAK MAPLE - WITH POWER OAK - WITH POWER 24 Wx 24 D x 23-1/2 H 24 Wx 24 D x 23-1/2 H 24 Wx 24 D x 23-1/2 H 24 Wx 24 D x 23-1/2 H 258 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

261 Occasional Tables 2000 SERIES OCCASIONAL TABLE The tables shall consist of two end or cross support frames and a top. END AND CROSS FRAMES: The frames shall consist of three members. Each member shall be 1-1/4 thick by 2-3/4 wide and profiled along both edges with a heavy radius. The three members shall be mitered at the corners and fitted with two fluted wood dowels per joint. The bottom of each leg of the frame shall receive a nylon floor glide. Cross frame assemblies are used on round tables and are fitted on the top side with a ¾ thick matching specie cleat to allow the top to float above the frame. TOPS: Tops are available in oak or maple veneer or high pressure laminate. Square and Rectangular Veneer tops shall be ¾ thick, 3-ply particleboard core with a select grade veneer face and sound balancing veneer on the bottom side. Two edges of the top shall receive a 1-1/8 thick by 3-1/4 high solid oak or maple band. The bands shall be tenoned to the edges of the top. Each end of the top shall be fitted with concealed fasteners for attachment to the end frames. Round Veneer Tops shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard core with a select grade veneer face and sound balancing veneer on the bottom side. The perimeter of the top shall receive a 9/16 thick by 1-3/16 high oak or maple bullnose. The top is attached to the cross frame with wood screws. Square and Rectangular Laminate tops shall be ¾ thick, 3-ply particleboard core with a.050 thick, decorative laminate face and.028 thick balancing backer on the bottom side. Two edges of the top shall receive a 1-1/8 thick by 3-1/4 high solid oak or maple band. The bands shall be tenoned to the edges of the top. Each end of the top shall be fitted with concealed fasteners for attachment to the end frames. Round Laminate Tops shall be 1-3/16 thick, 3-ply particleboard core with a.050 thick, decorative laminate face and.028 thick balancing backer on the bottom side. The perimeter of the top shall receive a 9/16 thick by 1-3/16 high oak or maple bullnose. The top is attached to the cross frame with wood screws. Model # Description Dimensions L MAPLE, MATCHING TOP 16 H x 36 DIAMETER LP MAPLE, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP 16 H x 36 DIAMETER O OP OAK, MATCHING TOP OAK, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP 16 H x 36 DIAMETER 16 H x 36 DIAMETER L LP O OP MAPLE, MATCHING TOP MAPLE, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP OAK, MATCHING TOP OAK, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP 16 H x 30 SQUARE 16 H x 30 SQUARE 16 H x 30 SQUARE 16 H x 30 SQUARE L LP O OP L LP O OP MAPLE, MATCHING TOP MAPLE, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP OAK, MATCHING TOP OAK, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP MAPLE, MATCHING TOP MAPLE, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP OAK, MATCHING TOP OAK, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP 22 H x 30 W x 24 D 22 H x 30 W x 24 D 22 H x 30 W x 24 D 22 H x 30 W x 24 D 16 H x 48 W x 24 D 16 H x 48 W x 24 D 16 H x 48 W x 24 D 16 H x 48 W x 24 D 3000 SERIES OCCASIONAL TABLE The table shall consist of a top and a base. VENEER and LAMINATE TOPS: Veneer tops shall be 3-ply particleboard construction with a select grade A oak or maple face and same specie backer. Laminate tops shall be 3-ply particleboard construction with a.050 thick decorative laminate face and.028 thick balancing backer. The perimeter edges of tops shall receive a 1-1/4 wide by 2-1/2 high matching hardwood band. The band shall have a ½ radius along the outer top corner and a ½ wide by ½ high reveal cut along the bottom edge. The band shall be assembled to the perimeter edges of the top core after the laminate or veneer have been applied, forming an external band. A tenon shall be used to join the band to the edge of the core. BASE: The base shall be 30 wide x 20 deep x 19-1/8 high, consisting of four sides and four corner moldings. Each side shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with select Grade A oak or maple veneer face and top edge and any sound back. The corner molding shall be 1 x 1 solid oak or maple shaped to a 3/4 outside radius and 1/16 x 1/16 reveals where the molding abuts the side panels. The panels shall be joined to the molding by means of cam-lock fasteners and to the top by means of plastic blocks and #8 x 1-1/4 FHW screws. GLIDES: Four 3/4 diameter rubber cushioned stainless steel nail glides shall be furnished. Model # Description Dimensions L LP O OP MAPLE, MATCHING TOP MAPLE, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP OAK, MATCHING TOP OAK, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP 16 H x 30 SQUARE 16 H x 30 SQUARE 16 H x 30 SQUARE 16 H x 30 SQUARE L LP O OP MAPLE, MATCHING TOP MAPLE, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP OAK, MATCHING TOP OAK, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP 16 H x 44 W x 20 D 16 H x 44 W x 20 D 16 H x 44 W x 20 D 16 H x 44 W x 20 D The Worden Company Source Book October

262 Occasional Tables 3000 SERIES OCCASIONAL TABLE cont d L MAPLE, MATCHING TOP 22 H x 20 W LP MAPLE, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP 22 H x 20 W O OAK, MATCHING TOP 22 H x 20 W OP OAK, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP 22 H x 20 W L MAPLE, MATCHING TOP 22 H x 26 W LP MAPLE, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP 22 H x 26 W O OAK, MATCHING TOP 22 H x 26 W OP OAK, PLASTIC LAMINIATE TOP 22 H x 26 W 4000 SERIES OCCASIONAL TABLE HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE TOP: The top shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply MDF construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 thick backer on the underside. The entire perimeter of the top shall be fitted with a 3/4 x 3/4 solid oak or maple sectored band externally applied. The band shall gave a 3/4 radius around the entire perimeter. There shall be a 1/16 x 1/16 reveal between the plastic laminate and the band. The top shall be cleated to the cylinder. VENEER TOP: The top shall be 3/4 thick, 3-ply MDF construction with plain sliced maple or oak veneer face and any sound grade veneer on the underside. The entire perimeter of the top shall be fitted with a 3/4 x 3/4 solid oak or maple sectored band externally applied. There shall be a 1/16 x 1/16 reveal between the veneer and the band. The top shall be cleated to the cylinder. CYLINDER: The cylinder shall be a preformed fiberboard tube, surfaced on the outside with plain sliced maple or oak veneer. The top and bottom edges shall have a 1/16 x 1/16 reveal between the veneer and the bands of top and base. BASE: The base shall be 3/4 MDF fitted with a 3/4 x 3/4 solid oak or maple sectored band radiused 3/4 around the entire perimeter. The base shall be screwed to screw cleats within the cylinder. The bottom shall be furnished with four 7/16 diameter plastic glides L LP O OP MAPLE, MATCHING TOP MAPLE, HPL TOP OAK, MATCHING TOP OAK BASE, HPL TOP 16 H x 30 DIAMETER 16 H x 30 DIAMETER 16 H x 30 DIAMETER 16 H x 30 DIAMETER L MAPLE, MATCHING TOP 22 H x 18 DIAMETER LP MAPLE, HPL TOP 22 H x 18 DIAMETER O OAK VENEER, MATCHING TOP 22 H x 18 DIAMETER OP OAK VENEER, HPL TOP 22 H x 18 DIAMETER L MAPLE, MATCHING TOP 22 H x 24 DIAMETER LP MAPLE, HPL TOP 22 H x 24 DIAMETER O OAK VENEER, MATCHING TOP 22 H x 24 DIAMETER OP OAK VENEER, HPL TOP 22 H x 24 DIAMETER 260 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

263 Diametron Occasional Tables DIAMETRON SQUARE AND ROUND OCCASIONAL TABLE The table shall be of space frame construction in which the base is a free-standing, self-contained unit, independent of the work surface for structural integrity. The table shall consist of a work surface, four hubs, four legs, and four apron rails. SQUARE WORK SURFACE: The work surface shall be 1-1/4 thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050 high pressure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The four corners of the core shall be radiused 2-1/8 and the entire perimeter of the work surface shall be externally banded with a 5/8 thick solid oak or maple band, radiused work surface and bottom 1/2. The four (4) corners shall be fitted with a sectored band having a 2-1/8 I.D. radius and a 2-3/4 O.D. radius providing a uniform 5/8 thick band detail. The bands shall be set flush to the high pressure laminate with no reveals or vein lines permitted at the joint. ROUND WORK SURFACE: The work suface shall be 1-1/4" thick, 3-ply particleboard construction with.050" high presure laminate face and.028 backer on the underside. The entire perimeter of the work surface shall be externally banded with a 5/8" x 1-1/4" thick steam bent solid oat or maple band, radiused top and bottom 1/2". The bands shall be applied to the core with PVA glues and electronically radio frequency (RF) cured. The bands shall be set flush to the high pressure laminate with no reveals or veins lines permitted at the joint. HUB: The hub shall be die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated black and heat cured and attached to the table work surface by means of 5/16-18 x 1 socket cap screws. The hub shall be designed to receive the leg and apron rails. The outside of the hub shall conform to the sectored band detail of the work surface. LEGS: The legs shall be 2-1/2 diameter, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel, meeting Commercial Quality Standards, fitted with a 2-1/2 diameter x 1-3/16 thick nylon adjustable glide and insert. Legs shall be epoxy powder coated and heat cured. The legs shall fit into the hub and shall be secured by means of a set screw on the back side of the hub. APRON RAILS: The four sides of the table shall be fitted with 1 x 2, 16 gauge CREW tubular steel apron rails with a powder coat finish. The apron rails shall fit onto the die cast tongue of the hub and shall be held in position by means of hidden tension screws. DTA HPL TOP, OAK 36 W x 36"L x HGT DTA M HPL TOP, MAPLE 36 W x 36"L x HGT DTA VENEER TOP, OAK 36 W x 36"L x HGT DTA M VENEER TOP, MAPLE 36 W x 36"L x HGT DTA HPL TOP, OAK 42 W x 42"L x HGT DTA M HPL TOP, MAPLE 42 W x 42"L x HGT DTA VENEER TOP, OAK 42 W x 42"L x HGT DTA M VENEER TOP, MAPLE 42 W x 42"L x HGT DTA HPL TOP 36 DIAMETER x HGT DTA M HPL TOP 36 DIAMETER x HGT DTA OAK TOP WITH DIAKOTE 36 DIAMETER x HGT DTA M MAPLE TOP WITH DIAKOTE 36 DIAMETER x HGT The Worden Company Source Book October

264 264264

265 W O R D E N LIGHTING Furniture for Learning Spaces. 263

266 FIXED LED TASK LIGHT This lighting is intended for use on study carrels and other areas where a light source is required under a shelf or other fixed mounting area. The units are available in either fixed or swivel and are driven by a 24 volt power supply unit. Up to six units may be powered by one supply by using the jumper cables for interconnection. TLED-18F LED Fixed Fixture ½ T x 1 W x 21 L This LED task light features an ultra slim aluminum body with a clear poly-carbonate lens with 120 degrees of illumination. The fixture is fitted with medium grey interconnecting/ enclosure end caps. The fixture requires a 24 volt, switched power supply, sold separately. This is a fixed variation and mounts to a flat surface with four screws. Additional units may be interconnected with a jumper cable (sold separately). This unit has a Color Rendering Index (CRI) rating of 80 or greater. It also produces 300 lumens with only 6 watts of power consumption. Unit exceeds requirements for both California Title 24 and Energy Star of 30 lumens / watt. SWIVEL LED TASK LIGHT TLED-18S LED Swivel Fixture 5/8 T x 1 w x 20-1/2 l This LED task light features an ultra slim aluminum body with a clear poly-carbonate with 120 degrees of illumination. The fixture is fitted with medium grey interconnecting swivel lock end caps. The fixture requires a 24 volt, switched power supply, sold separately. This is a swivel variation which can be rotated ± 45 degrees allowing the user to vary the direction of the light. It mounts to a flat surface with four screws and two swivel end sockets. Additional units may be interconnected with a jumper cable, also sold separately. This unit has a Color Rendering Index (CRI) rating of 80 or greater. It also produces 300 lumens with only 6 watts of power consumption. Unit exceeds requirements for both California Title 24 and Energy Star of 30 lumens / watt. LED TASK LIGHT POWER SOURCE TLED-PFS Volt Switched Power Supply This power supply device is a high efficiency, 24 volt power unit with a 9 connecting cord. The unit features a cord switch, conveniently located at 4 from the fixture end of the cable, the cord and supply housing are offered in a medium grey finish. This unit will drive up to 36 total watts of LED fixtures. Each unit is supplied with four self adhesive, cord management clips. Unit meets requirements for both California Title 24 and Energy Star requirements of.9 Power Factor. LED TASK LIGHT JUMPER CABLE TLED-J10 Jumper Cable 10 l This jumper cable is used to interconnect one LED fixture to another. The jumper cable is 10 long and supplied in a medium grey finish. TASK LIGHT The TL-24 task light is a fluorescent light fixture with a beveled front and is furnished with a T8 bulb, plastic diffuser lens, switch, supply cord in 2' or 9' lengths. The 2 power cord plugs into available power source at temporary power tap or power column. The 9 cord may plug directly into floor or wall outlet, in which case a black, #500 wire mold cord chase attaches along left rear corner of station between shelf and worksurface. The fixture is UL Listed under portable lamp standard (QOWZ). Model # Description Additional Description TL TL TL TL CORD, NO VALANCE 24 CORD, NO VALANCE 108 CORD, NO VALANCE 24 CORD, NO VALANCE 26 L FIXTURE 26 L FIXTURE 38 L FIXTURE 38 L FIXTURE 264

267 267 Lighting FOLIO LIGHT FIXTURE F-LIGHT W/ 2 RECEPTACLES (1 PER FACE) 4"W x 52-1/2"L x 19"H 4 DATA KNOCK-OUTS (OPEN) 15-13/16" TO BOTTOM SIDE - 9' CORD see electrical section for data jack options F-LIGHT-P W/ 2 RECEPTACLES (1 PER FACE) 4"W x 52-1/2"L x 19"H 4 DATA KNOCK-OUTS W/COVERS 15-13/16" TO BOTTOM SIDE - 9' CORD see electrical section for data jack options The Worden Company Source Book October

268 266

269 267 W O R D E N ELECTRICAL Furniture for Learning Spaces. Tilt-up Power/data Center

270 Electrical METAL CHANNEL TRIPLEX ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL: This product is based on a triple simplex, eight-wire, four circuit system with a metal enclosure channel and interconnecting jumpers. The lower portion of the channel provides an enclosed area for routing data cabling. USAGE: This system is intended for rear mount conditions where the furnishings are specifically designed to utilize this product. This product is not compatible with any other system offered by Worden. SYSTEM: Each furniture item or range of furniture must have at least one power entry device; this device may be a single circuit 20 amp, plug-in unit or multiple circuit, hardwire unit. The power entry must interconnect via jumper cables, connecting to triplex closures in order to complete the range assembly. Simplex designation must be selected at the time of order. SIMPLEX REMOVAL TOOL Model # Description Additional Description D8SR REMOVAL TOOL 8 WIRE The simplex removal tool is required to remove simplexes from the simplex enclosure block. Used whenever simplex are changed to access different circuits. SIMPLEX Model # Description Additional Description DR83/SB BLANK 8 WIRE DR84/SIG ISOLATED GROUND 8 WIRE DR84/SB #1 CIRCUIT 8 WIRE DR84/S2 #2 CIRCUIT 8 WIRE DR84/S4 #4 CIRCUIT 8 WIRE Simpex receptacles are provided and installed in powered channels; however they may also be purchased separately, allowing circuit designation changes after the product is installed. The simplex removal tool must be used to change simplexes. POWERED J-CHANNEL Model # JC/84/J2923/111A Description 29, 2 TRIPLEX, 8 WIRE Additional Description 4 CIRCUIT & BLANK DATA JC/84/J3523/111A 35, 2 TRIPLEX, 8 WIRE 4 CIRCUIT & BLANK DATA JC/84/J4123/111A 41, 2 TRIPLEX, 8 WIRE 4 CIRCUIT & BLANK DATA JC/84/J4723/111A 47, 2 TRIPLEX, 8 WIRE 4 CIRCUIT & BLANK DATA JC/84/J /A 29, 2 TRIPLEX, 8 WIRE 2C1-2C1G-2C4 & BLANK DATA JC/84/J /A 35, 2 TRIPLEX, 8 WIRE 2C1-2C1G-2C4 & BLANK DATA JC/84/J /A 41, 2 TRIPLEX, 8 WIRE 2C1-2C1G-2C4 & BLANK DATA JC/84/J /A 47, 2 TRIPLEX, 8 WIRE 2C1-2C1G-2C4 & BLANK DATA Powered J-channels include a formed metal channel, two triplex assemblies and one interconnecting jumper cable. The formed channel is 4 deep by 5-1/2 high and includes a secondary, removable enclosure for data passage. This enclosure is 2-3/8 wide by 1-9/16 high. The entire channel is fabricated from 22 gauge sheet metal with a black powder coat finish. Channels mount to vertical panels with 5/8 #8, pan head screws. The two triplex assemblies are mounted into the top portion of the j-cannel assembly with metal brackets. Each triplex assembly is fitted with the pre-designated simplex receptacles. One interconnecting jumper cable is supplied to carry power to the next j- channel in the furniture range. J-CHANNEL PASS THRU Model # Description Additional Description JC/84/J29N/A JC/84/J35N/A JC/84/J41N/A JC/84/J47N/A 29 W/ BLANK DATA COVER 35 W/ BLANK DATA COVER 41 W/ BLANK DATA COVER 47 W/ BLANK DATA COVER 18 M/F CONNECTING CABLE 24 M/F CONNECTING CABLE 30 M/F CONNECTING CABLE 26 M/F CONNECTING CABLE A j-channel pass through includes a formed metal channel and one interconnecting jumper cable. The formed channel is 4 deep by 5-1/2 high and includes a secondary, removable enclosure for data passage. This enclosure is 2-3/8 wide by 1-9/16 high. The entire channel is fabricated from 22 gauge sheet metal with a black powder coat finish. Channels mount to vertical panels with 5/8 #8, pan head screws. One interconnecting jumper cable is supplied to carry power through the furniture item the channel is mounted in and to adjacent powered channels. WIRE MANAGEMENT J-CHANNEL Model # Description Additional Description JC/J29A JC/J35A JC/J41A JC/J47A W/ 1 BLANK DATA COVER W/ 1 BLANK DATA COVER W/ 1 BLANK DATA COVER W/ 1 BLANK DATA COVER Wire management channels are constructed identical to the pass through and powered j-channels; except they are supplied without any internal components. These channels are specified where customers need space to manage wire and cables from equipment or intend to distribute power with alternate sources. 268 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

271 Electrical FOUR CIRCUIT POWER ENTRY PE/84/PFM/18 4 CIRCUIT POWER ENTRY, HARD WIRED Power entry device used to feed a system with up to four independent circuits. This unit is designed to fasten to a side or back panel and incorporates an 18 long metal housing, 24 long, flexible metal connecting cable (exiting the top) and a 72 long, liquid tight, eight wire connecting whip (exiting the bottom). The unit is finished in black. SINGLE CIRCUIT POWER ENTRY PE/84/PFS/18 SINGLE CIRCUIT POWER ENTRY, CORD CONNECT Power entry device used to feed a system where a single circuit is required. This unit is designed to fasten to a side or back panel and incorporates an 18 long metal housing, 24 long, flexible metal connecting cable(exiting the top) and a 24 long cord with molded 20 amp plug (exiting the bottom). The unit is finished in black. INTERNAL LEG CHASE For use on Teres and Tempus style tables, the chase is a divided black aluminum L shaped extrusion, 1-3/16 x 1-3/16 having continuous slots for data cabling and power cord egress. The slots shall be fitted with a black resilient cover. The chase shall be routed flush to the inside corner of the leg. The chase shall have a capacity of two power cords and six data cables. Model # Description Additional Description 5200/27/LC-I 5200/30/LC-I 6200/27/LC-I 6200/30/LC-I FOR 27 TEMPUS OAK W/S299 FOR 30 TEMPUS OAK W/S FOR 27 TEMPUS MAPLE W/S FOR 30 TEMPUS MAPLE W/S TB/25/LC-I TB/27/LC-I TB/29/LC-I TR/25/LC-I TR/27/LC-I TR/29/LC-I FOR 25 TERES B W/S FOR 27 TERES B W/S FOR 29 TERES B W/S FOR 25 TERES R W/S FOR 27 TERES R W/S FOR 29 TERES R W/S ACADEMY LEG CHASE For use with Academy frame style tables, the chase is a divided black aluminum extrusion, 1-1/2 x 1-3/4, having continuous slots for data cabling and power cord egress. The chase shall field mount at any spindle location. The chase shall have a capacity two power cords and six terminated data cables. Model # Description Additional Description BWM/ALC FOR 27 & 29 WORKSURFACE DEGILDE LEG CHASE For use with degilde frame style tables, the chase is a divided black aluminum extrusion, 1-1/2 x 1-3/4, having continuous slots for data cabling and power cord egress. The chase shall mount at the center spindle location without having to field drill. The chase shall have a capacity two power cords and six terminated data cables. Model # Description Additional Description BWM/25/DLC BWM/28/DLC BWM/39/DLC FOR 25 H WORK SURFACE FOR 28 H WORK SURFACE FOR 29 H WORK SURFACE DIAMETRON LEG CHASE For use with diametron tables the chase consists of one of the legs being notched top and bottom for power cord egress and slotted top and bottom for data cable egress. The data cable pathway shall be separated by an internal septum. The chase shall have a capacity of two power cords and six terminated data cables. Model # Description Additional Description The Worden Company Source Book October 2011 DUA25 DUA27 DUA29 DUA39 FOR 25 H TABLE FOR 27 H TABLE FOR 29 H TABLE FOR 39 H TABLE 269

272 Electrical EXTERNAL LEG CHASE For use with any leg style table, the chase is a divided black aluminum L shaped extrusion, 1-3/16 x 1-3/16 having continuous slots for data cabling and power cord egress. The slots shall be fitted with a black resilient cover. The chase shall be surface mounted to the inside corner of the leg. The chase shall have a capacity of two power cords and six terminated data cables. Model # Description Additional Description BWM/25/LC-E BWM/27/LC-E BWM/29/LC-E BWM/30/LC-E BWM/39/LC-E FOR 25 H WORK SURFACE FOR 27 H WORK SURFACE FOR 29 H WORK SURFACE FOR 30 H WORK SURFACE FOR 39 H WORK SURFACE STANCE VERTICAL WIRE MANAGER The Stance vertical wire manager is offered in heights to match the line offering. The leg is fabricated from extruded aluminum and includes a pair of angular, adjustable top brackets along with a black PVC foot pad. The extrusion features a vertical opening that allows access to a pair of inner cavities. The innermost cavity is suitable for management of smaller data and electrical cord, while the outer cavity allows for management of one ½ liquid tight multiple circuit hardwire connection, a black velcro strap is included to prevent cables from being dislodged. The leg is offered in arctic silver and graphite finishes. Model # Description Dimensions VRM-25-AS ARCTIC SILVER 25"H VRM-25 GP GRAPHITE 25"H VRM-27-AS ARCTIC SILVER 27"H VRM-27-GP GRAPHITE 27"H VRM-29-AS ARCTIC SILVER 29"H VRM-29-GP GRAPHITE 29"H VERTICAL CHASE For use with panel end style tables, the chase shall be a formed sheet metal channel with a divider separating power from data and a removable cover. The entire assembly shall be powder coated black. Model # Description Additional Description BWM/VC/6 6 L FOR DEGILDE & TEMPUS BWM/VC/10 10 L CHASE FROM 29 TO 39 BWM/VC/13 13 FOR ADJ. HEIGHT W/S BWM/VC/16 16 FOR CRI BWM/VC/18 18 L FOR 27 H WORK SURFACE BWM/VC/20 20 L FOR 29 H WORK SURFACE BWM/VC/30 30 L FOR 39 H WORK SURFACE J-CHANNEL The wire management channel is a 2 piece extruded PVC unit 4 wide x 5-1/4 hight OA with a 1-½ lip at the back of the upper channel. The lower channel pivots on a hinge that is molded into the upper channel. The lower channel pivots down to access data cords and can be secured by the catch at the front of the upper channel. The lower channel contains an access hole located at the rear center on the data compartment of the j-channel. The channel is mounted on brackets suspended from the top and help in place with retention pins. The assembly is UL Listed uner Office Frunishings Standard (QAWZ) and Utility Tables standard (WWJT). Note: Grommets in work surface or vertical panels must be ordered separately. Model # BWM/26.25/JC BWM/26.25/JC/P BWM/30/JC BWM/30/JC/P BWM/32.38/JC BWM/32.38/JC/P BWM/33/JC BWM/33/JC/P BWM/34/JC BWM/34/JC/P BWM/36/JC BWM/36/JC/P BWM/38/JC BWM/38/JC/P BWM/42/JC BWM/42/JC/P BWM/48/JC BWM/48/JC/P Description 26.25, DATA CHANNEL 26.25, DATA CHANNEL & PORT 30, DATA CHANNEL 30, DATA CHANNEL & PORT 32.38, DATA CHANNEL DATA CHAN & SEPTUM DATA CHANNEL 32.44, DATA CHANNEL & PORT 34, DATA CHANNEL 34, DATA CHANNEL & PORT 34.5, DATA CHANNEL 34.5, DATA CHANNEL & PORT 38, DATA CHANNEL 38, DATA CHANNEL & PORT 42, DATA CHANNEL 42, DATA CHANNEL & PORT 48, DATA CHANNEL 48, DATA CHANNEL& PORT Additional Description FOR 8 OPAC FOR 8 OPAC FOR 10 OPAC FOR 10 OPAC FOR A.C. COMPUTER CENTER FOR A.C. COMPUTER CENTER FOR CRI EC UNIT FOR CRI EC UNIT FOR MWS CORNER FOR MWS CORNER 270 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

273 Electrical J-CHANNEL cont'd Model # Description Additional Description BWM/60/JC 60, DATA CHANNEL BWM/60/JC/P 60, DATA CHANNEL & PORT BWM/63.75/JC 63.75, DATA CHANNEL FOR MWS EXTENDED CORNER BWM/63.75/JC/P 63.75, DATA CHANNEL & PORT FOR MWS EXTENDED CORNER BWM/72/JC BWM/72/JC/P BWM/90/JC BWM/90/JC/P BWM/96/JC BWM/96/JC/P 72, DATA CHANNEL 72, DATA CHANNEL & PORT 90, DATA CHANNEL 90, DATA CHANNEL & PORT 96, DATA CHANNEL 96, DATA CHANNEL & PORT BWM/D36/JC 34.5, DATA CHANNEL FOR DEGILDE BWM/D36/JC/P 34.5, DATA CHANNEL & PORT FOR DEGILDE BWM/D48/JC 46.5, DATA CHANNEL FOR DEGILDE BWM/D48/JC/P 46.5, DATA CHANNEL & PORT FOR DEGILDE GROMMET WITH COVER The grommet assembly consists of a 2 x 3-1/2 I.D. Lexan self-rimming sleeve, with a flush mounted black cover. Note: You will need to provide a plan layout indicating grommet location on the work surface, if other than standard, which is rear center. Model # BWM-GC Description 2 X 3 1/2 I.D. LOW PROFILE WIRE MANAGEMENT CHANNEL The channel shall be black, extruded, PVC with an inside storage cavity dimension of 1" high by 1-1/2" wide. The channel provides an extended mounting flange, allowing the channel to the mount to the bottom side of tables or other flat surfaces with screws. Model # Dimensions LPWM12 LPWM24 LPWM36 LPWM48 LPWM60 LPWM72 LPWM84 LPWM96 1-1/8"H x 2-3/8"W x 12" L 1-1/8"H x 2-3/8"W x 24" L 1-1/8"H x 2-3/8"W x 36" L 1-1/8"H x 2-3/8"W x 48" L 1-1/8"H x 2-3/8"W x 60" L 1-1/8"H x 2-3/8"W x 72" L 1-1/8"H x 2-3/8"W x 84" L 1-1/8"H x 2-3/8"W x 96" L GROMMET SLEEVE The grommet sleeve consists of 3 nominal diameter!.d. PVC sleeve, factory installed and used in conjunction with BWM or PPS J-Channels. Model # BWM-GS-2 BWM-GS-3 Description 2 NOMINAL DIAMETER 3 NOMINAL DIAMETER CPU SECURITY & UNIVERSAL HOLDER The device shall be designed to fit under work surfaces and shall be nonhanded allowing mounting vertically anywhere along the work surface. The units are adjustable allowing for CPU devices high, 5" - 9" wide, 14-3/4" /2" deep. The CPU/SH unit shall provide locked seurity preventing unauthorized removal of CPU but allowing access to drive slots on the face and cord egress at the back. Model # CPU/SH Description SECURITY HOLDER CPU/UH CPU/UHS UNIVERSAL HOLDER UNIVERSAL HOLDER WITH SLIDE OUT MECHANISM The Worden Company Source Book October

274 Electrical DATA JACKS Model # Description D1/N6AB D2/N6AB D3/N6AB D1/N6AB D2/N6AB D3/N6AB WIRING CONFIGURATION WIRING CONFIGURATION WIRING CONFIGURATION WING PANEL (used with floor power entries) For use with Teres study carrels & work stations. A black thermally fused laminate panel, which attached to the rear post of the above study carrel ranges and acts as a mounting board for floor power entries. Model # T-WP Description WING PANELS MID-RANGE CONNECTOR For use on single face carrel, MWS, CRI, or Circulation Desk configurations where the power source is entering the range at a location other than end units. Model # E-JCA-MRK E-PCA-MRK Description J-CHANNEL POWER COLUMN DUPLEXES Model # Description Additional Description E-R1 #1 CIRCUIT OUTLET E-R1G #1 CIRCUIT ISOLATED GROUND E-R2 #2 CIRCUIT OUTLET E-R2G #2 CIRCUIT ISOLATED GROUND E-R3 #3 CIRCUIT OUTLET E-R3G #3 CIRCUIT ISOLATED GROUND E-R4 #4 CIRCUIT OUTLET E-R4G #4 CIRCUIT ISOLATED GROUND SURGE SUPPRESSOR Model # Description Additional Description E-S1 #1 CIRCUIT E-S4G #4 CIRCUIT ISOLATED GROUND J-CHANNEL DATA SPOOL Model # Description J/SPOOL CORNER POWER TAP The power tap is an angular unit of formed metal and power coated black equipped with 4 grounded receptacles and a blank data port above the work surface. The unit has a 15 amp circuit breaker and a 6 0 SJ series black cord with 15 amp molded plug. The power tap is secured to the left rear corner of the carrel using four (4) screws. The assembly is 15 amp rated and UL Listed under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Note: When switch is provided, it operates the top receptacle only. These units may not be legally interconnected. Use BWM/20/PT on carrels. This unit may not be used on work stations with adjustable work surfaces. Model # Description Additional Description BWM/20/PT 20 L CORNER MOUNTED DATA PORT, 6 CORD BWM/20/SPT 20 L CORNER MOUNTED DATA PORT-SWITCH-6 CORD 272 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

275 Electrical RECTANGULAR POWER TAP The power tap is an rectangular unit of formed metal and power coated black equipped with 5 grounded receptacles and a blank data port above the work surface. The unit has a 15 amp circuit breaker and a 6 0 SJ series black cord with 15 amp molded plug. The power tap is secured to back panel of the work stations using four (4) screws. The assembly is 15 amp rated and UL Listed under Utility Table Standard (WWJT). Note: When switch is provided, it operates the top receptacles. These units may not be legally interconnected. Model # Description Additional Description BWM/R20/PT BWM/R20/SPT BWM/R25/PT BWM/R25/SPT 20 L REAR MOUNTED 20 L REAR MOUNTED 25 L REAR MOUNTED 25 L REAR MOUNTED DATA PORT, 6 CORD DATA PORT-SWITCH-6 CORD DATA PORT, 6 CORD DATA PORT-SWITCH-6 CORD The temporary power tap is an rectangular unit made of dark brown plastic and equipped with 6 grounded receptacles. The unit has a 15 amp circuit breaker and a 6 0 SJ series black cord with 15 amp molded plug, and is shipped loose for installation on tables. The assembly is 15 amp rated and UL Listed under Relocatable Power Tap Standard (XBTS). Note: Switch operates all receptacles. These units may not be legally interconnected. Model # Description Additional Description BWM-PT L WITH 6 CORD SINGLE FACED POWER DATA CENTER GENERAL: The system shall consist of a single face and double face tilt-up power/data centers, and single face and double face power raceways with cords or power legs. The tip-up power/data center is designed for table applications where patron equipment such as lap top computers requires access to power and data above the work surface. The power raceways are designed for table, carrel, and index table applications where permanent placement of equipment requires connection below the work surface and excess cables stowed. TILT-UP POWER DATA CENTER: The assembly shall consist of a self-rimming bezel, one hinged lid on single face units and two hinged lids opening on opposite sides on double face units, a circuit breaker, provisions below the work surface for connecting task lights, a 9 0 cord and a horizontal wire manager. The bezel shall be 1/2 wide, welded and ground flush at the corners. Each lid shall be steel formed assembly that, when opened exposes a duplex outlet and a data port. The lids shall have guides to allow them to stay open while accessing power and data. The data ports shall be separated from power connections by a septum. The assembly shall have an opening to allow for up to four data cables on single face units, and up to eight cables on double faced units. The cord shall be a black SJ series with a NEMA 5-15P molded straight plug. All exposed metal parts shall be finished with a textured black powder coat. Model # Description Additional Description PDC/100-IJR-BLK 1 DUPLEX; 2 DATA CUT-OUTS 72 CORD; BLACK PDC/100-MHO2-ALUM 2 SIMPLEX;2 DATA CUT-OUTS 120 CORD;BRUSHED ALUM. PDC/100-MP-BLK 2 SIMPLEX;2 DATA CUT-OUTS 120 CORD; BLACK PDC/100-MP-CM 2 SIMPLEX;2 DATA CUT-OUTS 120 CORD;CHARCOAL MICA PDC/100-MP-SM 2 SIMPLEX;2 DATA CUT-OUTS 120 CORD; SILVER MICA PDC/100-T-BLK 1 DUPLEX; 2 DATA CUT-OUTS 72 CORD; BLACK PDC/100-T-BSS 1 DUPLEX; 2 DATA CUT-OUTS 72 CORD; BRUSHED SS PDC/100-T-PSS 1 DUPLEX; 2 DATA CUT-OUTS 72 CORD; POLISH SS PDC/100-TJR-BLK 1 SIMPLEX;1 DATA CUT-OUT 72 CORD; BLACK PDC/100-TJR-SS 1 SIMPLEX;1 DATA CUT-OUT 72 CORD; BRUSHED SS PDC/100-TN2-BLK 1 SIMPLEX;1 DATA CUT-OUT 72 CORD; BLACK PDC/100-TN2-SS 1 SIMPLEX;1 DATA CUT-OUT 72 CORD; BRUSHED SS The Worden Company Source Book October

276 Electrical SINGLE FACED POWER/DATA RACEWAY The raceway shall be of formed metal with twelve receptacles and two data ports. The assembly shall have a circuit breaker and a 9 0 SJ series cord with a NEMA 5-15P molded plug. The assembly mounts to the underside of the work surface, and shall include a grommet for each seating position. WIRE MANAGEMENT: One wire management channel shall be provided for single face raceways and single and double face tilt-up power/data centers, and two wire managers provided for double face power/data raceways. Each wire manager shall be black PVC rated 94HB or better and shall be the same length as the raceway or sufficient length to extend to the end of the table. The channel shall be mounted under the work surface with the open end toward the raceway. Model # Description Additional Description PDR/136 PDR/160 PDR/172 PDR/ RECEPT & 2 DATA PORTS 10 RECEPT & 2 DATA PORTS 10 RECEPT & 2 DATA PORTS 10 RECEPT & 2 DATA PORTS FOR 36 TABLE FOR 60 TABLE FOR 72 TABLE FOR IND.TABLE DOUBLE FACED POWER/DATA RACEWAY The raceway shall be of formed metal with twelve receptacles and two data ports. The assembly shall have a circuit breaker and a 9 0 SJ series cord with a NEMA 5-15P molded plug. The assembly mounts to the underside of the work surface, and shall include a grommet for each seating position. WIRE MANAGEMENT: One wire management channel shall be provided for single face raceways and single and double face tilt-up power/data centers, and two wire managers provided for double face power/data raceways. Each wire manager shall be black PVC rated 94HB or better and shall be the same length as the raceway or sufficient length to extend to the end of the table. The channel shall be mounted under the work surface with the open end toward the raceway. Model # Description Additional Description PDR/236 PDR/260 PDR/290 FOR 36 CARREL FOR 60 DF INDEX TABLE FOR 90 DF INDEX TABLE WALL POWER ENTRY (Power Column) Devices are intended for use with power columns and mount to the inside face of a furniture panel, near a building electrical outlet. Cord Connect: The power entry assembly consists of a formed metal junction bow with a flat metal mounting flange, a 2 long, S series cord with a molded, 20 amp angle plug and section of BX conduit with a quick connector for interconnecting to the power within the furnishings. Hard Wired: The power entry assembly consists of a formed metal junction bow with a flat metal mounting flange, a 6 long length of liquid tight BX conduit and section of BX conduit with a quick connector for interconnecting to the power within the furnishings. Note: Must be hard wired to building power by licensed electrician. Model # Description PPS/12-4/CWE-1 SINGLE CIRCUIT CORD CONNECT Cord Connect Hard Wired PPS/12-4/CWE-2 (2) CIRCUIT, HARD WIRED FLOOR ENTRY (Power Column) Cord Connect: The power entry assembly consists of an electrical raceway and a formed metal chase with a blank data entry plate. The chase shall have a black textured fin- ish. The raceway terminates at the bottom with a 2 long S series cord with a molded 20-amp, 3 - prong straight plug. It terminates under the work surface with BX conduit and quick connector. Hard Wired: The power entry assembly consists of an electrical raceway and a formed metal chase with a blank data entry plate. The chase shall have a black textured finish. The raceway terminates at the bottom with a 3 long lenght of liquid tight BX conduit and a quick connector. Note: Must be hard wired to building power by a licensed electrician. Model # Description Additional Description Cord Connect Hard Wired PPS/29/CPE-1 SINGLE CIRCUIT CORD CONNECT 25,27, 29 NON ADJ. W/S PPS/29/CPE-2 (2) CIRCUIT HARD WIRED 25,27, 29 NON ADJ. W/S PPS/21/CPE-1 SINGLE CIRCUIT CORD CONNECT ADJ. W/S & DEGILDE PPS/21/CPE-2 (2) CIRCUIT HARD WIRED ADJ. W/S & DEGILDE PPS/39/CPE-1 SINGLE CIRCUIT CORD CONNECT 39 NON ADJUSTABLE W/S PPS/39/CPE-2 (2) CIRCUIT HARD WIRED 39 NON ADJUSTABLE W/S 274 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

277 Electrical POWER COLUMN CORNER MOUNT The power column is an angular, corner-mounted assembly, attached to the left rear corner of each carrel station. The power column has four grounded receptacles and a blank data port above the work surface and two interconnect sockets below the work surface. The column includes a BX jumper cable wth quick connect restraints on each end. The power column is rated as 20 amp through-power and 15 amp at the receptacles. Each column is provided with a 4 wide x 5-1/4 high, two-compartment extruded PVC J channel cable manager, mounted on brackets suspended from the underside of the top. Note: All grommets required for interconnection are included. Grommets through the writing surface must be ordered separately. When switch is specified, it operates the top receptacle only. Required for order: Power entry device Data jack must be ordered separately Model # Description Additional Description PPS/2036/PC W/ DATA PORT 36 W CARREL PPS/2036/SPC W DATA PORT & SWITCH 36 W CARREL PPS/2042/PC W/ DATA PORT 42 W CARREL PPS/2042/SPC W DATA PORT & SWITCH 42 W CARREL PPS/2048/PC W/ DATA PORT 48 W CARREL PPS/2048/SPC W DATA PORT & SWITCH 48 W CARREL POWER COLUMN REAR MOUNTED The power column is a rectangular, rear-mounted assembly, attached to the back panel of each work station. The power column has five grounded receptacles and a blank data port above the work surface and two interconnect sockets below the work surface. The column includes a BX jumper cable wth quick connect restraints on each end. The power column is rated as 20 amp through-power and 15 amp at the receptacles. Each column is provided with a 4 wide x 5-1/4 high, two-compartment extruded PVC J channel cable manager, mounted on brackets and suspended from the underside of the top. Note: All grommets required for interconnection are included. Grommets through the writing surface must be ordered separately. When switch is specified, it operates the top receptacle only. required for order: Power entry device Data jack must be ordered separately Model # Description Additional Description PPS/D2536/PC W/ DATA PORT FOR 36 W DEGILDE WORK STATION PPS/D2536/SPC W/ DATA PORT & SWITCH FOR 36 W DEGILDE WORK STATION PPS/D2548/PC W/ DATA PORT FOR 48 W DEGILDE WORK STATION PPS/D2548/SPC W/ DATA PORT & SWITCH FOR 48 W DEGILDE WORK STATION PPS/R2536/PC W/ DATA PORT 36 W WORK STATION PPS/R2536/SPC W/ DATA PORT & SWITCH 36 W WORK STATION PPS/R2542/PC W/ DATA PORT 42 W WORK STATION PPS/R2542/SPC W/ DATA PORT & SWITCH 42 W WORK STATION PPS/R2548/PC W/ DATA PORT 48 W WORK STATION PPS/R2548/SPC W/ DATA PORT & SWITCH 48 W WORK STATION WALL POWER ENTRY (J-Channel) Devices are intended for use with J-Channel electrical and mount to the inside face of a furniture panel, near a building electrical outlet. Cord Connect: The power entry assembly consists of a formed metal junction bow with a flat metal mounting flange, a 2 long, S series cord with a molded, 20 amp angle plug and section of BX conduit with a eight wire quick connector for interconnecting to the power within the furnishings. Hard Wired: The power entry assembly consists of a formed metal junction bow with a flat metal mounting flange, a 6 long length of liquid tight BX conduit and section of BX conduit with a eight wire quick connector for interconnecting to the power within the furnishings. Note: Must be hard wired to building power by licensed electrician. Model # Description PPS/12-8/JWE-1 SINGLE CIRCUIT, CORD CONNECT Cord Connect Hard Wired PPS/12-8/JWE-4G (4) CIRCUIT, HARD WIRED The Worden Company Source Book October

278 Electrical FLOOR ENTRY (J-Channel) Cord Connect: The power entry assembly consists of an electrical raceway and a formed metal chase with a blank data entry plate. The chase shall have a black textured finish. The raceway terminates at the bottom with a 2 long S series cord with a molded 20-amp, 3 - prong straight plug. It terminates under the work surface with BX conduit and right wire quick connector. Hard Wired: The power entry assembly consists of an electrical raceway and a formed metal chase with a blank data entry plate. The chase shall have a black textured finish. The raceway terminates at the bottom with a 3 long lenght of liquid tight BX conduit and a quick connector. Note: Must be hard wired to building power by a licensed electrician. Model # Description Additional Description Cord Connect Hard Wired PPS/29/JPE-1 SINGLE CIRCUIT CORD CONNECT 25, 27, 29 NON ADJ W/S PPS/29/JPE-4G (4) CIRCUIT HARD WIRED 25, 27, 29 NON ADJ W/S PPS/21/JPE-1 CORD CONNECT ADJ. W/S & DEGILDE PPS/21/JPE-4G HARD WIRED ADJ. W/S & DEGILDE PPS/39/JPE-1 CORD CONNECT 39 NON ADJ. W/S PPS/39/JPE-4G HARD WIRED 39 NON ADJ. W/S J-CHANNEL Pass Thru: The J channel is a two piece extruded PVC unit, 4 wide x 5-1/4 high with a 1-1/2 lip at the back of the upper channel. The lower channel pivots on a hinge that is molded into the upper channel. The lower channel pivots down to access data cords and is secured by the catch at the front of the upper channel. The J channel is mounted on brackets suspended from the top, or J channel shelf, and secured in place with retention pins. The J channel assembly includes a jumper BX conduit with quick connect connectors on each end allowing interconnection to adjacent power columns or adjacent pass-thru channels. Vertical panels are provided with grommets for interconnection. If grommets in the work surface are required, they must be ordered seperately. required for order: power entry device 252 With Duplex Opening(s): The J channel is a two piece extruded PVC unit, 4 wide x 5-1/4 high with a 1-1/2 lip at the back of the upper channel. The lower channel pivots on a hinge that is molded into the upper channel. The lower channel pivots down to access data cords and is secured by the catch at the front of the upper channel. The J channel is mounted on brackets suspended from the top, or J channel shelf, and secured in place with retention pins. The J channel assembly includes a raceway with an opening for a duplex, rated as 15 amp at the receptacle with 20 amp through-power. The raceway shall include necessary 9/16 oval BX jumpers with quick connects at both ends to allow for interconnection to adjacent units. Vertical panels are provided with grommets for interconnecting. Writing surfaces, which do not have cord drops include one BWM-GC grommet per seating position. Required for order: duplexes must be ordered separately data jacks must be ordered separately Model # Description Additional Description PPS/36/JC , PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/42/JC44 42, PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/48/JC44 48, PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL Pass Thru Duplex Opening J-CHANNEL 8 OPAC PPS/26.25/JC , PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/26.25/JCO DUPLEX DATA CHANNEL PPS/26.25/JCO/P DUPLEX DATA CHANNEL & PORT PPS/26.25/JCOO DUPLEXES DATA CHANNEL PPS/26.25/JCOO/P DUPLEXES DATA CHANNEL & PORT PPS/30/JC88 30, PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/30/JCO 30, 1 DUPLEX DATA CHANNEL PPS/30/JCO/P 30, 1 DUPLEX DATA CHANNEL & PORT J-CHANNEL 10 4 OPAC PPS/32.38/JCO 32.38, 1 DUPLEX DATA CHANNEL PPS/32.38/JCO/P 32.38, 1 DUPLEX DATA CHANNEL & PORT PPS/32.38/JCOO 32.38, 2 DUPLEXES DATA CHANNEL PPS/32.38/JCOO/P 32.38, 2 DUPLEXES DATA CHANNEL & PORT J-CHANNEL AMERICAN CLASSICS COMPUTER CENTER PPS/33/JC , PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/33/JCO 32.44, 1 DUPLEX DATA CHANNEL PPS/33/JCO/P 32.44, 1 DUPLEX DATA CHANNEL & PORT PPS/33/JCOO 32.44, 2 DUPLEXES DATA CHANNEL PPS/33/JCOO/P 32.44, 2 DUPLEXES DATA CHANNEL & PORT 276 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

279 Electrical J-CHANNEL cont'd Pass Thru Duplex Opening J-CHANNEL MWS CORNER Model # Description Additional Description PPS/34/JC88 34 PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/34/JCO 34, 1 DUPLEX DATA CHANNEL PPS/34/JCO/P 34, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/34/JCOO 34, 2 DUPLEX DATA CHANNEL PPS/34/JCOO/P 34, 2 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/36/JC , PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/36/JCO 34.5, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/36/JCO/P 34.5, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/36/JCOO 34.5, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/36/JCOO/P 34.5, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/42/JC88 42, PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/42/JCO 42, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/42/JCO/P 42, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/42/JCOO 42, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/42/JCOO/P 42, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/48/JC88 48 PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/48/JCO 48, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/48/JCO/P 48, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/48/JCOO 48, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/48/JCOO/P 48, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/60/JC88 60 PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/60/JCO 60, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/60/JCO/P 60, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/60/JCOO 60, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/60/JCOO/P 60, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/72/JC88 72, PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/72/JCOO 72, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/72/JCOO/P 72, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/72/JCOOO 72, 3 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/72/JCOOO/P 72, 3 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/90/JCOOO 90, 3 DUPLEXES DATA CHANNEL PPS/90/JCOOO/P 90, 3 DUPLEXES DATA CHANNEL & 2 DATA PORTS PPS/96/JCOOO 90, 3 DUPLEXES DATA CHANNEL PPS/96/JCOOO/P 90, 3 DUPLEXES DATA CHANNEL & 2 DATA PORTS PPS/38/JC88 38 PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/38/JCO 38, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/38/JCO/P 38, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/38/JCOO 38, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/38/JCOO/P 38, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT J-CHANNEL MWS EXTENDED CORNER PPS/63.75/JC , PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/63.75/JCO 63.75, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/63.75/JCO/P 63.75, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/63.75/JCOO 63.75, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/63.75/JCOO/P 63.75, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT BRU PASS THRU Model # PPS/BRU/88 J-Channel pass-thru used in BRU units of Circulation Desks Not required for CRI CORNER PASS THRU PPS/CPT/88 J-Channel pass-thru used in closed corner units of Circulation Desks and CRI Desks DEGILDE POWER COLUMN Model # PPS/D36/JC44 PPS/D48/JC , PASS THRU 46.5, PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL DATA CHANNEL Pass Thru Duplex Opening The Worden Company Source Book October

280 Electrical DEGILDE J-CHANNEL cont'd Model # Description Additional Description PPS/D36/JC , PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/D36/JCO 34.5, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/D36/JCO/P 34.5, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/D36/JCOO 34.5, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/D36/JCOO/P 34.5, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT Pass Thru Duplex Opening PPS/D48/JC , PASS THRU DATA CHANNEL PPS/D48/JCO 46.5, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/D48/JCO/P 46.5, 1 DUPLEX DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT PPS/D48/JCOO 46.5, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX & DATA CHANNEL PPS/D48/JCOO/P 46.5, 2 DUPLEXES DATA DUPLEX, CHANNEL & PORT HORIZONTAL CHASE (Power Column) Model # Description PPS/HC44 PASS THRU For use with Power Columns and Power Taps in an opposable carrel situation only. HORIZONTAL CHASE (J-Channel) PPS/HC88 PASS THRU J-Channel pass-thru used in opposable configurations of carrels, CRI & Circulation Desks with offets up to 30 VALANCE Note: May be ordered in addition to above task light Model # Description Additional Description TL-34.5-CV CHERRY 36 WIDE CARREL SHELF TL-34.5-MV MAPLE 36 WIDE CARREL SHELF TL-34.5-OV OAK 36 WIDE CARREL SHELF TL-34.5-TV THERMALLY FUSED LAMINATE 36 WIDE CARREL SHELF TL-48-CV CHERRY 48 WIDE CARREL SHELF TL-48-MV MAPLE 48 WIDE CARREL SHELF TL-48-OV OAK 48 WIDE CARREL SHELF TL-48-TV THERMALLY FUSED LAMINATE 48 WIDE CARREL SHELF 278 The Worden Company Source Book October 2011

281 W O R D E N ADDENDUM Furniture for Learning Spaces. The Worden Company Source Book October

282 Swing Seating SWING This chair is offered as a side chair only and features a sculpted hardwood frame with a fully upholstered seat and back. The frames are milled from premium grade, northern grown, American hardwood. FRAME ASSEMBLIES: The frame consists of a right hand and left hand assemblies. Each assembly includes a front and back leg along with upper and lower stretchers. The frame is milled from premium grade 8/4, hard, white maple. Joints are double doweled for strength. Front legs are 1-3/4 thick and 3-3/4 wide, milled along the front edge with a unique knife shape and contoured along the rear, inside face to meet the contours of the upper stretcher. The rear leg features the same unique shape and contouring as the front leg and is further sculptured to rise up and support the upholstered back. The lower stretcher is a premium hard white maple, 1 diameter smooth dowel. The stretcher is tennoned into the inside faces of the front and back legs. The bottom of each frame leg shall receive a ¾ diameter, nail-in, nylon floor glide. Frames are machine sanded followed by finish hand sanding. Frames are then finished to match one of the Worden standard finishes or any number of custom finishes provided by the customer for matching. UPHOSTERED SEAT: The upholstered seat blank is formed by surface bonding multiple layers of birch veneer to create a 1-1/4 thick contoured plywood blank. The blank is milled to an oval shape and fitted with four, 5/16-18 T-nuts. The T-nuts are installed in the top surface of the blank and allow the frame to be bolted to the bottom side of the seat blank. The upholstery begins by applying a 1-1/2 thick, 2.8 lb density, fire retardant polyurethane foam cushion to the face side. A fully sewn fabric cover with perimeter rope welts along the top and bottom corners is pulled around the seat blank and foam filler and fastened along the bottom side of the seat blank. The bottom shall be covered with black Accord fabric. UPHOSTERED BACK: The upholstered back blank is formed by surface bonding multiple layers of birch veneer to create a 1-1/4 thick contoured plywood blank. The blank is milled to an oval shape and fitted with two, concealed, wedge type, metal-to-metal fasteners. The upholstered back is driven down on these wedge fasteners, engaging shoulder screws on the tapered surface of the base frame rear legs. The upholstery begins by applying a 1 thick, 2.8 lb density, fire retardant polyurethane foam cushion to the face side and ¼ t dacron covering to the rear face. A fully sewn fabric cover with perimeter rope welts along the outer corners is pulled around the seat blank and foam filler and sewn closed on the bottom edge. Height: 31 Depth: 25 Width: 27 Seat Depth: 18-1/2 Seat Height: 18 Com Yardage: 2.5 yards SW.1.COM UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK COM SW.1.GR0 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GR0 SW.1.GR1 Model # Description UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK Grade GR1 SW.1.GR2 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GR2 SW.1.GR3 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GR3 SW.1.GR4 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GR4 SW.1.GR5 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GR5 SW.1.GR6 UPHOLSTERED SEAT & BACK GR6 280 The Worden Company Source Book 2010 (added )